Sew Servo

Edition
MOVIDRIVE compact
04/2002
System Manual
1053 3818 / EN
SEW-EURODRIVE
kVA
1 Important Notes...................................................................................................... 6
2 System Description................................................................................................ 8
3 Technical Data and Dimensions ......................................................................... 20
4 Parameters............................................................................................................ 86
5 Project Planning ................................................................................................. 152
6 Serial Communication ....................................................................................... 233
7 Safety Notes ....................................................................................................... 234
8 Unit Design ......................................................................................................... 235
9 Installation .......................................................................................................... 246
10 Startup................................................................................................................. 291
10
11 Operation and Service ....................................................................................... 356
11
12 Index of Changes ............................................................................................... 370
12
13 Abbreviation Key and Index .............................................................................. 371
13
14 Adress List.......................................................................................................... 377
14
P Hz
P6..
P60.
P600
I
0
MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual
1 Important Notes...................................................................................................... 6
2 System Description................................................................................................ 8
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Overview of the system................................................................................................ 8

Functions / features ................................................................................................... 14
Additional functions of the application version ........................................................... 16
Application modules ................................................................................................... 18
3 Technical Data and Dimensions ......................................................................... 20

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
CE-marking, UL approval and unit designation.......................................................... 20

General technical data ............................................................................................... 21
MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units)......................................... 22
MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-2_3 (230 V units)................................................ 32
Additional functions in the application type ................................................................ 40
MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCS electronics data ......................................... 42
MOVIDRIVE compact MCH electronics data........................................................... 46
MOVIDRIVE compact dimensions ........................................................................... 49
IPOSplus ................................................................................................................... 54
DBG11B keypad option ............................................................................................. 55
Serial interface option type USS21A (RS-232 and RS-485) ...................................... 56
5 V encoder power supply option type DWI11A......................................................... 57
MOVITOOLS software ............................................................................................... 58
Application modules for MOVIDRIVE compact ........................................................ 59
Braking resistor option type BW................................................................................. 63
Line chokes option type ND... .................................................................................... 69
NF...-... line filter option .............................................................................................. 70
Output choke option type HD... .................................................................................. 72
Output filter option type HF... ..................................................................................... 73
Pre-fabricated cables ................................................................................................. 76
4 Parameters............................................................................................................ 86
4.1
4.2
4.3
Menu structure ........................................................................................................... 86

Overview of parameters ............................................................................................. 87
Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................... 91
5 Project Planning ................................................................................................. 152

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
Schematic procedure ............................................................................................... 152

Control characteristics.............................................................................................. 153
Description of applications ....................................................................................... 154
Motor selection for asynchronous AC motors (VFC)................................................ 156
Motor selection for asynchronous servomotors (CFC)............................................. 163
Motor selection for synchronous servomotors (SERVO) ......................................... 184
Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies ............................................... 192
Overload capacity of the inverter ............................................................................. 193
Overload capacity of the inverter for short overload duration .................................. 204
Selecting the braking resistor................................................................................... 210
Connecting AC brake motors ................................................................................... 215
Permitted voltage systems for MOVIDRIVE .......................................................... 216
Mains contactor and mains fuses............................................................................. 216
Power cables and motor cables ............................................................................... 217
Group drive in VFC mode ........................................................................................ 221
Connecting explosion-proof AC motors ................................................................... 222
Components for EMC compliant installation ............................................................ 223
Connecting the optional power components ............................................................ 225
Electronics cables and signal generation................................................................. 228
External 24 VDC voltage supply ............................................................................... 229
Parameter set switchover......................................................................................... 230
Priority of operating states and logic gating of control signals ................................. 231
Limit switches........................................................................................................... 232
6 Serial Communication ....................................................................................... 233
7 Safety Notes ....................................................................................................... 234

8 Unit Design ......................................................................................................... 235
8.1
8.2
8.3
Unit designation, nameplates and scope of delivery................................................ 235

Unit design MCF/MCV/MCS4_A .............................................................................. 236
Unit design MCH4_A ............................................................................................... 241
9 Installation .......................................................................................................... 246

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
9.11
9.12
Installation instructions for basic unit ....................................................................... 246

Installation instructions for PROFIBUS-DP interface (MC_41A).............................. 250
Installation instructions for INTERBUS FO interface (MCH42A).............................. 254
UL compliant installation .......................................................................................... 258
Power shield clamp .................................................................................................. 259
Touch guard ............................................................................................................. 260
Wiring diagram, basic unit........................................................................................ 261
Removing the terminal unit ...................................................................................... 269
Assignment of braking resistors, chokes and filters ................................................. 270
System bus (SBus) installation ................................................................................ 273
Connection of option USS21A (RS-232 and RS-485).............................................. 275
Connection of motor encoder and external encoder ................................................ 276
4
5
6
10 Startup................................................................................................................. 291
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
General startup instructions ..................................................................................... 291

Preliminary work and resources............................................................................... 293
Startup with the DBG11B keypad ............................................................................ 294
Startup with a PC and MOVITOOLS........................................................................ 301
Starting the motor .................................................................................................... 302
Startup for positioning tasks (MCH4_A)................................................................... 305
Complete parameter list ........................................................................................... 306
Starting up the inverter with PROFIBUS-DP (MC_41A) .......................................... 313
Starting up the inverter with INTERBUS (MCH42A) ................................................ 328
7
8
9
11 Operation and Service ....................................................................................... 356

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
MC_40A operating displays (without fieldbus) ......................................................... 356

MC_41A (PROFIBUS-DP) operating displays ......................................................... 357
MCH42A operating displays (INTERBUS FO) ......................................................... 358
DBG11B keypad ...................................................................................................... 361
Fault information ...................................................................................................... 365
List of faults .............................................................................................................. 366
SEW electronics service .......................................................................................... 369
10
11
12 Index of Changes ............................................................................................... 370
12
13 Abbreviation Key and Index .............................................................................. 371

13.1
13.2
Abbreviation key ...................................................................................................... 371

Index ........................................................................................................................ 372
13
14 Address List ....................................................................................................... 377
14
1
1
Important Notes
Safety and warning instructions
Always follow the safety and warning instructions contained in this publication!
Electrical hazard
Possible consequences: Severe or fatal injuries.
Hazard
Possible consequences: Severe or fatal injuries.
Hazardous situation
Possible consequences: Slight or minor injuries.
Harmful situation
Possible consequences: Damage to the unit and the environment.
Tips and useful information.
A requirement of fault-free operation and fulfillment of any rights to claim under guarantee is that you adhere to the information in the operating instructions. Consequently, read the operating instructions before you start working with the unit!
The operating instructions contain important information about servicing; as a result, they should be kept in the vicinity of the unit.
Designated use
MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters are intended for use in industrial and commercial
systems for the operation of AC asynchronous motors or permanent-field AC synchronous motors. These motors must be suitable for operation with frequency inverters. No
other loads may be connected to the units.
MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters are units intended for stationary installation in
switch cabinets. Observe all instructions referring to the technical data and the permitted
conditions where the unit is operated.
Do not start up the unit (take into operation in the designated fashion) until you have established that the machine complies with the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and that the
conformity of the end product has been determined in accordance with the Machinery
Directive 89/392/EEC (with reference to EN 60204).
1
Application environment
The following uses are forbidden unless measures are expressly taken to make
them possible:
Use in explosion-proof areas
Use in areas exposed to harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, dust, radiation, etc.
Use in non-stationary applications which are subject to mechanical vibration and

shock loads in excess of the requirement in EN 50178
Safety functions
MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters are not allowed to perform any safety functions
unless the inverters are monitored by other safety systems.
Use superordinate safety systems to guarantee the protection of machinery and people.
Waste disposal
Please follow the current instructions: Dispose in accordance with the material structure
and the regulations in force, for instance as:
Electronics scrap (printed-circuit boards)
Plastic (housing)
Sheet metal
Copper
etc.
Overview of the system
System Description
2.1
Power components
3 x 380...500 VAC
3 x 200...240 VAC
Input filter
option
Line choke
option
MOVIDRIVE compact
MC_40/41/42A...-5_3
MOVIDRIVE MDR60A
Regen. power supply unit option
MOVIDRIVE compact
MC_40/41/42A...-2_3
DC link
Braking resistor
option
Output filter
option
Output choke
option
Figure 1: Overview of the system, MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A power components
02603BEN
Communications components
Figure 2: Overview of the system, MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A communications components
02604AEN
General description
MOVIDRIVE compact is the term for compact and high-performance drive inverters
from SEW. MOVIDRIVE compact units are precisely tailored to your requirements. You
can use them for AC drives in the power range from 1.5 to 90 kW (2.0 to 120 HP). They
satisfy the most exacting requirements for dynamic properties and control quality thanks
to the most modern inverter technology combined with tried-and-tested SEW control
processes.
Range of units
The MOVIDRIVE compact range of units includes four series:
Unit variants
MOVIDRIVE compact MCF:
Drive inverter for asynchronous AC motors without

encoder feedback, VFC control mode
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV:
Drive inverter for asynchronous AC motors with encoder

feedback, either VFC or CFC control mode.
MOVIDRIVE compact MCS:
Drive inverter for synchronous servo motors with resolver,

CFC control mode.
MOVIDRIVE compact MCH:
Drive inverter for asynchronous AC motors, asynchronous

servo motors or synchronous servo motors. Encoder feedback with Hiperface encoder, sin/cos encoder or TTL sensor.
The MCF, MCV and MCS series are available in two variants:
MCF/MCV/MCS40A: Control via binary inputs and setpoint selection via analog setpoint input.
MCF/MCV/MCS41A: Control either via PROFIBUS interface or binary inputs. Setpoint selection via PROFIBUS-DP interface.
The MCH series is available in three variants:
MCH40A: Control via binary inputs and setpoint selection via analog setpoint input.
MCH41A: Control either via PROFIBUS interface or binary inputs. Setpoint selection
via PROFIBUS-DP interface.
MCH42A: Control either via INTERBUS FO interface or binary inputs. Setpoint selection via INTERBUS FO interface.
Unit versions
MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters are each available in two versions, namely the
standard version and the technology version.
Standard version
As standard, the units are equipped with the IPOSplus integrated positioning and sequence control system. They can also be expanded with the available options.
The standard version is indicated by the '00' digits at the end of the unit designation.
Technology
version
In addition to the features of the standard version, these units include the technology
functions of 'electronic cam' and 'internal synchronous operation'. Furthermore, you can
use all the application modules available in the MOVITOOLS software package with the
units in technology version.
The technology version is indicated by the '0T' characters at the end of the unit designation.
10
Overview of the
series and versions
Control mode
The following table presents an overview of the series and versions:

Without
encoder input
With encoder input

for sin/cos and incremental encoders
With resolver
input
With encoder input for

Hiperface, sin/cos and
incremental encoders
Without fieldbus
MCF40A
MCV40A
MCS40A
MCH40A
With PROFIBUS-DP
MCF41A
MCV41A
MCS41A
MCH41A
With INTERBUS FO
MCH42A
VFC (Voltage Flux Control) and CFC (Current Flux Control) control modes are features
of MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters. Continuous calculation of the complete motor
model forms the basis for both control modes.
VFC (Voltage Flux Control) control mode
CFC (Current Flux Control) control mode
Voltage-controlled control mode for AC asynchronous motors with and without encoder feedback.
With encoder feedback
At least 150% torque, even with the motor
stopped
Servo-like characteristics
Current-controlled control mode for AC asynchronous motors and permanent-field AC servomotors.

Encoder feedback is always required.
At least 160 % torque, even with the motor
stopped
Maximum precision and concentric running
characteristics right down to standstill
Servo characteristics and torque control even
for asynchronous AC motors
Reacts to load changes within a few milliseconds
Without encoder feedback

At least 150 % torque up to 0.5 Hz
System bus
(SBus)
The system bus (SBus) is available as standard. It permits several MOVIDRIVE drive
inverters to be networked together. As a result, data can be exchanged rapidly between
the units. MOVILINK is the uniform SEW unit profile used for communication via the
SBus.
MOVILINK
MOVILINK means the same message structure is always used, regardless of the interface selected (SBus, RS-232, RS-485, fieldbus interfaces). As a result, the control
software is independent of the selected interface.
IPOSplus
A significant feature of MOVIDRIVE drive inverters is that the IPOSplus positioning

and sequence control system is integrated as standard. IPOSplus enables you to control sequences of motion directly in the inverter, right on the plant floor. This concept
takes the load off the master controller and allows modular concepts to be implemented
more easily.
11
The units at a glance

MOVIDRIVE compact for 3 380 500 VAC supply voltage (400/500 V units):
Continuous
Recommended motor power (VFC)
output cur(at Vin = 3 400 VAC)
rent
(CFC)
MOVIDRIVE compact type
Size
MCF4_A
MCV4_A
MCS4_A
MCH42A
Asynchronous Asynchronous Synchronous Asynchronous/
without
with encoder with resolver synchronous
encoder
with encoder
(Techn.
data)
1.5 kW (2.0 HP)
2.2 kW (3.0 HP)
4.0 AAC
0015-5A3-4-..
0015-5A3-4-..
0015-5A3-4-..
0015-5A3-4-..
2.2 kW (3.0 HP)
3.0 kW (4.0 HP)
5.5 AAC
0022-5A3-4-..
0022-5A3-4-..
0022-5A3-4-..
0022-5A3-4-..
3.0 kW (4.0 HP)
4.0 kW (5.0 HP)
7.0 AAC
0030-5A3-4-..
0030-5A3-4-..
0030-5A3-4-..
0030-5A3-4-..
4.0 kW (5.0 HP)
5.5 kW (7.5 HP)
9.5 AAC
0040-5A3-4-..
0040-5A3-4-..
0040-5A3-4-..
0040-5A3-4-..
5.5 kW (7.5 HP)
7.5 kW (10 HP)
12.5 AAC
0055-5A3-4-..
0055-5A3-4-..
0055-5A3-4-..
0055-5A3-4-..
7.5 kW (10 HP)
11 kW (15 HP)
16 AAC
0075-5A3-4-..
0075-5A3-4-..
0075-5A3-4-..
0075-5A3-4-..
11 kW (15 HP)
15 kW (20 HP)
24 AAC
0110-5A3-4-..
0110-5A3-4-..
0110-5A3-4-..
0110-5A3-4-..
15 kW (20 HP)
22 kW (30 HP)
32 AAC
0150-503-4-..
0150-503-4-..
0150-503-4-..
0150-503-4-..
22 kW (30 HP)
30 kW (40 HP)
46 AAC
0220-503-4-..
0220-503-4-..
0220-503-4-..
0220-503-4-..
30 kW (40 HP)
37 kW (50 HP)
60 AAC
0300-503-4-..
0300-503-4-..
0300-503-4-..
0300-503-4-..
37 kW (50 HP)
45 kW (60 HP)
73 AAC
0370-503-4-..
0370-503-4-..
0370-503-4-..
0370-503-4-..
45 kW (60 HP)
55 kW (75 HP)
89 AAC
0450-503-4-..
0450-503-4-..
0450-503-4-..
0450-503-4-..
55 kW (75 HP)
75 kW (100 HP)
105 AAC
0550-503-4-..
0550-503-4-..
0550-503-4-..
0550-503-4-..
75 kW (100 HP)
90 kW (120 HP)
130 AAC
0750-503-4-..
0750-503-4-..
0750-503-4-..
0750-503-4-..
1
( page 22)
2
( page 24)
3
( page 26)
4
( page 28)
5
( page 30)
MOVIDRIVE compact for 3 200 240 VAC supply voltage (230 V units):
Continuous
Recommended motor power (VFC)
output cur(at Vin = 3 230 VAC)
rent
(CFC)
Size
MCF4_A
MCV4_A
MCS4_A
MCH42A
Asynchronous Asynchronous Synchronous Asynchronous/
without
with encoder with resolver synchronous
encoder
with encoder
(Technical
data)
1.5 kW (2.0 HP)
2.2 kW (3.0 HP)
7.3 AAC
0015-2A3-4-..
0015-2A3-4-..
0015-2A3-4-..
0015-2A3-4-..
2.2 kW (3.0 HP)
3.7 kW (5.0 HP)
8.6 AAC
0022-2A3-4-..
0022-2A3-4-..
0022-2A3-4-..
0022-2A3-4-..
3.7 kW (5.0 HP)
5.0 kW (6.8 HP)
14.5 AAC
0037-2A3-4-..
0037-2A3-4-..
0037-2A3-4-..
0037-2A3-4-..
5.5 kW (7.5 HP)
7.5 kW (10 HP)
22 AAC
0055-2A3-4-..
0055-2A3-4-..
0055-2A3-4-..
0055-2A3-4-..
7.5 kW (10 HP)
11 kW (15 HP)
29 AAC
0075-2A3-4-..
0075-2A3-4-..
0075-2A3-4-..
0075-2A3-4-..
11 kW (15 HP)
15 kW (20 HP)
42 AAC
0110-203-4-..
0110-203-4-..
0110-203-4-..
0110-203-4-..
15 kW (20 HP)
22 kW (30 HP)
54 AAC
0150-203-4-..
0150-203-4-..
0150-203-4-..
0150-203-4-..
22 kW (30 HP)
30 kW (40 HP)
80 AAC
0220-203-4-..
0220-203-4-..
0220-203-4-..
0220-203-4-..
30 kW (40 HP)
37 kW (50 HP)
95 AAC
0300-203-4-..
0300-203-4-..
0300-203-4-..
0300-203-4-..
1
( page 32)
2
( page 34)
3
( page 36)
4
( page 38)
MOVIDRIVE MDR60A regenerative power supply units for 400/500 V units:

Regenerative power supply units1)
MOVIDRIVE MDR60A
Size
1.5 ... 37 kW (20 ... 50 HP)
Iin = 66 AAC, IDCL = 70 ADC
0370-503-00
15 ... 75 kW (20 ... 100 HP)
Iin = 117 AAC, IDCL = 141 ADC
0750-503-00
1) Technical data 'MDR60A Regenerative Power Supply Unit' manual
12
Block wiring diagram
The following block wiring diagram shows the configuration principles and theory of
operation of MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters taking the example of the MOVIDRIVE compact MCV41A.
Figure 3: MOVIDRIVE compact MCV41A block circuit diagram
05291AEN
13
Functions / features
2.2
Unit properties
Wide voltage range

400/500 V units for the voltage range 3 380 ... 500 VAC
230 V units for the voltage range 3 200 ... 240 VAC
High overload capacity

150 % IN short-term operation
125 % IN sustained for operation without overload (pumps, fans)
Control functions
14
In VFC mode and at IN = 100 % permitted ambient temperature up to = 50 C
4Q capability thanks to integrated brake chopper fitted as standard
Compact unit mounting position for minimum switch cabinet space requirement and
optimum utilization of switch cabinet volume
Integrated input filter fitted as standard in sizes 1 and 2, adherence to class A limit
on the input side without any additional measures
Six isolated binary inputs and three binary outputs, one of which is a relay output,
programmable inputs/outputs
One TF/TH input for the motor protection involving a PTC thermistor or thermocontact
3-color LED to display operating and fault states.
Separate 24 VDC voltage input for powering the inverter electronics (parameter setting, diagnostics and data storage even with the supply system switched off)
Removable connection unit and, in addition with MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A,

separable electronics terminals
Power terminals of size 1 units can be disconnected
VFC or CFC control processes for field-oriented operation (asynchronous servo)
With MCH4_A: Either asynchronous or synchronous AC motors can be operated.
IPOSplus positioning and sequence control system integrated as standard
Two complete parameter sets
Automatic motor calibration
Automatic brake control by the inverter
DC braking to decelerate the motor even in 1Q mode
Slip compensation for high static accuracy of speed, even without encoder feedback
Flying restart circuit for flying restart of the inverter
Hoist capability with all motor systems which can be connected
Motor pull-out protection by sliding current limitation in the field weakening range
Speed window masking to avoid mechanical resonance ranges
Heating current to prevent condensation forming in the motor
Factory settings can be reactivated
Parameter lock to protect against parameter changes
Speed controller and encoder input in types MCV (optionally sin/cos encoder, TTL
sensor or HTL sensor), MCS (resolver) and MCH (optionally Hiperface encoder, sin/
cos encoder or TTL sensor), user-friendly controller setting tool in the user interface
Setpoint technology
Communication /
operation
System expansion
Protective feature for complete protection of the inverter and motor (short-circuit,
overload, overvoltage/undervoltage, ground fault, excess temperature in the inverter,
motor pull-out protection, excess temperature in the motor)
Temperature-controlled power unit fan, i.e. no disruptive fan noise in most cases.
Speed monitoring and monitoring of the motor and regenerative limit power
Programmable signal range monitoring (speed, current, maximum current)
Memory for storing x/t diagrams which can be displayed using the SCOPE process
data visualization software (four channels, real-time capable)
Fault memory (five memory locations) with all relevant operating data at the moment
of the fault
Elapsed-hour counter for ON-hours (unit connected to supply system or 24 VDC) and
enable hours (output stage energized)
Uniform operation, identical parameter setting and the same unit connection technology for the entire MOVIDRIVE unit series
Ramp switch mode (total of four ramps)
Motor potentiometer, can be combined with analog setpoint and internal fixed setpoints
External setpoint selections: 0 ... +10 V, 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA or fieldbus
S-pattern for jerk-free speed changes
Programmable input characteristics for flexible setpoint processing
Six bipolar fixed setpoints which can be mixed with external setpoints and motor potentiometer function
System bus for networking up to 64 MOVIDRIVE units to one another
PROFIBUS-DP interface (max. 12 Mbaud) in MC_41A and INTERBUS FO interface

in MCH42A
Straightforward startup and parameter setting using keypad or PC
Extensive range of expansion options, for example:
Removable plain text keypad with parameter memory

RS-232 and RS-485 serial interfaces
Braking resistors, input filters, line chokes, output chokes, output filters
MOVITOOLS software package with SCOPE process data visualization
Technology version with access to technology functions and application modules for
user-friendly application solutions
MOVIDRIVE MDR60A regenerative power supply unit

Regenerative energy is fed back into the supply system
This reduces the thermal load in the switch cabinet and helps to cut costs
Standards / certificates
UL, cUL and C-Tick approved
Safe separation of power and electronic connections according to EN 50178
Compliance with all the requirements for CE certification of machines and plant
equipped with MOVIDRIVE on the basis of the EC Low-voltage Directive 73/23/
EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. Compliance with EMC product standard
EN 61800-3
15
Additional functions of the application version
2.3

SEW offers additional functions for special applications. You can use these additional
functions with MOVIDRIVE units in technology version (...-0T).
The following additional functions are available:
Electronic cam
Internal synchronous operation
Please refer to the 'Electronic Cam' and 'Internal Synchronous Operation' manuals for
detailed information about the additional functions. These manuals form part of the
'Technology Version' documentation package available from SEW.
Electronic cam
You can use the MOVIDRIVE range of units with the 'electronic cam' whenever you
need to harmonize complex sequences of motion in cyclical machines. This solution
gives you much greater flexibility in comparison to the mechanical cam. As a result, it
meets the needs of modern production and processing lines.
A user-friendly cam editor helps you during startup. You can also import existing cam
data. You can also set application-specific parameters for the engagement and disengagement phases using the cam editor.
Example
The figure below displays a typical application for the 'electronic cam'. Freshly filled yogurt jars are transported for further processing. The 'electronic cam' makes it possible
for movement to take place smoothly, which is an important requirement for this application.
03672AXX
Figure 4: Typical application for the 'electronic cam'
16
You can always use the MOVIDRIVE range of units with 'internal synchronous operation' whenever a group of motors have to be operated at a synchronous angle in relation
to one another or with an adjustable proportional ratio (electronic gear). A user-friendly
monitor helps you during startup.
Example
The figure below displays a typical application for the 'internal synchronous operation'.
Extruded material has to be cut to length. The saw receives a start signal and synchronizes itself with the extruded material. The saw moves synchronously to the extruded
material as it cuts. The saw returns to its starting position at the end of the sawing operation.
03866AXX
Figure 5: Typical application for the 'internal synchronous operation'
17
Application modules
2.4
Application modules
The application
Usually, the application involves more than adjusting the speed of a motor. Often, the
inverter is also required to control sequences of motion and undertake typical PLC tasks.
More and more complex drive applications have to be carried out without this resulting
in lengthy project planning and startup routines.
The solution with

MOVIDRIVE
SEW offers various standardized control programs specifically for 'positioning', 'winding'
and 'controlling' applications. These programs are called application modules. The application modules form part of the MOVITOOLS software package and can be used with
units in technology version.
A user-friendly user interface leads you through the process of setting the parameters.
All you have to do is enter the parameters you need for your application. The application
modules turns this information into the control program and loads it into the inverter.
MOVIDRIVE then undertakes all the movement control functions. This takes the load
off the master controller and allows decentralized concepts to be implemented more
easily.
The benefits at a
glance
Wide range of functions
User-friendly user interface
You only have to enter the parameters needed for the application
User-friendly application programs guide you through the process of setting parameters, so there is no need for complicated programming
No programming experience necessary
No lengthy learning curve, therefore quick project planning and startup
Control of all movement functions is performed directly in MOVIDRIVE
Decentralized concepts can be implemented more easily
Available application modules
The application modules currently available for MOVIDRIVE compact are listed below.
These application modules are explained in the 'Technical Data and Dimensions' chapter.
Positioning
Linear movement, the movement records are administered in the inverter:
Table positioning with bus control
Linear movement, the movement records are administered in the PLC:
Positioning via bus
Extended positioning via bus
Rotational movement:
Winding
Controlling
18
Rotary axis
Constant tension center winder
Winder with jockey roll control
Flying saw
Application modules
Application
The following figure shows an example for how the various SEW applications modules
are used in a block warehouse.
1.
2.
3.
04008AXX
Figure 6: Application in a block warehouse
1. Hoist: Table positioning

2. Travel axis: Absolute value or bus positioning
3. Rotary distributor: Rotary axis
19
kVA
CE-marking, UL approval and unit designation
P Hz
Technical Data and Dimensions
3.1
CE-marking, UL approval and unit designation
CE-marking
Low Voltage Directive

MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters comply with the regulations of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters are designed as components for installation
in machinery and plant. They comply with the EMC product standard EN 61800-3
'Variable-speed electrical drives'. Provided the installation instructions are complied
with, they satisfy the appropriate requirements for CE-marking of the entire machine/
system in which they are fitted, on the basis of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters of size 1 and 2 are fitted with an input filter as
standard. These units comply with limit value class A to EN 55011 and EN 55014 on
the line side without further measures.
The CE-mark on the nameplate indicates conformity with the Low-voltage Directive 73/
23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. We can issue a declaration of conformity
to this effect on request.
UL and cUL approval has been granted for the entire MOVIDRIVE range of units. cUL
is equivalent to CSA approval.
UL approval
UL UL
C-Tick
C-Tick approval has been granted for the entire MOVIDRIVE compact range of units.
C-Tick certifies conformity with the requirements of the ACA (Australian Communications Authority).
Unit designation
The following example illustrates the unit designation of MOVIDRIVE compact:
05292AEN
20
kVA
General technical data
3.2
P Hz
General technical data

The following table lists the technical data applicable to all MOVIDRIVE compact drive
inverters, irrespective of their type, version, size and performance.
MOVIDRIVE compact
All sizes
Interference immunity
To EN 61800-3
Interference emission with EMC-compliant installation
According to class B limit to EN 55011 and EN 55014

To EN 61800-3
Sizes 1 and 2 on line side according to class A limit to EN
55011 and EN 55014 without further measures
Ambient temperature
amb
Derating ambient temperature

Climate class
Storage temperature1)
0 C...+50 C at ID = 100 % IN and fPWM = 4 kHz

PN reduction: 3.0 % IN per K to max. 60 C
EN 60721-3-3, class 3K3
-25 C...+70 C (EN 60721-3-3, class 3K3)
DBG keypad: -20 C...+60 C
Type of cooling (DIN 51751)
Forced cooling
Temperature-controlled fan, response threshold at = 45 C
Enclosure
EN 60529
(NEMA1)
IP20
IP00 (power connections); IP10 with Plexiglas cover mounted
(supplied as standard)
Sizes 1 to 3
Size 4 and 5
Operating mode
DB (EN 60149-1-1 and 1-3)
Installation altitude
h 1000 m (3300 ft)

IN reduction: 1 % per 100 m (330 ft)
from 1000 m (3300 ft) to max. 2000 m (6600 ft)
1) Connect to supply voltage for min. 5 minutes every 2 years if stored for long periods, otherwise the unit
service life may be reduced.
MOVIDRIVE
compact unit
series
Figure 7: MOVIDRIVE compact unit series
02531AXX
21
kVA
MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units)
P Hz
3.3
Size 1
02570AXX
Figure 8: Size 1
MOVIDRIVE compact
0015-5A3-4-0_
0022-5A3-4-0_
0030-5A3-4-0_
0040-5A3-4-0_
INPUT
Supply voltage
Vmains
3 380 VAC -10 %...3 500 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency
fmains
50 Hz...60 Hz 5 %
1)
Rated system current Imains 100 %

(at Vmains = 3 400 VAC)
125 %
3.6 AAC
4.5 AAC
5.0 AAC
6.2 AAC
6.3 AAC
7.9 AAC
8.6 AAC
10.7 AAC
Rated output power2)

PN
(at Vmains = 3 400...500 VAC)
2.8 kVA
3.8 kVA
4.9 kVA
6.6 kVA
Rated output current1)

IN
4.0 AAC
5.5 AAC
7.0 AAC
9.5 AAC
Current limitation
Imax
Motor and regenerative 150 % IN, duration depending on the capacity utilization
OUTPUT
Internal current limitation
Imax = 0...150 % can be set in menu (P303 / P313)
Minimum permitted brake

RBWmin
resistance value (4Q operation)
68
Output voltage
Vout
max. Vin
PWM frequency
fPWM
Adjustable: 4/8/16 kHz (P860 / P861)
Speed range / resolution
nA / nA
-5000...0...+5000 rpm / 0.2 rpm across the entire range
GENERAL
Power loss at PNPVmax
85 W
3
105 W
Cooling air consumption
40 m /h (24 ft /min)
Weight
2.8 kg (6.16 lb)
Dimensions
WHD
130 W
180 W
MCF/MCV/MCS:
MCH:
105 315 155 mm (4.13 12.40 6.10 in)

105 315 161 mm (4.13 12.40 6.34 in)
1) The system and output currents must be reduced by 20 % from the nominal values for Vmains = 3 500 VAC.
2) The performance data apply to fPWM = 4 kHz (factory setting in VFC operating modes).
22
kVA
P Hz
MCF4_A standard type (VFC)
0015-5A3-4-00
0022-5A3-4-00
0030-5A3-4-00
0040-5A3-4-00
MCF40A part numbers (without fieldbus)
826 738 3
826 739 1
826 740 5
826 741 3
MCF41A part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP)
826 835 5
826 836 3
826 837 1
826 838 X
MCF4_A technology type (VFC)
0015-5A3-4-0T
0022-5A3-4-0T
0030-5A3-4-0T
0040-5A3-4-0T
827 426 6
827 427 4
827 428 2
827 429 0
827 449 5
827 450 9
827 451 7
827 452 5
Constant load
Recommended motor power Pmot 1.5 kW (2.0 HP)
2.2 kW (3.0 HP)
3.0 kW (4.0 HP)
4.0 kW (5.0 HP)
Variable torque load or constant

load without overload
3
3.0 kW (4.0 HP)
4.0 kW (5.0 HP)
5.5 kW (7.5 HP)
ID
Continuous output current = 125 % IN
(at Vmains = 3 400 VAC and fPWM = 4 kHz)
5.0 AAC
6.9 AAC
8.8 AAC
11.9 AAC
MCV4_A standard type (VFC/CFC)
0015-5A3-4-00
0022-5A3-4-00
0030-5A3-4-00
0040-5A3-4-00
MCV40A part numbers (without fieldbus)
826 908 4
826 909 2
826 910 6
826 911 4
MCV41A part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP) 826 928 9
826 929 7
826 930 0
826 931 9
MCV4_A technology type (VFC/CFC)
0015-5A3-4-0T
0022-5A3-4-0T
0030-5A3-4-0T
0040-5A3-4-0T
827 472 X
827 473 8
827 474 6
827 475 4
827 496 7
827 497 5
827 498 3
Recommended motor power MCF4_A
VFC operating mode

CFC operating mode (fPWM = 8 kHz)
4.0 AAC
5.5 AAC
7.0 AAC
Sec. Project Planning, CFC motor selection
9.5 AAC
Recommended motor power
MCS4_A standard type (SERVO)
0015-5A3-4-00
0022-5A3-4-00
0030-5A3-4-00
0040-5A3-4-00
MCS40A part numbers (without fieldbus)
827 060 0
827 061 9
827 062 7
827 063 5
MCS41A part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP) 827 077 5
827 078 3
827 079 1
827 080 5
MCS4_A technology type (SERVO)
0015-5A3-4-0T
0022-5A3-4-0T
0030-5A3-4-0T
0040-5A3-4-0T
827 518 1
827 519 X
827 520 3
827 521 1
827 542 4
827 543 2
827 544 0
SERVO operating mode (fPWM = 8 kHz)

ID
4.0 AAC
5.5 AAC
7.0 AAC
Sec. Project Planning, SERVO motor selection
9.5 AAC
MCH4_A standard type

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0015-5A3-4-00
0022-5A3-4-00
0030-5A3-4-00
0040-5A3-4-00
MCH40A part numbers (without fieldbus)
ID
827 603 X
827 604 8
827 605 6
827 606 4
MCH41A part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP) 827 649 8
827 650 1
827 651 X
827 652 8
MCH42A part numbers (with INTERBUS FO)
827 565 3
827 566 1
827 567 X
827 568 8
MCH4_A technology type

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0015-5A3-4-0T
0022-5A3-4-0T
0030-5A3-4-0T
0040-5A3-4-0T
827 626 9
827 627 7
827 628 5
827 629 3
827 673 0
827 674 9
827 675 7
827 158 5
827 159 3
827 160 7
827 161 5
VFC operating mode
CFC/SERVO operating mode (fPWM = 8 kHz)

ID
4.0 AAC
7.0 AAC
9.5 AAC
5.5 AAC
Sec. Project Planning, CFC/SERVO motor selection
23
kVA
P Hz
Size 2
02571AXX
Figure 9: Size 2
MOVIDRIVE compact
0055-5A3-4-0_
0075-5A3-4-0_
0110-5A3-4-0_
INPUT
Supply voltage
Vmains
3 380 VAC -10 %...3 500 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency
fmains
50 Hz...60 Hz 5 %
Rated system current1)Imains 100 %

125 %
11.3 AAC
14.1 AAC
14.4 AAC
18.0 AAC
21.6 AAC
27.0 AAC
PN
(at Vmains = 3 400...500 VAC)
8.7 kVA
11.2 kVA
16.8 kVA

IN
12.5 AAC
16 AAC
24 AAC
Current limitation
Imax
OUTPUT

RBWmin
47
Output voltage
Vout
max. Vin
PWM frequency
fPWM
nA / nA
22
GENERAL
220 W
80 m3/h (48 ft3/min)
Weight
Dimensions
290 W
400 W
5.9 kg (12.98 lb)

WHD
MCF/MCV/MCS:
MCH:
130 335 207 mm (5.12 13.19 8.15 in)

130 335 213 mm (5.12 13.19 8.39 in)
1) The system and output currents must be reduced by 20 % from the nominal values for Vin = 3 500 VAC.
24
kVA
0055-5A3-4-00
0075-5A3-4-00
0110-5A3-4-00
826 742 1
826 743 X
826 744 8
826 839 8
826 840 1
826 841 X
0055-5A3-4-0T
0075-5A3-4-0T
0110-5A3-4-0T
827 430 4
827 431 2
827 432 0
827 453 3
827 454 1
827 455 X
7.5 kW (10 HP)
11 kW (15 HP)

Recommended motor power Pmot 7.5 kW (10 HP)
11 kW (15 HP)
15 kW (20 HP)
15.6 AAC
20.0 AAC
30.0 AAC
0055-5A3-4-00
0075-5A3-4-00
0110-5A3-4-00
826 912 2
826 913 0
826 914 9
826 933 5
826 934 3
0055-5A3-4-0T
0075-5A3-4-0T
0110-5A3-4-0T
827 476 2
827 477 0
827 478 9
827 500 9
827 501 7
VFC operating mode
12.5 AAC
16 AAC
24 AAC
0055-5A3-4-00
0075-5A3-4-00
0110-5A3-4-00
827 064 3
827 065 1
827 066 X
827 082 1
827 083 X
0055-5A3-4-0T
0075-5A3-4-0T
0110-5A3-4-0T
827 522 X
827 523 8
827 524 6
827 546 7
827 547 5

ID
12.5 AAC
16 AAC
24 AAC

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0055-5A3-4-00
0075-5A3-4-00
0110-5A3-4-00
ID
827 607 2
827 608 0
827 609 9
827 654 4
827 655 2
827 569 6
827 570 X
827 571 8

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0055-5A3-4-0T
0075-5A3-4-0T
0110-5A3-4-0T
Part numbers (without fieldbus)
827 630 7
827 631 5
827 632 3
Part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP)
827 676 5
827 677 3
827 678 1
Part numbers (with INTERBUS FO)
827 162 3
827 163 1
827 164 X
VFC operating mode

ID
12.5 AAC
ID

P Hz
Constant load
16 AAC
24 AAC
25
kVA
P Hz
Size 3
02572AXX
Figure 10: Size 3
MOVIDRIVE compact
0150-503-4-0_
0220-503-4-0_
0300-503-4-0_
INPUT
Supply voltage
Vmains
3 380 VAC -10 %...3 500 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency
fmains
50 Hz...60 Hz 5 %

125 %
28.8 AAC
36.0 AAC
41.4 AAC
51.7 AAC
54.0 AAC
67.5 AAC

PN
(at Vmains = 3 400...500 VAC)
22.2 kVA
31.9 kVA
41.6 kVA

IN
32 AAC
46 AAC
60 AAC
Current limitation
Imax
OUTPUT

RBWmin
15
Output voltage
Vout
max. Vin
PWM frequency
fPWM
nA / nA
12
GENERAL
550 W
180 m3/h (108 ft3/min)
Weight
Dimensions
750 W
950 W
14.3 kg (31.46 lb)

WHD
MCF/MCV/MCS:
MCH:
200 465 227 mm (7.87 18.31 8.94 in)

200 465 233 mm (7.87 18.31 9.17 in)
26
kVA
0150-503-4-00
0220-503-4-00
0300-503-4-00
826 745 6
826 746 4
826 747 2
826 842 8
826 843 6
826 844 4
0150-503-4-0T
0220-503-4-0T
0300-503-4-0T
827 433 9
827 434 7
827 435 5
827 456 8
827 457 6
827 458 4
Constant load
Recommended motor power Pmot 15 kW (20 HP)
22 kW (30 HP)
30 kW (40 HP)

30 kW (40 HP)
37 kW (50 HP)
40.0 AAC
57.5 AAC
75.0 AAC
0150-503-4-00
0220-503-4-00
0300-503-4-00
826 915 7
826 916 5
826 917 3
826 936 X
826 937 8
0150-503-4-0T
0220-503-4-0T
0300-503-4-0T
827 479 7
827 480 0
827 481 9
827 503 3
827 504 1
VFC operating mode
32 AAC
46 AAC
60 AAC
0150-503-4-00
0220-503-4-00
0300-503-4-00
827 067 8
827 068 6
827 069 4
827 085 6
827 086 4
0150-503-4-0T
0220-503-4-0T
0300-503-4-0T
827 525 4
827 526 2
827 527 0
827 549 1
827 550 5

ID
32 AAC
46 AAC
60 AAC

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0150-503-4-00
0220-503-4-00
0300-503-4-00
ID
827 610 2
827 611 0
827 612 9
827 657 9
827 658 7
827 572 6
827 573 4
827 574 2

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0150-503-4-0T
0220-503-4-0T
0300-503-4-0T
827 633 1
827 634 X
827 635 8
MCH41A part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP) 827 679 X
827 680 3
827 681 1
827 165 8
827 166 6
827 167 4
VFC operating mode

ID
32 AAC
ID
P Hz

46 AAC
60 AAC
27
kVA
P Hz
Size 4
02573AXX
Figure 11: Size 4
MOVIDRIVE compact
0370-503-4-0_
0450-503-4-0_
INPUT
Supply voltage
Vmains
3 380 VAC -10 %...3 500 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency
fmains
50 Hz...60 Hz 5 %

125 %
65.7 AAC
81.9 AAC
80.1 AAC
100.1 AAC

PN
(at Vmains = 3 400...500 VAC)
51.1 kVA
62.3 kVA

IN
73 AAC
89 AAC
Current limitation
Imax
OUTPUT

RBWmin
Output voltage
Vout
max. Vin
PWM frequency
fPWM
nA / nA
GENERAL
1200 W
180 m3/h (108 ft3/min)
Weight
Dimensions
1450 W
26.3 kg (57.86 lb)

WHD
MCF/MCV/MCS:
MCH:
280 522 227 mm (11.02 20.55 8.94 in)

280 522 233 mm (11.02 20.55 9.17 in)
28
0370-503-4-00
0450-503-4-00
826 748 0
826 749 9
826 845 2
826 846 0
0370-503-4-0T
0450-503-4-0T
827 436 3
827 437 1
827 459 2
827 460 6
Constant load
45 kW (60 HP)

55 kW (75 HP)
P Hz
ID
91 AAC
111 AAC
0370-503-4-00
0450-503-4-00
826 918 1
826 919 X
826 939 4
0370-503-4-0T
0450-503-4-0T
827 482 7
827 483 5
MCV41A part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP) 827 505 X
827 506 8
VFC operating mode

kVA
73 AAC
89 AAC
ID
0370-503-4-00
0450-503-4-00
827 070 8

0370-503-4-0T
827 528 9
827 529 7
827 552 1

ID
0450-503-4-0T
73 AAC
89 AAC

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0370-503-4-00
0450-503-4-00
827 613 7
827 614 5
827 660 9
827 575 0
827 576 9

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0370-503-4-0T
0450-503-4-0T
827 636 6
827 637 4
MCH41A part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP) 827 682 X
827 683 8
827 168 2
827 169 0
VFC operating mode

ID
73 AAC
89 AAC
29
kVA
P Hz
Size 5
02574AXX
Figure 12: Size 5
MOVIDRIVE compact
0550-503-4-0_
0750-503-4-0_
INPUT
Supply voltage
Vmains
3 380 VAC -10 %...3 500 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency
fmains
50 Hz...60 Hz 5 %

125 %
94.5 AAC
118.1 AAC
117.0 AAC
146.3 AAC
PN
(at Vmains = 3 400...500 VAC)
73.5 kVA
91.0 kVA

IN
105 AAC
130 AAC
Current limitation
Imax
OUTPUT

RBWmin
Output voltage
Vout
max. Vin
PWM frequency
fPWM
nA / nA
GENERAL
1700 W
360 m3/h (216 ft3/min)
Weight
Dimensions
2000 W
34.3 kg (75.46 lb)

WHD
280 610 330 mm (11.02 24.02 12.99 in)
30
0550-503-4-00
0750-503-4-00
826 750 2
826 751 0
826 847 9
826 848 7
0550-503-4-0T
0750-503-4-0T
827 438 X
827 439 8
827 461 4
827 462 2
Constant load
P Hz
75 kW (100 HP)
3
90 kW (120 HP)
ID
131 AAC
162 AAC
0550-503-4-00
0750-503-4-00
826 920 3
826 921 1
826 941 6
0550-503-4-0T
0750-503-4-0T
827 484 3
827 485 1
827 508 4
VFC operating mode

kVA
105 AAC
130 AAC
ID
0550-503-4-00
0750-503-4-00
0550-503-4-0T
0750-503-4-0T
827 530 0
827 531 9
MCS41A part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP) 827 553 X
827 554 8


MCS41A part numbers (with PROFIBUS-DP)
105 AAC
130 AAC
ID

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0550-503-4-00
0750-503-4-00
827 615 3
827 616 1
827 662 5
827 577 7
827 578 5

(VFC/CFC/SERVO)
0550-503-4-0T
0750-503-4-0T
827 638 2
827 639 0
827 685 4
827 170 4
827 171 2
VFC operating mode

ID
105 AAC
130 AAC
31
kVA
MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-2_3 (230 V units)
P Hz
3.4
Size 1
Figure 13: Size 1
MOVIDRIVE compact
02570AXX
0015-2A3-4-0_
0022-2A3-4-0_
0037-2A3-4-0_
INPUT
Supply voltage
Vmains
3 200 VAC -10 %...3 240 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency
fmains
50 Hz...60 Hz 5 %

125 %
6.7 AAC
8.4 AAC
7.8 AAC
9.8 AAC
12.9 AAC
16.1 AAC

PN
(at Vmains = 3 230...240 VAC)
2.7 kVA
3.4 kVA
5.8 kVA
Rated output current

IN
7.3 AAC
8.6 AAC
14.5 AAC
Current limitation
Imax
OUTPUT

RBWmin
27
Output voltage
Vout
max. Vin
PWM frequency
fPWM
nA / nA
PVmax
110 W
GENERAL
Power loss at PN
Weight
Dimensions
126 W
210 W
40 m3/h (24 ft3/min)
2.8 kg (6.16 lb)

WHD
MCF/MCV: 105 315 155 mm (4.13 12.40 6.10 in)

MCH:
105 315 161 mm (4.13 12.40 6.34 in)
32
kVA
0015-2A3-4-00
0022-2A3-4-00
0037-2A3-4-00
826 752 9
826 753 7
826 754 5
826 853 3
826 854 1
826 855 X
0015-2A3-4-0T
0022-2A3-4-0T
0037-2A3-4-0T
827 440 1
827 441 X
827 442 8
827 463 0
827 464 9
827 465 7
Constant load
2.2 kW (3.0 HP)
3.7 kW (5.0 HP)

3.7 kW (5.0 HP)
5.0 kW (6.8 HP)
9.1 AAC
10.8 AAC
18.1 AAC
0015-2A3-4-00
0022-2A3-4-00
0037-2A3-4-00
826 922 X
826 923 8
826 924 6
826 943 2
826 944 0
0015-2A3-4-0T
0022-2A3-4-0T
0037-2A3-4-0T
827 486 X
827 487 8
827 488 6
827 510 6
827 511 4
Recommended motor power MDF60A
VFC operating mode
7.3 AAC
8.6 AAC
14.5 AAC

(VFC/CFC)
0015-2A3-4-00
0022-2A3-4-00
0037-2A3-4-00
ID
827 617 X
827 618 8
827 619 6
827 664 1
827 665 X
827 588 2
827 589 0
827 590 4

(VFC/CFC)
0015-2A3-4-0T
0022-2A3-4-0T
0037-2A3-4-0T
827 640 4
827 641 2
827 642 0
827 687 0
827 688 9
827 579 3
827 580 7
827 581 5
VFC operating mode

ID
7.3 AAC
ID
P Hz

8.6 AAC
14.5 AAC
33
kVA
P Hz
Size 2
02571AXX
Figure 14: Size 2
MOVIDRIVE compact
0055-2A3-4-0_
0075-2A3-4-0_
INPUT
Supply voltage
Vmains
3 200 VAC -10 %...3 240 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency
fmains
50 Hz...60 Hz 5 %

125 %
19.5 AAC
24.4 AAC
27.4 AAC
34.3 AAC
PN
Output rated power1)
(at Vmains = 3 230...240 VAC)
8.8 kVA
11.6 kVA
Output rated current

IN
22 AAC
29 AAC
Current limitation
Imax
OUTPUT

RBWmin
12
Output voltage
Vout
max. Vin
PWM frequency
fPWM
nA / nA
PVmax
300 W
GENERAL
Power loss at PN
Weight
Dimensions
380 W
80 m3/h (48 ft3/min)
5.9 kg (12.98 lb)

WHD
MCF/MCV: 130 335 207 mm (5.12 13.19 8.15 in)

MCH:
130 335 213 mm (5.12 13.19 8.39 in)
34
0055-2A3-4-00
0075-2A3-4-00
826 755 3
826 756 1
826 856 8
826 857 6
0055-2A3-4-0T
0075-2A3-4-0T
827 443 6
827 444 4
827 466 5
827 467 3
Constant load
Recommended motor power Pmot 7.5 kW (10 HP)
P Hz
11 kW (15 HP)
36.3 AAC
0055-2A3-4-00
0075-2A3-4-00
826 925 4
826 926 2
826 946 7
0055-2A3-4-0T
0075-2A3-4-0T
827 489 4
827 490 8
827 513 0
VFC operating mode
22 AAC
29 AAC

(VFC/CFC)
0055-2A3-4-00
0075-2A3-4-00
ID
827 620 X
827 621 8
827 667 6
827 591 2
827 592 0

(VFC/CFC)
0055-2A3-4-0T
0075-2A3-4-0T
827 643 9
827 644 7
827 690 0
827 582 3
827 583 1
VFC operating mode

ID
22 AAC
27.5 AAC
7.5 kW (10 HP)
ID

kVA
29 AAC
35
kVA
P Hz
Size 3
02572AXX
Figure 15: Size 3
MOVIDRIVE compact
0110-203-4-0_
0150-203-4-0_
INPUT
Supply voltage
Vmains
3 200 VAC -10 %...3 240 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency
fmains
50 Hz...60 Hz 5 %

125 %
40.0 AAC
50.0 AAC
49.0 AAC
61.0 AAC

PN
(at Vmains = 3 230...240 VAC)
17.1 kVA
21.5 kVA

IN
42 AAC
54 AAC
Current limitation
Imax
OUTPUT

RBWmin
7.5
Output voltage
Vout
max. Vin
PWM frequency
fPWM
nA / nA
PVmax
580 W
5.6
GENERAL
Power loss at PN
Weight
Dimensions
720 W
180 m3/h (108 ft3/min)
14.3 kg (31.46 lb)

WHD
MCF/MCV/MCS:
MCH:
200 465 227 mm (7.87 18.31 8.94 in)

200 465 233 mm (7.87 18.31 9.17 in)
36
0110-203-4-00
826 757 X
827 263 8
826 858 4
827 266 2
0110-203-4-0T
0150-203-4-0T
827 445 2
827 446 0
827 468 1
827 469 X
15 kW (20 HP)

22 kW (30 HP)
52.5 AAC
67.5 AAC
0110-203-4-00
0150-203-4-00
826 927 0
827 269 7
827 272 7
0110-203-4-0T
0150-203-4-0T
827 491 6
827 492 4
827 515 7
P Hz
VFC operating mode
42 AAC
54 AAC

(VFC/CFC)
0110-203-4-00
0150-203-4-00
827 622 6
827 623 4
ID
827 669 2
827 593 9
827 594 7

(VFC/CFC)
0110-203-4-0T
0150-203-4-0T
827 645 5
827 646 3
827 692 7
827 584 X
827 585 8
VFC operating mode

ID
42 AAC
ID
0150-203-4-00
Constant load

kVA
54 AAC
37
kVA
P Hz
Size 4
02573AXX
Figure 16: Size 4
MOVIDRIVE compact
0220-203-4-0_
0300-203-4-0_
INPUT
Supply voltage
Vmains
3 200 VAC -10 %...3 240 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency
fmains
50 Hz...60 Hz 5 %

125 %
72 AAC
90 AAC
86 AAC
107 AAC

PN
(at Vmains = 3 230...240 VAC)
31.8 kVA
37.8 kVA

IN
80 AAC
95 AAC
Current limitation
Imax
OUTPUT

RBWmin
3.0
Output voltage
Vout
max. Vin
PWM frequency
fPWM
nA / nA
PVmax
1100 W
GENERAL
Power loss at PN
Weight
Dimensions
1300 W
180 m3/h (108 ft3/min)
26.3 kg (57.86 lb)

WHD
MCF/MCV/MCS:
MCH:
280 522 227 mm (11.02 20.55 8.94 in)

280 522 233 mm (11.02 20.55 9.17 in)
38
0220-203-4-00
0300-203-4-00
827 264 6
827 265 4
827 267 0
827 268 9
0220-203-4-0T
0300-203-4-0T
827 447 9
827 448 7
827 470 3
827 471 1
Constant load
30 kW (40 HP)

37 kW (50 HP)
100 AAC
118 AAC
0220-203-4-00
0300-203-4-00
827 270 0
827 271 9
827 274 3
0220-203-4-0T
0300-203-4-0T
827 493 2
827 494 0
827 517 3
80 AAC
95 AAC

(VFC/CFC)
0220-203-4-00
0300-203-4-00
ID
827 624 2
827 625 0
827 671 4
827 595 5
827 596 3

(VFC/CFC)
0220-203-4-0T
0300-203-4-0T
827 647 1
827 648 X
827 694 3
827 586 6
827 587 4
VFC operating mode

ID
80 AAC
P Hz
VFC operating mode
ID

kVA
95 AAC
39
kVA
i
3.5
Additional functions in the application type
P Hz

Refer to the 'Electronic cam' manual for detailed information. This manual forms part of
the 'application version' documentation package which you can order from SEW.
SLAVE
Electronic cam
MASTER
Motor and encoder
Please note the following points:
The 'electronic cam' can only be implemented on MOVIDRIVE units in application

version (...-0T).
It is essential for the 'electronic cam' to have the current-controlled control mode and,
therefore, encoder feedback. As a result, the 'electronic cam' can only be implemented with type MCV in CFC operating modes, with type MCS in SERVO operating
modes and with type MCH in CFC or SERVO operating modes. The 'electronic cam'
cannot be implemented with type MCV/MCH in VFC and VFC-n-CONTROL operating modes or with type MCF.
The 'electronic cam' is available in parameter set 1 only.
Use the following motor types:
For operation with MOVIDRIVE compact MCV4_A...-5_3-4-0T:

Asynchronous servomotor CT/CV with high-resolution sin/cos encoder.
AC motor DT/DV/D with incremental encoder option, preferably high-resolution sin/
cos encoder.
For operation with MOVIDRIVE compact MCS4_A...-5_3-4-0T:

Synchronous servomotor CM with AS1H (Hiperface encoder).
Synchronous servomotor DS/DY with resolver.
For operation with MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A...-5_3-4-0T:

Asynchronous servomotor CT/CV with AV1H option (Hiperface encoder).
AC motor DT/DV/D with AV1H option (Hiperface encoder).
Synchronous servomotor CM with AS1H/ES1H (Hiperface encoder).
High-resolution speed detection is required for optimum operation of the cam disk. The
encoders installed as standard on CT/CV, CM and DS/DY motors fulfill these requirements. SEW recommends using high-resolution sin/cos encoders ES1S, ES2S or EV1S
as incremental encoders if DT/DV/D motors are used.
40
kVA
P Hz
Refer to the 'Internal Synchronous Operation' manual for detailed information. This manual forms part of the 'Additional Functions and Application Modules' documentation
package which you can order from SEW.
Please note the following points:
Motor and encoder
'Internal synchronous operation' can only be implemented on MOVIDRIVE units in

application version (...-0T).
It is essential for 'internal synchronous operation' to have the current-controlled control mode and, therefore, encoder feedback. As a result, 'internal synchronous operation' can only be implemented with type MCV in CFC operating modes, with type
MCS in SERVO operating modes and with type MCH in CFC or SERVO operating
modes. 'Internal synchronous operation' cannot be implemented with type MCV/
MCH in VFC and VFC-n-CONTROL operating modes or with type MCF.
'Internal synchronous operation' is available in parameter set 1 only.
Use the following motor types:
For operation with MOVIDRIVE compact MCV4_A...-5_3-4-0T:

Asynchronous servomotor CT/CV with high-resolution sin/cos encoder.
AC motor DT/DV/D with incremental encoder option, preferably high-resolution sin/
cos encoder.
For operation with MOVIDRIVE compact MCS4_A...-5_3-4-0T:

Synchronous servomotor CM with AS1H (Hiperface encoder).
Synchronous servomotor DS/DY with resolver.
For operation with MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A...-5_3-4-0T:

Asynchronous servomotor CT/CV with AV1H option (Hiperface encoder).
AC motor DT/DV/D with AV1H option (Hiperface encoder).
Synchronous servomotor CM with AS1H/ES1H (Hiperface encoder).
High-resolution speed detection is required for optimum operation of internal synchronous operation. The encoders installed as standard on CT/CV, CM and DS/DY motors
fulfill these requirements. SEW recommends using high-resolution sin/cos encoders
ES1S, ES2S or EV1S as incremental encoders if DT/DV/D motors are used.
41
kVA
i
3.6
MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCS electronics data
P Hz
MOVIDRIVE compact
Setpoint processing and speed ramps
MCF/MCV/MCS40A
and MCV/MCS41A
Version with analog setpoint input
Voltage supply
for setpoint input
Setpoint input n1
X10:1
X10:3
X10:2/X10:4
REF1: +10 VDC +5 % / -0 %, Imax = 3 mA

REF2: -10 VDC +0 % / -5 %, Imax = 3 mA
Reference voltages for setpoint potentiometer
AI11/AI12: Voltage or current input, can be set with S11 and P11_, sampling interval 1 ms
(Differential input)
Operating mode AI11/AI12
Resolution
Internal resistance
Voltage input:
n1 = 0...+10 V or -10 V...0...+10 V
12 bits
Ri = 40 k (external voltage supply)
Ri = 20 k (supply from REF1/REF2)
MCF/MCV/MCS41A (X10:2 and X10:4

ineffective with MCF41A)
Version with PROFIBUS-DP interface. There is no analog setpoint input n1 (AI11/AI12)

in MCF41A, setpoint specification only via PROFIBUS-DP interface.
Protocol option
Baud rate
Connection system
Bus termination
Station address
Name of the GSD file
DP identity number
PROFIBUS-DP acc. to IEC 61158

Automatic detection of baud rate from 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud
9-pin sub D connector, pin assignment to IEC 61158
Can be activated for cable type A to IEC 61158
0...125, can be set using DIP switch
SEW_6002.GSD
6002hex (24578dec)
Current input:
n1 = 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA
11 bits
Ri = 250
Applies to all versions

Setpoint input n2
TF/TH input
42
X10:6
Analog input 0...10 V or optionally ( P120) TF/TH input

with response threshold at RTF 2.9 k 10 %
Internal setpoints
Parameter set 1: n11/n12/n13 = -5000...0...+5000 rpm

Time ranges of speed ramps

at n = 3000 rpm
1st ramp
t11/t21
2nd ramp
t12/t22
Stop ramp
t13/t23
Emergency ramp
t14/t24
Motorized potentiometert3
Up: 0.0...2000 s
Down: 0.0...2000 s
Up = down: 0.0...2000 s
Down: 0...20 s
Down: 0...20 s
Up: 0.2...50 s
Down: 0.2...50 s
kVA
MOVIDRIVE compact
Auxiliary voltage output1)
P Hz
Other electronics data

X10:16
1)
VO24: VOUT = 24 VDC, maximum current carrying capacity Imax = 200 mA
Ext. voltage supply X10:24
VI24: VIN = 24 VDC -15 % / +20 % (range: 19.2...30 VDC) to EN 61131-2
Binary inputs
X10:9...X10:14
Internal resistance
DI...DI5: Isolated (optocoupler), PLC-compatible (EN 61131), sampling interval 5 ms

Ri 3.0 k, IE 10 mA
+13 V...+30 V
-3 V...+5 V
Signal level
= '1' = Contact closed

= '0' = Contact open
To EN 61131
Function
X10:9
X10:10...X10:14
DI: With fixed assignment '/Controller inhibit'

DI1...DI5: Selection option Parameter menu P60_
Binary outputs1)
X10:21/X10:19
DB/DO2: PLC compatible (EN 61131-2), response time 5 ms
Signal level
'0' = 0 V
Function
X10:21
X10:19
Only in MCF/MCV/MCS40AX10:19
Analog output
Relay output
X10:18/20/22
Function
'1' = +24 V
Important: Do not apply external voltage!
DB: With fixed assignment '/Brake', Imax = 150 mA, short-circuit proof
DO2: Selection option Parameter menu P62_, Imax = 50 mA, short-circuit proof
AO1: Menu P64_, resolution 8-bit, Imax = 20 mA (short-circuit proof)
DO1: Load capacity of the relay contacts Vmax = 30 VDC, Imax = 800 mA
X10:18
X10:20
X10:22
DO1-C: Shared relay contact

DO2-NO: NO contact
DO2-NC: NC contact
System bus (SBus)
X10:5
X10:7
SC11: SBus high

SC12: SBus low
Motor encoder input1)

not with type MCF4_A
X15:
Encoder with type MCV4_A

Permitted encoder types:
sin/cos encoder 1 VSS
5 V TTL sensors
24 V HTL sensors
Output encoder
simulation or
input external encoder1)
not with type MCF4_A
X14:
Selection option Parameter menu P62_
CAN bus to CAN specification 2.0, parts A and B, transmission

technology to ISO 11898, max. 64 stations, terminating resistor
(120 ) can be activated using DIP switches
Resolver with type MCS4_A
2-pole, 7 VAC_r.m.s., 7 kHz
Encoder power supply: +24 V, Imax = 180 mA

Output encoder simulation:
Signal level to RS-422 (5 V TTL)
Number of pulses as on X15: (MCV4_A) or
fixed 1024 pulses/revolution (MCS4_A)
Input external encoder (max. 200 kHz):

Only encoder with signal level to RS-422
(5 V TTL) should be connected!
Encoder power supply: +24 V, Imax = 180
mA
Reference terminals
X10:8
X10:17/X10:23
X10:15
AGND: Reference potential for analog signals n1 and n2 and terminals X10:1 and X10:3
DGND: Reference potential for binary signals, system bus (SBus), encoder and resolver.
DCOM: Reference potential for binary inputs X10:9...X10:14 (DI...DI5).
Permitted line cross section
one core per terminal:

two cores per terminal:
1)
0.20...2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12)

0.20...1 mm2 (AWG 24...17)
MCF/MCV/MCS40A (without fieldbus): The unit provides a current of Imax = 400 mA for the +24 V outputs (VO24, DB,
DB2, encoder supply). If this value is insufficient, a 24 VDC power supply unit must be connected to X10:24 (VI24). This external 24 VDC power supply must be capable of supplying a continuous power of 50 W and a peak power (1 s) of 100 W.
MCF/MCV/MCS41A (with PROFIBUS-DP): SEW recommends always supplying these units with 24 VDC at terminal X10:24
(VI24). This external 24 VDC power supply must be capable of supplying a continuous power of 50 W and a peak power (1 s) of
100 W.
The maximum total current which may be applied to the 24 VDC outputs X10:16 (VO24), X10:21 (DB) and X10:19 (DO2)
is Imax = 400 mA.
43
kVA
P Hz
Front view of MCF40A, MCF41A control unit
RUN
REF1
REF2
SC11
SC12
DI
DI2
DI4
DCOM
DGND
DO2
DB
DGND
1
3
AI11
AI21
SC11
AGND
SC12
DI1
DI
DI3
DI2
DI5
DI4
VO24
DCOM
DO1-C
DGND
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
19 20
21 22
REF1
AI12
17 18
BUS
FAULT
DO1-NO
PROFIBUS DP
X30
DB
DO1-NC
23 24
VI24
MCF40A X10
DO2
DGND
AI21
AGND
DI1
9 10
DI3
11 12
DI5
13 14
VO24
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
DO1-C
DO1-NO
DO1-NC
23 24
VI24
MCF41A X10
03381AXX
Figure 17: Front view of MCF40A, MCF41A control unit
44
kVA
P Hz
Front view of MCV/MCS40A, MCV/MCS41A control unit
RUN
REF1
REF2
SC11
SC12
DI
DI2
DI4
DCOM
X14
X15
ENCODER I/O ENCODER IN
DGND
DO2
DB
DGND
5
7
6
8
9 10
21 22
AI12
REF2
AI21
SC11
AGND
SC12
DI1
DI
DI2
9
DI5
DI4
DCOM
VO24
15 16
19 20
REF1
13 14
17 18
AI11
DI3
11 12
DO1-C
DO1-NO
X15
X15
ENCODER I/O ENCODER IN
PROFIBUS DP
X30
VI24
MCV40A X10
DGND
DO2
DB
DO1-NC
23 24
BUS
FAULT
DGND
AI11
AI12
AI21
AGND
DI1
9 10
DI3
11 12
DI5
13 14
VO24
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
DO1-C
DO1-NO
DO1-NC
23 24
VI24
MCV41A X10
03383AXX
Figure 18: Front view of MCV/MCS40A, MCV/MCS41A control unit
45
kVA
i
3.7
MOVIDRIVE compact MCH electronics data
P Hz
MOVIDRIVE compact
Setpoint processing and speed ramps
MCH40A
Version without fieldbus interface.
MCH41A
Version with PROFIBUS-DP interface.
Protocol option
Baud rate
Connection system
Bus termination
Station address
Name of the GSD file
DP identity number
PROFIBUS-DP acc. to IEC 61158

Automatic detection of baud rate from 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud
9-pin sub D connector, pin assignment to IEC 61158
not integrated, implement using suitable PROFIBUS plug with terminating resistors that can
be switched on
0...125, can be set using DIP switch
SEW_6003.GSD
6003hex (24579dec)
MCH42A
Version with INTERBUS fiber optic (FO) interface.
Protocol option
Baud rate
Connection system
INTERBUS to prEN 50254 (DIN 19258) with optically controlled FO interface

500 kbaud and 2 Mbaud, changeover via DIP switch
4 F-SMA plugs (2 remote bus input and 2 remote bus output)
Applies to all versions

Voltage supply
for setpoint input
Setpoint input n1
X10:1
X10:6
X10:2/X10:3
X10:4
Reference voltages for setpoint potentiometer
AI11/AI12: Voltage or current input, can be set with S11 and P11_, sampling interval 1 ms
Voltage input:
n1 = 0...+10 V or -10 V...0...+10 V
12 bits
Ri = 40 k (external voltage supply)
Ri = 20 k (supply from REF1/REF2)
(Differential input)
Operating mode AI11/AI12
Resolution
Internal resistance
Setpoint input n2
TF/TH input
REF1: +10 VDC +5 % / -0 %, Imax = 3 mA

REF2: -10 VDC +0 % / -5 %, Imax = 3 mA
Current input:
n1 = 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA
11 bits
Ri = 250
Analog input 0...10 V or optionally ( P120) TF/TH input

with response threshold at RTF 2.9 k 10 %
Internal setpoints

Time ranges of speed ramps

at n = 3000 rpm
1st ramp
t11/t21
2nd ramp
t12/t22
Stop ramp
t13/t23
Emergency ramp
t14/t24
Motorized potentiometert3
Up: 0.0...2000 s
Down: 0.0...2000 s
Up = down: 0.0...2000 s
Down: 0...20 s
Down: 0...20 s
Up: 0.2...50 s
Down: 0.2...50 s
The PROFIBUS-DP interface of the MOVIDRIVE MCH41A unit corresponds to the

state-of-the-art in PROFIBUS technology. The new, ground-breaking PROFIBUS-ASIC
technology has been used for these units.
The concept of the MCH41A PROFIBUS-DP interface is the same as the MOVIDRIVE
MD_60A option 'PROFIBUS fieldbus interface type DFP21A'. As a result, both PROFIBUS interfaces can be used with the same PROFIBUS project planning.
46
kVA
MOVIDRIVE compact
1)
X11:8
VO24: VOUT = 24 VDC, maximum current carrying capacity Imax = 200 mA
X12:6
VI24: VIN = 24 VDC -15 % / +20 % (range: 19.2...30 VDC) to EN 61131-2
Binary inputs
X11:1...X11:6
Internal resistance
P Hz
DI...DI5: Isolated (optocoupler), PLC-compatible (EN 61131), sampling interval 5 ms

Ri 3.0 k, IE 10 mA
+13 V...+30 V
-3 V...+5 V
Signal level
= '1' = Contact closed

= '0' = Contact open
To EN 61131
Function
X11:1
X11:2...X11:6
DI: With fixed assignment '/Controller inhibit'

DI1...DI5: Selection option Parameter menu P60_
Binary outputs1)
X12:1/X12:5
DB/DO2: PLC compatible (EN 61131-2), response time 5 ms
Signal level
'0' = 0 V
Function
Analog output
Relay output
Other electronics data
Auxiliary voltage output1)

Ext. voltage supply
Important: Do not apply external voltage!
X12:1
X12:5
DB: With fixed assignment '/Brake', Imax = 150 mA, short-circuit proof
DO2: Selection option Parameter menu P62_, Imax = 50 mA, short-circuit proof
X12:5
AO1: Menu P64_, resolution 8-bit, Imax = 20 mA (short-circuit proof)
X12:2/3/4
Function
'1' = +24 V
X12:2
X12:3
X12:4
DO1: Load capacity of the relay contacts Vmax = 30 VDC, Imax = 800 mA
DO1-C: Shared relay contact
DO2-NO: NO contact
DO2-NC: NC contact
System bus (SBus)
X10:7/10
X10:8/11
SC11/21: SBus high

SC12/22: SBus low
Motor encoder input1)
X15:

Hiperface encoders
TTL sensor
Selection option Parameter menu P62_
CAN bus to CAN specification 2.0, parts A and B, transmission

technology to ISO 11898, max. 64 stations, terminating resistor
(120 ) can be activated using DIP switches
Encoder power supply: +12 V, Imax = 180 mA

Output encoder
simulation or
input external encoder1)
X14:
Output encoder simulation:

Signal level to RS-422 (5 V TTL)
The number of pulses is as follows:
1024 pulses/revolution (Hiperface encoder
on X15)
as on X15: Motor encoder input (sin/cos
encoder or TTL sensor on X15)
Input external encoder (max. 200 kHz):

Hiperface encoders
TTL sensor
Encoder power supply: +12 V, Imax = 180
mA
Reference terminals
X10:5
X10:9/X11:9/X12:7
X11:7
AGND: Reference potential for analog signals n1 and n2 and terminals X10:1 and X10:6
DGND: Reference potential for binary signals, system bus (SBus), encoder and resolver.
DCOM: Reference potential for binary inputs X10:9...X10:14 (DI...DI5).
Permitted line cross section
only one core per terminal:

0.20...1.5 mm2 (AWG 24...16)
Use right-angled crimping pliers with 1.5 mm2 (AWG16)
1)
MCH40A (without fieldbus): The unit provides a current of Imax = 400 mA for the +24 V outputs (VO24, DB, DB2,
encoder supply). If this value is insufficient, a 24 VDC power supply unit must be connected to X10:24 (VI24). This external
24VDC power supply must be capable of supplying a continuous power of 50 W and a peak power (1 s) of 100 W.
MCH41A (with PROFIBUS-DP) or MCH42A (with INTERBUS FO): SEW recommends always supplying these units with
24VDC at terminal X10:24 (VI24). This external 24 VDC power supply must be capable of supplying a continuous power of 50 W
and a peak power (1 s) of 100 W.
The maximum total current which may be applied to the 24 VDC outputs X10:16 (VO24), X10:21 (DB) and X10:19 (DO2)
is Imax = 400 mA.
47
kVA
P Hz
Front view of MCH42A control unit
X14 Encoder I/O
Remote IN
X31 OUT
X15 Encoder IN
Remote OUT
X32 IN
Remote OUT
X33 OUT
X10
X12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Remote IN
X30 IN
1 REF1
2 AI11
3 AI12
4 AI21
5 AGND
6 REF2
7 SC11
8 SC12
9 DGND
10 SC21
11 SC22
X11
X11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UL
CC
BA
RD
TR
FO1
FO2
X10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DI
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DCOM
VO24
DGND
X12
V1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DB
DO1-C
DO1-NO
DO1-NC
DO2
VI24
DGND
MCH 42A
05294AXX
Figure 19: Front view of MCH42A control unit
48
kVA
MOVIDRIVE compact dimensions
3.8
P Hz
Dimensions, size 1 (0015...0040-5A3 and 0015...0037-2A3)

MCH: 161 (6.34)
MCF/MCV/MCS: 155 (6.10)
105 (4.13)
85 (3.35)
6
(0.24)
345** (13.58**)
315 (12.40)
82 (3.23)
300 (11.81)
54 (2.13)
*
02490AXX
Figure 20: Dimensions, size 1, in mm (in)

*
Power shield clamp
** Unit dimension with power terminals attached
Provide at least 100 mm (4 in) clearance above and below the unit to ensure adequate
cooling! No lateral clearance required; the units can be lined up side-by-side.
49
kVA
P Hz
Dimensions, size 2 (0055...0110-5A3 and 0055 / 0075-2A3)

MCH: 213 (8.39)
130 (5.12)
MCF/MCV/MCS: 207 (8.15)
120 (4.72)
32
(1.60)
6.5 (0.26)
*
335 (13.19)
315 (12.40)
300 (11.81)
105 (4.13)
02578AXX

*
Power shield clamp
50
kVA
P Hz
Dimensions, size 3 (0150...0300-503 and 0110 / 0150-203)

MCH: 233 (9.17)
200 (7.87)
MCF/MCV/MCS: 227 (8.94)
445 (17.52)
465 (18.31)
105 (4.13)
7
(0.28)
173 (6.81)
02579AXX
51
kVA
P Hz
Dimensions, size 4 (0370 / 0450-503 and 0220 / 0300-203)

MCH: 233 (9.17)
MCF/MCV/MCS: 227 (8.94)
502 (19.76)
522 (20.55)
280 (11.02)
140 (5.51)
7
(0.28)
160 (6.30)
02593AXX
Provide at least 100 mm (4 in) clearance above and below the unit. No clearance is required at the sides; the units can be lined up side-by-side.
Do not install any components which are sensitive to high temperatures within 300 mm
(11.81 in) of the top of the unit (e.g. contactors or fuses).
52
kVA
P Hz
Dimensions, size 5 (0550 / 0750-503)
590 (23.23)
610 (24.02)
140 (5.51)
7
(0.28)
280 (11.02)
160 (6.30)
330 (12.99)
02594AXX
Provide at least 100 mm (4 in) clearance above and below the unit. No clearance is required at the sides; the units can be lined up side-by-side.
Do not install any components which are sensitive to high temperatures within 300 mm
(11.81 in) of the top of the unit (e.g. contactors or fuses).
53
kVA
IPOSplus
P Hz
3.9
IPOSplus
Description
The IPOSplus positioning and sequence control system is integrated into every MOVIDRIVE inverter as standard. With IPOSplus, control functions and positioning tasks
can be performed either simultaneously or independently of one another.
The IPOSplus sequence control system makes it possible to run a user program, regardless of any encoder feedback or the selected control mode (VFC, CFC, SERVO).
In conjunction with encoder feedback (MCV, MCS, MCH), the IPOSplus positioning
control provides a high-performance point-to-point positioning capability. The IPOSplus
program is written using the MOVITOOLS software. Startup of the inverter, accessing
parameters and editing variables are possible either with the software or the DBG11B
keypad. (Note: The DBG11B can only be used for startup in VFC mode.)
Properties
With MCV/MCS/
MCH only
Program execution independent of encoder feedback and operating mode.
The user program is continued even if the unit develops a malfunction (troubleshooting is possible in the user program).
Two user programs can be run in parallel and independently of one another (task 1,
interrupt-capable, and task 2).
The user programs programmed in assembler can contain up to 800 program lines.
User-friendly and comprehensive control options for the inverter.
Extensive options for communication via system bus (SBus), RS-485, RS-232 and
fieldbus (direct communication with MOVIMOT is possible).
Processing of digital and analog input/output signals.
Positioning with selectable travel speed and positioning ramp.
Feedforward for position, speed and torque control loops with minimized lag error.
Two touch probe inputs.
LINEAR, SINUSOIDAL and SQUARED ramp functions.
Status and monitoring functions: Lag error monitoring, position signal, software and
hardware limit switches.
Eight possible reference travel types.
Possibility of changing the target position, travel speed, positioning ramp and torque
while movement is in progress.
'Endless positioning' is possible.
Override function.
Technical data
Max. program length of task 1 and task 2
54
approx. 800 program lines in total (assembler programming)
Command processing time per program line
Task 1: 1.0 ms; Task 2: 0.5 ms
Variables
512, of which 128 (0...127) can be stored to non-volatile memory; range of values: -231...+(231-1)
Touch probe inputs
2 inputs, processing time < 100 s
Sampling interval of digital and analog inputs
1...5 ms
Digital inputs/outputs
6 inputs / 3 outputs
Analog inputs/outputs
1 input (0...10 V, 10 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA)

1 input (0...10 V)
1 output (0...20 mA, 4...20 mA)
kVA
DBG11B keypad option
3.10
P Hz
DBG11B keypad option
Description
Equipment
The keypad is used for startup and for service. The basic version of MOVIDRIVE does
not have a keypad but can be upgraded.
Keypad
Language
DBG11B-08
DE/EN/FR/ES/PT (German/English/French/Spanish/Portuguese)
Part number
824 154 6
DBG11B-09
EN/IT/SV/DA/FI (English/Italian/Swedish/Danish/Finnish)
824 155 4
DBG11B-11
ES/DE/EN/FR/PT (Spanish/German/English/French/Portuguese)
824 156 2
DBG11B-12
SV/EN/IT/DA/FI (Swedish/English/Italian/Danish/Finnish)
824 157 0
DBG11B-13
EN/ES/DE/FR/PT (English/Spanish/German/French/Portuguese)
824 158 9
DBG11B-14
FR/IT/ES/PT/EN (French/Italian/Spanish/Portuguese/English)
824 248 8
Illuminated plain text display, five languages can be set.
Membrane keypad with 6 keys.
Selection between the quick menu, detailed parameter menu and startup menu in
VFC mode (CFC and SERVO startup is not possible with the DBG11B).
Can be plugged onto the inverter (TERMINAL option slot).
Connection possible via FKG11A extension cable (part number 822 101 4).
Enclosure IP40 (EN 60529)
Note
The DBG11B keypad option and the USS21A serial interface option are connected to
the same inverter slot (TERMINAL) and cannot therefore be used at the same time.
Functions
Displays of process values and status displays.
Status displays of the binary inputs/outputs.
Fault memory inquiry and fault reset.
Displaying and setting the operating parameters and service parameters.
Saving data and transferring parameter sets to other MOVIDRIVE units.
User-friendly startup menu for VFC mode.
Storing a curve for the electronic cam.
1.5 (0.06)
85 (3.35)
28.5 (1.12)
75 (2.95)
822 101 4
110 (4.33)
120 (4.72)
40 (1.57)1.
FKG11A2.
1800 (70.87)
DBG11B
12 (0.47)1.
Dimensions
3.
04030AXX
Figure 25: Dimensions, DBG11B and FKG11A, in mm (in)
1. Cut-out for the plug in the mounting plate

2. DBG11B-MOVIDRIVE communications cable
3. Holes for tapping screws 3.5 9.5 mm (0.14 0.37 in)
55
kVA
i
3.11
Serial interface option type USS21A (RS-232 and RS-485)
P Hz
Serial interface option type USS21A (RS-232 and RS-485)
Part number
822 914 7
Description
MOVIDRIVE can be equipped with isolated RS-232 and RS-485 interfaces. The RS232 interface is configured as a 9-pin sub D female connector (EIA standard) and the
RS-485 interface as a terminal connection. The interfaces are accommodated in a housing for plugging onto the inverter (TERMINAL option slot). The option can be plugged on
during operation. The transmission rate of both interfaces is 9600 baud.
Startup, operation and service are possible from the PC via the serial interface. The
SEW MOVITOOLS software is used for this. It is also possible to transfer parameter settings to several MOVIDRIVE drive inverters via PC.
Note
DBG11B and USS21A are connected to the same inverter slot (TERMINAL) and cannot
be used at the same time.
RS-232 interface
To connect a PC to the MOVIDRIVE USS21A option, use a commercial shielded serial

interface cable with a 1:1 connection assignment.
PC COM 1-4
USS21A
GND (ground)
3
2
TxD
3
2
RxD
max. 5 m (16.5 ft)

9-pin sub D connector (male)
9-pin sub D connector (female)

02399AEN
Figure 26: USS21A-PC connection cable (1:1 connection assignment)
RS-485 interface
You can network up to 16 MOVIDRIVE units for communications purposes (max. total
cable length 200 m (660 ft)) via the RS-485 interface of the USS21A. Dynamic terminating resistors are permanently installed, so do not connect any external terminating resistors.
Unit addresses 0...99 are permitted with multipoint connections. In this case, the 'point
to point connection' must not be selected in MOVITOOLS. The communications address
in MOVITOOLS and the RS-485 address of the MOVIDRIVE unit (P810) must be the
same.
0V5 - +
RS485
RS232
1.5 (0.06)
85 (3.35)
120 (4.72)
Dimensions
28.5 (1.12)
01003BXX
Figure 27: Dimensions, USS21A, in mm (in)
56
kVA
5 V encoder power supply option type DWI11A
3.12
P Hz
5 V encoder power supply option type DWI11A
Part number
822 759 4
Description
If you are using an incremental encoder with a 5 VDC encoder power supply, install the
5 V encoder power supply option type DWI11A between the inverter and the incremental
encoder. This option provides a regulated 5 VDC power supply for the encoder. This involves converting the 24 VDC power supply for the encoder inputs to 5 VDC by means of
a voltage controller. The supply voltage at the encoder is measured using a sensor line
and the voltage drop along the encoder cable is compensated.
Do not connect incremental encoders with 5 VDC encoder power supply directly to the
encoder inputs X14: and X15:. Such a connection would result in irreparable damage to
the encoders.
Note that in the event of a short circuit on the sensor line, the connected encoder may
be subjected to a voltage in excess of its permitted voltage.
Technical data
Recommendation
Option
5 V encoder power supply type DWI11A
Part number
822 759 4
Voltage input
+24 V to EN 61131-2, 18...30 VDC, Imax = 120 mA
Encoder power supply
+5 V (up to Vmax +10 V), Imax = 300 mA
Max. line length which can be connected
100 m (330 ft) total

Use a shielded twisted-pair cable (A and A, B and B, C and C) for
connecting the encoder to the DWI11A and the DWI11A to MOVIDRIVE.
Use prefabricated cables from SEW for connection of the encoder.
X2: Encoder
75 (2.96)
X1: MOVIDRIVE
Dimensions
DWI
5 (0.20)
22.5 (0.89)
68 (2.68)
73 (2.87)
01315BXX
Figure 28: Dimensions, DWI11A, in mm (in)
The DWI11A option is mounted on a support rail (EN 50022-35 7.5) in the switch cabinet.
57
kVA
i
3.13
MOVITOOLS software
P Hz
MOVITOOLS software
Part number
0918 5054
Description
MOVITOOLS is a program package comprising SHELL, SCOPE, IPOSplus Compiler

and LOGODrive. You can use MOVITOOLS to address either of the three ranges of
units MOVIDRIVE MD_60A, MOVIDRIVE compact and MOVITRAC 07.
SHELL can be used for starting up the drive and setting its parameters in a convenient fashion.
SCOPE provides extensive oscilloscope functions for diagnostics of the drive.
IPOSplus Compiler provides a convenient way of writing programs for applications

in a high-level language.
The assembler enables you to write programs directly on the machine.
LOGODrive allows you to write applications with graphics support.
Device status displays the status of the connected unit.
Various application modules, e.g. table positioning, are stored in MOVITOOLS in advance as IPOSplus programs and can be activated using units in application version.
MOVITOOLS is supplied on a CD-ROM and can also be downloaded from the SEW
homepage (http://www.sew-eurodrive.com). MOVITOOLS can be used with the following operating systems:
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000 (from version 2.60)
Windows Me (from version 2.60)
02719AEN
Figure 29: MOVITOOLS window
58
kVA
Application modules for MOVIDRIVE compact
3.14
MOVITO
P Hz
OLS
IPOSplus
In the past, it was necessary to write complicated control programs for the machine control in order to implement applications such as bus positioning. All movements were controlled by the machine control.
SEW MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters with integrated IPOSplus positioning and
sequence control systems are capable of controlling all movements themselves. The
control program runs in the inverter. The major advantages are:
Decentralized concepts can be implemented more easily.
Movements are controlled closer to the machine, i.e. response times are shorter.
The machine control does not have to perform as many functions.
Users do not have to go to the trouble of writing the IPOSplus control program themselves. SEW offers application modules for MOVIDRIVE compact units in application
version. The application modules form part of the MOVITOOLS software package.
Advantages
Scope of supply
and documentation
The application modules offer the following benefits:
Wide range of functions
User-friendly user interface
You only have to enter the parameters needed for the application
User-friendly application programs guide you through the process of setting parameters, i.e. there is no need for complicated programming
No programming experience necessary
Steep learning curve
The application modules form part of the MOVITOOLS software package and can be
used with units in application version (MOVIDRIVE compact...-0T). All manuals relating to the application modules are contained in the 'Additional Functions and Application
Modules' documentation package. You can order this documentation package from
SEW.
The individual manuals (files in PDF format) can also be downloaded from the SEW
homepage (http://www.sew-eurodrive.com).
59
kVA
P Hz
Positioning
The application modules for the 'Positioning' application are suited to all applications
which involve target positions being specified and then movement taking place to those
positions. The sequence of motion can be linear or rotational.
These include trolleys, hoists, gantries, rotary tables, swiveling devices and storage and
retrieval units for high-bay warehouses.
Linear positioning
In the case of linear positioning application modules, SEW distinguishes between

whether the movement records are managed in the inverter or in the master PLC.
Movement records
in the inverter
Table positioning with bus control
You can manage up to 32 movement records in the inverter with this application module.
A movement record is made up of the destination, speed and ramp. The destination to
which movement is to take place is selected using binary code, by means of virtual terminals (fieldbus, system bus). The application module comes with the following range
of features:
32 table positions can be defined and selected.
The travel speed can be selected as required for each positioning movement.
The ramp can be set separately for each positioning movement.
Software limit switches can be defined and evaluated.
Menu system for startup and diagnostics

Freely definable user travel units
Calculation of position resolution during positioning via the motor encoder
Graphical position display
This application module is suited to applications in which movement has to take place
to a limited number of different destinations only and that require the highest possible
degree of independence from the machine control.
There are four operating modes for controlling the machine:
Movement records
in the PLC
Jog mode: The machine can be moved manually.
Reference travel: The machine zero is determined automatically with incremental position measurement.
Teach-in: The stored position can be corrected without a programming unit.
Automatic mode: Automatic sequence controlled by the master PLC.
Positioning via bus
Extended positioning via bus
In these application modules, the movement records are managed in the PLC. The destination and travel speed are specified via the fieldbus or system bus. The application
modules come with the following range of features:
60
Any number of target positions can be defined and selected by means of a fieldbus/
system bus.
The travel speed can be selected as required via the fieldbus/system bus for each
positioning movement.
Software limit switches can be defined and evaluated.
Straightforward connection to the machine control.
kVA
P Hz

Freely definable user travel units
Jog mode with variable speed
Fieldbus monitor
These application modules are suited for applications in which movement has to take
place to a large number of different target positions.
There are three operating modes for controlling the machine:
Rotational positioning
Reference travel: The machine zero is determined automatically with incremental position measurement.
Automatic mode: Automatic sequence controlled by the master PLC.
Rotary axis
You can manage up to 16 movement records in the inverter with this application module.
A movement record is made up of the destination, speed and ramp. The destination to
which movement is to take place is selected using binary code, by means of the binary
inputs of the inverter or via virtual terminals (fieldbus, system bus). The position measurement can only take place with incremental encoders. The application module comes
with the following range of features:
16 table positions can be defined and selected.
The travel speed can be selected as required for each positioning movement.
The ramp can be set separately for each positioning movement.
Flying referencing when using a non-whole number ratio.
Positioning with position optimization or positioning with a predefined direction of rotation.
Pulse mode with 16 step widths.
External encoder for position detection possible.

Graphical position display
This application module is suited for applications in which rotational movements or similar endless movements are required. These include rotary tables, circular indexing tables, swiveling devices or cyclic belts.
The following operating modes are available for controlling the machine:
Reference travel: The machine zero is determined automatically.
Teach-in: The stored position can be corrected without a programming unit.
Positioning with position optimization
Positioning with a fixed direction of rotation
Cyclical operation
61
kVA
P Hz
Winding
Constant tension central winder (short: central winder)
In this application, the web tension is set for winding or unwinding using the setpoints,
the mechanical friction values, the winding diameter and the winding characteristics.
Control takes place either via the binary inputs of the inverter or the virtual terminals
(fieldbus, system bus). The application module comes with the following range of features:
Calculation of the reel diameter and the tensile force.
Material tear monitoring.
Material length counter.

Adjustable winding curve
Display of web speed and current diameter
This application module is suited for applications in which an endless material, e.g. paper, film, foam, textiles or sheet metal is wound for further processing.
There are four operating modes for controlling the machine:
Controlling
Teach-in: The speed-dependent friction values are determined automatically.
Automatic mode with constant torque.
Automatic mode with constant web tension.
Flying saw
In this application module, the sequence of motion is controlled according to specifications. The application module comes with the following range of features:
Cut edge protection or singling using the 'Draw gap' function.
Immediate cut function by manual interrupt.
Material length counter.

Display of the current cut length and the material speed
Display of the saw drive speed
This application module is suited for applications in which endless material has to be cut,
sawn or pressed, e.g. diagonal saws or flying punches.
There are two operating modes for controlling the machine:
62
Reference travel: The reference point of the machine is determined.
Positioning mode
Automatic mode
kVA
Braking resistor option type BW...
3.15
P Hz
General information
The braking resistors in the BW... series are adapted to the technical characteristics of
MOVIDRIVE drive inverters.
Flat-type braking
resistor
Shockproof (IP54)
Internal thermal overload protection (fuse which cannot be replaced)
Touch guard and mounting rail mounting available from SEW as accessories.
Perforated sheet cover (IP20) open towards the mounting surface.
The short-time load capacity of the wire and grid resistors is greater than in the flattype braking resistors ( power diagrams).
Wire and grid

resistors
SEW recommends protecting the wire and grid resistors against overload using a bimetallic relay. Set the trip current to the value IF in the table. Do not use any electronic or
electromagnetic fuses since even the brief excess currents which are still permitted may
cause them to trip.
The surfaces of the resistors get very hot if loaded with PN. Bear this aspect in mind
when selecting the installation location. As a rule, braking resistors are mounted on the
switch cabinet roof.
The performance data listed in the tables below show the load capacity of the braking
resistors according to their cyclic duration factor (cyclic duration factor = cdf of the braking resistor in % in relation to a cycle duration 120 s).
Parallel connection
Two braking resistors must be connected in parallel in the case of some inverter/resistor
combinations. In this case, the trip current must be set on the bimetallic relay to twice
the value of IF entered in the table.
Assignment to 400/500 V units (...-5_3)

Braking resistor type
Part number
Load capacity
at
100 % cdf
50 % cdf1)
25 % cdf
12 % cdf
6 % cdf
BW100-005
BW100-006
BW168
BW268
BW147
BW247
BW347
826 269 1
821 701 7
820 604 X
820 715 1
820 713 5
820 714 3
820 798 4
0.45 kW
0.60 kW
0.83 kW
1.11 kW
2.00 kW
0.6 kW
1.1 kW
1.9 kW
3.5 kW
5.7 kW
0.8 kW
1.4 kW
2.6 kW
4.7 kW
7.6 kW
1.2 kW
2.2 kW
3.8 kW
6.7 kW
10 kW2)
1.2 kW
2.2 kW
3.8 kW
7.2 kW
11 kW
2.0 kW
3.8 kW
6.4 kW
12 kW
14.4 kW2)
4.0 kW
7.6 kW
12.8 kW
14.4 kW2)
14.4 kW2)
Note the regenerative power limit of the inverter!

(= 150 % of the recommended motor power Technical Data)
Resistance value
RBW
Trip current (of F16)
IF
Type
100 10 %
0.8 ARMS
1.8 ARMS
68 10 %
2.5 ARMS
3.4 ARMS
47 10 %
3.5 ARMS
4.9 ARMS
Flat type
Wire resistor on ceramic core
Connections
Cable
Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm2 (AWG12)
Enclosure
IP54
IP20 (when mounted)
Ambient temperature
amb
-20...+45 C
Type of cooling
for MOVIDRIVE
7.8 ARMS
KS = Self-cooling
0015/0022
0015...0040
0055/0075
1) cdf = Cyclic duration factor of the braking resistor in relation to a cycle duration TD 120 s.
2) Physical power limit due to the DC link voltage and the resistance value.
63
kVA
P Hz

Part number
Load capacity
at
100 % cdf
50 % cdf1)
25 % cdf
12 % cdf
6 % cdf
BW039-012
BW039-026
BW039-050
BW018-015
BW018-035
BW018-075
821 689 4
821 690 8
821 691 6
821 684 3
821 685 1
821 686 X
1.2 kW
2.1 kW
3.8 kW
7.0 kW
11.4 kW
2.6 kW
4.6 kW
8.3 kW
15.3 kW
17.3 kW2)
5.0 kW
8.5 kW
15.0 kW
17.3 kW2)
17.3 kW2)
1.5 kW
2.5 kW
4.5 kW
6.7 kW
11.4 kW
3.5 kW
5.9 kW
10.5 kW
15.7 kW
26.6 kW
7.5 kW
12.7 kW
22.5 kW
33.7 kW
37.5 kW2)

Resistance value
RBW
IF
Type
39 10 %
4.2 ARMS
7.8 ARMS
18 10 %
11 ARMS
4.0 ARMS
Wire resistor
8.1 ARMS
14 ARMS
Grid resistor
Connections
Enclosure
IP20 (when mounted)
Ambient temperature
amb
-20...+45 C
Type of cooling
KS = Self-cooling
for MOVIDRIVE
0150/0220 and 2 parallel with 0370/0450
0110

Part number
Load capacity
at
100 % cdf
50 % cdf1)
25 % cdf
12 % cdf
6 % cdf
BW915
BW012-025
BW012-050
BW012-100
BW106
BW206
821 260 0
821 680 0
821 681 9
821 682 7
821 050 0
821 051 9
16 kW
27 kW
45 kW2)
45 kW2)
45 kW2)
2.5 kW
4.2 kW
7.5 kW
11.2 kW
19.0 kW
5.0 kW
8.5 kW
15.0 kW
22.5 kW
38.0 kW
10 kW
17 kW
30 kW
45 kW
56 kW2)
13 kW
24 kW
40 kW
66 kW
102 kW
18 kW
32 kW
54 kW
88 kW
112 kW2)

Resistance value
RBW
IF
15 10 %
28 ARMS
12 10 %
6.1 ARMS
12 ARMS
Type
M8 stud
Enclosure
42 ARMS
M8 stud
IP20 (when mounted)

amb
-20...+45 C
Type of cooling
for MOVIDRIVE
38 ARMS
Grid resistor
Connections
Ambient temperature
6 10 %
22 ARMS
KS = Self-cooling
0220
0300
0370...0750
64
kVA
P Hz
Assignment to 230 V units (-2_3)

Part number
Load capacity
at
100 % cdf
50 % cdf1)
25 % cdf
12 % cdf
6 % cdf
BW039003
BW039006
BW039012
BW039026
BW027006
BW027012
BW018015
BW018035
821 687 8
821 688 6
821 689 4
821 690 8
822 422 6
822 423 4
821 684 3
821 685 1
0.3 kW
0.5 kW
1.0 kW
1.7 kW
2.8 kW
0.6 kW
1.1 kW
1.9 kW
3.5 kW
5.7 kW
1.2 kW
2.1 kW
3.8 kW
5.9 kW2)
5.9 kW2)
2.6 kW
4.6 kW
5.9 kW2)
5.9 kW2)
5.9 kW2)
0.6 kW
1.2 kW
2.0 kW
3.5 kW
6.0 kW
1.2 kW
2.3 kW
5.0 kW
7.5 kW
8.5 kW2)
1.5 kW
2.5 kW
4.5 kW
6.7 kW
11.4 kW
3.5 kW
5.9 kW
10.5 kW
15.7 kW
25.6 kW3)

Resistance value
RBW
IF
39 10 %
2.0 ARMS
3.2 ARMS
27 10 %
4.2 ARMS
7.8 ARMS
2.5 ARMS
4.4 ARMS
Type
Wire resistor
Connections
Enclosure
18 10 %
4.0 ARMS
8.1 ARMS
Grid resistor
IP20 (when mounted)
Ambient temperature
amb
-20...+45 C
Type of cooling
KS = Self-cooling
for MOVIDRIVE
0015/0022
0015...0037
2 parallel with 0110

Part number
Load capacity
at
100 % cdf
50 % cdf1)
25 % cdf
12 % cdf
6 % cdf
BW018-075
BW915
BW106
BW206
821 686 X
821 260 0
BW012-025 BW012-050 BW012-100

821 680 0
821 681 9
821 682 7
821 050 0
821 051 9
7.5 kW
12.7 kW
22.5 kW
25.6 kW2)
25.6 kW2)
16.0 kW
27.0 kW
30.7 kW2)
30.7 kW2)
30.7 kW2)
2.5 kW
4.2 kW
7.5 kW
11.2 kW
19.0 kW
5.0 kW
8.5 kW
15.0 kW
19.2 kW2)
19.2 kW2)
10 kW
17 kW
19.2 kW2)
19.2 kW2)
19.2 kW2)
13 kW
24 kW
38.4 kW2)
38.4 kW2)
38.4 kW2)
18 kW
32 kW
38.4 kW2)
38.4 kW2)
38.4 kW2)

Resistance value
RBW
IF
18 10 %
15
10 %
14 ARMS
28 ARMS
Type
2.5 mm2
(AWG12)
M8 stud
Enclosure
19 ARMS
27 ARMS
38 ARMS
42 ARMS
M8 stud
IP20 (when mounted)

amb
-20...+45 C
Type of cooling
for MOVIDRIVE
10 ARMS
6 10 %
Grid resistor
Connections
Ambient temperature
12 10 %
KS = Self-cooling
0055/0075
0150 and 2 parallel with

0220/0300
65
kVA
P Hz
Touch guard
Touch guard is available for braking resistors in flat-pack design.

Touch guard
BS005
Part number
813 152 X
For braking resistor
BW100-005
a1
Grommet
b
b1
Mounting rail attachment

00524BEN
Figure 30: Dimensions, touch guard
All dimensions in mm (in):

Touch guard
BS005
Mounting rail
installation
66
Main dimensions
Fixing dimensions
Weight
a1
b1
kg (lb)
60
(2.36)
160
(6.30)
252
(9.92)
125
(4.92)
40
(1.57)
20
(0.79)
6
(0.24)
17.5
(0.69)
0.5
(1.1)
A mounting rail attachment is available from SEW as an accessory, part number 822
194 4, for mounting the touch guard on a mounting rail.
kVA
P Hz
DKB11A heat sink for brake resistors in flat-pack design

Part number
814 345 5
Description
The DKB11A heat sink for brake resistors in flat-pack design provides a space-saving
means of mounting braking resistors in flatpack design (BW100-005) below MOVIDRIVE size 1 (400/500 V units: 0015...0040; 230 V units: 0015...0037). The resistor is
inserted into the heat sink and attached using the supplied screws (M4 20).
3
4 x Spacer bolt
2)
4 x Pan head screw

M4 x 20
4 x M5 x 12
BW...-005
315 (12.40)
300 (11.81)
814 345 5
1)
BW...-003
9
(0.35)
185 (7.28)
30
(1.18)
85 (3.35)
10 (0.39)
105 (4.13)
PE screw M5
03826AEN
Figure 31: Dimensions, DKB11A heat sink for brake resistors in flatpack design in mm (in)
1) Mounting surface for the braking resistor

2) Retaining screws, not included in scope of delivery
67
kVA
P Hz
Dimensions,
BW...
M4
Steel grid resistor
x1
Flat-pack design
12
b
x2
(0.47)
Connecting cable, length 500 mm (19.69 in)
a
W
4 M4 threaded bushings,
types 1 and 2 are supplied
b
D
Wire-wound resistor
x1
c
b1
D
00523BEN
Figure 32: Dimensions, BW... braking resistors
Mounting position as required

BW...
Type
BW100-005
216 (8.50)
BW100-006
486 (19.13)
BW168
365 (14.37)
BW268
BW147
465 (18.31)
BW247
665 (26.18)
BW347
670 (26.38)
BW039-003
286 (11.26)
BW039-006
BW039-012
486 (19.13)
BW039-026
586 (23.07)
BW039-050
395 (15.55)
BW027-006
BW027-012
68
Main dimensions
486 (19.13)
H
80 (3.15)
Fixing dimensions
D
b/b1
15 (0.59)
204 (8.03)
60 (2.36)
92 (3.62)
426 (16.77)
64 (2.52)
x1
6 (0.24)
Hole
dimension
Weight
x2
kg (lb)
10 (0.39)
4 threaded
bushes
0.6 (1.3)
2.2 (4.9)
326 (12.83)
120 (4.72)
185 (7.28)
426 (16.77)
3.6 (8.0)
626 (24.65)
145 (5.71)
340 (13.39)
92 (3.62)
120 (4.72)
260 (10.24)
185 (7.28)
226 (8.90)
426 (16.77)
300 (11.81)
530 (20.87)
240 (9.45)
370 (14.57)
380 (14.96)
92 (3.62)
426 (16.77)
5.8 (0.23)
13.2 (29.1)
1.5 (3.3)
2.2 (4.9)
4.3 (9.5)
7.5 (16.6)
64 (2.52)
150 (5.91)
6.1 (13.5)
10 (0.39)
10.5 (0.41)
12 (26.5)
5.8 (0.23)
4.3 (9.5)
2.2 (4.9)
BW018-015
600 (23.62)
BW018-035
295 (11.61)
270 (10.63)
9.0 (19.8)
BW018-075
595 (23.43)
570 (22.44)
21 (46.3)
BW915
795 (31.30)
770 (30.31)
26 (57.3)
BW012-025
295 (11.61)
270 (10.63)
9.0 (19.8)
BW012-050
395 (15.55)
BW012-100
595 (23.43)
570 (22.44)
21 (46.3)
BW106
795 (31.30)
770 (30.31)
32 (70.5)
BW206
995 (39.17)
970 (38.18)
43 (94.8)
260 (10.24)
490 (19.29)
540 (21.26)
10 (0.39)
150 (5.91)
275 (10.83)
185 (7.28)
4.3 (9.5)
64 (2.52)
490 (19.29)
92 (3.62)
120 (4.72)
630 (24.80)
4.3 (9.5)
150 (5.91)
370 (14.57)
64 (2.52)
380 (14.96)
4.0 (8.8)
10.5 (0.41)
12 (26.5)
Line chokes option type ND...
3.16
kVA
P Hz
Line chokes option type ND...
To increase the overvoltage protection
To limit the charging current when several inverters are connected together in parallel on the input end with a shared
supply system contactor (rated current of line choke = total of inverter rated currents)
Line choke type

Part number
ND020-013
ND045-013
ND085-013
ND1503
ND200-0033
826 012 5
826 013 3
826 014 1
825 548 2
826 579 8
3 380 VAC -10 %...3 500 VAC +10 %, 50/60 Hz
Rated voltage
VN
Rated current1)
IN
20 AAC
45 AAC
Power loss at IN
PV
10 W
15 W
Inductance
LN
Ambient temperature
amb
85 AAC
150 AAC
25 W
65 W
0.1 mH
200 AAC
100 W
0.03 mH
-25...+45 C
Enclosure
IP 00 (EN 60529)
Modular terminal
blocks
4 mm2 (AWG 10)
Connections
Modular terminal
blocks
10 mm2 (AWG 8)
Modular terminal
blocks
35 mm2 (AWG 2)
M10 stud / PE: M8 stud

In rated operation (100 %)
0015...0075
0110...0220
0300...0450 and
MDR60A0370
0550/0750
With increased power (VFC, 125 %)
0015...0075
0110/0150
0220...0370
0450...0750
0015...0055
0075/0110
0150/0220
0300
0015...0037
0055/0075
0110/0150
0220/0300
MDR60A0750
Assignment to 230 V units (...-2_3)

With increased power (VFC, 125 %)
1) If more than one MOVIDRIVE is connected to a line choke, the total value of the rated currents of the connected units must not
exceed the rated current of the line choke!
Space for terminals (safe to touch)
c
a
H
00526BEN
Figure 33: Dimensions, ND... line chokes


Line choke
type
Main dimensions
W
Fixing dimensions
D
Hole dim.
Weight
kg (lb)
ND020-013
85 (3.35)
60 (2.36)
120 (4.72)
50 (1.97)
31 (1.22)
5-10 (0.20-0.39)
0.5 (1.1)
ND045-013
125 (4.92)
95 (3.74)
170 (6.69)
84 (3.31)
55-75 (2.17-2.95)
6 (0.24)
2.5 (5.5)
ND085-013
185 (7.28)
115 (4.53)
235 (9.25)
136 (5.35)
56 (2.20)
7 (0.28)
8 (17.6)
ND1503
255 (10.04)
140 (5.51)
230 (9.06)
170 (6.69)
77 (3.03)
8 (0.31)
17 (37.5)
ND200-0033
250 (9.84)
160 (6.30)
230 (9.06)
180 (7.09)
98 (3.86)
8 (0.31)
15 (33.1)
69
kVA
i
3.17
NF...-... line filter option
P Hz
To suppress interference emissions on the line side of inverters
Input filter type

Part number
Rated voltage
VN
Rated current
IN
Power loss
at INPV
Earth-leakage current at VN
NF009503
NF014503
827 412 6
827 116 X
NF018503
NF035503
827 413 4 827 128 3
NF048503
NF063503
NF085503
NF115503
NF150503
827 117 8
827 414 2
827 415 0
827 416 9
827 417 7
3 380 VAC -10 %...3 500 VAC +10 %, 50/60 Hz

9 AAC
14 AAC
18 AAC
35 AAC
48 AAC
63 AAC
85 AAC
115 AAC
150 AAC
6W
9W
12 W
15 W
22 W
30 W
35 W
60 W
90 W
< 25 mA
< 25 mA
< 25 mA
< 25 mA
< 40 mA
< 30 mA
< 30 mA
< 30 mA
< 30 mA
16 mm2
(AWG 6)
35 mm2
(AWG 2)
50 mm2
(AWG1/0)
95 mm2
(AWG4/0)
Ambient
temperature
amb
-25...+40 C
Enclosure
IP 20 (EN 60529)
Connections
L1-L3/L1-L3
4 mm2 (AWG 10)
PE
10 mm2 (AWG 8)
M5 stud
M5 stud
M6 stud
M6 stud
M8 stud
M10 stud
M10 stud

In rated operation
(100 %)
0015...
0040
0055/
0075
0110/
0150
0220
0300
0370/
0450
0550
0750
With increased power

(VFC, 125 %)
0015...
0030
0040/
0055
0075
0110
0150
0220
0300/
0370
0450
0550/
0750
Assignment to 230 V units (...-2_3)

In rated operation
(100 %)
0015/
0022
0037
0055/
0075
0110
0150
0220
0300
With increased power

(VFC, 125 %)
0015
0022
0037
0055/
0075
0110/
0150
0220/
0300
The effectiveness of input filters is restricted in IT systems.
70
kVA
P Hz
3
D
c
L3
L2
L1
LINE
LOAD
L3' L2' L1'
05233AEN
Figure 34: Dimensions, NF input filters

Input filter
type
NF009-503
NF014-503
NF018-503
NF035-503
NF048-503
NF063-503
NF085-503
NF115-503
NF150-503
Main dimensions
W
55 (2.16)
50 (1.96)
60 (2.36)
90 (3.54)
100 (3.93)
Fixing dimensions
D
80 (3.15)
20 (0.79)
195 (7.67)
225 (8.85)
240 (9.45)
255 (10.04)
100 (3.93)
260 (10.24)
330 (13.00)
140 (5.51)
155 (6.10)
30 (1.18)
60 (2.36)
65 (2.56)
5.5 (0.22)
kg (lb)
M5
0.9 (2.0)
1.1 (2.4)
1.7 (3.7)
295 (11.61)
M6
235 (9.25)
255 (10.04)
Weight
0.8 (1.8)
210 (8.27)
255 (10.04)
320 (12.60)
PE connection
180 (7.09)
275 (10.83)
315 (12.40)
Hole
dimension
6.5 (0.26)
M8
M10
2.1 (4.6)
2.4 (5.3)
3.5 (7.7)
4.8 (10.6)
5.6 (12.3)
71
kVA
Output choke option type HD...
P Hz
3.18
Output choke option type HD...
To suppress radiated interference from the unshielded motor cable. We recommend routing the motor cable through
the output choke with five loops. Less than five loops are possible if the cable has a large diameter. To make up for
this, two or three output chokes should be connected in series. Two output chokes should be connected in series if
there are four loops, and three output chokes in series if there are three loops.
Output chokes are allocated on the basis of the cable cross sections of the motor feeders. Consequently, there is no
separate allocation table for the 230 V units.
Output choke type
HD001
Part number
HD002
HD003
813 325 5
813 557 6
813 558 4
121 64 131 mm
(4.76 2.52 5.16 in)
66 49 73 mm
(2.60 1.93 2.87 in)
170 64 185 mm
(6.69 2.52 7.28 in)
50 mm (1.97 in)
23 mm (0.91 in)
88 mm (4.46 in)
15 W
8W
30 W
Weight
0.5 kg (1.1 lb)
0.2 kg (0.44 lb)
1.1 kg (2.42 lb)
For cable cross sections
1.5...16 mm2
(AWG 16...6)
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
16 mm2 (AWG 6)
Dimensions W H D
Inside diameter d
Max. power loss PVmax
b
H
00570CEN
Figure 35: Dimensions, HD... output chokes

Output choke
type
72
Main dimensions
Fixing dimensions
Inside
Hole dimension
HD001
121 (4.76)
64 (2.52)
131 (5.16)
80 (3.15)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
HD002
66 (2.60)
49 (1.93)
73 (2.87)
44 (1.73)
38 (1.50)
23 (0.91)
HD003
170 (6.69)
64 (2.52)
185 (7.28)
120 (4.72)
50 (1.97)
88 (3.46)
5.8 (0.23)
7.0 (0.28)
Output filter option type HF...
3.19
kVA
P Hz
Sine filter for smoothing the output voltage of inverters. They are used:
In group drives (several motor feeders in parallel); the discharge currents in the motor cables are suppressed.
To protect the motor winding insulation of non-SEW motors which are not suitable for use with PWM inverters and
could be damaged by voltage spikes in long motor feeders (> 100 m).
Output filters are only allowed to be used with 400/500 V units type MCF, MCV and
MCH in VFC operating modes. Do not use with 230 V units, do not use with type MDV
in CFC operating modes, do not use with type MCH in CFC or SERVO operating
modes and do not use with type MDS.
Output filters are not allowed to be used in hoists.
Output filter type
HF015-503
HF022-503
HF030-503
HF040-503
HF055-503
Part number
826 030 3
826 031 1
826 032 X
826 311 6
826 312 4
Rated voltage
Voltage drop at IN
3 380 VAC -10 %...3 500 VAC +10 %, 50/60 Hz1)
VN
< 6.5 % (7.5 %) at 400 V / < 4 % (5 %) at 500 V and fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz)
Rated throughput current2)IN 400 V

Power loss at IN
PV
4 AAC
6 AAC
8 AAC
10 AAC
12 AAC
3 AAC
5 AAC
6 AAC
8 AAC
10 AAC
35 W
55 W
65 W
90 W
115 W
0 mA
Emitted interference via unshielded

motor lead
Ambient temperature

Complies with EN 50081, parts 1 and 2
amb
0...+45 C (reduction: 3.0 % IN per K to max. 60 C)
Enclosure (EN 60529)
IP 20
M4 connection studs: 0.5...6 mm2 (AWG 20...10)
Connections
Weight
10 mm2 (AWG 8)
4.4 kg (9.68 lb)
For MOVIDRIVE MD_60A...-5_3

With increased power (125 %)
10.8 kg (23.76 lb)
0015
0022
0030
0040
0055
0015
0022
0030
0040
Output filter type
HF075-503
HF450-503
HF023-403
HF033-403
HF047-403
Part number
826 313 2
826 948 3
825 784 1
825 785 X
825 786 8
Rated voltage
Voltage drop at IN
3 380 VAC -10 %...3 500 VAC +10 %, 50/60 Hz1)
VN
< 6.5 % (7.5 %) at 400 V / < 4 % (5 %) at 500 V and fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz)

Power loss at IN
PV
16 AAC
90 AAC
23 AAC
33 AAC
47 AAC
13 AAC
72 AAC
19 AAC
26 AAC
38 AAC
135 W
400 W
120 W
200 W
0 mA
Emitted interference via unshielded

motor lead
Ambient temperature
90 W

Complies with EN 50081, parts 1 and 2
amb
0...+45 C (reduction: 3.0 % IN per K to max. 60 C)
Enclosure (EN 60529)
IP 20
IP 10
IP 20
Connections
10 mm2 (AWG 8)
35 mm2 (AWG 2)
25 mm2 (AWG 4)
Weight
10.8 kg (23.76 lb)
32 kg (70.58 lb)
15.9 kg (35.0 lb)
16.5 kg (36.3 lb)
23 kg (50.6 lb)
0075
0370/0450/
05503)/07503)
0110
0150/03003)
0220
0075
0110/02203)
0150
For MOVIDRIVE MD_60A...-5_3

With increased power (125 %)
0055
0300/0370/0450/
0550/0750
1) A reduction of 6 % IN per 10 Hz applies above fAN = 60 Hz for the rated throughput current IN.
2) Only applies to operation without UZ connection. For operation with UZ connection, observe the project planning instructions in the
MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual, Sec. 'Project Planning/Connecting the optional power components'.
3) Connect two HF... output filters together in parallel for operation with these MOVIDRIVE units.
73
kVA
P Hz
Dimensions, output filter HF...-503, in mm (in)
H
b
HF040/055/075-503
H
b
HF015/022/030-503
c
W
a
W
D
00527BEN
Figure 36: Dimensions, output filter HF015...075-503

Only the mounting position shown in the dimensions diagram is permitted
Main dimensions
Output filter type
Hole dimension
Fixing dimensions
HF015/022/030-503
80 (3.15)
286 (11.26)
176 (6.93)
265 (10.43)
HF040/055/075-503
135 (5.31)
296 (11.65)
216 (8.50)
70 (2.76)
283 (11.14)
Ventilation clearance1)
Top
Bottom
7 (0.28)
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
1) No clearance is required at the sides; the units can be lined up side-by-side.
HF450-503
a
W
D
03388BEN
Figure 37: Dimensions, output filter HF450-503

Only the mounting position shown in the dimensions diagram is permitted
Main dimensions
Output filter type

HF450-503
74
Fixing dimensions
Hole dimension
Ventilation clearance
Top
Bottom
465 (18.31)
385 (15.16)
240 (9.45)
436 (17.17)
220 (8.66)
8.5 (0.33)
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
kVA
P Hz
Dimensions, output filter HF...-403, in mm (in)

b
b1
a1
4
5
6
7
U
V
W
D
D1
00528BEN
Figure 38: Dimensions, output filter HF...-403
Fixing dimensions
Main dimensions
Type
HF023-403
HF033-403
HF047-403
Standard installation
D/D1
145
(5.71)
284
(11.18)
365/390
(14.37/15.35)
268
(10.55)
60
(2.36)
190
(7.48)
300
(11.82)
385/400
(15.16/15.57)
284
(11.18)
80
(3.15)
Crossways mounting position
Hole
dimen
sion
Ventilation clearance
a1
a2
At side
Top
Bottom
210
(8.27)
334
(13.15)
6.5
(0.26)
30 each
(1.18 ea)
150
(5.91)
150
(5.91)
75
kVA
i
3.20
Pre-fabricated cables
P Hz
Overview
SEW offers cable sets and prefabricated cables for straightforward and error-free connection of various system components to MOVIDRIVE. Specifically, these are:
1. Cable sets for DC link connection MDR MCF/MCV/MCS/MCH
2. Motor cables and extension cables for connecting CM motors to MCS and MCH
3. Motor cables for connecting DS/DY motors to MCS
4. Hiperface cables, resolver cables and extension cables (plug and terminal box versions) for CM/DS/DY motors
5. VR forced cooling fan cables and extension cables
6. Brake cables
7. Encoder cables for connecting the motor encoder to encoder input X15 of the MCV
basic unit or to 'X2: Encoder' of the 5 V encoder power supply type DWI11A
8. Encoder connection 'X1: MOVIDRIVE' of the DWI11A and X15 MCV basic unit
9. Encoder cables for connecting an external encoder or a control (encoder simulation
output) to X14 of the MCV/MCS basic unit
10.Encoder connection (MCV/MCS: master X14 slave X14)
It is necessary to differentiate between whether the cables are intended for fixed routing
or for use in cat tracks. The cables are pre-fabricated in 1 m steps for the required length.
BMK
brake rectifier
MOVIDRIVE
compact
MCS4_A
MCH4_A
MOVIDRIVE
compact
MCS4_A
to the
switch cabinet
MOVIDRIVE
MDR60A
1.
2. 4.
3. 4.
Figure 39: Cable sets for the MOVIDRIVE compact system
76
5.
6.
05297AEN
kVA
MOVIDRIVE
compact
MCV4_A
P Hz
MOVIDRIVE
compact
MCV4_A
X1: MOVIDRIVE
X2: Encoder
7.
8.
DWI
7.
05298AXX
Figure 40: Motor encoder connection
MOVIDRIVE
compact
MCV4_A
MCS4_A
MOVIDRIVE
compact
MCV4_A
MCS4_A
9.
X14: Master
X14: Slave
10.
05299AXX
Figure 41: Connection of external encoder and master/slave connection
77
kVA
P Hz
1. Cable sets for DC link connection MDR MCF/MCV/MCS/MCH

Description
SEW strongly recommends that the cable sets named below are used, because they
possess the relevant dielectric strength and are also color-coded. This is necessary because cross-polarity and ground faults could cause irreparable damage to the connected equipment.
The length of the cables restricts the DC link circuit connection to the permitted five
meters (16.4 ft), whilst they can also be cut to length by the customer for connecting several units. The lugs for connecting to the regenerative power supply unit and an inverter
are supplied with the cable set. Use commercial lugs for connecting additional inverters.
The inverters must then be connected to the regenerative power supply unit in a star
configuration. Use a busbar subdistributor if the DC link terminals of the regenerative
power supply unit are not sufficient.
Type of routing
Only fixed routing is possible.

Cable set type
DCP12A
DCP13A
DCP15A
Part number
814 567 9
814 250 5
814 251 3
0015...0110
0150...0300
0370...0750
For connecting MOVIDRIVE
2. Motor cables for connecting CM motors to MCS or MCH and extension cables
Motor cables
The cables are equipped with a plug for the motor connection and conductor end
sleeves for the inverter connection.
Number of cores and line cross section

2
Type of routing
For motor
41.5 mm (AWG 16)
199 179 5
CM..SM51
41.5 mm2 (AWG 16) + 31.0 mm2 (AWG 17)
199 189 2
CM..BR SB51
42.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
199 181 7
CM..SM52
42.5 mm2 (AWG 12) + 31.0 mm2 (AWG 17)
199 191 4
CM..BR SB52
44 mm2 (AWG 10)
199 183 3
44 mm2 (AWG 10) + 31.0 mm2 (AWG 17)
199 193 0
46 mm2 (AWG 10)
199 185 X
CM..SM56
46 mm2 (AWG 10) + 31.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
199 195 7
CM..BR SB56
410 mm2 (AWG 8)
199 187 6
CM..SM59
410 mm2 (AWG 8) + 31.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
199 197 3
CM..BR SB59

mm2
(AWG 16)
Part number
Fixed routing
Type of routing
CM..SM54
CM..BR SB54
For motor
199 180 9
CM..SM51
41.5 mm2 (AWG 16) + 31.0 mm2 (AWG 17)
199 190 6
CM..BR SB51
42.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
199 182 5
CM..SM52
42.5 mm2 (AWG 12) + 31.0 mm2 (AWG 17)
199 192 2
CM..BR SB52
41.5
78
Part number
44 mm2 (AWG 10)
199 184 1
44 mm2 (AWG 10) + 31.0 mm2 (AWG 17)
199 194 9
Cat track routing
CM..SM54
CM..BR SB54
46 mm2 (AWG 10)
199 186 8
CM..SM56
46 mm2 (AWG 10) + 31.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
199 196 5
CM..BR SB56
410 mm2 (AWG 8)
199 188 4
CM..SM59
410 mm2 (AWG 8) + 31.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
199 198 1
CM..BR SB59
kVA
Extension cables
P Hz
The cables are equipped with a plug and coupling for extending the CM motor cable.
Part number
Type of routing
For motor
41.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
199 549 9
CM..SM51
41.5 mm2 (AWG 16) + 31.0 mm2 (AWG 17)
199 199 X
CM..BR SB51
42.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
199 551 0
CM..SM52
42.5 mm (AWG 12) + 31.0 mm (AWG 17)
199 201 5
CM..BR SB52
44 mm2 (AWG 10)
199 553 7
44
mm2
(AWG 10) + 31.0
mm2
(AWG 17)
46 mm2 (AWG 10)
199 203 1
Fixed routing
CM..SM54
CM..SM56
46 mm2 (AWG 10) + 31.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
199 205 8
CM..BR SB56
410 mm2 (AWG 8)
199 557 X
CM..SM59
199 207 4
CM..BR SB59
410 mm (AWG 8) + 31.5 mm (AWG 16)

41.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Part number
Type of routing
For motor
199 550 2
CM..SM51
41.5 mm2 (AWG 16) + 31.0 mm2 (AWG 17)
199 200 7
CM..BR SB51
42.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
199 552 9
CM..SM52
199 202 3
CM..BR SB52
42.5
(AWG 12) + 31.0
mm2
(AWG 17)
44 mm2 (AWG 10)

2
199 554 5
2
Cat track routing
CM..SM54
44 mm (AWG 10) + 31.0 mm (AWG 17)
199 204 X
46 mm2 (AWG 10)
199 556 1
CM..SM56
46 mm (AWG 10) + 31.5 mm (AWG 16)
199 206 6
CM..BR SB56
410 mm2 (AWG 8)
199 558 8
CM..SM59
199 208 2
CM..BR SB59
410 mm (AWG 8) + 31.5 mm (AWG 16)
CM..BR SB54
199 555 3
mm2
CM..BR SB54
3. Motor cables for connecting DS/DY motors to MCS

Description
The cables are equipped with a plug for the motor connection and conductor end
sleeves for the inverter connection.

41.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Part number
Type of routing
For motor
198 669 4
DS56 / SM11
41.5 mm2 (AWG 16) + 20.75 mm2 (AWG 18)
198 670 8
DS56..B / SM11
41.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
198 683 X
DY71 / SM21
42.5 mm (AWG 12)
198 684 8
42.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
198 685 6
44 mm2 (AWG 10)
198 686 4
DY90/112 / SM34
46 mm2 (AWG 10)
198 687 2
DY90/112 / SM36
mm2
DS71 / SM22
Fixed routing
DY90/112 / SM32
(AWG 10)
198 688 0
DY112 / SM46
410 mm2 (AWG 8)
198 689 9
DY112 / SM41
46
79
kVA
P Hz

41.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Part number
Type of routing
For motor
198 741 0
DS56 / SM11
41.5 mm2 (AWG 16) + 20.75 mm2 (AWG 18)
198 742 9
DS56..B / SM11
41.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
198 734 8
DY71 / SM21
42.5 mm (AWG 12)
198 735 6
42.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
198 736 4
44 mm2 (AWG 10)
198 737 2
DY90/112 / SM34
46 mm2 (AWG 10)
198 738 0
DY90/112 / SM36
mm2
DS71 / SM22
DY90/112 / SM32
Cat track routing
(AWG 10)
198 739 9
DY112 / SM46
410 mm2 (AWG 8)
198 740 2
DY112 / SM41
46
4. Hiperface cables, resolver cables and extension cables

Hiperface cables for CM motors with plug connection:
Part number
Routing
199 488 3
199 320 8
Fixed routing
Cat track routing
For Hiperface encoder AS1H/ES1H in

motor
CM71...112
Line cross section
6 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
cos+: Red (RD)

cos-: Blue (BU)
sin+: Yellow (YE)
sin-: Green (GN)
D+: Black (BK)
D-: Violet (VT)
TF/TH/KTY+: Brown (BN)
TF/TH/KTY-: White (WH)
GND: Grey/pink + pink (GY-PK + PK)
US: Red/blue + gray (RD-BU + GY)
Manufacturer and type

Connection to
encoder / motor
MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A
Lapp, PVC/C/PP 303 028 1
Nexans, 493 290 70
With 12-pin round connector plug (Intercontec, type ASTA021NN00 10 000 5 000)
With 15-pin sub D plug
Extension cables for Hiperface cables (CM motors with plug connection):
Part number
Routing
199 539 1
199 540 5
Fixed routing
Cat track routing

motor
Line cross section
6 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
cos+: Red (RD)

cos-: Blue (BU)
sin+: Yellow (YE)
sin-: Green (GN)
D+: Black (BK)
D-: Violet (VT)

Connection to
80
CM71...112
encoder / motor
Hiperface cable
Nexans, 493 290 70
With 12-pin round connector plug (Intercontec, type AKUA20)
kVA
P Hz
Hiperface cables for CM motors with terminal box:

Part number
Routing
199 591 X
199 592 8
Fixed routing
Cat track routing

motor
CM71...112
Line cross section
6 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
cos+: Red (RD)

cos-: Blue (BU)
sin+: Yellow (YE)
sin-: Green (GN)
D+: Black (BK)
D-: Violet (VT)
Connection to
encoder / motor
Nexans, 493 290 70
With conductor end sleeves

Resolver cables for DS56 and CM motors with plug connection:

Part number
Routing
199 487 5
199 319 4
Fixed routing
Cat track routing
For RH1M resolver in motor
DS56, CM71...112
Line cross section
5 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
Ref.+: Pink (PK)

Ref.-: Gray (GY)
cos+: Red (RD)
cos-: Blue (BU)
sin+: Yellow (YE)
sin-: Green (GN)
TF/TH/KTY+: Brown + pink (BN + PK)
TF/TH/KTY-: White + black (WH + BK)
Lapp, PVC/C/PP
Connection to
resolver/motor
MOVIDRIVE compact MCS4_A
Nexans
Extension cables for resolver cables (DS56 and CM motors with plug connection):
Part number
Routing
199 542 1
199 541 3
Fixed routing
Cat track routing
DS56, CM71...112
Line cross section
5 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
Ref.+: Pink (PK)

Ref.-: Gray (GY)
cos+: Red (RD)
cos-: Blue (BU)
sin+: Yellow (YE)
sin-: Green (GN)

Connection to
Lapp, PVC/C/PP
resolver/motor
Resolver cables
Nexans
With 12-pin round connector plug (Intercontec, type AKUA20)
81
kVA
P Hz
Resolver cables for DY71...112 motors with plug connection:

Part number
Routing
198 827 1
198 812 3
Fixed routing
Cat track routing
DY71...112
Line cross section
4 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
Ref.+: Pink (PK)

Ref.-: Gray (GY)
cos+: Red (RD)
cos-: Blue (BU)
sin+: Yellow (YE)
sin-: Green (GN)
TF/TH: Brown (BN)
TF/TH: White (WH)

Connection to
resolver/motor
Lapp, Unitronic Li2YCY (TP)

Helukabel, Paar-Tronic-CY
Lapp, Unitronic FD CP (TP)

Helukabel, Super-Paar-Tronic-C-PUR
With 12-pin round connector plug (Framatome Souriou, type GN-DMS2-12S)

Resolver cables for DS56 and DY71...112 motors with terminal box:
Part number
199 589 8
Routing
199 590 1
Fixed routing
Cat track routing
DS56, DY71...112
Line cross section
5 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
Ref.+: Pink (PK)

Ref.-: Gray (GY)
cos+: Red (RD)
cos-: Blue (BU)
sin+: Yellow (YE)
sin-: Green (GN)
Lapp, PVC/C/PP
Connection to
resolver/motor
Nexans

5. VR forced cooling fan cables and extension cables

VR forced cooling fan cables:
Part number
199 559 6
Routing
Fixed routing
Cat track routing

3 1 mm2 (AWG 17)
Line cross section

Connection
199 560 X
VR forced cooling fan

Switch cabinet
With plug STAK 200

Extension cables for VR forced cooling fan cables:

Part number
199 561 8
Routing
Fixed routing
cables
82
Cat track routing

3 1 mm2 (AWG 17)
Line cross section

Connection
199 562 6

With plug STAK 200

with plug connection
kVA
P Hz
6. Brake cables
Part number
Routing
198 633 3
198 745 3
Fixed routing
Cat track routing

4 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Line cross section

Connection to
DY motor
Brake rectifier
With plug
3
7. Motor encoder cables, connection to MCV4_A, X15
Cables for TTL sensors and sin/cos motor encoders (TTL sensors and sin/cos encoders)
Part number
Routing
198 829 8
198 828 X
Fixed routing
Cat track routing
ES1T, ES2T and EV1T via option DWI11A and cable 814 344 7
ES1S, ES2S, EV1S, ES1R, ES2R and EV1R directly to X15 (MCV)
For encoder
Line cross section
4 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23) + 1 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
A: Yellow (YE)
A: Green (GN)
B: Red (RD)
B: Blue (BU)
C: Pink (PK)
C: Gray (GY)
UB: White (WH)
: Brown (BN)
Sensor line: Violet (VT)

Connection
To encoder/motor

Lapp, Unitronic FD CP (TP)

Helukabel, Super-Paar-Tronic-C-PUR

On ES1T, ES2T and EV1T, connect the violet conductor (VT) on the encoder to UB
On ES1S, ES2S, EV1S, ES1R, ES2R and EV1R,
cut off the violet conductor (VT) at the encoder end
To MCV4_A, X15 or DWI11A
Cables for HTL motor encoders (HTL encoders)

Part number
Routing
For encoder
198 932 4
198 931 6
Fixed routing
Cat track routing

ES1C, ES2C and EV1C
Line cross section
5 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23) + 1 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
A: Yellow (YE)
B: Green (GN)
C: Gray (GY)
UB: White (WH)
: Brown (BN)

Connection
To encoder/motor
To MCV4_A, X15
Lapp, Unitronic LiYCY

Helukabel, Tronic-CY
Lapp, Unitronic FD CP
Helukabel, Super-Tronic-C-PUR

83
kVA
P Hz
8. Encoder connection
This cable is intended for the following connections:
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV 'Encoder In' (X15) 5 V encoder power supply option type DWI11A
Part number
814 344 7
Routing
Fixed routing
For encoder with 5 V encoder power supply
ES1T, ES2T and EV1T via option DWI11A
Line cross section
4 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23) + 1 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
A: Yellow (YE)
A: Green (GN)
B: Red (RD)
B: Blue (BU)
C: Pink (PK)
C: Gray (GY)
UB: White (WH)
: Brown (BN)

Connection to
To DWI11A
X15
With 9-pin sub D socket

9. Cable for external encoder (TTL encoder) or encoder simulation, connection on X14
This cable is provided for connecting an external encoder or evaluation of encoder simulation on MCV/MCS4_A.
Part number
Routing
For encoder
ES1R, ES2R and EV1R or evaluation of encoder simulation
Line cross section
4 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23) + 1 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
A: Yellow (YE)
A: Green (GN)
B: Red (RD)
B: Blue (BU)
C: Pink (PK)
C: Gray (GY)
UB: White (WH)
: Brown (BN)
Switch mode: Violet (VT)

Connection
To encoder/to the
Evaluation unit
To MCV/MCS4_A, X14
84
815 354 X
Fixed routing


External encoder: cut off the violet conductor (VT) at the encoder end
Evaluation unit: jumper the violet conductor (VT) with the brown conductor (BN)
kVA
P Hz
10. Encoder connection MCV/MCS4_A X14: Master MCV/MCS4_A X14: Slave

This cable is provided for the master/slave connection of two MCV/MCS4_A units.
Part number
815 355 8
Routing
Fixed routing
For master/slave connection
X14: Master X14: Slave
Line cross section
4 2 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23) + 1 0.25 mm2 (AWG 23)
Conductor colors
A: Yellow (YE)
A: Green (GN)
B: Red (RD)
B: Blue (BU)
C: Pink (PK)
C: Gray (GY)
UB: White (WH)
: Brown (BN)

Connection to
X14: Master1)
X14: Slave1)

1) Important: Connect the socket marked 'Master' to X14: Master and the socket marked 'Slave' to X14: Slave!
85
P6..
P60.
Menu structure
P600
Parameters
Generally speaking, the parameters menu is only required for startup and when servicing is undertaken. Consequently, the basic unit of MOVIDRIVE is configured without a
keypad; it can be supplemented with the appropriate communications facility as an option.
There are various ways of setting MOVIDRIVE parameters:
With the optional keypad type DBG11B.
With the MOVITOOLS PC program (includes SHELL, SCOPE and IPOS programming). PC connection via the USS21A serial interface.
Using the serial interfaces, programming by the customer.
Using the fieldbus interfaces, programming by the customer.
Using IPOSplus, programming by the customer.
The latest version of the MOVITOOLS PC program can be downloaded from the SEW
homepage (www.sew-eurodrive.com).
4.1
Menu structure
1st Menu level
Main menu
2nd Menu level

Submenu
3rd Menu level

Parameters
Editing mode
[] []
CONTR. INHIBIT
CURR.:
0 A
0.. DISPLAY
VALUES
1.. SETPOINTS/
RAMP GENERATORS []
3.. MOTOR
PARAMETERS
[]
4.. REFERENCE
SIGNALS
5.. MONITORING
FUNCTIONS
6.. TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
7.. CONTROL
FUNCTIONS
8.. UNIT
FUNCTIONS
9.. IPOS
PARAMETERS
[] []
10. SETPOINT
SELECTION
11. ANALOG INP. 1
[]
(+/- 10 V)
12. ANALOG
INPUT AI2
13. SPEED
RAMPS 1
14. SPEED
RAMPS 2
15. MOTOR. POT.
16. FIXED
SETPOINTS 1
17. FIXED
SETPOINTS 2
[]
[] []
110
A11
111
A11
1
SCALING
0 mV [] 111
OFFSET [] A11
112
A11
REF. NMAX
OPERAT. MODE
113
A11
0 V
V-OFFSET
114
A11
0 /M
n-OFFSET
0 mV
OFFSET
115
1.89 ms
ETPOINT FILTER
02407AEN
Figure 42: Menu structure
86
P6..
Overview of parameters
P60.
P600
4.2
The following table lists all parameters with their setting range and the factory settings (in bold):
0__
DISPLAY VALUES page 91
08_
Fault memory
00_
Process values
080...084
Fault t-0...t-4
000
Speed
09_
Bus diagnosis
001
User display
090
PD configuration
002
Frequency
091
Fieldbus type
003
Actual position
092
Fieldbus baud rate
004
Output current
093
Fieldbus address
005
Active current
094...096
PO1...PO3 setpoint
006
Motor utilization 1
097...099
PI1...PI3 actual value
007
Motor utilization 2
1__
SETPOINTS / RAMP GENERATORS page 94
008
DC link voltage
10_
Setpoint selection
009
Output current
100
Setpoint source
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
01_
Status displays
101
Control signal source
TERMINALS
010
Inverter status
11_
Analog input AI1
011
Operational status
110
AI1 scaling
-10...-0.1 / 0.1...1...10
012
Fault status
111
AI1 offset
-500...0...500 mV
Ref. N-MAX
013
Active parameter set
112
AI1 operation mode
014
Heat sink temperature
113
AI1 voltage offset
-10...0...10 V
015
Mains ON operation time
114
AI1 speed offset
-5000...0...5000 rpm
016
Operating time (enabled)
115
Filter setpoint
0...5...100 ms, 0 = OFF
017
Electrical energy
12_
Analog inputs (optional)
02_
Analog setpoints
120
AI2 operation mode
020/021
Analog input AI1/AI2
13_/14_
Speed ramps 1 / 2
022
External current limit
130/140
Ramp t11/t21 UP CW
0...2...2000 s
03_
Binary inputs basic unit
131/141
Ramp t11/t21 DOWN CW
0...2...2000 s
030...035
Binary input DI...DI5
132/142
Ramp t11/t21 up CCW
0...2...2000 s
036
Status binary inputs
133/143
Ramp t11/t21 down CCW
0...2...2000 s
04_
Binary inputs option
134/144
Ramp t12/t22 UP=DOWN
0...2...2000 s
040...047
Binary inputs DI1...DI17
135/145
S pattern t12/t22
0...3
048
Status binary inputs
136/146
Stop ramp t13/t23
0...2...20 s
05_
Binary outputs basic unit
137/147
Emergency ramp t14/t24
0...2...20 s
050
Binary output DB
138
Ramp limit
NO = 0 / YES = 1
051/052
Binary output DO1/DO2
15_
Motorized potentiometer
NO FUNCTION
053
Status binary outputs
150
Ramp t3 UP
0.2...20...50 s
06_
Binary outputs option
151
Ramp t3 DOWN
0.2...20...50 s
060...067
Binary outputs DO1...DO17
152
Save last setpoint
ON / OFF
068
Status binary outputs
16_/17_
Fixed setpoints 1 / 2
07_
Unit data
160/170
Internal setpoint n11/n21
070
Unit type
161/171
-5000...750...5000 rpm
071
162/172
-5000...1500...5000 rpm
072
Option 1
073
Option 2
074
Firmware option 1
075
Firmware option 2
076
Firmware basic unit
077
Technology function
-5000...150...5000 rpm
87
P6..
P60.
P600
88
2__
CONTROLLER PARAMETERS page 107
42_
Speed setp./act. val. comp.
20_
Speed control
420
Hysteresis
0...100...300 rpm
200
P gain speed controller
0.1...2...32
421
Delay time
0...1...9 s
201
Time constant n-control.
0...10...300 ms
422
Signal = '1' if:
n nsetpt / n = nsetpt
202
Gain accel. feedforward
0...32
43_
Current reference signal
203
Filter accel. feedforward
0...100 ms
430
Current reference value
0...100...150 % IN
204
Filter speed actual value 0...32 ms
431
Hysteresis
0...5...30 % IN
205
Load feedforward CFC
0...150 %
432
Delay time
0...1...9 s
206
Sample time n-control.
1 ms = 0 / 0.5 ms = 1
433
Signal = '1' if:
I < Iref / I > Iref
207
Load feedforward VFC
0...150 %
44_
Imax signal
21_
Hold controller
440
Hysteresis
0...5...50 % IN
210
P-gain hold controller
441
Delay time
0...1...9 s
22_
442
Signal = '1' if:
I = Imax / I < Imax
228
Feedforward filter (DRS) 0...100 ms
5__
MONITORING FUNCTIONS page 117
3__
Motor parameters page 110
30_/31_
Limits 1 / 2
50_ 1 2
500/502
Speed monitoring 1/2
OFF/MOT/GEN/MOT& GEN
300/310
Start/stop speed 1/2
0...60...150 rpm
501/503
Delay time 1/2
0...1...10 s
301/311
Minimum speed 1/2
0...60...5500 rpm
52_
Mains OFF monitoring
0.1...2...32
Speed monitoring
302/312
Maximum speed 1/2
0...1500...5500 rpm
520
Mains OFF response time 0...5 s
303/313
Current limit 1/2
0...150 %IN
521
Mains OFF response
304
Torque limit
0...150 %
6__
TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT page 118
32_/33_
Motor compensat. 1/2 (asynchr.)
60_
320/330
Automatic adjustment 1/2 ON / OFF
600
Binary input DI1
CW/STOP
321/331
Boost 1/2
0...100 %
601
Binary input DI2
CCW/STOP
322/332
IR compensation 1/2
0...100 %
602
Binary input DI3
ENABLE/RAP.STOP
323/333
Premagnetizing time 1/2 0...0.1...2 s
603
Binary input DI4
n11/n21
324/334
34_ 1 2
Slip compensation 1/2
604
Binary input DI5
n12/n22
62_
340/342
Motor protection 1/2
ON / OFF
620
Binary output DO1
READY
341/343
35_ 1 2
Cooling type 1/2
FAN / FORCED
621
Binary output DO2
NO FUNCTION
Motor sense of rotation
64_
Analog output
350/351
Change direction of rota- ON / OFF

tion 1/2
640
Analog output AO1
ACTUAL SPEED
0...500 rpm
Motor protection
CONTROL.INHIBIT/EMERGENCY STOP
36_
Startup (only available in DBG11B)
641
Scaling AO1
-10...0...1...10
360
Startup
642
Operating mode AO1
OFF/10 V/0(4)..20 mA
4__
REFERENCE SIGNALS page 114
7__
Control functions page 122
40_
Speed reference signal
400
Speed reference value
0...1500...5000 rpm
Operating mode 1/2
401
Hysteresis
0...100...500 rpm
70_ 1 2
700/701
71_ 1 2
402
Delay time
0...1...9 s
403
Signal = '1' if:
n < nref / n > nref
YES / NO
710/711
72_ 1 2
Operating modes
VFC 1 / 2
Current at standstill
Standstill current 1/2
0...50 % Imot
Setpoint stop function
41_
Speed window signal
720/723
Setpoint stop function 1/2 ON / OFF
410
Window center
0...1500...5000 rpm
721/724
Stop setpoint 1/2
0...30...500 rpm
411
Range width
0...5000 rpm
Start offset 1/2
0...30...500 rpm
412
Delay time
0...1...9 s
722/725
73_ 1 2
413
Signal = '1' if:
INSIDE / OUTSIDE
730/733
Brake function 1/2
ON / OFF
731/734
Brake release time 1/2
0...2 s
732/735
Brake application time 1/2 0...0.2...2 s
Brake function
P6..
P60.
P600
74_ 1 2
740/742
0...1500...5000 rpm
86_ 1 2
860/861
Modulation
Skip window center 1/2
741/743
Skip width 1/2
0...300 rpm
862/863
PWM fix 1/2
ON / OFF
75_
Master-Slave function
864
PWM frequency CFC
4 / 8 / 16 kHz
750
Slave setpoint
MASTER-SLAVE OFF
87_
Process data description
751
Scaling slave setpoint
-10...0...1...10
870
Setpoint description PO1
CTRL. WORD 1
8__
UNIT FUNCTIONS page 139
871
SPEED
NO FUNCTION
Speed skip
PWM frequency 1/2
4 / 8 / 16 kHz
80_
Setup
872
800
Quick menu
ON / OFF
873
Actual value description PI1 STATUS WORD1
801
Language
DE / EN / FR
874
Actual value description PI1 SPEED
802
Factory setting
YES / NO
875
Actual value description PI1 OUTPUT CURRENT
803
Parameter lock
ON / OFF
876
PO data enable
804
Reset statistic data
NO / FAULT / KWH /
OPERATING HOURS
877
DeviceNet PD configuration PARAM+1PD
806
Copy DBG MDX
YES / NO
88_
Manual operation
807
Copy MDX DBG
YES / NO
880
Manual operation
81_
Serial communication
9__
IPOS PARAMETERS page 148
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
810
RS485 address
0...99
90_
IPOS Reference travel
811
RS-485 group address
100...199
900
Reference offset
-(231-1)...0...231-1 inc
812
RS485 timeout delay
0...650 s
901
Reference speed 1
0...200...5000 rpm
813
SBus address
0...63
902
Reference speed 2
0...50...5000 rpm
814
SBus group address
0...63
903
Reference travel type
0...7
815
SBus timeout delay
0...650 s
904
Reference travel to zero

pulse
Yes / No
816
SBus baud rate
125/250/500/1000 kB
91_
IPOS Travel parameter
817
SBus synchronization ID
0...1023
910
Gain X controller
0.1...0.5...32
818
CAN synchronization ID
0...1...2047
911
Positioning ramp 1
0...1...20 s
819
Fieldbus timeout delay
0...0.5...650 s
0...1...20 s
82_ 1 2
820/821
Brake operation
4-quadrant operation 1/2
83_
Fault response
ON / OFF
EMERG.STOP/FAULT
912
Positioning ramp 2
913
Travel speed CW
0...1500...5000 rpm
914
Travel speed CCW
0...1500...5000 rpm
915
Speed feedforward
-199.99...0...100
...199.999 %
LINEAR/SINE/SQUARED
830
Response EXT. FAULT
916
Ramp type
831
Response FIELDBUS TIME- RAPID STOP/FAULT

OUT
92_
IPOS Monitoring
832
Response MOTOR OVERLOAD
EMERG.STOP/FAULT
920
SW limit switch CW
-(231-1)...0...231-1 inc
833
Response RS485 TIMEOUT RAPID STOP/WARNG
921
SW limit switch CCW
-(231-1)...0...231-1 inc
834
Response DRS LAG ERROR EMERG.STOP/FAULT
922
Position window
0...50...32767 inc
835
Response TF sensor SIGNAL
NO RESPONSE
923
Lag error window
0...5000...231-1 inc
836
Response SBus TIMEOUT
EMERG.STOP/FAULT
84_
Reset response
840
Manual reset
93_
IPOS Special functions
930
Override
ON / OFF
YES / NO
931
CTRL word Task 1
START / STOP
932
CTRL word Task 2
START / STOP
841
Auto reset
ON / OFF
842
Restart time
1...3...30 s
85_
Scaling speed actual value
850
Scaling factor numerator
1...65535
851
Scaling factor denominator
1...65535
852
User dimension
1 rpm
89
P6..
P60.
P600
94_
IPOS Encoder
940
IPOS variables edit
ON / OFF
Source actual position
MOTOR ENC. (X15)/

EXTERN.ENC (X14)/
ABSOL.ENC. (DIP)
942
Encoder factor numerator
1...32767
943
Encoder factor denominator 1...32767
944
Encoder scaling ext.

encoder
1/2/4/8/16/32/64
TTL / SIN/COS / HIPERFACE
941
90
945
Encoder type (X14)
95_
DIP
950
Encoder type
NO ENCODER
951
Counting direction
NORMAL / INVERTED
952
Cycle frequency
1...200 %
953
Position offset
-(231-1)...0...231-1 inc
954
Zero offset
-(231-1)...0...231-1 inc
955
Encoder scaling
1/2/4/8/16/32/64
96_
IPOS Modulo Function
960
Modulo function
OFF/SHORT/CW/CCW
961
Modulo numerator
0...231
962
Modulo denominator
0...231
963
Modulo encoder resolution 0...4096...20000
P6..
Explanation of the parameters
P60.
P600
4.3

The parameters are explained below. The parameters are divided into 10 groups. The
names of the parameters correspond to their representation in the MOVITOOLS\SHELL
PC program. The factory setting is underlined in each case.
Symbols
The following symbols are used to assist understanding:

Parameters which can be switched over, i.e. they are available in parameter sets 1 and
2.
Parameters which can only be changed with INHIBITED inverter status (= output stage
at high resistance).
AUTO
Parameter is automatically changed by the startup function.
PARAMETER GROUP 0__, DISPLAY VALUES

This group of parameters contains information about process values and status conditions of the basic unit
and the installed options. Furthermore, the fault memory and the fieldbus parameters can be called up.
00_
Process values
000
Speed [rpm]
Resolution with DBG11B: 1 rpm; with MOVITOOLS\SHELL: 0.2 rpm
The speed is established by taking the rated speed and the set slip compensation in
VFC mode without an encoder connection. The speed is established from the encoder or resolver signals and displayed when there is an encoder connection.
001
User display [text]

Speed value weighted by the scaling factors ( P850/P851) in the user dimension
( P852).
002
Frequency [Hz]
Output frequency of the inverter.
003
Actual position [inc] (4096 increments/motor revolution)

Position of the drive as a value in increments observing the signs in the range
0...231-1 inc (with encoder connection). The value is zero without an encoder connection.
004
Output current [%In]

Apparent current in the range 0...200 % of the rated unit current.
005
Active current [%In]

Active current in the range 0...200 %IN. The displayed value is positive when the
torque is in the positive sense of rotation; the displayed value is negative when the
torque is in the negative sense of rotation.
006
Motor utilisation 1 [%] (applies to parameter set 1)
007
Motor utilisation 2 [%] (applies to parameter set 2)

Parameters P006 and P007 show the thermal utilisation of the connected motor in
the range 0...200 % ( P340/P341).
008
DC link voltage [V]
009
Output current [A]

Apparent current, displayed in AAC.
91
P6..
P60.
P600
01_
Status displays
010
Inverter status
Status of the unit output stage (INHIBITED, ENABLED).
011
Operational status
The following operational states are possible:
24 V OPERATION, CONTROLLER INHIBIT, NO ENABLE, CURRENT AT STANDSTILL, ENABLE (VFC), ENABLE (N-CONTROL), TORQUE OPERATION, HOLD
CONTROL, FACTORY SETTING, LIMIT SWITCH, TECHNOLOG.OPTION, FAULT,
REFERENCE MODE, FLYING START.
012
Fault status
Fault number and fault in plain text. The operation LED V1 lights up red to indicate a
fault.
013

Parameter set 1 or 2.
014
Heat sink temperature [C]

Heat sink temperature of the inverter in the range -40...0...125 C.
015
Mains ON operation time [h]

Total number of hours for which the inverter has been connected to the mains or a
24 VDC external supply. Storage cycle every 15 min.
016
Operating time (enabled) [h]

Total number of hours for which the inverter has been at ENABLE operating status.
Storage cycle every 15 min.
017
Electrical energy [kWh]

Cumulated electrical watt-hours used by the motor. Storage cycle every 15 min.
02_
Analog setpoints (020...022)
020/021
Analog input AI1 [V] / Analog input AI2 [V]

Voltage (0...10 V) at analog input AI1 (020) and at the optional analog input AI2 (021).
If P112 'AI1 operation mode' is set to 'N-MAX, 0(4)...20mA' and S11 = ON, P020 displays 0(1)...5 V = 0(4)...20 mA.
022
External current limit [%]

If analog input AI2 is set to the '0..10V I-limit' operation mode ( P120, 0...10 V =
0...100 %), 022 displays which external current limit is in effect.
03_
Binary inputs basic unit (030...035)
04_
Binary inputs option (040...047)
05_
Binary outputs basic unit (050...052)
06_
Binary outputs option (060...067)

Status ('0' or '1') of the binary inputs/outputs and programmed function (menu selection P6__). Note that binary input DI (030) is fixed at /CONTROLLER INHIBIT
and binary output DB (050) is fixed at /BRAKE in the programming. They cannot
be reprogrammed.
92
P6..
P60.
P600
07
Unit data (070...076)

Unit type, rated unit current, firmware part number, type (standard or application version).
08_
Fault memory (Fault t-0...t-4)

There are 5 fault memories (t-0...t-4). The faults are stored in a chronological sequence with the most recent fault event being held in fault memory t-0. If there are
more than 5 faults, the fault event of longest standing, stored in t-4, is deleted (fault
response P83_).
080...084
Faults which have occurred t-0...t-4.
At the time of the fault, the following information is stored and can be displayed using
P080...P084 in the event of a fault:
Status ('0' or '1') of the binary inputs/outputs, operational status of the inverter, inverter status, heat sink temperature [C], speed [rpm], output current [%In], active current
[%], unit utilization [%], DC link voltage [V], mains on operation time [h], operating
time (enabled) [h], parameter set [1/2] and motor utilization 1 and 2 [%].
09_
Bus diagnostics
090
Set process data word configuration.
091
Installed fieldbus type

CAN, PROFIBUS FMS/DP, PROFIBUS DP, INTERBUS, INTERBUS with FO, DeviceNet, CAN, CANopen, NO FIELDBUS
092
Active baud rate.
093
Address of the inverter on the fieldbus.
094...096
Process data setpoints from the fieldbus master.
097...099
Process data actual values to the fieldbus master.

P87_ 'Process data description' for the meaning of the process data.
93
P6..
P60.
P600
PARAMETER GROUP 1, SETPOINTS / RAMP GENERATORS

10_
Setpoint selection
100
Setpoint source
This parameter is used for setting the source from which the inverter obtains its setpoint.
BIPOL./FIX.SETPT
The setpoint comes from the analog inputs (AI1/AI2) or the fixed setpoints (P16_), if
these are selected via a binary input ( P60_/P61_). The setpoints are processed
as signed setpoints. A positive setpoint causes CW rotation; a negative setpoint produces CCW rotation.
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
The setpoint is provided by the analog inputs or the fixed setpoints. Negative analog
setpoints result in a setpoint of zero. The fixed setpoints are processed in accordance with their value. The direction of rotation is specified using binary inputs ( P
60_).
RS-485
The setpoint comes from the RS-485 interface.
FIELDBUS
The setpoint comes from the fieldbus interface.
MOTOR POT ( P15_)
The setpoint is defined by the internal motor potentiometer. To enable this, one binary input must be programmed to MOTOR.POT. UP and another binary input to MOTOR.POT. DOWN, and the binary inputs must be activated accordingly. The direction of rotation is specified by the clockwise/stop and counterclockwise/stop binary
inputs.
MOTOR.POT.+ANALOG1 ( P15_)
The setpoint is defined by the total of the motorised potentiometer and the setpoint
selection at analog input AI1. The analog setpoint is processed as a signed setpoint.
nmin takes effect if the total is negative. The direction of rotation is specified using binary inputs. Also, the settings of AI1 operation mode apply ( P112).
FIXED SETPOINT+ANALOG1 ( P16_)
The setpoint is defined by the total of the selected fixed setpoint and the setpoint selection at analog input AI1. The fixed setpoint is processed without its sign (= according to its value) and the analog setpoint is processed as a signed setpoint. nmin is in
effect if the total is negative or if no fixed setpoint is selected. The direction of rotation
is specified using binary inputs.
FIXED SETPOINTx ANALOG1 ( P16_)
The value at analog input AI1 serves as the evaluation factor (0...10 V = 0...100 %)
for the selected fixed setpoint. The fixed setpoint is processed without its sign (= according to its value). nmin is in effect if the voltage at analog input AI1 is negative or
if no fixed setpoint is selected. The direction of rotation is specified using binary inputs.
MASTER SBus ( P75_)
The setpoint comes from the master in master/slave mode via the system bus.
MASTER RS-485 ( P75_)
The setpoint comes from the master in master/slave mode via the RS-485 interface.
SBus ( IPOSplus manual)
The setpoint selection is made via the system bus.
94
P6..
P60.
P600
101

This parameter sets the source from which the inverter obtains its control commands
(CONTROLLER INHIBIT, ENABLE, CW, CCW, etc.). Control via IPOSplus is taken into
account regardless of P101.
TERMINALS
Control is via the binary inputs.
RS-485
Control is via the RS-485 interface and the binary inputs.
FIELDBUS
Control is via the fieldbus and the binary inputs.
SBus
Control is via the system bus and the binary inputs.
P100 and P101 can also be used for selecting a communications port as the setpoint or
control signal source. However, the interfaces are not automatically deactivated with
these parameters because the drive inverter must remain ready to receive via all interfaces all the time.
If the drive inverter is in 't = Timeout active' status, please check the timeout times of
parameters P812, P815 and P819 and, if necessary, switch off timeout monitoring by
entering 0 s or 650 s.
95
P6..
P60.
P600
11_
Analog input AI1
110
AI1 scaling
Setting range: -10...0...1...10
The slope of the setpoint characteristic is defined. When AI1 scaling = 1 and the input
voltage VE is 10 V, the setpoint is defined as 3000 rpm or nmax depending on the
set operating mode of analog input AI1 ( P112).
n
nmax
3000 rpm
-1
nmax/2
1500 rpm
-2
10
-10
-0.5
0.5
-0.1
0.1
VI
-nmax/2
-1500 rpm
0.1
-0.1
0.5
-0.5
1
-nmax
-3000 rpm
-1
2
-10V
10
-10
-5V
-2
5V
10V
01259BEN
Figure 43: Slope of the setpoint characteristic
Only the 1st quadrant can be used with a unipolar setpoint source ( P100); negative
setpoint selections then produce the setpoint zero. P110 does not have any effect if current input is set in the AI1 operation mode ( P112).
111
AI1 offset compensation [mV]

Setting range: -500...0...500 mV
When the setpoint selection is made by an external controller, it is possible to compensate for a fault voltage present at analog input AI1 when the setpoint selection is
zero. The setting of this parameter causes the co-ordinate zero point in Figure 43 to
be calibrated. This setting is in effect in all AI1 operating modes.
AI1
+
P111
P110
01292BXX
Figure 44: Effect of the AI1 offset
96
P6..
P60.
P600
112
AI1 operation mode

The selection for the AI1 operating mode differentiates between various characteristic
curves and voltage/current input.
Ref. N-MAX
Voltage input with reference nmax ( P302/P312). The characteristic can be adapted
with AI1 scaling ( P110). AI1 voltage offset ( P113) and AI1 speed offset (
P114) do not have any effect.
Ref. 3000 rpm
Voltage input with reference 3000 rpm. The characteristic can be adapted with AI1
scaling. AI1 voltage offset and AI1 speed offset do not have any effect.
U-Off., N-MAX
Voltage input with reference nmax. The characteristic can be adapted with AI1 voltage
offset. AI1 scaling and AI1 speed offset do not have any effect.
N-Off., N-MAX
Voltage input with reference nmax. The characteristic can be adapted with AI1 speed
offset. AI1 scaling and AI1 voltage offset do not have any effect.
Expert charact.
There is a free choice of reference between setpoint voltage and speed. The characteristic can be adapted with AI1 scaling (reference 3000 rpm), AI1 voltage offset and AI1
speed offset ( Figure 49). The following structural diagram shows how the speed setpoint is created from the expert characteristic.
02162BEN
Figure 45: 'Expert characteristic' structural diagram
N-MAX, 0-20mA
Current input 0...20 mA = 0...nmax, no setting possibilities (P110 ineffective). Set the
internal load (250 ) 'S11 = ON'.
N-MAX, 4-20mA
Current input 4...20 mA = 0...nmax, no setting possibilities (P110 ineffective). Set the
internal load (250 ) 'S11 = ON'.
97
P6..
P60.
P600
113
AI1 voltage offset [V]

Setting range: -10...0...10 V
The zero passage of the setpoint characteristic can be moved along the UE axis.
n
nmax
P302/P312
Reference point
for positive offset
(P113)
V offset
-7.5V
-5V
5V
7.5V
VI
Reference point
for negative offset
-nmax
P302/P312
-10V
-8V
-6V
-4V
-2V
0V
2V
4V
6V
8V
10V
01260BEN
Figure 46: AI1 voltage offset
98
P6..
P60.
P600
114
AI1 speed offset [rpm]

Setting range: -5000...0...5000 rpm
The zero passage of the setpoint characteristic can be moved along the n axis.
01261BEN
Figure 47: AI1 speed offset
115
Filter setpoint [ms]

Setting range: T = 0...5...100 ms (0 = filter setpoint off)
The speed ramp is filtered. This can be used for dampening stepped setpoint selections, e.g. from external controllers, or interference pulses at the analog input. Also
effective in torque control.
01265BEN
Figure 48: Effect of the setpoint filter
99
P6..
P60.
P600
Sample expert characteristics (P112 = Expert charact.):

There is a free choice of reference between setpoint voltage and speed in the expert
characteristic. Set parameter P100 'Setpoint source' to 'BIPOL./FIX.SETPT' in order to
exploit the possibilities of the expert characteristic to the full.
One point on the characteristic (marked by o in Figure 49) is specified by AI1 voltage
offset and AI1 speed offset, then the slope is specified with AI1 scaling. Reference 3000
rpm always applies to scaling with the expert characteristic.
The speed range is restricted by P302/P312 'Maximum speed 1/2'. P302 is set to 4000
rpm. Setting the maximum speed does not alter the slope.
The voltage value of the x-axis must be converted to a speed value for calculating the
slope triangulation function y/x = slope = setting value for P110 'Scaling'. The following applies: 10 V = 3000 rpm.
[rpm]
5500
P114
5000
nmax = 4
4000
x4
3000
2000
y2
y4
1000
x2
-1000
VI
P113
3
-2000
1
-3000
-nmax = 2
-4000
-5000
-5500
-10V
-8V
-6V
-4V
-2V 0V
2V
4V
6V
8V
10V
01264CEN
Figure 49: Samples of expert characteristics with P100 'Setpoint source' = 'BIPOL./
FIX.SETPT'
The following slope triangulation functions are calculated for characteristic curves 2 and
4 in Figure 49 below. This determines the settings for P110 'Scaling'.
Char. curve 2: y2 = 2500 rpm, x2 = 6 V = 1800 rpm, y2/x2 = 2500/1800 = 1.39
Char. curve 4: y4 = -3000 rpm, x4 = 8 V = 2400 rpm, y4/x4 = -3000/2400 = -1.25
The expert characteristics displayed in Figure 49 are created as follows:
Char.
100
P113
P114
P110
AI1 scaling (slope)
500
1.39
1500
3000
-1.25
P6..
P60.
P600
The expert characteristic can also be used with P100 'Setpoint source = UNIPOL/
FIX.SETPT'. The direction of rotation is then specified using binary inputs. The expert
characteristic is mirrored on the x-axis. The section below the x-axis causes the speed
setpoint to be 0. If the direction of rotation 'CW' is specified, then movement is only possible at speeds in the range 0...nmax, while the range 0...-nmax applies if the direction of
rotation 'CCW' is specified. Figure 50 shows the expert characteristics from Figure 49
with the setting P100 'Setpoint source = UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT'.
02143BEN
Figure 50: Samples of expert characteristics with P100 'Setpoint source' = 'UNIPOL/
FIX.SETPT'
The expert characteristics displayed in Figure 49 are created as follows:

P113
P114
P110
AI1 scaling (slope)
500
1.39
1500
3000
-1.25
Char.
101
P6..
P60.
P600
Expert characteristic with current setpoints:

Voltage signals are required at the AI11/AI12 analog input for the expert characteristic
function. Switch S11 (changeover I signal V signal) must be set to ON and the current
signal routed to AI11 if an impressed current of 0(4)...20 mA is available as the setpoint.
The internal load (250 ) converts the 0(4)...20 mA setpoints into 0(1)...5 V voltage signals.
02165BEN
Figure 51: Samples of expert characteristics with current setpoints
You have to set the expert characteristic as follows if you want to achieve speeds of
1000...4000 rpm, for example, with 0(4)...20 mA:
for 0...20 mA:
P110 = 2
P113 = 0 V
P114 = 1000 rpm
P302 (nmax) = 4000 rpm
for 4...20 mA:
P110 = 2.5
P113 = 1 V
P114 = 1000 rpm
P302 (nmax) = 4000 rpm
Set P100 'Setpoint source' to 'UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT'. The direction of rotation is then

specified using binary inputs.
102
P6..
P60.
P600
12_
Analog inputs AI2
120
AI2 operation mode (optional)

Analog input AI2 is available with the optional terminal expansion board (DIO11A) only.
NO FUNCTION
The setpoint at AI2 is not used; the external current limitation is set to 100 %.
0...10 V+Setpt1
The setpoint at AI2 is added to setpoint 1 (=AI1) observing the signs; the external current limitation is set to 100 %. 10 V = nmax (reference nmax).
0...10 V I-limit
The input is used as an external current limitation. 0...10 V = 0...100 % of the internal
set current limit ( P303/P313).
TF sensor
Analog input AI2 can also be used as a TF/TH input.
13_/14_ 1 2
130/140
Ramp t11 UP CW [s] / Ramp t21 UP CW [s]
131/141
Ramp t11 DOWN CW [s] / Ramp t21 DOWN CW [s]
132/142
Ramp t11 up CCW [s] / Ramp t21 up CCW [s]
133/143
Ramp t11 down CCW [s] / Ramp t21 down CCW [s]
Speed ramps 1 (parameter set 1) / Speed ramps 2 (parameter set 2)
Setting range: 0...2...2000 s

The ramp times refer to a setpoint step change of n = 3000 rpm. The ramp takes
effect when the speed setpoint is changed and the enable is withdrawn via the CW/
CCW terminal.
01293BEN
Figure 52: Separately adjustable speed ramps
134/144
Ramp t12 UP=DOWN [s] / Ramp t22 UP=DOWN [s] (2nd ramp of parameter set 1/2)
The following applies to this ramp: UP = DOWN and CW = CCW.
103
P6..
P60.
P600
135/145
S pattern t12 / S pattern t22

Setting range: 0 / 1 / 2 / 3 (0 = off, 1 = weak, 2 = medium, 3 = strong)
The 2nd ramp of parameter set 1 and 2 can be rounded with 3 pattern grades in order
to achieve a smoother acceleration of the drive.
01266BEN
Figure 53: Effect of the S pattern
A started S pattern is interrupted by the stop ramp t13/t23 and a changeover to ramp
t11/t12. Withdrawing the setpoint or a stop via the input terminals causes the started
S curve to be completed. This means the drive can still accelerate in spite of the withdrawal of the setpoint.
136/146
Stop ramp t13 [s] / Stop ramp t23 [s]

The stop ramp is activated by withdrawing the ENABLE terminal or by a fault (
P83_).
137/147
AUTO
Emergency ramp t14 [s] / Emergency ramp t24 [s]

The emergency ramp is activated by a fault ( P83_). The system monitors whether
the drive reaches zero speed in the set time. The output stage is inhibited and the
brake is applied after the set time has elapsed; this is the case even if zero speed
has not yet been reached.
138
Ramp limit
Setting range: NO = 0 / YES = 1
The ramp limit restricts the smallest possible ramp time to 100 ms in VFC operation
modes ( P700, reference: n = 3000 rpm). Settings less than 100 ms are ignored
and the ramp time 100 ms applies. The ramp limit limits the maximum output current
to 185 % of the rated output current. An active pull-out protection for the connected
motor is implemented using the current limiting controller when ramp limitation is activated.
There is no active pull-out protection for the connected motor when ramp limitation
is deactivated and ramp times of less than 100 ms are used. Parameters P303/313
'Current limit 1/2' are not effective then. If a maximum output current of 185 % of the
rated output current is exceeded for more than 60 ms, the inverter switches off with
fault message F01 'Overcurrent' and the 'Immediate switch-off' fault response.
104
P6..
P60.
P600
15_
150/151
Motor potentiometer (parameter set 1 and 2)

The ramp times refer to a setpoint change of n = 3000 rpm.
Ramp t3 UP / Ramp t3 DOWN
Setting range: 0.2...20...50 s
The ramp is active when the setpoint source ( P100) is set to MOTOR POT or
MOT.POT. +AI1 and an input terminal programmed to MOTOR POT UP or MOTOR
POT DOWN ( P6__) has a '1' signal.
152
Save last setpoint

ON
If MOTOR POT UP and MOTOR POT DOWN = '0', the last applicable motorized potentiometer setpoint is stored in the permanent memory 2 s afterwards. The last motorized potentiometer setpoint is reactivated following mains power off/power on.
OFF
The inverter starts with nmin ( P301/P311) following a mains power off/power on or
after withdrawal of the enable.
The motorized potentiometer function is used for continuous speed control. Consequently, set P152 to OFF otherwise the EEPROM fault message may appear after about
100,000 storage procedures.
01294BEN
Figure 54: Motorized potentiometer function
105
P6..
P60.
P600
16_/17_
1
160/170
Fixed setpoints 1 (parameter set 1) / Fixed setpoints 2 (parameter set 2)

Internal setpoint n11 (parameter set 1) / n21 (parameter set 2)
161/171
162/172

Setting range: 0...5000 rpm
Factory setting: n11/n21 = 150 rpm, n12/n22 = 750 rpm, n13/n23 = 1500 rpm
3 internal setpoints (= fixed setpoints) can be set separately for each of parameter
sets 1 and 2. The internal setpoints are active when the setpoint source ( P100) is
set to BIPOL./FIX.SETPT, UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT, FIX SETP+AI1 or FIX SETP*AI1
and an input terminal programmed to n11/n21 or n12/n22 ( P6__) has a '1' signal.
Response
Terminal
n11/n21
n12/n22
Enable/rapid stop
Parameter set 1/2
Rapid stop
'0'
Fixed setpoint not

active
'0'
'0'
'1'
'0'
n11 in effect
'1'
'0'
'1'
'0'
n12 in effect
'0'
'1'
'1'
'0'
n13 in effect
'1'
'1'
'1'
'0'
n21 in effect
'1'
'0'
'1'
'1'
n22 in effect
'0'
'1'
'1'
'1'
n23 in effect
'1'
'1'
'1'
'1'
The fixed setpoints of the currently inactive parameter set come into effect when this
terminal is actuated (= '1') if an input terminal is programmed to FIX SETPT SW.OV.
This changeover is possible whether the unit is inhibited or enabled.
106
P6..
P60.
P600
PARAMETER GROUP 2__, CONTROLLER PARAMETERS

20_
Speed control (parameter set 1 only)

The speed controller of the MOVIDRIVE is a PI-controller and is active when the following operating modes are set:
All operating modes with VFC-n-CONTROL
CFC operating modes: The speed controller is only active in 'CFC & M-CONTROL'
when speed limiting is active ( P70_)
Servo operating modes: The speed controller is only active in 'SERVO & M-CTRL'
when speed limiting is active ( P70_).
The setting of all parameters relevant for speed control is supported by the startup functions of the MOVITOOLS\SHELL or the DBG11B keypad (VFC only). Direct alterations
to individual controller parameters are reserved for optimisation by specialists.
P203
Filter setpoint
P115
Speed
setpoint
Acceleration
feedforward

P202
PI-controller
P200/P201
Torque
setpoints
Filter speed
actual value
Speed
P204
actual
value
Encoder/
Resolver
Signal
processing
01312BEN
Figure 55: Structural principles of the speed control loop
200
AUTO
P gain speed controller

Setting range: 0.1...2...32
Gain factor of the P-component of the speed controller.
201
AUTO

Setting range: 0...10...300 ms (0 = no I-component)
Integration time constant of the speed controller. The I-component reacts inversely
proportionate to the time constant, i.e. a large numerical value results in a small
I component, although 0 = no I-component.
202
AUTO

Setting range: 0...32
Gain factor of the acceleration feedforward. It influences the control response of the
speed controller.
203
AUTO

Setting range: 0...100 ms
Filter time constant of the acceleration feedforward. It influences the control response of the speed controller. The differentiator is fixed in the programming.
204
AUTO
Filter speed actual value

Filter time constant of the speed actual value filter.
107
P6..
P60.
P600
205
Load feedforward CFC (effective in CFC and SERVO operating modes only)
Setting range: -150...0...150 %
This parameter determines the initial value and the direction of the torque setpoint
on enable. The parameter must be set if an increased initial torque is required after
the enable. For example, setting the value to greater than 0 % makes it possible to
prevent the unwanted sagging of hoists when the brake is released.
Recommended setting: Value of the active current (P005 [% In]) when n = 0 rpm is
specified.
206
Sample time n-control (effective in CFC and SERVO operating modes only)
Setting range: 1 ms = 0 / 0.5 ms = 1
The setting 0.5 s improves speed control in dynamic drives with a low inherent moment of inertia.
207
Load feedforward VFC (effective in VFC-n-CTRL operating modes only)

Setting range: -150...0...150 %
This parameter determines the initial value and the direction of slip control on enable.
A setting greater than 0 % causes slip control to be pre-stressed, which means the
motor develops more torque when enabled. For example, this makes it possible to
prevent the unwanted sagging of hoists when the brake is released.
Setting values greater than 150 % switches off the function (no pre-stressing).
Recommended setting:
Irms IN / IMot_N cos phi
Irms= Value of the active current (P005 [% In]) when n = 0 rpm is specified.
IN
= Rated output current (P071 [A])
IMot_N
= Rated motor current (motor nameplate [A])
cos phi
= Power factor (motor nameplate)
In VFC & HOIST and VFC-n-CTRL.&HOIST modes and with load feedforward
switched off (value > 150 % set), pre-stressing of 0.5 sN is in effect. Pre-stressing
then takes place in the direction of the applied setpoint.
21_
Hold controller (parameter set 1 only)

The hold control function is used for drift-free standstill control of the drive and can only
be activated in operating modes with speed control (encoder feedback). Hold control is
active when an input terminal programmed to /HOLD CONTROL ( P6__) has a '0' signal. The unit then performs a stop using the t11 DOWN or t21 DOWN ramp. The position
applicable at the moment when the speed of the drive reaches zero is held. The gain
factor setting is supported in the startup function of the speed controller in MOVITOOLS\SHELL or in the DBG11B keypad.
210
AUTO
P gain hold controller

Setting range: 0.1...0.5...32
The parameter corresponds to the proportional gain of a position controller and is effective in conjunction with the activated 'Hold control' function only.
108
P6..
P60.
P600
22_
Internal synchronous operation (effective with the 'Internal Synchronous Operation' technology function only)
(Detailed description 'Additional Functions and Application Modules' documentation
package)
228
Feedforward filter (DRS)

Setpoint filter for feedforward of synchronous operation control.
109
P6..
P60.
P600
PARAMETER GROUP 3, MOTOR PARAMETERS

This group of parameters is used for adapting the inverter to the motor. The parameters
can be set separately for parameter set 1 and 2. This means two different motors can
be operated alternately on the same inverter without any new setting having to be made.
30_/31_ 1 2
300/310
AUTO
Limits 1 (parameter set 1) / Limits 2 (parameter set 2)

Start/stop speed 1/2
Setting range: 0...60...150 rpm
Only in effect in VFC mode, without function in CFC and SERVO mode. This entry
defines the smallest speed request which the inverter sends to the motor when enabled. The transition to the speed determined in the setpoint selection is made using
the active acceleration ramp.
When a stop command is performed, this setting also defines the slowest speed at
which the motor energization is switched off or at which post-magnetization takes effect and the brake is applied, if appropriate.
301/311
AUTO
Minimum speed 1/2 (nmin)

The speed value below which it is not possible to go, even when zero is selected as
the setpoint. The minimum speed also applies when nmin < nstart/stop has been set.
Important: The slowest speed is 15 rpm when the hoist function is active, even if
nmin has been set to a lower value.
302/312
AUTO
Maximum speed 1/2 (nmax)

The value set here cannot be exceeded by a setpoint selection. nmax applies if nmin
is set > nmax.
303/313
AUTO
Current limit 1/2

Setting range: 0...150 %IN
The internal current limitation refers to the apparent current. It is superordinate to the
external current limitation ( P120). Consequently, the entry determines the 100 %
value within which the external current limitation can take effect. The current limit is
automatically reduced in the field weakening range above the frequency of 1.15
ftrans. This provides protection against the motor pulling out.
The current limit in effect in the field weakening range can be calculated using the
following formula:
Current limit [%] = (1.15 ftrans / fact) Setting value of P303/P313 [%]
fact is the current rotating field frequency.
304
AUTO
Torque limit (only effective in CFC and SERVO operating modes)

Setting range: 0...150 %
The parameter limits the maximum torque of the motor. The entry acts on the setpoint of the motor torque (kT IN_inverter). Refer to the 'Project Planning' chapter for
detailed information about calculating the setpoint torque (Motor selection for asynchronous servomotors (CFC) and Motor selection for synchronous servomotors
(SERVO)).
The current limit comes into effect before the torque limit is reached if the current limit
(P303) is set to a lower value than the torque limit.
110
P6..
P60.
P600
32_/33_
1
320/330
Motor compensat. 1 (asynchr.) / Motor compensat. 2 (asynchr.)

Automatic adjustment 1/2
This is only in effect in VFC modes. The function only makes sense with single motor
operation. The inverter sets P322/P332 'IR 1/2' automatically at each enable and
stores the value. The inverter thereby determines a basic setting which is suitable for
many different drive tasks. The connected motor is calibrated during the last 20 ms of
the pre-magnetization phase. The motor is not calibrated if
P320/P330 = OFF,
Operating mode (P700/P701) VFC & GROUP or VFC &FLY.START selected,
Pre-magnetization time (P323/P333) 100 ms set,
Operating mode VFC-n-CONTROL selected and brake function P730 = OFF set.
In such cases, the set It value is used for calculating the winding resistance.
ON
Automatic adjustment
OFF
No automatic calibration
321/331
Boost 1/2
With VFC & GROUP: Manual setting for increasing the starting torque by increasing
the output voltage in the range below the transition speed.
With VFC: Manual setting normally not required. In exceptional cases, manual setting may be necessary to increase the breakaway torque. In this case set to max.
10 %.
Voutp.
Vmax
Voutp.
Vmax
VFC & GROUP
VFC
100% Boost
0% Boost
50V
100% Boost
0% Boost
50V
Setting range
Boost
0
nb
ae s
Setting range
Boost
n
0 nb
ae/10
s
nb
ae s
01295BEN
Figure 56: Working principle of boost (drawing not to scale)
322/332
AUTO
IR compensation 1/2
In VFC operating mode, this parameter acts on the parameters of the calculated motor model which establish the torque. Automatic setting takes place when P320/P330
= ON. Manual alterations to this parameter are reserved for optimization by specialists.
111
P6..
P60.
P600
323/333
324/334
AUTO
Premagnetizing time 1/2

Setting range: 0...0.1...2 s Pre-magnetization serves to establish a high motor torque
and it starts when the inverter is enabled.
Slip compensation 1/2
Slip compensation increases the speed accuracy of the motor. The rated slip of the
connected motor should be entered if the entry is made manually. A setting range of
20 % of the rated slip is permitted if a value other than the rated slip is entered in
order to compensate for fluctuations between various motors.
34_ 1 2
340/342
Motor protection
Motor protection 1/2
Recommendation: Only use in VFC modes. Ensure motor protection through the
project planning in CFC and SERVO operating modes.
When this function is activated, MOVIDRIVE takes over the thermal protection of the
connected motor by electronic means. In most cases, the motor protection function is
comparable to standard thermal protection (motor protection switch) and, furthermore,
it takes account of speed-dependent cooling by the integral fan. The motor utilization is
determined on the basis of the inverter output current, the type of cooling, the motor
speed and the time. The thermal motor model is based on the motor data entered during
commissioning (MOVITOOLS\SHELL, DBG11B) and on maintaining the operating conditions specified for the motor. If the motor also has to be protected against failure of the
ventilation, blockage of air ducts, etc., it is also necessary to employ protection in the
form of a positive temperature coefficient thermistor TF or bimetallic switch TH.
The following signaling and indication functions are available in conjunction with motor
protection:
P006/P007 Motor utilization 1/2
Display of the motor utilization for parameter set 1/2
P832 Response MOTOR OVERLOAD
Fault response of the inverter when 110 % of motor utilization 1/2

(P006/007) is reached. Factory setting: EMERG.STOP/FAULT
Binary output programmable to:

/Motor utilization 1
/Motor utilization 2
Prewarning if motor utilization 1/2 (P006/007) exceeds a value of

100 %. In this case, the programmed output is set to '0' = 0 V.
Isolating the inverter (mains and 24 V external) always resets the motor utilization to zero, i.e. any motor heating existing when the motor is switched back on is not taken into
account. The motor protection function processes the utilization of the connected motors
separately for both sets of parameters. The motor protection function must not be used
if only one motor is permanently connected to the inverter and the 'parameter set
changeover' function is only used for control purposes. Equally, the motor protection
function must not be used with group drives since it is not possible to protect each individual motor reliably.
ON
Motor protection function is active.
OFF
Motor protection function is not active.
341/342
Cooling type 1/2

Setting range: FAN COOLED / FORCED COOLING
It is necessary to know the motor cooling type in order to calculate the thermal load
of the motor as exactly as possible, as described in P340/P342.
112
P6..
P60.
P600
35_
350/351

SEW-EURODRIVE defines the sense of rotation looking onto the drive side of the motor.
A clockwise turn (positive) is defined as to the right and a counterclockwise turn as to
the left. This definition is implemented in the configuration of the motor connection in accordance with the SEW designation.
Change direction of rotation 1/2
Positive setpoint
(positive travel direction)
Negative setpoint
(negative travel direction)
OFF
Motor turns CW
Motor turns CCW
ON
Motor turns CCW
Motor turns CW
Change direction of rotation
ON
The above definition is reversed. The assignment of limit switches is maintained in
all cases. When the sense of rotation is CW, the drive is stopped properly if movement results in contact with the right limit switch. It is necessary to check carefully
that the limit switches are connected correctly and also that the reference point and
the travel positions are defined correctly during the use of and just after the
changeover of this parameter.
Altering the 'Change direction of rotation' parameter after the system has been
moved to its reference point causes the system to lose its reference point for the absolute position. This may result in undesirable travel movements of the axis.
OFF
The SEW definition applies.
35_
Startup (available in DBG11B only)
360
Startup
YES
Begins the startup function with the DBG11B keypad.
With P360, MOVIDRIVE can only be started up in VFC operating modes. Startup in
CFC and SERVO operating modes requires MOVITOOLS/SHELL.
NO
The startup function is not begun.
113
P6..
P60.
P600
PARAMETER GROUP 4__, REFERENCE SIGNALS

The following reference values are used for recording and signaling certain operational
states. All signals in parameter group 4__ can be output via binary outputs ( P62_/
P63_).
Important: The signals are only valid if the inverter has signaled 'ready' after switch-on
and there is no fault display.
40_

Signal if the speed is less than or greater than the set reference speed.
400
Speed reference value

401
Hysteresis
402
Delay time
403
Signal = '1' if:

n<nref / n>nref
01619BEN
Figure 57: Speed reference signal
41_
Speed window signal

Signal if the speed is within or outside the set window range.
410
Window center
411
Range width
412
Delay time
413
Signal = '1' if:

INSIDE / OUTSIDE
114
P6..
P60.
P600
42_

Signal if the speed is equal to or not equal to the setpoint speed.
420
Hysteresis
421
Delay time
422
Signal = '1' if:

n = n setpt / n <> n setpt
01625BEN
Figure 58: Speed setp./act. val. comp.
43_

Signal if the output current is greater than or less than the reference value.
430
Current reference value

Setting range: 0...100...150 %IN
431
Hysteresis
432
Delay time
433
Signal = '1' if:

I < Iref / I > Iref
115
P6..
P60.
P600
01623BEN
Figure 59: Current reference signal
44_
Imax signal
Signal if the inverter has reached the current limitation
440
Hysteresis
441
Delay time
442
Signal = '1' if:

I<Imax / I=Imax
116
P6..
P60.
P600
PARAMETER GROUP 5__, MONITORING FUNCTIONS

The following monitoring functions have been implemented in order to monitor what
happens to drive-specific parameters in the specific application and to be able to react
in case of impermissible deviations. Some of the monitoring functions are available separately in both parameter sets. It is possible to set the reaction to the triggering of monitoring functions using the parameters in group P83_ (Fault response).
50_
Speed monitoring
500/502
Speed monitoring 1/2

Setting range: OFF / MOTOR MODE / REGENERAT. MODE / MOT.& REGEN.MODE
The speed required by the setpoint can only be achieved if there is sufficient torque
available to meet the load request. If the set current limit (P303 and external current
limitation) is reached, MOVIDRIVE assumes that the torque has reached the maximum limit and the desired speed cannot be attained. Speed monitoring is triggered
if this situation persists for the duration specified in P501/P503.
501/503
Delay time 1/2

The set current limit may be reached briefly during acceleration and deceleration procedures or when load peaks occur. An unintentionally sensitive response by the
speed monitoring function can be prevented by setting the delay time accordingly.
The current limit must be attained uninterruptedly for the duration of the delay time
before the monitoring function responds.
504
encoder monitoring (from firmware version 822 660 0.18 for sin/cos encoders and from
firmware version 823 854 5.10 for TTL sensors and sin/cos encoders)
Setting range: ON / OFF
TTL sensors and sin/cos encoders are monitored for function and voltage supply.
The encoder monitoring is triggered in the event of a malfunction or if there is no voltage supply. Fault F14 'Encoder' is generated. The drive is stopped with a rapid stop.
Encoder monitoring is not a safety function!
52_

The setting of P520/P521 is significant when a binary input is programmed to 'MAINS
ON' and MOVIDRIVE regenerative mode is used (MOVIDRIVE regenerative
power unit MDR manual).
520
Mains OFF response time

Setting range: 0...5 s
521
Mains OFF response

CONTROL.INHIBIT / EMERGENCY STOP
117
P6..
P60.
P600
PARAMETER GROUP 6__, TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT

60_

Binary input DI with fixed assignment '/CONTROLLER INHIBIT'
600...604
Binary inputs DI1...DI5
The binary inputs can be programmed to the following functions:

Effective in
Inverter status
Effect of
Function
'0' signal
NO FUNCTION
'1' signal
Inhibit
-
Rapid stop on t13/t23
Enable
DI3
CW/STOP
Stop on t11/t21 or t12/t22
Enable CW running
DI1
CCW/STOP
Stop on t11/t21 or t12/t22
Enable CCW running
DI2
DI4
DI5
ENABLE/RAP.STOP
n11/n21
External setpoints only
n11/n21
External setpoints only
n12/n22
n13/n33
n12/n22
n13/n23
Fixed setpoints of inactive
parameter set selected
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
1st ramp (t11/t21) active
2nd ramp (t12/t22) active
MOTOR POT UP
Increase setpoint
MOTOR POT DOWN
Reduce setpoint
External fault
PAR. SWITCHOVER
RAMP SWITCHOVER
/EXT. FAULT
FAULT RESET
Reset on positive edge ('0' '1')
Hold control active
/LIM. SWITCH CW
CW limit switch reached
Not reached
Not reached
CCW limit switch reached
IPOS INPUT
Actuated
REF TRAVEL START
Start of reference travel for

IPOS
SLAVE FREE RUNN.
Master/slave mode
Slave free running
Do not take over
Take over setpoint
P521
Ext. signal MAINS ON
DRS SET ZERO PT.
'1' '0': Sets new zero point
Delete angular misalignment
DRS SLAVE START
no enable
Enable
DRS TEACH-IN
Take on position
DRS MASTER
STOPPED
Master turning
Master at standstill
SETPOINT HOLD
MAINS ON
P16_/
P17_
P13_/
P14_
P15_
P210
Function depends on IPOS program

Not actuated
REFERENCE CAM
P13_/
P14_
/HOLD CONTROL
/LIM. SWITCH CCW
See also
Fixed setpoints of active

parameter set selected
FIX SETPT SW.OV
118
enabled
Factory
setting
IPOSmanual
plus
P52_
Synchronous running
manual
P6..
P60.
P600
62_
Binary output DB with fixed assignment '/BRAKE'

620/621
Binary outputs DO1-NO/DO1-NC/DO2
The binary outputs can have the following functions assigned to them:
Binary output has
'0' signal
'1' signal
factory setting
Always '0' signal
DO2
Function
NO FUNCTION
/FAULT
Collective fault signal
READY
Not ready
Ready
Unit inhibited
Unit enabled and motor is energized
No rotating field
Rotating field
Brake is applied
Brake is released
Brake is released
Brake is applied
OUTP. STAGE ON
ROT. FIELD ON
BRAKE RELEASED
1)
BRAKE APPLIED1)
MOTOR STANDSTILL
See also
DO1
Motor turning
Motor at standstill
Parameter set 1 active
n > nref (n < nref)
n < nref (n > nref)
P40_
Speed is outside (inside) speed

window
Speed is inside (outside) speed

window
P41_
n <> nsetpt (n = nsetpt)
n = n setpt (n <> n setpt)
P42_
I > Iref (I < Iref)
I < Iref (I > Iref)
P43_
I < Imax (I = Imax)
I = Imax (I < Imax)
P44_
/MOTOR UTILIZ.1
100 % prewarning of motor protection in parameter set 1
/MOTOR UTILIZ.2
100 % prewarning of motor protection in parameter set 2
/DRS PREWARN.
Value for prewarning lag error

(P511) exceeded
Lag error limit (P512) exceeded
DRS SLAVE IN POS
Position not reached
Position reached
IPOS IN POSITION
Position not reached
Position reached
IPOS REFERENCE
No reference travel
Reference travel completed
PARAMETER SET
SPEED REFERENCE
P403 = n < nref (n > nref)
SPEED WINDOW
P413 = INSIDE (OUTSIDE)
SP/ACT.VAL.COMP.
P422 = n = n setpt (n <>
nsetpt)
CURR. REFERENCE
P433 = I < Iref (I > Iref)
Imax-SIGNAL
P442 = I = Imax (I < Imax)
/DRS LAG ERROR
IPOS OUTPUT
/IPOS FAULT
P34_
Depends on IPOS program

Fault signal IPOS program
Synchronous
running manual
IPOSplus
manual
1) Use binary output DB for activating the brake. This binary output has the fixed assignment of the '/BRAKE' function. The 'BRAKE
RELEASED' and 'BRAKE APPLIED' signals are intended to be passed on to a master controller.
The binary signals are only valid if the inverter has signaled 'READY' after switch-on and
there is no fault display. Binary signals have '0' status while MOVIDRIVE is being initialized.
Several terminals can be programmed with the same function.
119
P6..
P60.
P600
64_
Analog output
640
Analog output AO1

The signal range is 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA depending on the set operating mode (
P642).
The analog output can have the following functions assigned to it:
Scaling (with P641 = 1)
Function
Reference
value
NO FUNCTION
Output value
Explanation
0 mA
RAMP INPUT
3000 rpm
20 mA
Setpoint speed at input of internal ramp generator
SPEED SETPOINT
3000 rpm
20 mA
Valid setpoint speed (output ramp generator or correcting variable of master controller)
ACTUAL SPEED
3000 rpm
20 mA
Actual speed
ACTUAL FREQUENCY
100 Hz
20 mA
Rotating field frequency
OUTPUT CURRENT
150 % IN
20 mA
Apparent current
ACTIVE CURRENT
150 % IN
20 mA
Active current, pos. with torque in pos. direction of

rotation, neg. with torque in neg. direction of rotation.
RELATED TORQUE
150 % IN
20 mA
Active current which forms the torque; the value '0'

is always output in VFC operating modes.
UNIT UTILIZATION
150 %
20 mA
Momentary unit utilization
IPOS OUTPUT
10,000 digit
20 mA
Internal IPOS values ( IPOSplus manual)
IPOS OUTPUT 2
10,000 digit
20 mA
Internal IPOS values ( IPOSplus manual)
641
factory setting
AO1
Scaling AO1
Setting range: -10...0...1...10
The slope of the characteristic for the analog output is defined.
05593AEN
Figure 60: Slope of the characteristic for the analog output
120
P6..
P60.
P600
642
Operating mode AO1

OFF
The value zero is always output.
0...20 mA
Output of the value of the reference value as current value 0...20 mA on AOC1, the
voltage output AOV1 is not valid. The scaling AO1 (P641) is evaluated on the basis
of the value.
01306BEN
Figure 61: Characteristic of 0...20 mA operating mode
4...20 mA
Output of the value of the reference value as current values 4...20 mA on AOC1, the
voltage output AOV1 is not valid. The slope of the characteristics is flatter than in
0...20 mA operating mode. The characteristic has an offset of 4 mA and the value of
the scaling AO1 (P641) refers to the value range of 16 mA.
01307BEN
Figure 62: Characteristic of 4...20 mA operating mode
121
P6..
P60.
P600
PARAMETER GROUP 7__, CONTROL FUNCTIONS

All settings with regard to the fundamental control properties of the inverter are defined
within parameter group 7__. These are all functions which the inverter performs automatically upon activation and which influence its behavior in certain operating modes.
70_
Operating modes
700/701
Operating mode 1/2

This parameter sets the basic operating mode of the inverter for parameter set 1 and
2. In particular, this comprises defining the motor system, the encoder feedback and
corresponding control functions. When MOVIDRIVE inverters are delivered, their
parameters are set to the specific motor which matches the power of the motor.
All operating modes can be set for parameter set 1. Only operating modes without
encoder feedback can be set for parameter set 2 ( following table).
Parameter set 1/2
700/701 Operating mode 1/2
700/701
Unit type and option
Motor
VFC 1 / 2
VFC 1/2 & GROUP
VFC 1/2 & HOIST
VFC 1/2 & DC BRAK.
VFC 1/2 &FLY.START
MCF, MCV or MCH
DT/DV/D without incremental encoder
VFC-n-CONTROL
VFC-n-CTRL&GROUP
VFC-n-CTRL&HOIST
VFC-n-CTRL& IPOS
MCV or MCH
DT/DV/D with incremental encoder
CFC
CFC & M-CONTROL
CFC & IPOS
MCV or MCH
DT/DV/D with incremental encoder

or CT/CV (incremental encoder
installed as standard)
SERVO
SERVO & M-CTRL.
SERVO&IPOS
MCS or MCH
CM (as standard with Hiperface

encoder) or DFY (as standard with
resolver)
VFC 1 / 2
Default setting for asynchronous motors without encoder feedback. Suited to general
applications such as conveyor belts, trolleys and hoists with a counterweight. A fluxoriented motor model is used. This is optimally adapted to the motor after the commissioning function in MOVITOOLS or in the DBG11B keypad has been carried out.
It is necessary to input the motor type (SEW motor) or the nameplate data (motor
from another manufacturer) as part of the startup function. The following parameters
are preset (parameter set 1/2):
Settings after the startup function
P303/P313 Current limit 1/2
P302/P312 Maximum speed 1/2
P301/P311 Minimum speed 1/2
15 rpm
P130...P133/P140...P143 Ramp t11/t21
2s
P136/P146 Stop ramp t13 / t23
2s
P137/P147 Emergency ramp t14 / t24

P500/P502 Speed monitoring 1/2
P501/P503 Delay time 1/2
P100 Setpoint source
P101 Control signal source
P730/P733 Brake function 1/2
P731/P734 Brake release time 1/2
P732/735 Brake application time 1/2
P300/P310 Start/stop speed 1/2
122
Imax (inverter) = 150 % IN_mot

Depending on number of poles and rated motor frequency
e.g. 2-pole / 50 Hz 3000 rpm
e.g. 4-pole / 60 Hz 1800 rpm
2s
MOT.& REGEN.MODE
1s
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
TERMINALS
ON
With SEW motors: Setting in accordance with motor data.
With non-SEW motors: Set the correct value by hand!
15 rpm
P6..
P60.
P600

P820/P821 4-quadrant operation 1/2
P324/P334 Slip compensation 1/2
P321/P331 Boost 1/2
P322/P332 IxR compensation 1/2
P320/P330 Automatic adjustment 1/2
P323/P333 Premagnetizing time 1/2
700/701
ON
Setting in accordance with specified motor data
0
ON
SEW recommends using the P320/P330 'Automatic adjustment' parameter activated in the factory setting. This means the P322/P332 'IxR compensation 1/2'
parameter is set automatically during the pre-magnetization time through the calibration of the motor.
SEW recommends not changing the P321/P331 'Boost 1/2' parameter from its
factory setting (=0).
VFC 1/2 & GROUP

Set this if a group of asynchronous motors is to be operated on one inverter. All motors in the group must have the same rated voltage and rated frequency. The brake
is controlled in accordance with P730/P733. Set the data for the largest motor in the
group during commissioning ( VFC 1). Once startup is finished, adapt the current
limit P303/P313 to the total current of all connected motors. We recommend a basic
setting of P321/P331 'Boost 1/2' to the same value as P322/P332 'IxR compensation
1/2'.
P303/P313 Current limit 1/2
P302/P312 Maximum speed 1/2

e.g. 2-pole / 50 Hz 3000 rpm
e.g. 4-pole / 60 Hz 1800 rpm
P301/P311 Minimum speed 1/2
15 rpm
P130...P133/P140...P143 Ramp t11/t21
2s
2s

P500/P502 Speed monitoring 1/2
P501/P503 Delay time 1/2
P730/P733 Brake function 1/2
P732/P735 Brake application time 1/2
P820/P821 4-quadrant operation 1/2
2s
MOT.& REGEN.MODE
1s
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
TERMINALS
ON
ON
Do not use this operating mode for hoist applications!

The pre-magnetization current is adapted to the largest motor in the group during
startup. Whenever motors are taken out of the group by being switched off, it may
be necessary to reduce the current limitation to a current appropriate to the remaining combination of motors.
Slip compensation is not in effect. This means load-dependent speeds are established on the motors.
123
P6..
P60.
P600
700/701
700
VFC 1 / 2 & HOIST

VFC-n-CTRL&HOIST (only parameter set 1)
The hoist function automatically provides all functions required for operating a nonbalanced hoist. In particular, monitoring functions are activated for safety reasons.
These may prevent the drive from starting. They are in particular:
Monitoring the output current during the pre-magnetization phase.

Avoiding sag when the brake is released by load feedforward ( P207).
Monitoring that the pre-magnetization time is set to an adequate value
Constellations which can be recognized as incorrect
Fault triggered
2 or 3-phase motor phase interruption
F82 = Output open
Pre-magnetization time too short, or incorrect motor/

inverter combination.
F81 = Fault start condition
Failure of a motor phase through active speed monitoring

(factory setting) P500/501, P502/503
700/701
F08 = Fault n-monitoring
A single-phase motor phase failure cannot always be reliably detected.

SEW strongly recommends activating speed monitoring (factory setting).
Correct performance of the hoist function requires the motor brake to be controlled via the inverter.
VFC 1 / 2 & DC BRAK.

The DC braking function permits the asynchronous motor to be braked using a current injection. In this case, the motor can be braked on the inverter without a braking
resistor.
02167BEN
Figure 63: DC braking: Braking torque profile
A constant current with a rotating field frequency of 5 Hz is impressed during the

braking process. The braking torque equals 0 at a standstill. A greater braking torque
acts at a slower speed; the braking torque drops as the speed increases. The braking
time, and thus the duration of the braking current, depends on the load on the motor.
If the rotating field frequency of the motor reaches 5 Hz, DC braking is cancelled and
the motor is stopped with the rapid stop ramp. The current injection occurs at rated
motor current in accordance with the startup function. In all cases, the inverter limits
the current to max. 125 % IN. See the brake function regarding activation of the
brake.
It is not possible to enable a directed stop or to observe a certain ramp using
DC braking. The main application of this parameter is to drastically reduce
coasting of motors.
124
P6..
P60.
P600
n
nset p
Rapid stop ramp

t13/t23
5 Hz
t
Enable
"1"
"0"
Braking phase
t
01313BEN
Figure 64: DC braking: Braking profile
The braking procedure is interrupted if the 'Enable' binary input receives a '1' signal again during the braking phase. DC braking is completed and the drive is only
accelerated afterwards.
The drive stops with ramp t11/t21 or t12/t22 if a binary input is programmed to the
'CW/STOP' ('CCW/STOP') function in 'VFC 1/2 & DC BRAK.' operating mode and
'CW/STOP' ('CCW/STOP') receives a '0' signal. The stop is continued and no DC
braking initiated if the 'Enable' binary input is switched from '1' to '0' during the ramp
time.
To start DC braking, it is first necessary for 'Enable' to be switched from '1' to
'0', and this must happen at least 10 ms prior to 'CW/STOP' ('CCW/STOP') is
switched from '1' to '0'.
700/701
VFC 1/2 &FLY.START (from firmware version .15)

The flying restart circuit makes it possible to lock the inverter onto a rotating motor.
This applies in particular to drives which are not braked actively, which run on for a
long time or which are turned by a flowing medium, e.g. pumps and fans. The maximum flying start time is approx. 200 ms.
01308BEN
Figure 65: VFC & flying start function
The flying restart circuit does not function if there is an output filter connected to the
inverter.
Never use the flying restart circuit with hoist applications!
125
P6..
P60.
P600
700
VFC-n-CONTROL (parameter set 1 only)

This operating mode builds on VFC mode to make it possible to have speed controlled operation with an incremental encoder mounted on the motor shaft. The following encoders can be used as incremental encoders:
1.
2.
3.
4.
RS-422 / TTL incremental encoder

HTL incremental encoder (only with MCV, not with MCH)
High resolution incremental encoder with sinusoidal tracks 1 VSS
Hiperface encoder (only with MCH, not with MCV)
SEW recommends the use of encoders with 1024 increments/revolution by default.

The following properties derive from the speed feedback:
Increase in the static control accuracy and greater control dynamics.

Hold control: Programming a binary input to '/Hold control' (P60_/P61_) enables
the motor to be brought to a standstill with position control even when under load.
Set the hold controller (gain) using P210.
The startup function of MOVITOOLS/SHELL not only supports motor startup (VFC)
but also the additional controller setting of the speed controller. The following parameters are set which are relevant to n-control:
P303 Current limit 1
P302 Maximum speed 1
Imax (inverter) = 150 % Imotor

e.g. 2-pole / 50 Hz 3000 rpm
e.g. 4-pole / 60 Hz 1800 rpm
P301 Minimum speed 1
0 rpm
P500 Speed monitoring 1
MOT.& REGEN.MODE
P501 Delay time 1
0.1 s
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
TERMINALS
P730 Brake function 1

P731 Brake release time 1
P732 Brake application time 1
P323 Premagnetizing time 1
ON
Settings after the startup function of the speed controller

P200 P gain speed controller
P201 Time constant n-control.
P202 Gain accel. feedforward
P204 Filter speed actual value
Setting in accordance with specified data
P115 Filter setpoint

P203 Filter accel. feedforward
P210 P gain hold controller
P910 Gain X controller
Position controller gain for the hold control

Hold control
Position controller gain for IPOSplus
(positioning mode)
P130...P133/P140...P143 Ramp t11/t21

The setting of the 4-quadrant operation (P820) is ignored; 4-quadrant operation is always active.
126
P6..
P60.
P600
700
VFC-n-CTRL&GROUP (parameter set 1 only)

Set this if a group of asynchronous motors is to be operated on one inverter. All motors in the group must have the same rated voltage, rated frequency and rated power. One motor in the group is operated with speed control and must be equipped with
an incremental encoder connected to X15. The following encoders can be used as
incremental encoders:
1.
2.
3.
4.

SEW recommends the use of encoders with 1024 increments/revolution by default.

The other motors in the group follow the speed controlled motor in a slip-dependent
function.
The startup function of MOVITOOLS not only supports motor startup (VFC) but also
the additional controller setting of the speed controller. The following parameters are
set which are relevant to n-control:


e.g. 2-pole / 50 Hz 3000 rpm
e.g. 4-pole / 60 Hz 1800 rpm
0 rpm
MOT.& REGEN.MODE
P501 Delay time 1
0.1 s
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
TERMINALS

ON



Hold control
(positioning mode)
P130...P133/P140...P143 Ramp t11/t21

700
VFC-n-CTRL& IPOS (only parameter set 1)

Must be set if IPOSplus positioning commands are to be processed. Refer to the 'IPOSplus Positioning and Sequence Control System' manual for detailed descriptions
of IPOSplus. This manual can be obtained from SEW.
127
P6..
P60.
P600
700
CFC (parameter set 1 only)

CFC operating mode makes it possible to operate an asynchronous motor with real
servo properties, i.e. high control dynamics, very good smooth running properties
and controlled operation even when at a standstill. This is achieved because the CFC
procedure enables direct control over the magnetic flux in the motor and, therefore,
over the torque. Operation in conjunction with speed feedback via incremental encoder is obligatory. The following encoders can be used as incremental encoders:
1.
2.
3.
4.

SEW recommends using type 3 encoders with a resolution of 1024. These encoders
achieve the best possible control characteristics.
The following parameters do not have any effect: slip compensation (P324), boost
(P321) and IxR compensation (P322).
The MOVITOOLS startup function requires the motor type to be entered (SEW motor). No startup can be performed with the DBG11B keypad in CFC mode. The following parameters are set by default (parameter set 1):

e.g. 2-pole / 50 Hz 3000 rpm
e.g. 4-pole / 60 Hz 1800 rpm
0 rpm
MOT.& REGEN.MODE
P501 Delay time 1
0.1 s
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
TERMINALS

ON
CFC always requires the speed controller to be started up as well.



Hold control
(positioning mode)
P130...P133/P140...P143 Ramp t11/t21

128
P6..
P60.
P600
700
CFC & M-CONTROL (only parameter set 1) Sec. 4.5

This operating mode allows the torque of the asynchronous motor to be controlled
directly. The setpoint is standardized on the following torque:
3000 rpm = 150 % output current torque constant.
The torque values should be entered directly as fixed setpoints in the unit [%In] (P
16_, P 17_). The set processing (P11_) also applies to the torque control if the setpoint selection is made by way of an analog input.
The torque constant (motor-specific parameter) is defined by: kT = MN / Iq_n
If P500 'Speed monitoring 1' is active, the drive is monitored according to the
P500 parameter description ( page 117).
If P500 'Speed monitoring 1' = OFF is set, the drive reacts as follows if its speed
is faster or slower than nmax (P302) and -nmax:
Motor mode: The available motor torque is reduced to zero with a linear function above nmax and below -nmax. As a result, there is no active speed control.
Regenerative mode: No response; the master drive must prevent the drive losing position.
M-control is also in effect in the range -nmin...n...nmin.

The current is always limited to the set current limit (P303).


e.g. 2-pole / 50 Hz 3000 rpm
e.g. 4-pole / 60 Hz 1800 rpm

0 rpm
MOT.& REGEN.MODE
P501 Delay time 1

0.1 s
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
TERMINALS

ON
Setting in accordance with specified motor data.
Settings after the commissioning function of the torque controller



Hold control
(positioning mode)
P130...P133/P140...P143 Ramp t11/t21

129
P6..
P60.
P600
700
CFC & IPOS (parameter set 1 only)

700
SERVO (parameter set 1 only)

SERVO operating mode makes it possible to operate a synchronous motor (servomotor) with a permanent field.
MCS4_A: The motor must be equipped with a resolver.
MCH4_A: The motor must be equipped with a Hiperface encoder.
The MOVITOOLS startup function requires the motor type to be entered (SEW motor). No startup can be performed with the DBG11B keypad in SERVO mode. The
following parameters are set by default (parameter set 1):
Torque limit
Imax (inverter) = 3 motor current at standstill

The value of the motor torque can be limited. The maximum
value (= 3 motor standstill torque) is determined by the
motor type. Do not alter P303 'Current limit'!
Rated motor speed (2000 rpm, 3000 rpm, 4500 rpm)
0 rpm
MOT.& REGEN.MODE
P501 Delay time 1
0.1 s
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
TERMINALS

ON
SERVO always requires the speed controller to be started up as well.



Hold control
(positioning mode)
P130...P133/P140...P143 Ramp t11/t21

130
P6..
P60.
P600
SERVO & M-CTRL. (only parameter set 1) Sec. 4.6
700
This operating mode allows the torque of the servomotor to be controlled directly.
The setpoint is standardized on the following torque:
3000 rpm = 150 % output current torque constant
The torque values should be entered directly as fixed setpoints in the unit [%In]
(P16_, P17_). The set processing (P11_) also applies to the torque control if the setpoint selection is made by way of an analog input.
The torque constant (motor-specific parameter) is defined by: ke = M0 / I0
700
If P500 'Speed monitoring 1' is active, the drive is monitored according to the
P500 parameter description ( page 117).
If P500 'Speed monitoring 1' = OFF is set, the drive reacts as follows if its speed
is faster or slower than nmax (P302) and -nmax:
Motor mode: The available motor torque is reduced to zero with a linear function above nmax and below -nmax. As a result, there is no active speed control.
Regenerative mode: No response; the master drive must prevent the drive losing position.
M-control is also in effect in the range -nmin...n...nmin.

The current is always limited to the set current limit (P303).
SERVO & IPOS (only parameter set 1)

71_
Standstill current (parameter set 1/2)
710/711
Setting range: 0...50% Imot
The standstill current is used for injecting an adjustable current into the motor when
the motor is at a standstill and the brake is applied. The standstill current can be
switched off by /CONTROLLER INHIBIT = 0. This allows the following functions to
be carried out:
At low ambient temperatures of the motor, it is possible to prevent the danger of

condensation formation and freezing (in particular of the disc brake). Setting the
current level avoids overheating of the motor. Recommendation: The motor
housing should be hand-hot.
It is possible to perform a rapid motor start when standstill current is activated because the motor is kept in an excited state. This means the motor can be started
without having to wait for the premagnetizing time. Recommendation: Set to
45...50 % for hoists.
The standstill current function is deactivated by P710/P711 = 0. The setting is made

in % of the rated motor current. The standstill current is monitored for current limit 1/
2 (P303/P313) in every case.
In CFC mode, the amount of magnetization current injected is always at least that
required on the basis of the motor model. The higher value applies if P710 is set higher. This function does not have any effect in SERVO (MDS) operating mode.
131
P6..
P60.
P600
72_
720/723
Setpoint stop function (parameter set 1/2)

The setpoint stop function makes possible an enable function generated automatically by the inverter depending on the main setpoint. There is an enable with all required functions such as pre-magnetization, brake control system, etc. In all cases,
there must be an additional enable via terminals.
Setpoint stop function 1/2
721/724
Stop setpoint 1/2

722/725
Start offset 1/2

There is no enable if stop setpoint + start offset (start setpoint) > nmax.
Movement with nmin is never possible if the stop setpoint is > nmin.
"1"
/Controller
inhibit
"0"
"1"
CW/stop
"0"
Enable/ "1"
rapid stop
"0"
"1"
/Brake
"0"
nsetp [1/min]
120
Input ramp
generator
60
Stop
setpoint
0
Start
offset
nact [1/min]
120
Output ramp
generator
Brake
release time
60
Brake appliBrake
cation time release time
t11 CW down
Stop
ramp t13
30
0
t11 CW up
Premagnet.time
t11
t11
Brake application time

t13
Premagnet.time
01638BEN
Figure 66: Setpoint stop function
132
P6..
P60.
P600
73_
Brake function (parameter set 1/2)

MOVIDRIVE inverters are capable of controlling a brake fitted on the motor. The
brake function acts on the binary output DB which has the fixed assignment of the
'/BRAKE' function (24 V = brake released). In drives with encoder feedback (speed
control), this makes it possible to select between electrical holding of the load and
mechanical application of the brake in halt condition.
Sec. 7.11.1 regarding wiring of the brake control system.
Operating mode P700
Brake function P730 (P733) ON/OFF
(The same applies to parameter set
2 /P701, however in this case VFC
operating modes are possible without encoder feedback)
1) VFC, VFC & GROUP,
VFC & DC BRAK.,
VFC & FLYING START
P730 = ON
Brake control in accordance with Figure 67.
Effective parameters:
P323/P333 Premagnetizing time 1/2
P732/P735 Brake application time 1/2
P730 = OFF
In this case too, post-magnetization takes place with the set
brake application time in order to improve positioning of the
drive.
2) VFC & HOIST
See 1)
The brake function is automatically always active when the
hoist function is activated, even if P730 = OFF.
3) VFC-n-CONTROL
VFC-n-CTRL&GROUP
VFC-n-CTRL&HOIST
P730 = ON
See 1)
P730 = OFF
The speed setpoint of 0 rpm is specified in the inverter when
the start/stop speed is reached. See 'HOLD CONTROL' if real
hold control (position control) is required.
4) CFC
See 3): Pre-magnetization is carried out.
5) Servo
See 3)
6) CFC & M-CONTROL
The brake is controlled in accordance with P730.
7) SERVO & M-CTRL.
The brake is controlled in accordance with P730.
8) VFC/CFC/ SERVO & IPOS
See IPOSplus manual
The brake is always applied when /CONTROLLER INHIBIT = 0.
133
P6..
P60.
P600
Enable "1"
"0"
t
Premagnet. time
Brake
release time
n
nsetp
t
t
nstart-stop
0
"1"
/BRAKE
"0"
t
t
Output stage enable "1"

"0"
Rotating field on "1"

"0"
t
01316BEN
Figure 67: Inverter response when the brake function is activated
74_
740/742
Speed skip (parameter set 1/2)

The 'Speed skip' function makes it possible to prevent the motor speed from remaining within a certain speed window. This suppresses vibration and noise, in particular
in machines with pronounced mechanical resonances.
Skip window center 1/2
741/743
Skip width 1/2

The skip window center and skip width are values and automatically have an effect
on positive and negative setpoints when activated. The function is deactivated by
setting skip width = 0.
01310BEN
Figure 68: Speed skip
134
P6..
P60.
P600
75_
Master-slave function offers the opportunity to implement functions such as synchronous speed running, load share and torque control (slave). The RS-485 interface
(USS21A) or the system bus interface (SBus) can be used as the communications
link. Both interfaces can also send setpoints. Note that a slave can only be served
from one interface. Sending setpoints from both interfaces makes sense when some
slaves are connected to the RS-485 interface and other slaves to the SBus. P100
'Setpoint source' must then be set to MASTER-SBus or MASTER-RS-485. By programming a binary input to 'SLAVE FREE RUNN.' (P60_/P61_), it is possible to separate the slave from the master setpoint of the master and switch it to a local control
mode.
01311BEN
Figure 69: Master-Slave function
*) DI '/Controller inhibit' and the programmed binary inputs Enable, CW and CCW
must also get a '1' signal.
RS-485 group addresses (P811) and SBus group addresses (P814) must be set to the
same value in the master and the slave. Set a group address (P811) greater than 100
for master/slave operation via the RS-485 interface. Activate the bus terminating resistors on the master and slave (S12 = ON) for master/slave operation via the system bus.
Connection check
System bus (SBus):

Parameter P815 'SBus timeout delay' is in effect when there is a communications link
via the SBus. If P815 is set to '0', there is no monitoring of data transmission via the
SBus.
RS-485 interface:
A connection check is always in effect if the communications link is via the RS-485
interface (USS21A), parameter P812 'RS-485 timeout delay' does not have any function. The slave inverters must receive a valid RS-485 telegram within the fixed time
interval of t = 500 ms. If the time is exceeded, the slave drives are stopped with the
emergency stop ramp and fault message F43 'RS-485 timeout' is signaled.
Important: The fault is automatically reset and the drives are enabled when the
slave inverters once again receive a valid telegram.
135
P6..
P60.
P600
Overview of functions, master/slave mode

Master
Function
Slave setpoint P750
Slave
Operating mode P700 Setpoint source P100 Operating mode P700
Synchronous speed operation:

Master controlled
Slave controlled
SPEED (RS485)
SPEED (SBus)
SPEED (485+SBus)
VFC, VFC & GROUP,

VFC & HOIST
MASTER SBus
MASTER RS-485
VFC, VFC & GROUP,

VFC & HOIST

Master speed controlled
Slave controlled
SPEED (RS485)
SPEED (SBus)
SPEED (485+SBus)
VFC-n-CONTROL
VFC-n-CTRL. & ...
CFC
CFC/SERVO & IPOS
MASTER SBus
MASTER RS-485
VFC, VFC & GROUP,

VFC & HOIST

Slave speed controlled
Drives without rigid mechanical
connection!
SPEED (RS485)
SPEED (SBus)
SPEED (485+SBus)
VFC-n-CONTROL
VFC-n-CTRL. & ...
CFC
CFC/SERVO & IPOS
MASTER SBus
MASTER RS-485
VFC-n-CONTROL
VFC-n-CTRL&GROUP
VFC-n-CTRL&HOIST
CFC
SERVO

Master controlled
Drives without rigid mechanical
connection!
SPEED (RS485)
SPEED (SBus)
SPEED (485+SBus)
VFC, VFC & GROUP

VFC & HOIST
MASTER SBus
MASTER RS-485
VFC-n-CONTROL
VFC-n-CTRL&GROUP
VFC-n-CTRL&HOIST
CFC
SERVO
Load share:
Master controlled
Slave controlled
LOAD SHAR(RS-485)
LOAD SHARE (SBus)
LOAD S(485+SBus)
VFC, VFC & GROUP

VFC & HOIST
MASTER SBus
MASTER RS-485
VFC, VFC & GROUP

VFC & HOIST
Load share:
Slave controlled
LOAD SHAR(RS-485)
LOAD SHARE (SBus)
LOAD S(485+SBus)
VFC-n-CONTROL
VFC-n-CTRL. & ...
CFC
CFC/SERVO & IPOS
MASTER SBus
MASTER RS-485
VFC, VFC & GROUP

VFC & HOIST
VFC & FLYING START
Load share:
Not possible in control system
Load share:
Master controlled
Not possible in control system
Torque control of slave:

Slave torque controlled
750
TORQUE (RS-485)
TORQUE (SBus)
TORQUE(485+SBus)
CFC/SERVO
CFC/SERVO & IPOS
MASTER SBus
MASTER RS-485
CFC/SERVO &
M-CONTROL
Slave setpoint
The setpoint which is sent to the slave is set on the master. The 'MASTER-SLAVE
OFF' setting must be retained on the slave.
MASTER-SLAVE OFF
SPEED (RS-485)
SPEED (SBus)
SPEED (485+SBus)
TORQUE (RS-485)
TORQUE (SBus)
TORQUE(485+SBus)
LOAD SHAR(RS-485)
LOAD SHARE (SBus)
LOAD S(485+SBus)
136
P6..
P60.
P600
751
Scaling slave setpoint

Setting range: -10...0...1...10
The setpoint sent from the master is multiplied by this factor which is set in the slave.
Speed synchronization (SPEED (RS-485) / SPEED (SBus) / SPEED
(485+SBus)):
The speed of the inverter which is parameterized as the slave follows the speed of
the master inverter. Set the speed ratio using parameter P751 'Scaling slave setpoint' on the slave inverter. The slip compensation (P324/P334) of the slave should
be left at the startup setting.
Example:
Parameters
Setting on master
Setting on slave
E.g. UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
MASTER SBus
E.g. TERMINALS
Not effective
P700 Operating mode
VFC-n-CONTROL
VFC 1
SPEED (SBus)
MASTER-SLAVE OFF
Not effective
1 (then 1:1)
P750 Slave setpoint

P751 Scaling slave setpoint
P811 RS-485 group address
Not effective
P814 SBus group address

P816 SBus baud rate
Set the same value (0...63)

Set the same value (125, 250, 500 or 1000 kbaud)
Load share (LOAD SHAR(RS-485) / LOAD SHARE. (SBus) / LOAD

S(485+SBus)):
This function allows two inverters to operate at the same load. It is assumed in this
case that the shafts of the motors corresponding to the master and the slave are rigidly connected together. You are recommended to use the same motors with the
same gear ratios, otherwise different delays may result during starting/stopping due
to the pre-magnetizing time and the brake release/application time. Set the speed ratio (recommendation: 1) using parameter P751 'Scaling slave setpoint'.
The slip compensation (P324 / P334) of the slave must be set to 0.
Example:
Parameters
Setting on master
Setting on slave
E.g. BIPOL./FIX.SETPT
MASTER-RS-485
E.g. TERMINALS
Not effective
P324 Slip compensation 1
Do not alter
VFC 1
VFC 1
LOAD SHAR(RS-485)
MASTER-SLAVE OFF
Not effective
1 (then 1:1)
P700 Operating mode

P750 Slave setpoint
Not effective
P816 SBus baud rate
Not effective
137
P6..
P60.
P600
Torque control of the slave (TORQUE (RS-485) / TORQUE (SBus) / TORQUE

(485+SBus)):
The slave inverter receives the torque setpoint of the master directly (the correcting
variable of the speed controller). This also enables a high quality load share to be
achieved, for example. This setting should be preferred over 'Load share' if the drive
configuration permits it. Set the torque ratio using parameter P751 'Scaling slave setpoint'.
Example:
Parameters
P700 Operating mode
P750 Slave setpoint
138
Setting on master
Setting on slave
E.g. UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
MASTER-RS-485
E.g. TERMINALS
Not effective
CFC
CFC
TORQUE (RS-485)
MASTER-SLAVE OFF
Not effective
1 (then 1:1)
Not effective
P816 SBus baud rate
Not effective
P6..
P60.
P600
PARAMETER GROUP 8__, UNIT FUNCTIONS

80_
Setup
800
Quick menu (with DBG11B only)

P800 enables the DBG11B keypad to be changed over between the factory-set quick
menu and the detailed parameter menu. The fact that the quick menu is activated is
indicated by a slash following the parameter number. The parameters contained in
the quick menu are identified by a '/' in the parameter list. The previously selected
menu is active after MOVIDRIVE has been switched off and on again.
801
Language (with DBG11B only)
Setting range DBG11B-08: DE / EN / FR / ES / PT

P801 enables the DBG11B keypad to be changed over between various languages.
The language setting is not altered by the factory setting.
802
Factory setting
Setting range: YES / NO
P802 can be used to reactivate the factory settings for almost all parameters; these
are stored in the EPROM. Startup data, statistical data and language are not reset.
The statistical data must be reset separately using P804. The factory settings are restored if the parameter is set to 'YES'. The operation LED V1 flashes yellow during
this period. After the factory settings have been set, the operation LED V1 shows the
previous operating status of the inverter again and P802 automatically reverts to
'NO'.
Almost all parameter values are overwritten when the factory setting is activated.
However, the unit is not returned to its original delivery condition. Store the set parameter values (MOVITOOLS) before you activate the factory setting. The startup
parameters are not altered by activating the factory setting, which means the startup
procedure for the drive does not have to be repeated. We recommend checking the
following parameters after activating the factory setting and setting them again if necessary:
P13_/P14_ Speed ramps
P16_/P17_ Fixed setpoints
P5__ Monitoring functions
P6__ Terminal assignment
803
Parameter lock
Setting parameter 803 to 'ON' makes it possible to prevent any change to the parameters (except for parameter 841 'Manual reset' and the parameter lock itself). This
makes sense, for example, after the MOVIDRIVE setting has been optimized. Parameter 803 must be restored to 'OFF' in order to permit changes to parameters
again.
Important: The parameter lock also acts on the RS-485, fieldbus and SBus interfaces and on IPOSplus.
139
P6..
P60.
P600
804
Reset statistic data (with MOVITOOLS/Shell only)

Setting range: NO / FAULT MEMORY / KWH-METER / OPERATING HOURS
P804 permits the statistical data stored in the EEPROM, namely the fault memory,
kilowatt-hour meter and operating hours counter, to be reset. These data are not affected when the factory setting function is activated.
806
Copy DBG MDX (with DBG11B only)

The parameter data in the DBG11B are transmitted to MOVIDRIVE.
807
Copy MDX DBG (with DBG11B only)

The parameter data set in MOVIDRIVE are transmitted to the DBG11B keypad.
81_
810
RS485 address
P810 sets the address by means of which communication can take place with MOVIDRIVE via the RS-485 serial interface (USS21A). Max. 32 participants can be networked together.
On delivery, the MOVIDRIVE address is always 00. You are recommended not to
use the 00 address in order to avoid collisions during data transfer when several inverters are involved in serial communication.
811
RS-485 group address

P811 makes it possible to group together several MOVIDRIVE units for communication via the serial interface. All MOVIDRIVE units with the same RS-485 group
address can thus be addressed using a multicast telegram via this address. The data
received via the group address are not acknowledged by MOVIDRIVE. For example, the RS-485 group address makes it possible to send setpoint selections to a
group of MOVIDRIVE inverters simultaneously. Group address 100 means that the
inverter is not assigned to any group.
812
RS485 timeout delay

P812 sets the monitoring time for data transmission via the serial interface. MOVIDRIVE performs the fault response set in P833 if there is no cyclical process data exchange via the serial interface for the period set in parameter 812. No monitoring of
serial data transmission takes place when P812 is set to the value 0. Monitoring is
activated with the first cyclical data exchange.
813
SBus address
P813 sets the system bus address of MOVIDRIVE. The MOVIDRIVE unit can
communicate with other MOVIDRIVE units using the system bus (SBus) by means
of the address set here.
140
P6..
P60.
P600
814
SBus group address

P814 sets the system bus group address (for multicast telegrams) of MOVIDRIVE.
815
SBus timeout delay

P815 sets the monitoring time for data transmission via the system bus. MOVIDRIVE performs the fault response set in P836 if there is no data traffic via the system bus for the period set in P815. No monitoring of data transmission via the system
bus takes place when P815 is set to the value 0.
816
SBus baud rate
Setting range: 125 / 250 / 500 / 1000 kbaud

P816 sets the transmission speed of the system bus.
817
SBus synchronization ID
A synchronization between the drives can take place for transmitting process data
and parameter data via the system bus. To do this, the master control has to send a
synchronization message to the connected inverters at specific intervals. Thus, the
inverters synchronize themselves with the master controller. P817 is used for setting
the identifier (address) of the synchronization signal in the inverter for the internal
system bus. Make sure there is no overlap between the identifiers for the process
data or parameter data telegrams.
818
CAN synchronization ID
Setting range: 0...1...2047
A synchronization between the drives can take place for transmitting process data
and parameter data via the optional CAN bus. To do this, the master control has to
send a synchronization message to the connected inverters at specific intervals.
Thus, the inverters synchronize themselves with the master controller. P818 is used
for setting the identifier (address) of the synchronisation signal in the inverter for the
optional CAN bus. Make sure there is no overlap between the identifiers for the process data or parameter data telegrams.
819
Fieldbus timeout delay

Setting range: 0...0.5...650 s
P819 sets the monitoring time for data transmission via the existing fieldbus
(MC_41A PROFIBUS-DP or MCH42A INTERBUS FO). MOVIDRIVE performs the fault response set in P831 if there is no data traffic via the fieldbus for the
period set in P819. No monitoring of data transmission via the fieldbus takes place
when P819 is set to the value 0 or 650. The timeout time is automatically specified
by the DP master with PROFIBUS-DP. Changing this parameter does not have any
effect and it is overwritten whenever the PROFIBUS-DP is started up again.
141
P6..
P60.
P600
82_
Brake operation
820/821
4-quadrant operation 1/2

This is only taken into account in VFC operating mode without encoder feedback; 4quadrant operation is assumed in all other operating modes. P820 enables 4-quadrant operation to be switched on and off for parameter set 1/2. 4-quadrant operation
is possible if a braking resistor or a regenerative power supply unit is connected to
MOVIDRIVE (CCW/CW; motor/regenerative). P820/P821 must be set to 'NO' if
there is neither a braking resistor nor a regenerative power supply unit connected to
MOVIDRIVE, which means regenerative operation is not possible. In this operating
mode, MOVIDRIVE attempts to extend the deceleration ramp so the generated
power is not too great and the DC link voltage remains below the switch-off threshold.
Despite the fact that the deceleration ramps are automatically extended by MOVIDRIVE, it is possible that the generated power during braking may be too great, leading to MOVIDRIVE switching itself off and issuing fault message F07 (DC link overvoltage). In such a case, the deceleration ramps must be extended manually.
83_
Fault response
830
Response EXT. FAULT

The fault is only triggered in the ENABLED inverter status. P830 programs the fault
response which is triggered by an input terminal programmed to '/EXT. FAULT'. The
following responses can be programmed:
Response
Description
No fault is displayed and no fault response is undertaken. The fault which is signaled
NO RESPONSE
is completely ignored.
DISPLAY
FAULT
142
The fault is displayed (operation LED V1 and MOVITOOLS), although the unit does
not implement any other fault response. The fault can be reset (terminal, RS-485,
fieldbus, auto-reset).
IMM. STOP/
FAULT
The inverter performs an immediate switch-off and a fault is signaled. The output
stage is inhibited and the brake is applied. The ready signal is revoked and the fault
output is set, if programmed. A restart is only possible after a fault reset has been performed during which the inverter is reinitialized.
EMERG.STOP/
FAULT
The drive is braked with the set emergency stop ramp. Once the stop speed is
reached, the output stage is inhibited and the brake is applied. The fault is signaled
immediately. The ready signal is revoked and the fault output is set, if programmed. A
restart is only possible after a fault reset has been performed during which the inverter
is reinitialized.
RAPID STOP/
FAULT
The drive is braked with the set rapid stop ramp. Once the stop speed is reached, the
output stage is inhibited and the brake is applied. The fault is signaled immediately.
The ready signal is revoked and the fault output is set, if programmed. A restart is only
possible after a fault reset has been performed during which the inverter is reinitialized.
IMM. STOP/
WARNG
The inverter performs an immediate switch-off and a fault is signaled. The output
stage is inhibited and the brake is applied. A fault message is issued via the terminal,
if programmed. The ready signal is not revoked. The drive restarts without a unit reinitialization if the fault is rectified by an internal procedure or by a fault reset.
EMERG.STOP/
WARNG
The drive is braked with the set emergency stop ramp. Once the stop speed is
reached, the output stage is inhibited and the brake is applied. The fault is signaled
immediately. A fault message is issued via the terminal, if programmed. The ready
signal is not revoked. The drive restarts without a unit re-initialization if the fault is rectified by an internal procedure or by a fault reset.
RAPID STOP/
WARNG
The drive is braked with the set rapid stop ramp. Once the stop speed is reached, the
output stage is inhibited and the brake is applied. The fault is signaled immediately. A
fault message is issued via the terminal, if programmed. The ready signal is not
revoked. The drive restarts without a unit re-initialization if the fault is rectified by an
internal procedure or by a fault reset.
P6..
P60.
P600
831
Response FIELDBUS TIMEOUT

See P830 for the responses which can be programmed. Factory setting: RAPID
STOP/WARNG
response which is triggered by the fieldbus timeout monitoring. The reaction time for
the monitoring can be set using P819 (see P819 and the 'Fieldbus Unit Profile' manual for a more detailed description of the 'Fieldbus timeout').
832
Response MOTOR OVERLOAD

See P830 for the responses which can be programmed. Factory setting:
EMERG.STOP/FAULT
P832 programs the fault response which is triggered by the motor protection function
(see P340 for a more detailed description of 'Motor overload').
833
Response RS-485 TIMEOUT

See P830 for the responses which can be programmed. Factory setting: RAPID
STOP/WARNG
response which is triggered by the RS-485 timeout monitoring. The reaction time for
the monitoring can be set using P812 (see P812 for a more detailed description of
the 'RS-485 timeout').
834
Response DRS LAG ERROR (IPOSplus)

EMERG.STOP/FAULT
P834 programs the fault response which is triggered by the lag error monitoring of
the positioning mode with IPOSplus. It is possible to make various settings for this
in parameter group 51_.
835
Response TF sensor SIGNAL

See P830 for the responses which can be programmed. Factory setting: NO RESPONSE
P835 programs the fault response which is triggered by the temperature sensor monitoring of the TF which may be incorporated in the motor winding.
836
Response SBus TIMEOUT

EMERG.STOP/FAULT
P836 programs the fault response which is triggered by the system bus timeout monitoring. The reaction time for the monitoring can be set using P815 (see P815 for a
more detailed description of the 'SBus timeout').
84_
Reset response
840
Manual reset
YES
The fault in MOVIDRIVE is reset. In case of a fault, it is possible to press the [E] key
on the DBG11B to access P840 directly.
Also, P840 is listed in the 'Main menu' under 'Parameters' in MOVITOOLS as well.
P840 automatically reverts to NO following a reset. Activating the manual reset does
not have any effect if there is no fault present.
NO
No reset.
143
P6..
P60.
P600
841
Auto reset
ON
The auto-reset function is activated. In the event of a fault, this function automatically
resets the unit after an adjustable restart time (P842). Up to five auto-resets are possible in one auto-reset phase. Should five faults occur which are reset by an autoreset, no more auto-resets are possible until:
a manual reset is performed using the input terminal,
a manual reset is performed using the serial interface (MOVITOOLS/Shell,
DBG11B, master controller),
there is a transition to 24 V backup mode or the inverter is completely switched off.
Following this, five auto-resets are possible once again.
Do not use auto-reset with drives where an automatic restart could represent
a danger to people or units.
OFF
No auto-reset.
842
Restart time
P842 sets the waiting time which has to elapse after a fault occurs before an autoreset is performed.
85_
Scaling actual speed value

Scaling actual speed value defines a user-specific display parameter ( P001 User
display). For example, the user display is to be shown in 1/s. A scaling factor of 1/60
is required for this. The scaling factor numerator must therefore be set to 1 and the
scaling factor denominator to 60. The scaling unit 1/s is entered in P852.
01640BEN
Figure 70: Scaling actual speed value (example)
850
Scaling factor numerator

Setting range: 1...65535 (can only be set using MOVITOOLS/Shell)
851
Scaling factor denominator

Setting range: 1...65535 (can only be set using MOVITOOLS/Shell)
852
User dimension (can only be set using MOVITOOLS/Shell)

Factory setting: 1 rpm
Up to eight ASCII characters; is displayed in P001 'User display'.
144
P6..
P60.
P600
86_
Modulation
860/861
PWM frequency 1/2 (parameter set 1/2)

Setting range: 4 / 8 / 16 kHz
P860/P861 can be used in VFC modes to set the switching frequency at the inverter
output for parameter set 1/2. The inverter automatically switches back to lower
switching frequencies when the unit utilization reaches a specific level if the clock frequency for parameter set 1/2 is not fixed to the set value using P862/P863. This reduces switching losses in the output stage and, consequently, unit utilization.
862/863
PWM fix 1/2 (parameter set 1/2)

ON
P862/P863 = ON for parameter set 1/2 enables the PWM frequency set in P860/
P861 to be fixed when an automatic reduction in the PWM frequency is not permitted
(e.g. when output filters with DC link are used).
OFF
MOVIDRIVE automatically reduces the set output frequency (down to minimum 4
kHz) when there is a high level of thermal load on the output stage, in order to avoid
a switch-off with the 'Unit utilization' fault.
864
PWM frequency CFC (effective in CFC and SERVO operating modes)

Setting range: 4 / 8 / 16 kHz
The switching frequency at the inverter output can be set using P864 in CFC and
SERVO operating modes (only possible in parameter set 1). 'PWM fix 1 = ON' is always in effect in the settings 8 kHz (= factory setting) and 16 kHz. Note that the inverter must be of an adequate size in order to supply the increased power demand
at higher switching frequencies.
87_
870
Setpoint description PO1; Factory setting: CTRL. WORD 1
871
Setpoint description PO2; Factory setting: SPEED
872
Setpoint description PO3; Factory setting: NO FUNCTION

P870/P871/P872 define the content of the process output data words PO1/PO2/
PO3. This is necessary so MOVIDRIVE can allocate the appropriate setpoints. The
following process output assignments are available:
Assignment
NO FUNCTION
SPEED
CURRENT
Description
The content of the process output data word is ignored.
Speed setpoint selection in rpm.
Current setpoint selection (for torque control)
POSITION LO
Position setpoint low word
POSITION HI
Position setpoint high word
MAX. SPEED
MAX. CURRENT
Maximum system speed (P302/P312)

Current limitation in % of IN of the inverter (P303/P313)
SLIP
Slip compensation (P324/P334)
RAMP
Ramp time for setpoint selection
CTRL. WORD 1
Control signals for start/stop, etc.
CTRL. WORD 2
SPEED [%]
IPOS PO data
Control signals for start/stop, etc.

Selection of a speed setpoint in % of nmax
Specification of a 16-bit-coded value for IPOSplus
'Fieldbus Unit Profile' manual for additional explanations
145
P6..
P60.
P600
873
Actual value description PI1; Factory setting: STATUS WORD1
874
Actual value description PI2; Factory setting: SPEED
875
Actual value description PI3; Factory setting: NO FUNCTION

P873/P874/P875 define the content of the process input data words PI1/PI2/PI3.
This is necessary so MOVIDRIVE can allocate the appropriate actual values. The
following process input assignments are available:
Assignment
Description
NO FUNCTION
The content of the process input data word is 0000hex
SPEED
Current actual speed value of the drive in rpm.
OUTPUT CURRENT
Momentary output current of the system in % of IN
ACTIVE CURRENT
Momentary active current of the system in % of IN:

Positive sign = Positive torque
Negative sign = Negative torque
POSITION LO*
Current actual position low word
POSITION HI*
Current actual position high word
STATUS WORD1
STATUS WORD2
SPEED [%]
IPOS PI-DATA
The actual position is read from:

P941 'Source actual position'
Status information of the inverter

Status information of the inverter
Current actual speed value in % of nmax.
Checkback of a 16-bit-coded value for IPOSplus
Both assignments must always be set.
'Fieldbus Unit Profile' manual for additional explanations

876
PO data enable
ON
The process output data sent most recently by the fieldbus controller come into effect.
OFF
The process output data which were most recently valid remain in effect.
877
DeviceNet PD configuration
Setting range: 1...24 PD / Param + 1...24 PD
This parameter sets the process data configuration for the DFD11A DeviceNet interface.
88_
Manual mode (only available in DBG11B keypad)

The inverter can be controlled using the DBG11B keypad using the manual operation
function. The inverter must be in 'No enable' status in order for manual operation to
be started. 'No enable' status means DI /Controller inhibit = '1' and binary inputs
DI1 CW/STOP, DI2 CCW/STOP and DI3 Enable/Rapid stop = '0' which are programmed in the factory settings.
Binary input DI /Controller inhibit is also effective in manual operation. The other
binary inputs are ineffective during manual operation. Binary input DI '/Controller
inhibit' must get a '1' signal to enable the drive to be started in manual operation. The
drive can also be stopped in manual operation by DI = '0'. The direction of rotation
is not determined by the 'CW/stop' or 'CCW/stop' binary inputs. Instead, you select
the direction of rotation using the keypad ( Figure 71).
146
P6..
P60.
P600
Manual operation remains active even after the supply system power has been
switched off/on. The inverter is then inhibited, however. A change of direction command using the or key produces an enable and a start in the selected sense of
rotation at nmin. The speed is increased and decreased using the and keys. The
modification speed is 150 rpm per second.
880
MANUAL
OFF
OPERATION
-key
-key
880
MANUAL
_OFF
OPERATION
- or -key
E-key
_ DIR. OF ROTATION
L
<E>=EXIT
R
Q-key
-key
_ 0%In
<Q>=STOP
Q-key
-key
-key
0 rpm
R
-key
_ 0%In
L
0 rpm
<Q>=STOP
-key: increase speed

-key: decrease speed
02406AEN
Figure 71: Manual mode with DBG11B
The signals at the binary inputs take effect as soon as manual operation is finished.
Binary input DI '/Controller inhibit' does not have to be switched from '1' to '0' and
back to '1'. The drive can start according to the signals at the binary inputs and the
setpoint sources.
Note that the binary inputs DI1 CW/STOP, DI2 CCW/STOP and DI3 Enable/
Rapid stop which are programmed in the factory settings receive a '0' signal when
you end manual operation.
Connection check
In manual mode, a connection check is always active between the DBG11B and the inverter or between the USS21A and the inverter. Parameter P812 'RS-485 timeout delay'
does not have any function. The inverter must receive a valid RS-485 telegram within
the fixed time interval of t = 500 ms. If the time is exceeded, the drive is stopped with the
emergency stop ramp and fault message F43 'RS-485 timeout' is signaled.
Important: The fault is automatically reset and the drive is enabled when the inverter
once again receives a valid telegram.
880
Manual operation
ON
Manual mode is activated.
OFF
No manual mode.
147
P6..
P60.
P600
PARAMETER GROUP 9__, IPOS PARAMETERS

The IPOS parameters are described in detail in the IPOSplus manual.
Be aware that modifying these parameters without knowledge of the IPOS program which may be active can give rise to unexpected movements and place undesirable loads on the mechanical driveline. Knowledge of the IPOSplus manual
is an essential prerequisite for setting these parameters.
90_

The purpose of reference travel is to establish a machine zero to which all absolute
positioning commands refer. It is possible to select from various strategies, referred
to as reference travel strategies, for this purpose ( P903 Reference travel type).
These define appropriate travel modes, for example to search for a reference cam.
Starting from the reference point located using reference travel, P900 Reference
offset permits the machine zero point to be moved in accordance with the following
equation:
Machine zero = Reference position + Reference offset
The speeds of the travel movements required on the basis of the reference travel
type are set using P901 Reference speed 1 and P902 Reference speed 2.
In addition, P904 can be used for specifying whether the zero pulse should be used
for reference travel.
91_
910

Setting range: 0.1...0.5...32
Setting value for the P controller of the position control loop in IPOSplus. The value
from P210 (P gain hold controller) is adopted here in the default setting.
911/912
Positioning ramp 1/2

Setting range: 0.01...1...20 s
Setting value for the ramp which is used during the positioning operation. The same
ramp (positioning ramp 1) is always used for acceleration and deceleration when the
ramp type setting (P916) is SINE and SQUARED. Deceleration takes place in accordance with positioning ramp 2 when a LINEAR ramp type is set.
913/914
Travel speed CW / CCW

Specifies the speed with which positioning should occur. The setting must be
matched to the maximum motor speed.
P302/P312 limit P913/P914, so consequently always set P302/P312 greater than
P913/P914 (by approx. 10 %). Otherwise, there may be a lag error!
148
P6..
P60.
P600
915
Speed feedforward
Setting range: -199.99...0...100...199.99 %
With a value of 100 %, the drive operates with a linear speed profile optimized in respect of time. If a value less than 100 % is specified, a larger gap between position
setpoint and actual position occurs (lag distance) during a positioning operation. This
results in a 'soft' run-in to the target position for the acceleration procedure.
This function is inoperative with 'sine' and 'squared' acceleration types!

916
Ramp type
This parameter specifies the type of positioning ramp. This has an effect on the
speed or acceleration characteristic during positioning.
Ramp type
LINEAR
SQUARED
SINE
Positioning performance
Optimum time, however block-shaped acceleration characteristic
Smoother acceleration characteristic than LINEAR
Very smooth acceleration characteristic; higher torque requirement
than with SQUARED
BUSRAMP
CAM-CONTROL
I-SYNCHR.OPERAT.
92_
IPOS Monitoring
920/921
SW limit switch CW/CCW
Setpoint interpolation for SBus.

Only available in the technology version.
Setting range: -(231-1)...0...231-1 inc

The software limit switches permit the user to restrict the range in which travel commands are accepted. This is done via the software. The limits of the movement range
are specified using these two parameters (software limit switches). If P941 'Source
actual position' is set to MOTOR ENC. (X15) or EXTERN.ENC (X14), then these do
not take effect until after performance of a reference travel. If the software limit
switches are in effect, the system checks whether the target position (H492) of the
current movement command is beyond the software limit switches. The movement
command is not performed if the target position is beyond. If a drive is already in motion, it is decelerated using the emergency stop ramp. Fault message F78 (IPOS SW
limit switch) is generated. The fault response is an emergency stop followed by an
inhibit. The drive no longer has a reference point after the fault is reset!
Reset options:
1-signal at the 'reset' input
Mains power OFF / ON (not in 24 V backup mode)
Manual reset via MOVITOOLS/Shell
Reset using IPOSplus control word (H484)
Following a fault reset (F78), the monitoring function for the software limit switches
is not reactivated until the drive has been moved to its reference point again!
Deactivation: Set both parameter values to 0 during uni-directional operation. This
deactivates the software limit switch function.
149
P6..
P60.
P600
922
Position window
Setting range: 0...5...32767 inc
The parameter defines a distance range (position window) around the target position
of a travel or STOP command. The 'Axis in position' = YES condition applies if a drive
is inside the position window around the current target position (H492). The 'Axis in
position' information is used as a final condition for waiting positioning commands. It
can be used further as an output terminal function.
923
Lag error window

Setting range: 0...5000...231-1 inc
The lag error window defines a permitted difference in values between the setpoint
and actual positions. A lag error message or lag error response is triggered if the limit
is exceeded. You can set the responses with P834 'Response DRS LAG ERROR'.
Deactivation: Setting value = 0 deactivates lag error monitoring
93_
930
Override
The override function makes it possible to change the travel speed for positioning operations which is programmed in the IPOSplus program. The speed can be altered
within the range from 0 to 150 % of the specifically programmed speed. The analog
input (X11:2/3) is used for this purpose. As such, 0 to 150 % corresponds to 0...10 V
on the analog input. However, the maximum value for the speed is always restricted
by P302, 'Maximum speed'.
931
CTRL word Task 1 (only in the DBG11B keypad, not in MOVITOOLS)

Setting range: START / STOP
Task 1 of the IPOSplus program is started or stopped.
932
CTRL word Task 2 (only in the DBG11B keypad, not in MOVITOOLS)

Display parameter, cannot be set using DBG11B.
Indicating range: START / STOP
START = Task 2 of the IPOSplus program is currently being processed.
STOP
= Task 2 of the IPOSplus program is stopped.
94_
IPOS Encoder
940
IPOS Variables edit (only in the DBG11B keypad, not in MOVITOOLS)

The IPOS variable can be altered if P940 is set to 'ON'.
941
Source actual position

Setting range: MOTOR ENC. (X15) / EXTERN.ENC (X14) / ABSOL.ENC. (DIP)
Defines the encoder to which IPOSplus positions.
Only the settings P941 = MOTOR ENC. (X15) and P941 = EXTERN.ENC (X14) are
permitted with MOVIDRIVE compact.
150
P6..
P60.
P600
942/943
Encoder factor numerator/denominator

In the event of positioning to an external encoder (X14), then these two parameters
for used for adapting the resolution to the motor encoder (X15).
944
Encoder scaling ext. encoder

Setting range: 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 / 32 / 64
The significance of the travel resolution of the external encoder (incremental encoder
on basic unit: X14) is adapted using this parameter.
945
Encoder type (X14)

Setting range: TTL / SIN/COS / HIPERFACE
946
Counting direction X14 (effective with MCH4_A only)

Setting range: NORMAL / INVERTED
Determines the counting direction of the Hiperface encoder connected to X14. The
setting must be done so that the counting direction of motor encoder (X15) matches
the one of the external encoder (X14).
96_
IPOS Modulo function

The IPOS modulo function is used for endless positioning, for example with circular indexing tables or chain conveyors. Refer to the IPOS manual for detailed information.
960
Modulo function
OFF
The modulo function is switched off.
SHORT
The 'short travel' modulo function is active. The drive moves from its actual position
to the target position by the shortest possible route. Both directions of rotation are
possible.
CW
The 'clockwise' modulo function is active. The drives moves from its actual position
to the target position with the 'CW' direction of rotation, even if this means moving a
longer distance. The 'CCW' direction of rotation is not possible.
CCW
The 'counterclockwise' modulo function is active. The drives moves from its actual
position to the target position with the 'CCW' direction of rotation, even if this means
moving a longer distance. The 'CW' direction of rotation is not possible.
961
Modulo numerator
Numerator value for simulating the ratio (gear unit + additional gear).
962
Modulo denominator
Denominator value for simulating the ratio (gear unit + additional gear).
963
Modulo encoder resolution

Setting range: 0...4096...20000
Resolution of the selected IPOS encoder system in increments.
151
Schematic procedure
Project Planning
5.1
Schematic procedure
Drive properties
The required drive properties are the chief factors determining the selection of the inverter. The following figure is intended to provide assistance.
System selection
Positioning accuracy of the motor

shaft
< 360
< 5...45
< 1
Setting range (reference 3000 rpm)

1:200
1:800
Control
> 1:800
Pos. ctrl.
n-ctrl.
M-ctrl.
Voltage-controlled flux vector control

(VFC) without encoder
Voltage-controlled flux vector control

(VFC) with encoder
Current-controlled flux vector control

(CFC or SERVO) with encoder or resolver
MOVIDRIVE compact MCF4_A with

asynchronous AC motor (DR, DT, DV,
D) without speed feedback
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV4_A with

asynchronous AC motor (DR, DT, DV,
D) and speed feedback
Motor selection for VFC

Max. torque < 150 % MN
Max. speed < 140 % ntransition
Thermal loading (setting range, cyclic duration factor)
Selection of the correct encoder (if necessary)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV4_A with

asynchronous servomotor (CT, CV)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCS4_A with
synchronous servomotor (CM, DS, DY)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A with
asynchronous servomotor (CT, CV,
CM)
Motor selection for CFC and SERVO

Max. torque < 300 % MN
R.m.s. torque < MN at average speed
Torque characteristic curves
Selecting the correction encoder, for example Hiperface
encoder only with MCH4_A
Selecting the MOVIDRIVE

Unit without fieldbus (MC_40A), with PROFIBUS-DP (MC_41A) or Hiperface and INTERBUS FO (MCH42A)
Standard type or technology type
Motor/inverter assignment
Continuous power and peak power in voltage-controlled flux vector control (VFC)
Continuous current and peak current in current-controlled flux vector control (CFC or SERVO)
Selecting the braking resistor

On the basis of the calculated regenerative power and the intermittency factor cdf
Options
EMC measures (NF, HD, shielded motor feeder)
Operation/communication (keypad, serial interfaces)
Key
Pos. ctrl.
152
= Positioning control
n-ctrl.
= Speed control
M-ctrl.
= Torque control
VFC
= Voltage-controlled flux vector control (voltage flux control)
CFC
= Current-controlled flux vector control (current flux control) for asynchronous servomotors
SERVO
= Current-controlled flux vector control for synchronous servomotors
MN
= Rated torque of the motor
ntrans
= Rated speed (transition speed) of the motor
Control characteristics
5.2
Characteristic
parameters
MOVIDRIVE drive inverters achieve excellent control characteristics thanks to their optimally adapted control algorithms. The following characteristic parameters apply to operation with four-pole SEW motors and synchronous SEW servomotors.
n
Transient recovery time
Rotational accuracy
nsetp
Maximum
speed deviation
Step change in load M = 80%

of rated motor torque
t
01762BEN
Figure 72: Characteristic parameters for the control characteristics
The following values apply to MOVIDRIVE inverters in combination with motors of the
same power:
Continuous speed range
nmax = 3000 rpm
Static control accuracy1) with

reference to nmax = 3000 rpm
MCF, VFC without encoder
1:200
0.30%
MCV/MCH, VFC with encoder (1024 inc.)
1:800
0.01%
MCV/MCH, CFC with encoder (1024 inc.)
1:3000
0.01%
MCV/MCH, CFC with sin/cos encoder
1:5000
0.01%
MDS, SERVO with resolver

MCH, CFC/SERVO with Hiperface encoder
> 1:3000
0.01%
1:5000
0.01%
1) = Deviation from speed actual value - speed mean value to setpoint speed
The defined control characteristics are maintained in the specified speed range.
Control response
By way of example, the following table shows the differences in control characteristics
between the MCF and MCV MOVIDRIVE compact types.
Settings
Set speed nset = 1000 rpm
Step change in load M = 80 % of rated motor torque
Torsion-free load with mass inertia ratio JL/JM = 1.8
MOVIDRIVE compact
type
Transient recovery
time in relation to the
value of MCF
Max. speed deviation at True-running accuracy at

M = 80 %, with
M = const. in relation to
reference to n = 3000 rpm
n = 3000 rpm
MCF, VFC
Without encoder
100%
1.8%
0.20%
MCV, VFC with encoder

(1024 increments)
90%
1.5%
0.17%
MCV, CFC with encoder

(1024 increments)
35%
1.0%
0.07%
MCV, CFC with

sin/cos encoder
25%
0.7%
0.03%
153
Description of applications
5.3
Inverter selection
The large number of different drive applications can be divided up into five categories.
The five categories are listed below and the suitable SEW inverter recommended. This
assignment is based on the required setting range and the resulting control process.
1. Drives with a base load and a speed-dependent load, e.g. conveyor belt drives.
Low requirements with regard to the setting range (motor without encoder)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCF4_A (VFC)
High requirements with regard to the setting range (motor with encoder)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV4_A (VFC-n-CONTROL)
2. Dynamic load, e.g. trolleys; brief high torque demand for acceleration followed by low
load.
High dynamic requirements (asynchronous or synchronous servomotor)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV/MCH4_A (CFC)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCS/MCH4_A (SERVO)
3. Static load, e.g. hoists; chiefly steady high static load with overload peaks.
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV/MCH4_A (CFC)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCS/MCH4_A (SERVO)
4. Load falling in inverse proportion to speed, e.g. winch or coil drives.
Torque control (asynchronous or synchronous servomotor)

MOVIDRIVE compact MCV/MCH4_A (CFC&M-CONTROL)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCS/MCH4_A (SERVO&M-CTRL.)
5. Variable torque load, e.g. fans and pumps.
Low load at low speed and no load peaks, 125 % utilization (ID = 125 % IN) (motor
without encoder)
Project planning
for trolleys
154
The motor load in the dynamic sections determines the peak motor power according to
which the dimensions are to be set. The thermal load determines the required continuous power of the motor. The thermal load is determined on the basis of the movement
cycle, with the load from acceleration and deceleration as well as the standstill times.
The speed characteristic is a significant factor in determining the self-cooling of the motor. See also 'Motor selection examples' on page 159.
Project planning
for hoists
In practice, the question of setting the size of hoists is addressed with regard to special
thermal and safety-critical criteria.
Thermal considerations
In contrast to trolleys, hoists require approx. 70...90 % of the rated motor torque assuming constant speed upwards or downwards and the standard configuration.
Starting torque
The highest operating torque is required in the event of acceleration with maximum load
in the UPWARDS hoisting direction.
VFC&HOIST
The 4-pole geared motor should always be designed for a maximum speed of 2100 rpm
(70 Hz) with a transition speed of 1500 rpm (50 Hz) and 2500 rpm (83 Hz) at a transition
speed of 1800 rpm (60 Hz). This means the gear unit input speed is increased by a factor
of 1.4. Consequently, it is also necessary to choose a gear ratio which is higher by a
factor of 1.4. This measure means that no torque is lost on the output shaft in the field
weakening range (50...70 Hz or 60...83 Hz), since the higher gear ratio compensates for
the inversely proportionate fall in torque in relation to speed (frequency). Furthermore,
the startup torque is 1.4 times greater in the range from 0...1500 rpm (0...50 Hz) or
0...1800 rpm (0...60 Hz). Other advantages are that the speed range is greater and the
self-cooling of the motor more powerful.
VMot
Vmax
nbase
M/MN
1.4
1.0
n
[rpm]
0
0
a
Torque reserve range
1500
(1800)
2100
(2500)
n
[rpm]
0
0
1500
(1800)
2100
(2500)
04949AEN
Figure 73: a = Recommended voltage/speed characteristics and resultant torque characteristic
The motor power for hoists is selected according to the load type.
S1 (100 % c.d.f.): Motor power 1 level higher than the selected inverter power, e.g.
for lengthy upwards travel or continuous elevators.
S3 (40 % c.d.f.): Motor power according to the selected inverter power.
The hoist function on the inverter should be activated irrespective of the above guidelines. See also 'Motor selection examples' on page 159.
Encoder monitoring
MOVIDRIVE compact has encoder monitoring for TTL sensors, sin/cos and Hiperface
encoders (only MCH). There is no encoder monitoring for HTL sensors.
SEW recommends using TTL sensors or sin/cos encoders for speed controlled hoist
drives and activating encoder monitoring.
Avoid using an HTL sensor if possible.
Variable torque
load (pumps,
fans)
In these applications, there is no chance of the motor suffering a thermal overload at low
speeds. The maximum load occurs at the maximum speed; there are no overload peaks.
As a result, the dimensions of MOVIDRIVE and the motor can be selected so the continuous motor current is less than or equal to the continuous output current (VFC operating mode, 125 % of the nominal output current at fPWM = 4 kHz) of the MOVIDRIVE.
This means MOVIDRIVE can operate a motor whose power is one level greater. See
also 'Motor selection examples' on page 159.
155
Motor selection for asynchronous AC motors (VFC)
5.4
Basic recommendations
Voltage/frequency characteristic
Only use motors with a thermal classification of F at least.
Use TF thermistor sensors or TH winding thermostats. TH should be preferred in the

case of multi-motor drives on one inverter. The series connection of TH contacts (NC
contacts) is not subject to any restriction if joint monitoring is provided.
For multi-motor drives, we recommend that the motors should not differ from one another by more than 3 type levels.
4-pole motors should be preferred. This particularly applies to geared motors which
are operated with a high oil filling level as a result of their vertical mounting position.
Generally speaking, the motor can be operated at its listed power without forced
cooling if the operating conditions differ from S1-mode, e.g. positioning drive with
1:20 speed range in S3-mode.
Avoid selecting a motor which is too large, especially in case of a delta connection.
Otherwise, the inverter may trigger a short circuit detection function due to the small
winding resistance of the motor (1/3 that of a star connection).
A MOVIDRIVE compact MCV4_A (with encoder connection) is required for speed

control. The motor must then be equipped with an incremental encoder, preferably
with 1024 increments/revolution.
The asynchronous motor follows a load-dependent voltage/frequency characteristic in

VFC operating mode. It is possible to achieve full motor torque down to minimum speeds
because the motor model is continuously calculated. This characteristic curve is set by
entering the rated motor voltage and the rated frequency of the motor in the startup function. The setting determines the speed-dependent torque and power characteristics of
the asynchronous motor.
Voutp [V]
400
230
50
87
f [Hz]
01650BEN
Figure 74: Voltage/frequency characteristics of the asynchronous motor
Sample asynchronous motor 230/

400 V, 50 Hz
1 Star connection; 400 V, 50 Hz

2 Delta connection: 230 V, 50 Hz
3 Delta connection: 400 V, 87 Hz
The inverter output voltage VA is limited by the supply voltage which is connected. The
'nominal system voltage' input value in the startup function limits the effective value of
the maximum output voltage. This restriction is used whenever the connected motor has
a lower design voltage than the power supply of the inverter. The maximum permitted
motor voltage should be entered. Furthermore, make sure that the 'nominal system voltage' input value is less than or equal to the supply voltage of the inverter.
156
Speed/torque
characteristics
The field weakening range starts when the set maximum output voltage of the inverter
is reached. As the speed increases, the motor generates:
constant torque with increasing power in the basic speed range,
constant power with an inversely proportionate decrease in torque in the field weakening range.
When determining the maximum speed in the field weakening range, note that the rated
torque MN (in relation to the rated speed, e.g. nN = 1500 rpm) falls in inverse proportion
and the breakdown torque MK is reduced in an inverse quadratic relationship. The MK/
MN ratio is a motor-specific parameter. The MOVIDRIVE pull-out protection limits the
speed when the maximum possible torque is reached.
3.0
M
MN
2.5
MK = 3.0 MN
MK = 2.8 MN
MK = 2.5 MN
MK = 2.2 MN
2.0
MK = 1.8 MN
1.5
MN
1.0
0.5
Armature range
0
Field weakening range

1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000 3300 3600
n / rpm
01729BEN
Figure 75: Quadratically falling breakdown torque
With geared motors, the maximum motor speed is dependent on the size and mounting
position of the gear unit. The speed should not exceed 3000 rpm due to the resulting
noise and oil churning losses.
Dynamic applications (Pinverter
greater than Pmotor)
The startup function sets the current limit of the inverter (P303/P313) to 150 % of the
rated motor current. The value of the current limit refers to the rated inverter current.
As a result, 150 % of the rated motor current is less than 150 % of the rated inverter
current (value of P303/P313). This parameter must be set to a higher value manually
for dynamic applications.
The startup function sets the slip compensation parameter (P324/P334) to the nominal slip of the motor. In the case of VFC-n-CONTROL, the internal slip limiting function allows the slip to reach max. 150 % of this setting. Consequently, the motor develops at most 150 % of the nominal motor torque. The slip compensation parameter
(P324) must be increased accordingly for greater torques.
Set parameter P324 'Slip compensation' to max. 130 % of the nominal slip of the
motor for stable operation.
Combinations
with Pinverter
greater than 4
Pmotor
The large difference between the rated inverter current and the rated motor current
means that these combinations cannot be started up without taking special measures:
Project planning for connecting the motor in a delta connection. This means the motor current is increased by a factor 3 and the unfavorable ratio is reduced.
The motor must be started up in VFC & GROUP operating mode if this measure does
not suffice. In this operating mode, the inverter operates without slip compensation
and simulates a constant-voltage constant-frequency system (system with a constant U/f ratio).
157
Motor selection in delta/star topology (230/400 VAC / 50 Hz)

Motors for 380 VAC / 60 Hz can also be allocated on the basis of this selection table.
Pmax [kW (HP)] for operation on MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCH 4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units)
/ 400 VAC1)
Connection
Cooling
Self-cooling
Forced
Self-cooling
Forced
10 - 50
6 - 60
5 - 70 / 5.5 - 80
2.5 - 50 / 3 - 603)
9 - 87
2.5 - 873)
300 - 1500
180 - 1800
150 - 2100 / 165 - 2400
75 - 1500 / 90 - 1800
270 - 2610
75 - 2610
1:5
1:10
1:15
1:20
1:10
1:20
P = Preduced
P = Pn
fmin...fmax [Hz]
nmin...nmax [rpm]
Setting range
Motor type
Rated power Pn
[kW (HP)]
/ 230 VAC2)
[kW (HP)]
With MCF/
MCV/MCH5)
4_A...-5_3
P = Pincreased4)
With MCF/
MCV/MCH5)
4_A...-5_3
[kW (HP)]
DT71D4
0.37
(0.5)
0.25
(0.33)
0.37
(0.5)
0.55
(0.75)
DT80K4
0.55
(0.75)
0.37
(0.5)
0.55
(0.75)
0.75
(1.0)
DT80N4
0.75
(1.0)
0.55
(0.75)
0.75
(1.0)
1.1
(1.5)
DT90S4
1.1
(1.5)
0.75
(1.0)
1.1
(1.5)
1.5
(2.0)
0015
0015
With MCF/
MCV/MCH5)
4_A...-5_3
[kW (HP)]
0015
DT90L4
1.5
(2.0)
1.1
(1.5)
1.5
(2.0)
2.2
(3.0)
0022
DV100M4
2.2
(3.0)
1.5
(2.0)
2.2
(3.0)
0022
3.0
(4.0)
0030
DV100L4
3.0
(4.0)
2.2
(3.0)
0022
3.0
(4.0)
0030
4.0
(5.4)
0040
DV112M4
4.0
(5.4)
3.0
(4.0)
0030
4.0
(5.4)
0040
5.5
(7.5)
0055
DV132S4
5.5
(7.5)
4.0
(5.4)
0040
5.5
(7.5)
0055
7.5
(10)
0075
DV132M4
7.5
(10)
5.5
(7.5)
0055
7.5
(10)
0075
9.2
(12.5)
DV132ML4
9.2
(12.5)
7.5
(10)
0075
9.2
(12.5)
11
(15)
DV160M4
11
(15)
9.2
(12.5)
11
(15)
15
(20)
0150
DV160L4
15
(20)
11
(15)
18.5
(25)
0220
DV180M4
18.5
(25)
15
(20)
22
(30)
0300
DV180L4
22
(30)
18.5
(25)
DV200L4
30
(40)
22
(30)
0110
0150
0220
0110
15
(20)
18.5
(25)
22
(30)
30
(40)
30
(40)
0300
37
(50)
0150
0220
0110
0370
DV225S4
37
(50)
30
(40)
0300
37
(50)
0370
45
(60)
0450
DV225M4
45
(60)
37
(50)
0370
45
(60)
0450
55
(75)
0550
75
(100)
0750
DV250M4
55
(75)
45
(60)
0450
55
(75)
0550
DV280S4
75
(100)
55
(75)
0550
75
(100)
0750
D280M4
90
(120)
75
(100)
0750
1) Also applies to motors with rated voltage 460 V or 500 V and to 400 V / 690 V motors with connection.
2) Also applies to motors with rated voltage 266 V or 290 V.
3) The following applies to MCF, MCV and MCH without speed control: fmin = 0.5 Hz
4) Pincreased means that the motor is operated at the power of the next larger motor (1 frame size), rather than with the 3-fold power.
5) The devices listed here permit intermittent loads of up to 1.5 times the nominal load in the specific application. With variable torque
load and constant load without overload, each inverter can also be operated with an increased continuous output power ( Sec. Technical Data). The continuous output current of 125 % of the rated unit current is only available at fPWM = 4 kHz in the VFC operating
modes.
158
Examples for motor selection delta/star topology 230/400 V

Trolley
drive
Constant load with overload (acceleration) and low load when in motion:
Ptravel = 1.3 kW
Pmax = 13 kW
nmin = 270 rpm, setting range 1:10
nmax = 2610 rpm
In inverter mode with adapted power (P = Pn), the motor output can be 150 % of its listed
power during the acceleration phase. Consequently:
PMot = Pmax : 1.5 = 13 kW : 1.5 = 8.67 kW
A DV132M4 with delta connection (Pn = 9.2 kW) is selected.
The selection table ( page 158) allocates a MOVIDRIVE compact MCF60A0110 (P =
Pn).
5
Hoist
drive
High constant load with intermittent overload (acceleration):
Pmax = 26 kW
Psustained = 20 kW
Speed range 1:15, low speed only for positioning
Brake applied when stationary
Load type S3 (40 % c.d.f.)
The inverter output can be 150 % of its rated current during acceleration. Consequently,
a MOVIDRIVE compact MCF60A0220 is selected.
In view of the load type (S3, 40 % c.d.f.), the selection table allocates motor type
DV180L4 (Pn = 22 kW) in a star connection.
Sec. Project planning for hoists on page page 155 for more information.
Fan/
pump
Variable torque load with the following power values:
Pmax = 4.8 kW
nmax = 1400 rpm, continuous duty with nmax
The motor can be operated at its listed power (P = Pn) even without forced cooling due
to the quadratically falling torque. This means the DV132S4 motor type with star connection (Pn = 5.5 kW) is adequate.
The selection table allocates a MOVIDRIVE compact MCF60A0055 (P = Pn). However, the inverter can be operated with an increased output power because this case involves a variable torque load without overload. Consequently, a MOVIDRIVE compact
MCF60A0040 is sufficient.
159
Motor selection in double-star/star topology (230/460 VAC / 60 Hz)

Pmax [kW (HP)] for operation on MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCH 4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units)
/ 460 VAC
Connection
Cooling
Self-cooling
Self-cooling
Forced
Self-cooling
Forced
6 - 90
10 - 60
0 - 601)
10 - 120
0 - 1201)
180 - 2700
200 - 1800
0 - 1800
200 - 3600
0 - 3600
1:15
1:6
1:15
1:12
1:20
fmin...fmax [Hz]
nmin...nmax [rpm]
Setting range
P = Preduced
Motor type
DT71D4
Rated power Pn
[kW (HP)]
[kW (HP)]
0.37
(0.5)
0.25
DT80K4
0.55
(0.75)
DT80N4
0.75
(1.0)
DT90S4
1.1
DT90L4
1.5
/ 230 VAC
With MCF/
MCV/MCH3)
4_A...-5_3
With MCF/
MCV/MCH3)
4_A...-5_3
[kW (HP)]
(0.33)
0.37
(0.5)
0.37
(0.5)
0.55
(0.75)
0.55
(0.75)
0.75
(1.0)
(1.5)
0.75
(1.0)
1.1
(2.0)
1.1
(1.5)
1.5
0015
P = Pincreased2)
P = Pn
With MCF/
MCV/MCH3)
4_A...-5_3
[kW (HP)]
0.75
(1.0)
1.1
(1.5)
1.5
(2.0)
(1.5)
2.2
(3.0)
0022
(2.0)
3.0
(4.0)
0030
0015
0015
DV100M4
2.2
(3.0)
1.5
(2.0)
2.2
(3.0)
0022
4.0
(5.4)
0040
DV100L4
3.7
(5.0)
2.2
(3.0)
0022
3.0
(4.0)
0030
5.5
(7.5)
0055
0075
DV112M4
4.0
(5.4)
3.0
(4.0)
0030
4.0
(5.4)
0040
7.5
(10)
DV132S4
5.5
(7.5)
4.0
(5.4)
0040
5.5
(7.5)
0055
9.2
(12.5)
DV132M4
7.5
(10)
5.5
(7.5)
0055
7.5
(10)
0075
11
(15)
DV132ML4
9.2
(12.5)
7.5
(10)
0075
9.2
(12.5)
15
(20)
11
(15)
15
(20)
DV160M4
11
(15)
9.2
(12.5)
DV160L4
15
(20)
11
(15)
0110
0110
0150
0110
0150
18.5
(25)
22
(30)
30
(40)
0300
37
(50)
0370
0220
DV180M4
18.5
(25)
15
(20)
DV180L4
22
(30)
18.5
(25)
DV200L4
30
(40)
22
(30)
30
(40)
0300
45
(60)
0450
DV225S4
37
(50)
30
(40)
0300
37
(50)
0370
55
(75)
0550
DV225M4
45
(60)
37
(50)
0370
45
(60)
0450
75
(100)
0750
DV250M4
55
(75)
45
(60)
0450
55
(75)
0550
75
(100)
0150
0220
DV280S4
75
(100)
55
(75)
0550
D280M4
90
(120)
75
(100)
0750
18.5
(25)
22
(30)
0220
0750
2) Pincreased means that the motor is operated at the power of the next larger motor (1 frame size), rather than with the 3-fold power.
modes.
160
Motor selection with the delta topology (230 VAC / 50 Hz)

Pmax [kW (HP)] for operation on MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCH 4_A...-2_3 (230 V units)
/ 230 VAC
Connection
Cooling
fmin...fmax [Hz]
nmin...nmax [rpm]
Self-cooling
Forced
10 - 50
6 - 60
5 - 70 / 5.5 - 80
2.5 - 50 / 3 - 601)
300 - 1500
180 - 1800
150 - 2100 / 165 - 2400
75 - 1500 / 90 - 1800
1:5
1:10
1:15
1:20
P = Preduced
P = Pn
Setting range
Motor type2)
Rated power Pn
[kW (HP)]
[kW (HP)]
With MCF/
MCV/MCH3)
4_A...-2_3
With MCF/
MCV/MCH3)
4_A...-2_3
[kW (HP)]
DT71D4
0.37
(0.5)
0.25
(0.33)
0.37
(0.5)
DT80K4
0.55
(0.75)
0.37
(0.5)
0.55
(0.75)
DT80N4
0.75
(1.0)
0.55
(0.75)
DT90S4
1.1
(1.5)
0.75
(1.0)
DT90L4
1.5
(2.0)
1.1
DV100M4
2.2
(3.0)
1.5
DV100L4
3.0
(4.0)
2.2
(3.0)
DV112M4
4.0
(5.4)
3.0
(4.0)
DV132S4
5.5
(7.5)
4.0
DV132M4
7.5
(10)
5.5
DV132ML4
9.2
(12.5)
DV160M4
11
(15)
DV160L4
15
(20)
11
(15)
DV180M4
18.5
(25)
15
(20)
DV180L4
22
(30)
18.5
(25)
DV200L4
30
(40)
22
(30)
DV225S4
37
(50)
30
(40)
0.75
(1.0)
1.1
(1.5)
(1.5)
1.5
(2.0)
(2.0)
2.2
(3.0)
0022
0022
3.0
(4.0)
0030
0030
4.0
(5.4)
0040
(5.4)
0040
5.5
(7.5)
0055
(7.5)
0055
7.5
(10)
0075
7.5
(10)
0075
9.2
(12.5)
9.2
(12.5)
11
(15)
0015
0110
0150
0220
0300
0015
0110
15
(20)
0150
18.5
(25)
0220
22
(30)
30
(40)
0300
-
2) In load type S3 (40 % c.d.f.), the motor must not be operated at its listed power (P = Pn) even without forced-cooling. Example: Pstat
= 2 kW, Pdyn = 2.5 kW selected motor DV100M4 (Pn = 2.2 kW).
modes.
161
Motor selection with the double-star topology (230 VAC / 60 Hz)

Pmax [kW (HP)] for operation on MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCH 4_A...-2_3 (230 V units)
/ 230 VAC
Connection
Cooling
Self-cooling
Self-cooling
Forced
6 - 90
10 - 60
0 - 601)
180 - 2700
200 - 1800
0 - 1800
1:15
1:6
1:15
fmin...fmax [Hz]
nmin...nmax [rpm]
Setting range
P = Preduced
Motor type
DT71D4
Rated power Pn
[kW (HP)]
[kW (HP)]
P = Pn
With MCF/
MCV/MCH2)
4_A...-2_3
0.37
(0.5)
0.25
(0.33)
DT80K4
0.55
(0.75)
0.37
DT80N4
0.75
(1.0)
0.55
DT90S4
1.1
(1.5)
0.75
(1.0)
DT90L4
1.5
(2.0)
1.1
(1.5)
DV100M4
2.2
(3.0)
1.5
(2.0)
DV100L4
3.7
(5.0)
2.2
(3.0)
0022
DV112M4
4.0
(5.4)
3.0
(4.0)
DV132S4
5.5
(7.5)
4.0
(5.4)
DV132M4
7.5
(10)
5.5
DV132ML4
9.2
(12.5)
7.5
DV160M4
11
(15)
9.2
(12.5)
DV160L4
15
(20)
11
(15)
DV180M4
18.5
(25)
15
(20)
DV180L4
22
(30)
18.5
(25)
DV200L4
30
(40)
22
(30)
DV225S4
37
(50)
30
(40)
0.37
(0.5)
(0.5)
0.55
(0.75)
(0.75)
0.75
(1.0)
0015
With MCF/
MCV/MCH3)
4_A...-2_3
[kW (HP)]
0015
1.1
(1.5)
1.5
(2.0)
2.2
(3.0)
0022
3.0
(4.0)
0030
0030
4.0
(5.4)
0040
0040
5.5
(7.5)
0055
(7.5)
0055
7.5
(10)
0075
(10)
0075
9.2
(12.5)
11
(15)
15
(20)
0150
18.5
(25)
0300
22
(30)
30
(40)
0110
0150
0220
0300
0110
0370
-
modes.
162
Motor selection for asynchronous servomotors (CFC)
5.5

The torque limit (M limit) is set automatically by the startup function of the MOVITOOLS
software package. Do not alter this automatically set value!
We recommend always using the latest version of MOVITOOLS (2.70 or later) for startup. The latest MOVITOOLS version can be downloaded from our homepage
(www.sew-eurodrive.de).
Motor characteristics
The drive in CFC operating modes is characterized by its ability to control torque directly
and rapidly. This means it achieves a high level of dynamic overload capacity (up to 3
MN) and a very high speed and control range (up to 1:5000). Smooth running at speed
and positioning accuracy fulfill the exacting requirements of servo systems. This behavior is achieved by the field-oriented control function. The current components for magnetization (Id) and torque generation (Iq) are controlled separately. A feature of the CFC
operating modes is that there must always be an encoder on the motor.
The inverter needs exact data about the connected motor in order to calculate the motor
model. These data are made available by the MOVITOOLS software with the startup
function. CFC operating modes are only possible with 4-pole SEW-motors (CT/CV or
DT/DV/D), not with the other SEW motors or non-SEW motors. The necessary motor
data for the CFC operating modes are stored in MOVIDRIVE for the 4-pole SEW motors.
Typical speedtorque characteristic
MN is determined by the motor. Mmax and ntransition depend on the motor/inverter combination. You can refer to the motor selection tables for CFC mode for the values of ntransition, MN and Mmax.
M
Mmax
Mrated
1
0
nbase1.4nbase
n
01651BEN
Figure 76: Speed/torque characteristic curve in CFC operating mode

1
With integrated cooling
With forced cooling
Maximum torque
163
Magnetization
current
Dynamic drives which are supposed to accelerate without a time lag are also energized
when at a standstill without load. This means the magnetization current Id is flowing. The
inverter must be able to supply this current constantly in applications in which the output
stage is permanently enabled, e.g. in CFC & M-CONTROL mode. In particular in the
case of large motors with a slip frequency 2 Hz, you must refer to the diagrams in Sec.
'Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies' ( page 192) to check whether the
inverter can supply the current. Also check whether the thermal characteristics of the
motor are suitable for this mode of operation (forced cooling fan). Refer to the motor tables (CT/CV page 167, DT/DV/D page 172) for the magnetization current Id.
CFC operating modes are only possible with SEW-motors (CT/CV or DT/DV/D series),
not with non-SEW motors. The necessary motor data for the CFC operating modes are
stored in MOVIDRIVE for the SEW motors.
Speed is the correcting variable in the CFC modes with speed control. Torque is the correcting variable in the CFC modes with torque control (CFC & M-CONTROL).
CFC mode with

speed control
There is no reason to differentiate between quadratic, dynamic and static load types
when configuring a system for CFC mode. Project planning for an asynchronous motor
in CFC mode is undertaken in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Effective torque demand at the average speed of the application.
Mr.m.s. < Mn_mot
The point must lie below the characteristic curve for the continuous torque (Figure
76, curve 2). No forced cooling is required if this operating point lies below the characteristic curve for forced cooling (Figure 76, curve 1).
2. Maximum torque required across the speed characteristic.
Mmax < Mdyn_mot
This operating point must lie below the characteristic curve for the maximum torque
of the motor-MOVIDRIVE combination (Figure 76, curve 3).
3. Maximum speed
The maximum speed of the motor should not be configured higher than 1.4 times the
transition speed. The maximum torque available will then still be approx. 100 % of
the rated continuous torque of the motor; the input speed for the gear unit connected
to the motor output will still be less than 3000 rpm with delta connection.
nmax < 1.4 ntransition < 3000 rpm
Motor cooling
164
Self-cooling of asynchronous motors is based on the integrated fan, and consequently

depends on the speed. The integrated fan does not provide any cooling at low speeds
and when the motor is stopped. Forced cooling may be required in case of a high static
load or a high effective torque.
CFC mode with

torque control
(CFC & M-CONTROL)
This operating mode permits direct torque control of the asynchronous motor in the basic speed range (n ntransition). The setpoint sources of the speed controlled CFC mode
can also be used for torque control. All speed setpoint sources are interpreted as current
setpoint sources. The settings for evaluating the analog input ( P11_, parameter description) also remain in effect. The fixed setpoints (P16_, P17_) can be entered either
in the unit [rpm] or [%IN_inverter] ( MOVITOOLS).
The following relationship applies between the units:
3000 rpm = 150 % rated inverter current
The torque on the output shaft can then be calculated for the basic speed range (n
ntransition) using the following formulae:
Specification of a setpoint for the motor torque in %In_inverter:
M = kT In _ inverter Setpo int

04972AEN
Specification of a setpoint for the motor torque in rpm:
M = kT 1.5 In _ inverter
Setpo int
3000 rpm
04973AEN
In_inverter
= Rated output current of the inverter
kT
= Torque constant = Mn / Iq_n

Mn and Iq_n are motor-specific parameters. Refer to the motor tables (DT/DV/D
page 172, CT/CV page 167) for the values of the torque constants kT and
the motor-specific parameters Mn and Iq_n.
In addition to the current Iq for creating the torque, the inverter also needs to supply the
magnetization current Id. The inverter output current Itot which actually flows can be calculated using the following formulae:
Specification of a setpoint for the motor torque in %In_inverter:
Itot =
dSetpo int In _inverter i2 + Id2 _N

04974AEN
Specification of a setpoint for the motor torque in rpm:
Itot =
FG Setpo int 1.5 I

H
n _ inverter
3000 rpm
IJ
K
+ Id2 _ N
04975AEN
Iq_n
= Nominal value for the current which generates the torque, according to the motor
table
Id_n
= Nominal value for the magnetization current, according to the motor table
165
CT/CV asynchronous servomotors
SEW offers series CT/CV asynchronous servomotors especially for operation with
MOVIDRIVE compact in the CFC operating modes. These motors have the following
characteristics:
High power yield
The optimum winding of CT/CV motors permits a high power yield.
Organization into
speed categories
CT/CV motors are supplied in four speed categories. This ensures optimum utilization
of torque and speed.
With sin/cos
encoder as standard
As standard, CT/CV motors are equipped with a high-resolution sin/cos encoder (ES1S,
ES2S, EV1S).
As standard, with
TF or TH motor
protection
The winding temperature of the three motor phases is monitored using thermistor sensors (TF). The thermistor sensor can be connected to the TF/TH input of MOVIDRIVE
compact. Thermal monitoring is then undertaken by MOVIDRIVE compact; no additional monitoring unit is required.
Bimetallic switches (TH) can also be used instead of thermistor sensors. The bimetallic
switches are also connected to the TF/TH input.
Thermal classification F as standard
As standard, CT/CV motors are built using thermal classification F materials. The maximum permitted temperature rise is therefore 105 K.
Reinforced pinion
spigot
CT/CV motors can generate up to three times their rated motor torque during dynamic
operation. For this reason, these motors are fitted with reinforced pinion spigots for direct mounting to gear units. These spigots enable these motors to transmit the high
torque levels reliably.
Either DT/DV/D motors or CT/CV motors can be used in CFC mode. SEW recommends
using CT/CV motors in order to achieve optimum benefit from the advantages of CFC
mode.
Advantage
Disadvantage
Slower transition speed than the
CT/CV motor.
The power yield of the motor is
less than the rated motor power.
CFC mode with DT/DV/D motor

Motor selection page 175
Standard version of motor
In terms of the power yield, the

mass inertia is greater than the
CT/CV motors.
In some inverter/motor combinations, the maximum torque is limited by the mechanical strength.
Faster transition speed than DT/

DV/D motor.
CFC mode with CT/CV motor
Motor selection page 168
Usually with a power yield one

level higher.
Lower mass inertia in relation to
the power yield.
Motor is designed for dynamic
operation.
166
Not an IEC standard motor
Higher current consumption due

to the higher power yield, therefore a larger inverter must be
assigned.
Motor table CT/CV

nN
Motor
[rpm]
1200
1700
2100
3000
MN
IN
Iq_n
Id_n
kT
UN
[Nm]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[V]
Jmot
JBmot
[10-4 kgm2]
CT80N4
2.0
1.52
1.30
2.50
350
8.7
9.6
CT90L4
10
3.5
2.95
1.89
2.86
345
34
39.5
CV100M4
15
4.7
4.13
2.25
3.19
345
53
59
CV100L4
26
8.9
8.30
3.21
2.92
310
65
71
CV132S4
37
11.1
9.99
4.83
3.33
340
146
158
CV132M4
50
15.5
14.2
6.18
3.23
340
280
324
CV132ML4
61
17.6
16.0
7.43
3.47
345
330
374
CV160M4
73
22.5
20.3
9.73
3.24
335
400
440
CV160L4
95
29
25.3
14.2
3.28
330
925
1030
CV180M4
110
34
27.7
19.7
3.24
330
1120
1226
CV180L4
125
35
28.4
20.5
3.57
345
1290
1396
CV200L4
200
58
52.9
23.7
3.45
330
2340
2475
CT80N4
2.8
2.15
1.79
2.33
350
8.7
9.6
CT90L4
10
4.8
4.03
2.61
2.48
345
34
39.5
CV100M4
15
6.5
5.71
3.10
2.63
345
53
59
CV100L4
26
13.6
12.9
4.41
2.02
315
65
71
CV132S4
37
15.2
13.7
6.67
2.70
340
146
158
CV132M4
48
20.8
18.9
8.70
2.54
335
280
324
CV132ML4
58
24.4
21.7
11.2
2.67
320
330
374
CV160M4
71
29.8
26.6
13.4
2.67
340
400
440
CV160L4
89
37.5
32.0
19.5
2.78
330
925
1030
CV180M4
105
44.5
35.2
27.2
2.98
335
1120
1226
CV180L4
115
48.5
37.5
30.7
3.07
325
1290
1396
CV200L4
190
77
69.4
33.4
2.74
330
2340
2475
CT71D4
2.5
2.0
1.60
1.20
1.56
340
4.6
5.5
CT80N4
3.5
2.67
2.26
1.87
340
8.7
9.6
CT90L4
10
6.1
5.14
3.29
1.95
335
34
39.5
CV100M4
15
8.1
7.09
3.91
2.12
335
53
59
CV100L4
25
14.8
13.7
5.56
1.82
305
65
71
CV132S4
37
19.2
17.3
8.41
2.14
335
146
158
CV132M4
48
26
23.7
10.7
2.03
335
280
324
CV132ML4
58
29
26.0
12.9
2.23
340
330
374
CV160M4
70
37
33.9
16.9
2.13
330
400
440
CV160L4
88
46
38.9
24.6
2.26
330
925
1030
CV180M4
100
53
40.5
34.2
2.47
330
1120
1226
CV180L4
115
56
43.4
35.4
2.65
345
1290
1396
CV200L4
175
88
77.8
41.2
2.25
325
2340
2475
CT71D4
2.4
2.6
2.01
1.65
1.19
345
4.6
5.5
CT80N4
4.5
4.3
2.97
3.11
1.52
350
8.7
9.6
CT90L4
9.5
7.9
6.47
4.54
1.47
345
34
39.5
CV100M4
15
11.3
9.93
5.39
1.51
345
53
59
CV100L4
21
17.0
15.2
7.65
1.38
310
65
71
CV132S4
35
25.0
22.1
11.6
1.58
340
146
158
CV132M4
45
34
30.5
15.1
1.48
335
280
324
CV132ML4
52
38
32.7
19.3
1.59
320
330
374
CV160M4
64
47
40.8
23.3
1.57
345
400
440
CV160L4
85
62
51.9
33.9
1.64
335
925
1030
CV180M4
93
68
49.0
47.2
1.90
340
1120
1226
CV180L4
110
81
61.2
53.1
1.80
325
1290
1396
CV200L4
145
102
84.0
57.8
1.73
330
2340
2475
167
CT/CV motor selection

CT/CV motors in the four speed categories are designed for operation with 400/500 V
units. Please contact SEW concerning operation with 230 V units.
1. Rated speed nN = 1200 rpm:
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units) in CFC operating modes (P700)
Motor
CT80N4
0015
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CT90L4
Mmax
CV100M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV100L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132S4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132ML4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV160M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV160L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV180M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV180L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
168
0030
25.7
(227)
30.5
(270)
781
685
29.0
(256)
37.0
(327)
0040
0055
0075
0110
0150
0220
0300
0370
0450
0550
0750
540
[Nm]
18.2
([lb.in]) (160)
ntransition[rpm]
CV200L4
0022
Mmax[Nm]
15.6
([lb.in]) (138)
928
883
3 400/500 VAC
45.0
(398)
781
680
32.6
(288)
45.3
(400)
60.0
(530)
75.0
(663)
1062
947
813
675
64.0
(565)
84.0
(743)
110
(972)
915
1175
992
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
CT/CV: nN = 1200 rpm
82.0
125
150
(725) (1105) (1326)
1011
877
770
126
169
183
(1114) (1495) (1617)
922
819
725
125
169
219
(1105) (1495) (1936)
986
909
840
163
240
294
(1440) (2121) (2600)
1043
954
1240
241
320
360
(2130) (2828) (3183)
1050
986
1005
231
308
360
(2042) (2723) (3183)
1018
973
980
326
402
494
567
(2882) (3554) (4367) (5013)
1011
986
947
940
Motor
Mmax
CT80N4
0015
0022
[Nm]
12.6
([lb.in]) (111)
15.6
(138)
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CT90L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV100M4
1150
0030
0040
18.0
(159)
23.5
(208)
30.5
(270)
1400
1280
1150
25.7
(227)
36.0
(318)
0075
0110
0150
0220
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
CV100L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132S4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132M4
0300
[Nm]
([lb.in])
1402
1274
1150
32.9
(290)
44.2
(390)
57.0
(504)
75.0
(663)
1510
1402
1274
1090
59.0
(522)
91.0
(805)
110
(972)
1470
1330
1280
89.0
121
150
(787) (1070) (1326)
83.0
114
166
183
(734) (1008) (1468) (1618)
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV160L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV180M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV180L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
0750
1440
CV160M4
0550
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
0450
3 400/500 VAC
45.0
(398)
Mmax
CV132ML4
0370
980
Mmax
CV200L4
0055
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
1562
1330
1485
1250
1331
1325
120
176
219
(1060) (1555) (1936)
1420
1310
1250
170
226
277
294
(1503) (2000) (2450) (2600)
1470
1400
1330
1380
168
226
280
345
360
(1485) (2000) (2475) (3050) (3183)
1550
1510
1460
1400
1490
217
269
332
360
(1918) (2378) (2935) (3183)
1450
1420
1370
1420
353
420
524
(3120) (3713) (4632)
1421
1395
1344
169
Motor
0015
Mmax
CT71D4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
1280
9.7
(86)
13.8
(122)
15.6
(138)
1754
1510
1400
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CT90L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
0040
0055
25.5
(225)
30.5
(270)
0075
0110
0150
0220
18.3
(162)
ntransition[rpm]
CV100M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV100L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132S4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132ML4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV160M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV160L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV180M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV180L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
0300
0370
0450
0550
0750
3 400/500 VAC
E
Mmax
170
0030
Mmax
CT80N4
CV200L4
0022
7.7
(68)
1843
1677
1625
28.0
(248)
38.1
(337)
45.0
(398)
1760
1626
1550
33.7
(298)
44.0
(390)
67.0
(592)
75.0
(663)
2003
1894
1645
1550
72.0
(637)
97.0
(858)
110
(972)
1850
1722
1730
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
95.0
138
150
(840) (1220) (1326)
1850
1670
1670
139
183
(1230) (1618)
1715
1574
138
183
219
(1220) (1618) (1936)
1792
1690
1625
177
218
268
294
(1565) (1927) (2370) (2600)
1882
1824
1740
1760
218
270
322
360
(1927) (2387) (2847) (3183)
1939
1894
1836
1930
260
310
360
(2300) (2740) (3183)
1824
1786
1840
329
412
(2910) (3642)
1830
1792
Motor
Mmax
CT71D4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CT80N4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CT90L4
0015
0022
6.6
(58)
7.7
(68)
0030
0040
2280
2080
9.7
(86)
12.7
(112)
15.5
(137)
2560
2350
2200
12.7
(112)
18.0
(160)
[Nm]
([lb.in])
0075
24.0
(212)
30.5
(270)
0110
0150
0220
ntransition[rpm]
CV100M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV100L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132S4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV132ML4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
2790
2650
0300
0370
0450
0550
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
2490
2360
26.5
(235)
34.6
(305)
45.0
(398)
2620
2490
2425
31.8
(281)
49.0
(433)
66.0
(583)
75.0
(663)
2800
2600
2380
2290
51.0
(450)
69.0
(610)
101
(893)
110
(972)
2740
2650
2455
2580
67.0
(592)
99.0
131
150
(875) (1158) (1326)
2750
2600
2450
2400
94.0
124
152
183
(830) (1096) (1343) (1618)
ntransition[rpm]
2765
Mmax
98.0
131
161
198
219
(866) (1158) (1423) (1750) (1936)
CV160M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV160L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV180M4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
CV180L4
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition[rpm]
0750
3 400/500 VAC
E
Mmax
CV200L4
0055
2630
2656
2550
2547
2470
2400
2370
2380
124
155
192
228
286
(1096) (1370) (1697) (2015) (2528)
2720
2680
2620
2545
2440
150
191
228
289
(1326) (1690) (2015) (2555)
2790
2745
2700
2635
182
220
276
(1610) (1945) (2440)
2620
2580
2540
293
(2590)
2573
171
DT/DV/D motor tables

Characteristic values for delta/star 230/400 V / 50 Hz
Star (400 V)
Mass moment of inertia JM

MN
Motor
[Nm
(lb.in)]
Without
brake
With brake
[10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lb.ft2)]
Delta (230 V)
In
Iq_n1)
Id_n1)
kT1)
In
Iq_n1)
Id_n1)
kT1)
[A]
[A]
[A]
[Nm/A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[Nm/A]
DT71D4
2.6
(23)
4.6 (10.4)
5.5 (12.5)
2.15
1.82
1.14
1.43
DT80K4
3.9
(34)
6.6 (15.6)
7.5 (17.7)
3.03
2.53
1.67
1.54
DT80N4
5.2
(46)
8.7 (20.7)
9.6 (22.8)
2.15
1.72
1.29
3.02
3.72
2.99
2.21
1.74
DT90S4
7.5
(66)
25 (59.4)
31 (72.2)
2.80
2.39
1.46
3.13
4.85
4.17
2.48
1.80
DT90L4
10.2
(90)
34 (78.9)
40 (93.6)
3.7
3.18
1.89
3.21
6.41
5.51
3.28
1.85
DV100M4
15.0
(133)
42 (101)
48 (114)
4.95
4.37
2.32
3.43
8.57
7.57
4.02
1.98
DV100L4
20.5
(181)
53 (126)
59 (139)
6.7
5.89
3.19
3.48
11.6
10.2
5.52
2.01
DV112M4
26.9
(238)
98 (233)
110 (262)
8.7
7.85
3.75
3.43
15.2
13.6
6.79
1.98
DV132S4
36.7
(324)
146 (416)
158 (445)
11.4
10.3
4.89
3.56
19.8
17.9
8.46
2.05
DV132M4
50.1
(443)
280 (655)
330 (769)
15.5
14.2
6.21
3.53
27.0
24.6
11.1
2.04
DV132ML4
61.0
(539)
330 (769)
380 (887)
18.7
17.1
7.57
3.57
32.5
29.6
13.4
2.06
DV160M4
72.9
(644)
398 (945)
448 (1049)
22.5
20.3
9.70
3.59
39.0
35.1
17.0
2.08
DV160L4
98.1
(867)
925 (2197)
1060 (2449)
31.0
27.6
14.1
3.55
54.0
47.8
25.1
2.05
DV180M4
121
(1070)
1120 (2660)
1255/15202)
(2912/31642))
38.5
33.1
19.7
3.66
67.0
57.3
34.7
2.11
DV180L4
143
(1264)
1290 (3064)
1425/15202)
(3316/35672))
46.0
40.7
21.4
3.51
80.0
70.4
38.0
2.03
DV200L4
195
(1724)
2340 (5558)
2475/25702)
(5809/60612))
57.0
51.8
23.8
3.76
99.0
89.8
41.7
2.17
DV225S4
240
(2122)
3010 (7149)
3145/32402)
(7400/76522))
70.0
64.5
27.2
3.72
122
112
48.4
2.14
DV225M4
292
(2581)
3570 (8479)
3705/38002)
(8730/89822))
86.0
77.6
37.1
3.76
149
134
65.2
2.18
DV250M4
356
(3147)
6300 (14950)
6600/67302)
(15550/
159082))
102
91.7
44.7
3.88
DV280S4
483
(4270)
8925 (21180)
9225/93552)
(21737/
221122))
142
124
68.9
3.90
D280M4
580
(5127)
14500
(34409)
3)
155
147
49.2
3.95
1) Applies in the basic speed range up to ntransition.

2) Double disk brake
3) On request
172
Characteristic values for double-star/star 230/460 V / 60 Hz

(according to MG1, NEMA design B up to DT80K4, NEMA design C up to DT80N4)
Star (460 V)
Double-star (230 V)
Without brake With brake
MN at
1000 rpm
In
[10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lb.ft2)]
[Nm (lb.in)]
[A]
[A]
[A]
DT71D4
4.6 (10.4)
5.5 (12.5)
2.60 (23.0)
1.15
0.95
0.65
2.74
(24.2)
DT80K4
6.6 (15.6)
7.5 (17.7)
3.90 (34.5)
1.67
1.35
0.98
DT80N4
8.7 (20.7)
9.6 (22.8)
5.20 (46.0)
2.11
1.72
DT90S4
25 (59.4)
31 (72.2)
7.50 (66.3)
2.94
DT90L4
34 (78.9)
40 (93.6)
10.2 (90.2)
DT100LS4
42 (101)
48 (114)
DT100L4
53 (126)
DV112M4
Motor
Iq_n1) Id_n1)
kT1)
MN at
2400 rpm
[Nm/A
[Nm (lb.in)]
(lb.in/A)]
In
Iq_n1) Id_n1)
kT1)
[A]
[A]
[A]
[Nm/A
(lb.in/A)]
2.60 (23.0)
2.30
1.90
1.30
1.37
(12.1)
2.89
(27.3)
3.90 (34.5)
3.34
2.70
1.96
1.44
(12.8)
1.22
3.03
(26.8)
5.20 (46.0)
4.21
3.44
2.44
1.51
(13.4)
2.33
1.80
3.21
(28.4)
7.50 (66.3)
5.89
4.66
3.60
1.61
(14.2)
3.57
3.06
1.84
3.35
(29.6)
10.2 (90.2)
7.13
6.11
3.68
1.67
(14.8)
15.0 (133)
5.00
4.47
2.25
3.34
(29.5)
15.0 (133)
10.1
9.00
4.50
1.66
(14.7)
59 (139)
20.5 (181)
7.92
7.32
3.02
3.45
(30.5)
20.5 (181)
15.8
14.6
6.05
1.72
(15.2)
98 (233)
110 (262)
26.9 (238)
8.20
7.47
3.37
3.60
(31.8)
26.9 (238)
16.4
14.9
6.74
1.80
(15.9)
DV132S4
146 (416)
158 (445)
36.7 (324)
11.0
10.3
3.77
3.55
(31.4)
36.7 (324)
22.0
20.7
7.54
1.78
(15.7)
DV132M4
280 (655)
330 (769)
50.0 (442)
15.9
14.3
6.87
3.46
(30.5)
50.1 (443)
31.8
28.7
13.7
1.77
(15.3)
DV132ML4
330 (769)
380 (887)
61.0 (539)
18.6
16.9
7.69
3.61
(31.7)
61.0 (539)
37.2
33.9
15.4
1.80
(15.8)
DV160M4
398 (945)
448 (1049)
71.0 (628)
22.7
20.4
9.93
3.47
(30.7)
71.0 (628)
45.4
40.8
19.9
1.74
(15.4)
DV160L4
925 (2197)
1060 (2449)
96.0 (849)
30.7
27.4
13.7
3.51
(31.0)
96.0 (849)
61.3
54.8
27.5
1.75
(15.5)
DV180M4
1120 (2660)
1255/15202)
120 (1060)
(2912/31642))
36.5
33.6
14.3
3.57
(31.6)
120 (1060)
72.9
67.1
28.6
1.79
(15.8)
DV180L4
1290 (3064)
1425/15202)
130 (1150)
(3316/35672))
42.7
37.6
20.2
3.46
(30.6)
130 (1150)
85.4
75.1
40.5
1.73
(15.3)
DV200L4
2340 (5558)
2475/25702)
190 (1680)
(5809/60612))
54.6
52.1
16.2
3.65
(32.3)
190 (1680)
109
104
32.5
1.82
(16.2)
DV225S4
3010 (7149)
3145/32402)
235 (2078)
(7400/76522))
67.9
64.5
21.0
3.64
(32.3)
235 (2078)
136
129
42.0
1.83
(16.2)
DV225M4
3570 (8479)
3705/38002)
280 (2475)
(8730/89822))
78.8
74.1
27.0
3.78
(33.5)
260 (2300)
148
138
54.0
1.89
(16.8)
D250M4
7300 (17323)
3)
356 (3147)
102
95.6
36.4
3.73
(33.0)
D280S4
12000 (28476)
3)
483 (4270)
135
128
45.2
3.77
(33.3)
D280M4
14500 (34409)
3)
580 (5128)
162
153
51.7
3.79
(33.5)

3) On request
173
Characteristic values for JEC motors

400 V / 60 Hz
440 V / 60 Hz
400 V / 50 Hz

MN
Motor
Without
brake
[Nm
(lb.in)]
With brake
[10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lb.ft2)]
200 V / 60 Hz
220 V / 60 Hz
200 V / 50 Hz
In
Iq_n1)
Id_n1)
kT1)
In
Iq_n1)
Id_n1)
kT1)
[A]
[A]
[A]
[Nm/A
(lb.in/A)]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[Nm/A
(lb.in/A)]
DT80K4
2.71
(24)
6.55 (15.5)
7.45 (17.7)
1.35
( )
0.96
0.95
2.82
(24.9)
2.70
()
1.92
1.90
1.41
(12.5)
DT80N4
4.97
(44)
8.7 (20.6)
9.6 (22.8)
2.20
( )
1.72
1.37
2.88
(25.5)
4.40
()
3.45
2.73
1.44
(12.7)
DT90L4
10.0
(88)
34 (80.7)
39.4 (93.5)
3.85
( )
3.29
2.00
3.04
(26.9)
7.70
()
6.58
3.99
1.52
(13.4)
DV100M4
14.9
(131)
53 (126)
58.4 (139)
4.70
( )
4.13
2.25
3.60
(31.8)
9.40
()
8.25
4.50
1.80
(15.9)
DV112M4
24.4
(215)
98 (233)
110.2 (262)
8.50
( )
7.55
3.93
3.24
(28.6)
17.0
()
15.1
7.85
1.62
(14.3)
DV132S4
36.7
(324)
146 (346)
158.0 (375)
12.0
()
10.9
5.10
3.38
(29.9)
24.0
()
21.7
10.2
1.69
(14.9)
DV132M4
48.8
(431)
280 (664)
323.7 (768)
16.0
()
14.6
6.50
3.34
(29.5)
32.0
()
29.2
13.0
1.67
(14.8)
DV160M4
70.4
(622)
398 (944)
441.7 (1048)
23.0
()
20.6
10.3
3.42
(30.2)
46.0
()
41.2
20.5
1.71
(15.1)
DV160L4
96.6
(854)
925 (2195)
1031 (2447)
32.3
()
28.6
14.9
3.38
(29.9)
64.5
()
57.2
29.8
1.69
(14.9)
DV180M4
120
(1060)
1120 (2658)
1226/13322)
(2909/31602))
40.5
()
34.8
20.7
3.46
(30.6)
81.0
()
69.6
41.4
1.73
(15.3)
DV180L4
140
(1237)
1290 (3060)
1396/15022)
(3313/35642))
47.8
()
42.0
22.7
3.34
(29.5)
95.5
()
84.1
45.3
1.67
(14.8)
DV200L4
194
(1714)
2340 (5553)
2446/25522)
(5804/60562))
60.0
()
54.5
24.9
3.56
(31.5)
120
()
109
49.9
1.78
(15.7)
DV225S4
234
(2068)
3010 (7143)
3116/32222)
(7394/76452))
72.0
()
66.0
28.7
3.54
(31.3)
144
()
132
57.3
1.77
(15.6)
DV225M4
284
(2510)
3570 (8472)
3676/37822)
(8723/89752))
88.5
()
79.5
38.9
3.58
(31.6)
177
()
159
77.9
1.79
(15.8)

174
DT/DV/D motor selection with the delta/star topology (230/400 VAC / 50 Hz)
1. Star connection 400 V / 50 Hz or 400/690 V / 50 Hz motors in connection:
Motor
400 V / 50 Hz
0015
0022
0030
0040
DT80N4
Mmax[Nm]
([lb.in])
9.3
(82)
ntransition [rpm]
908
DT90S4
Mmax [Nm]
13.5
([lb.in]) (120)
13.5
(120)
ntransition [rpm]
1011
1011
DT90L4
Mmax [Nm]
18.2
([lb.in]) (161)
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
ntransition [rpm]
1049
1056
DV100M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
26.8
(236)
26.8
(236)
26.8
(236)
ntransition [rpm]
940
1043
1056
928
0055
0075
0110
0150
36.8
(325)
36.8
(325)
36.8
(325)
ntransition [rpm]
889
1004
1011
DV112M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
47.1
(416)
48.4
(427)
48.4
(427)
ntransition [rpm]
915
1030
1062
DV132S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
64.4
(569)
66.1
(584)
66.1
(584)
ntransition [rpm]
992
1132
1196
DV132M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
81.7
(722)
90.2
(797)
90.2
(797)
ntransition [rpm]
1011
1145
1152
110
(972)
110
(972)
1043
1132
DV160L4
DV180M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV180L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV200L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV225S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
986
1248
1312
1395
1465
230
258
258
258
(2033) (2280) (2280) (2280)
1017
1152
1299
1369
325
351
351
351
(2873) (3100) (3100) (3100)
1011
Please note: The maximum

torque Mmax is limited to 180 % of
the rated motor torque MN.
ntransition [rpm]
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition [rpm]
D280M4
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
1196
1164
ntransition [rpm]
DV280S4
217
217
217
(1917) (1917) (1917)
ntransition [rpm]
DV250M4
1132
1043
ntransition [rpm]
DV225M4
0750
163
177
177
(1440) (1565) (1565)
ntransition [rpm]
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0550
124
131
131
(1096) (1157) (1157)
ntransition [rpm]
ntransition [rpm]
0450
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV132ML4
ntransition [rpm]
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0370
DT/DV/D: 400 V/50 Hz
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV160M4
0300
3 400/500 VAC
DV100L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0220
1126
1299
1420
395
433
433
433
(3490) (3826) (3826) (3826)
947
1030
1164
1312
482
526
526
(4260) (4648) (4648)
1030
1100
1299
587
641
(5188) (5665)
1017
1133
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
711
(6283)
ntransition [rpm]
1075
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
745
(6583)
ntransition [rpm]
1107
175
2. Delta connection 230 V / 50 Hz:
Motor
230 V / 50 Hz
0015
0022
0030
0040
0055
0075
0150
0220
DT71D4
ntransition [rpm]
1958
DT80K4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
6.9
(61)
6.9
(61)
ntransition [rpm]
1849
1868
DT80N4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
9.3
(82)
9.3
(82)
9.3
(82)
ntransition [rpm]
1817
2054
2054
DT90S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
13.5
(120)
13.5
(120)
13.5
(120)
ntransition [rpm]
1971
2246
2304
DT90L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
ntransition [rpm]
1843
2240
2329
DV100M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
26.8
(236)
26.8
(236)
26.8
(236)
ntransition [rpm]
1862
2214
2297
DV100L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
36.8
(325)
36.8
(325)
36.8
(325)
ntransition [rpm]
1779
2080
2188
DV112M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
45.5
(402)
48.4
(427)
48.4
(427)
ntransition [rpm]
1779
2163
2195
DV132S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
66.1
(584)
66.1
(584)
66.1
(584)
ntransition [rpm]
1996
2374
2444
DV132M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
90.2
(797)
90.2
(797)
ntransition [rpm]
1939
2310
0300
0370
110
(972)
110
(972)
2105
2246
DV160M4
ntransition [rpm]
1894
DV160L4
Mmax[Nm]
([lb.in])
DV180M4
ntransition [rpm]
DV180L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition [rpm]
DV200L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition [rpm]
DV225S4
0750
DT/DV: 230 V/50 Hz
131
131
131
(1157) (1157) (1157)
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0550
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition [rpm]
0450
3 400/500 VAC
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV132ML4
ntransition [rpm]
176
0110
Mmax [Nm]
4.6
([lb.in]) (40.5)

2246
2348
177
177
177
177
(1565) (1565) (1565) (2496)
1881
2208
2451
2496
217
217
217
217
(1917) (1917) (1917) (1917)
1952
2336
2611
2809
258
258
258
(2280) (2280) (2280)
1836
2131
2457
329
351
(2908) (3100)
1830
2092
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
405
(3580)
ntransition [rpm]
1708
DT/DV/D motor selection with the double-star/star topology (230/460 VAC / 60 Hz)
1. Star connection 460 V / 60 Hz:
Motor
460 V / 60 Hz
0015
DT80N4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
9.3
(82)
ntransition [rpm]
1145
DT90S4
Mmax [Nm]
13.5
([lb.in]) (120)
ntransition [rpm]
DT90L4
0022
0040
0055
0075
0110
ntransition [rpm]
1318
1152
26.5
(234)
27.0
(238)
1100
1222
DT100L4
28.2
(250)
36.8
(325)
36.8
(325)
ntransition [rpm]
1171
1075
1120
DV112M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
35.8
(316)
48.4
(427)
48.4
(427)
ntransition [rpm]
1196
1139
1312
DV132S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
48.7
(430)
65.1
(575)
66.1
(584)
ntransition [rpm]
1068
992
1100
DV132M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
80.0
(705)
90.2
(797)
ntransition [rpm]
1088
1222
DV160L4
DV180M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV180L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV200L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV225S4
Mmax[Nm]
([lb.in])
1196
1299
1260
1140
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
1318
1370
1177
1350
228
258
258
(2015) (2280) (2280)
1081
1196
1324
323
351
351
(2845) (3100) (3100)
1024

ntransition [rpm]
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition [rpm]
D280M4
0750
164
217
217
(1448) (1917) (1917)
ntransition [rpm]
D280S4
110
(972)
1158
ntransition [rpm]
D250M4
0550
161
177
(1422) (1565)
ntransition [rpm]
DV225M4
110
(972)
1132
ntransition [rpm]
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0450
120.3 131
131
(1062) (1157) (1157)
ntransition [rpm]
ntransition [rpm]
0370
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV132ML4
ntransition [rpm]
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0300
DT/DV/D: 460 V/60 Hz
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV160M4
0220
3 460 VAC
18.3
(162)
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0150
1312
Mmax [Nm]
18.3
([lb.in]) (162)
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DT100LS4
ntransition [rpm]
0030
1107
1248
318
391
433
433
(2815) (3456) (3826) (3826)
1100
1075
1145
1286
401
494
526
526
(3542) (4364) (4648) (4648)
1081
1056
1139
1324
570
640
(5040) (5656)
1300
1395
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
717
(6335)
ntransition [rpm]
1345
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
712
(6290)
ntransition [rpm]
1337
177
2. Double-star connection 230 V / 60 Hz:

Motor
230 V / 60 Hz
0015
0022
0030
0040
0055
0075
DT71D4
Mmax [Nm]
4.6
([lb.in]) (40.5)
ntransition [rpm]
2988
DT80K4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
7.0
(62)
7.0
(62)
ntransition [rpm]
2688
2822
DT80N4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
8.3
(73)
9.3
(82)
9.3
(82)
ntransition [rpm]
2585
2873
2969
DT90S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
11.9
(105)
13.5
(120)
13.5
(120)
ntransition [rpm]
2636
2931
3462
DT90L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
16.4
(145)
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
ntransition [rpm]
2604
3014
3353
22.5
(200)
27.0
(238)
27.0
(238)
2592
2732
3104
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DT100LS4
ntransition [rpm]
0150
0220
DT100L4
32.5
(287)
36.8
(325)
ntransition [rpm]
2592
2912
DV112M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
41.4
(365)
48.4
(427)
ntransition [rpm]
2534
2988
DV132S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
62.4
(550)
66.1
(585)
ntransition [rpm]
2233
2572
DV132M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
80.0
(705)
90.2
(797)
ntransition [rpm]
2348
2707
DV160M4
DV160L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV180M4
Mmax[Nm]
([lb.in])
DV180L4
ntransition [rpm]
DV200L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition [rpm]
DV225S4
DV225M4
0550
0750
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
110
(972)
110
(972)
2566
2944
2451
2688
2963
150
177
177
(1325) (1565) (1565)
ntransition [rpm]
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0450
115
131
131
(1015) (1157) (1157)
ntransition [rpm]
ntransition [rpm]
0370
DT/DV: 230 V/60 Hz
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0300
3 460 VAC
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV132ML4
ntransition [rpm]
178
0110
2457

2512
2918
189
217
217
217
(1670) (1917) (1917) (1917)
2355
2457
2771
3040
220
258
258
(1943) (2280) (2280)
2284
2291
2720
281
350
(2482) (3092)
2208
2163
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
346
(3056)
ntransition [rpm]
2291
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
354
(3127)
ntransition [rpm]
2278
DT/DV/D motor selection with the double-star/star or double-delta/delta topology

(200/400 VAC / 50 Hz)
1. Star connection or delta connection 400 V / 50 Hz:
Motor
, 400 V / 50 Hz1)
0015
DT80K4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
6.9
(61)
ntransition [rpm]
748
DT80N4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
9.3
(82)
ntransition [rpm]
985
0022
0030
0040
0055
0075
0110
0150
Mmax [Nm]
17.2
([lb.in]) (152)
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
ntransition [rpm]
1120
1145
DV100M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
26.8
(236)
26.8
(236)
26.8
(236)
ntransition [rpm]
940
1043
1056
DV112M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
44.5
(393)
48.4
(427)
48.4
(427)
ntransition [rpm]
992
1088
1145
DV132S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
61.0
(540)
66.1
(584)
66.1
(584)
ntransition [rpm]
1068
1177
1280
DV132M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
77.3
(683)
90.2
(797)
90.2
(797)
ntransition [rpm]
1088
1210
1228
DV160M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV160L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV180M4
Mmax[Nm]
([lb.in])
DV180L4
DV200L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV225S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0550
0750
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
118
131
131
(1042) (1157) (1157)
1056
1177
1273
154
177
177
(1363) (1565) (1565)
1113

ntransition [rpm]
ntransition [rpm]
ntransition [rpm]
DV225M4
0450
ntransition [rpm]
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
0370
DT/DV: , 420 V / 50 Hz
ntransition [rpm]
ntransition [rpm]
0300
3 400 VAC
DT90L4
1011
0220
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition [rpm]
1292
1401
217
217
217
(1917) (1917) (1917)
1177
1440
1561
218
258
258
258
(1930) (2280) (2280) (2280)
1088
1177
1344
1452
308
351
351
351
(2730) (3100) (3100) (3100)
1075
1139
1331
1472
374
433
433
433
(3307) (3826) (3826) (3826)
1004
1043
1190
1363
456
526
526
(4037) (4648) (4648)
1094
1113
1324
1) The values also apply to 400 V / 60 Hz and 440 V / 60 Hz.
179
2. Double-star connection or double-delta 200 V / 50 Hz:

Motor
, 200 V / 50 Hz
1)
0015
0022
DT80K4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
6.9
(61)
6.9
(61)
0030
0040
ntransition [rpm]
2035
2112
DT80N4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
9.3
(82)
9.3
(82)
9.3
(82)
ntransition [rpm]
2483
2624
2624
0055
0075
0110
0150
0220
0300
0370
0450
MCV/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: CFC...
DT/DV:
, 210 V / 50 Hz
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
ntransition [rpm]
2521
2924
2963
DV100M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
24.4
(215)
26.8
(236)
26.8
(236)
ntransition [rpm]
2124
2419
2732
DV112M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
48.4
(427)
48.4
(427)
ntransition [rpm]
2457
2796
DV132S4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
58.3
(515)
66.1
(585)
66.1
(585)
ntransition [rpm]
2355
2656
3052
DV132M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
77.3
(683)
90.2
(797)
90.2
(797)
ntransition [rpm]
2361
2688
2886
DV160M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
112
131
131
131
(995) (1157) (1157) (1157)
ntransition [rpm]
2265
DV160L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
DV180M4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])

ntransition [rpm]
DV180L4
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition [rpm]
DV200L4
DV225S4
0750
3 400 VAC
DT90L4
ntransition [rpm]
0550
2470
2784
2918
177
177
177
177
(1565) (1565) (1565) (1565)
2316
2726
2995
3084
217
217
217
(1917) (1917) (1917)
2406
2803
3251
252
258
(2233) (2280)
2240
2662
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
336
(2975)
ntransition [rpm]
2233
Mmax [Nm]
([lb.in])
330
(2917)
ntransition [rpm]
2112
180
DT/DV motor selection with the delta connection type (230 VAC / 50 Hz)
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV/MCH4_A...-2_3 (230 V units) in CFC operating modes (P700)
Motor
230 V / 50 Hz
0015
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
6.9
(61)
DT80K4
0022
ntransition
[rpm]
812
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
9.3
(82)
ntransition
[rpm]
908
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
13.5
(120)
13.5
(120)
DT80N4
DT90S4
0037
[rpm]
1011
1011
[Nm]
([lb.in])
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
953
1024
1056
25.5
(225)
26.8
(236)
921
1056
ntransition
[rpm]
[Nm]
([lb.in])
DV100M4
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
DV100L4
0150
36.8
(325)
972
1011
[rpm]
[Nm]
([lb.in])
48.4
(427)
48.4
(427)
MCV/MCH4_A...-2_3
(230 V)
P700: CFC...
ntransition
[rpm]
1036
1062
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
65.3
(577)
66.1
(584)
66.1
(584)
992
1152
1196
85.4
(755)
90.2
(797)
90.2
(797)
998
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
DV132M4
ntransition
[rpm]
1152
1152
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
110
(972)
110
(972)
110
(972)
DV132ML4
0300
36.8
(325)
ntransition
DV132S4
0220
DT/DV: 230 V/50 Hz
Mmax
DV112M4
0110
ntransition
Mmax
0075
3 230 VAC
Mmax
DT90L4
0055
ntransition
[rpm]
1050
1132
1132
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
126
(1110)
131
(1157)
131
(1157)
980
1120
1196
158
(1395)
177
(1565)
177
(1565)
1050
1248
1312
217
(1917)
217
(1917)
1165
1325
231
(2042)
258
(2280)
1017
1068
DV160M4
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
DV160L4
DV180M4
DV180L4
DV200L4
Please note: The maximum torque

Mmax is limited to 180 % of the rated
motor torque MN.
295
(2605)
1025
181
DT/DV motor selection with the double-star topology (230 VAC / 60 Hz)
Motor
230 V / 60 Hz
[Nm]
([lb.in])
7.0
(62)
DT80K4
0022
ntransition
[rpm]
1100
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
9.3
(82)
ntransition
[rpm]
1145
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
13.5
(120)
13.5
(120)
DT80N4
DT90S4
0037
0075
[rpm]
1267
1337
[Nm]
([lb.in])
17.2
(152)
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
ntransition
[rpm]
1145
1210
1325
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
20.1
(178)
27.0
(238)
1190
1228
ntransition
[rpm]
[Nm]
([lb.in])
29.2
(258)
36.8
(325)
36.8
(325)
ntransition
[rpm]
1158
1113
1120
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
37.2
(328)
48.4
(427)
48.4
(427)
1190
DV112M4
ntransition
[rpm]
1248
1337
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
57.0
(504)
66.1
(585)
66.1
(585)
1030
DV132S4
0150
ntransition
[rpm]
1062
1120
[Nm]
([lb.in])
71.7
(633)
90.2
(797)
90.2
(797)
1113
ntransition
[rpm]
1165
1222
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
109
(970)
110
(972)
DV132ML4
0300
MCV/MCH4_A...-2_3
(230 V)
P700: CFC...
Mmax
DV132M4
0220
DT/DV: 230 V/60 Hz
Mmax
DT100L4
0110
ntransition
DT100LS4
0055
3 230 VAC
Mmax
DT90L4
ntransition
[rpm]
1100
1260
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
104
(920)
131
(1157)
131
(1157)
1165
1145
1318
133
(1178)
177
(1565)
177
(1565)
1190
1267
1395
208
(1840)
217
(1917)
1100
1203
DV160M4
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
DV160L4
DV180M4
DV180L4
DV200L4
182
0015
Mmax

motor torque MN.
236
(2087)
1075
210
(1860)
253
(2235)
1080
1062
DT/DV motor selection with the double-star or double-delta topology (200 VAC / 50 Hz)
Motor
, 200 V / 50 Hz
1)
0015
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
6.9
(61)
DT80K4
0022
0037
ntransition
[rpm]
748
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
9.3
(82)
ntransition
[rpm]
985
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
15.5
(137)
18.3
(162)
18.3
(162)
1049
998
1145
DT80N4
DT90L4
0055
0110
ntransition
[rpm]
[Nm]
([lb.in])
26.8
(236)
26.8
(236)
1050
1056
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
48.4
(427)
48.4
(427)
48.4
(427)
1017
DV112M4
ntransition
[rpm]
1132
1145
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
66.1
(585)
66.1
(585)
1107
1280
DV132S4
0150
0220
MCV/MCH4_A...-2_3
(230 V)
P700: CFC...
DT/DV:
, 210 V / 50 Hz
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
90.2
(797)
90.2
(797)
90.2
(797)
1139
DV132M4
ntransition
[rpm]
1228
1228
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
131
(1157)
131
(1157)
1050
1273
DV160M4
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
ntransition
[rpm]
DV160L4
DV180M4
DV180L4
0300
3 200 VAC
Mmax
DV100M4
0075

motor torque MN.
177
(1565)
177
(1565)
1177
1312
195
(1723)
217
(1917)
1145
1216
226
(2000)
1080
183
Motor selection for synchronous servomotors (SERVO)
5.6

The torque limit (M limit) is set automatically by the startup function of the MOVITOOLS
software package. Do not alter this automatically set value!
We recommend always using the latest version of MOVITOOLS (2.70 or later) for startup. The latest MOVITOOLS version can be downloaded from our homepage
(www.sew-eurodrive.de).
Motor characteristics
The requirements made of a servo drive include speed dynamics, stable speed and positioning accuracy. CM/DFS/DFY motors with MOVIDRIVE meet these requirements.
Technically speaking, these are synchronous motors with permanent magnets on the
rotor and an integrated resolver. The required characteristics, namely a constant torque
over a wide speed range (up to 4500 rpm), a high speed and control range (up to 1:3000)
and a high overload capacity (3 M0), are achieved using control by MOVIDRIVE. The
servomotor has a lower mass moment of inertia than the asynchronous motor. This
means it is optimally suited to applications requiring dynamic speeds.
M [lb.in]
Mmax
M0
nrated
n [rpm]
01652CEN
Figure 77: Speed/torque characteristic curve of the DFY servomotor

1
Continuous torque
Maximum torque
M0 is determined by the motor. Mmax is 3 M0 of the motor. The attainable Mmax may
also be less, depending on the inverter.
Refer to the motor table (CM page 186, DFS/DFY page 189) for the values for M0.
Refer to the motor table (CM page 187, DFS/DFY page 190) for the values for M0.
184
SERVO operating modes are only possible with SEW motors (CM/DFS/DFY), not with
non-SEW motors. The necessary motor data for the SERVO operating modes are
stored in MOVIDRIVE for the SEW motors.
Speed is the correcting variable in the SERVO modes with speed control. Torque is the
correcting variable in the SERVO modes with torque control (SERVO & M-CONTROL).
SERVO mode with

speed control
There is no reason to differentiate between quadratic, dynamic and static load types
when configuring a system for SERVO mode. Project planning for a synchronous motor
is undertaken in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Effective torque demand at the average speed of the application.
Mr.m.s. < Mn_mot
The point must lie below the characteristic curve for the continuous torque (Figure
77, curve 1). The continuous torque of the DFY series can be increased by 60 % by
forced cooling if this operating point lies above the characteristic curve for self-cooling.
2. Maximum torque required across the speed characteristic.

Mmax < Mdyn_mot
This operating point must lie below the characteristic curve for the maximum torque
of the motor-MOVIDRIVE combination (Figure 77, curve 2).
3. Maximum speed
The maximum speed must not be configured higher than the rated speed of the motor. Planetary gear units should be used for speeds greater than 3000 rpm as a result
of the high input speed.
nmax nN
SERVO mode with
torque control
(SERVO & MCTRL.)
This operating mode allows the torque of the servomotor to be controlled directly. The
setpoint sources of the speed controlled SERVO mode can also be used for torque control. All speed setpoint sources are interpreted as current setpoint sources. The settings
for evaluating the analog input ( P11_, parameter description) also remain in effect.
The fixed setpoints (P16_, P17_) can be entered either in the unit [rpm] or [%IN_inverter]
( MOVITOOLS).
The following relationship applies between the units:
3000 rpm = 150 % rated inverter current
You can calculate the torque at the output shaft of the servomotor using the following
formula:
M=
M0 150% In _ inverter n set
I0
3000 rpm
04976AEN
M0
Continuous static torque according to the motor table DFS/DFY ( page 189)
I0
Continuous static torque according to the motor table DFS/DFY ( page 189)
185
Motor table CM
Additional project planning notes and information about the type CM synchronous servomotors can be found in the 'Geared Servo Motors' catalog. This can be ordered from
SEW.
Characteristic values at Vmax = 400 VAC

nN
Without forced cooling

fan
Motor
3000
4500
186
Imax
Mass moment of inertia

JM
Without
brake
M0
I0
M0_VR
I0_VR
[Nm (lb.in)]
[A]
[Nm (lb.in)]
[A]
[A]
CM71S
5.0 (44)
2.2
7.3 (64)
3.2
8.8
4.85 (11.4)
6.89 (16.2)
CM71M
6.5 (57)
2.9
9.4 (83)
4.2
11.6
6.27 (14.7)
8.31 (19.5)
CM71L
9.5 (84)
4.2
13.8 (122)
6.1
16.8
9.1 (21.4)
11.1 (26.1)
[rpm]
2000
With forced cooling fan

VR
With brake
[10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lb.ft2)]
CM90S
11.0 (97)
4.9
16.0 (141)
7.1
20.0
14.3 (33.6)
19.8 (46.5)
CM90M
14.5 (128)
6.9
21.0 (185)
10.0
28.0
18.6 (43.7)
24.1 (56.7)
CM90L
21.0 (185)
9.9
30.5 (270)
14.4
40.0
27.1 (63.7)
32.6 (76.7)
CM112S
23.5 (207)
10.0
34.0 (300)
14.5
40.0
67.4 (159)
87.5 (206)
CM112M
31.0 (274)
13.5
45.0 (397)
19.6
54.0
87.4 (206)
108 (254)
CM112L
45.0 (397)
19.1
65.0 (574)
29.0
80.0
128 (301)
148 (348)
CM71S
5.0 (44)
3.3
7.3 (64)
4.8
13.2
4.85 (11.4)
6.89 (16.2)
CM71M
6.5 (57)
4.3
9.4 (83)
6.2
17.2
6.27 (14.7)
8.31 (19.5)
CM71L
9.5 (84)
6.2
13.8 (122)
9.0
25.0
9.1 (21.4)
11.1 (26.1)
CM90S
11.0 (97)
7.3
16.0 (141)
10.6
30.0
14.3 (33.6)
19.8 (46.5)
CM90M
14.5 (128)
10.1
21.0 (185)
14.6
40.0
18.6 (43.7)
24.1 (56.7)
CM90L
21.0 (185)
14.4
30.5 (270)
21.0
58.0
27.1 (63.7)
32.6 (76.7)
CM112S
23.5 (207)
15.0
34.0 (300)
22.0
60.0
67.4 (159)
87.5 (206)
CM112M
31.0 (274)
20.5
45.0 (397)
30.0
82.0
87.4 (206)
108 (254)
CM112L
45.0 (397)
30.0
65.0 (574)
44.0
120
128 (301)
148 (348)
CM71S
5.0 (44)
4.9
7.3 (64)
7.2
20.0
4.85 (11.4)
6.89 (16.2)
CM71M
6.5 (57)
6.6
9.4 (83)
9.6
27.0
6.27 (14.7)
8.31 (19.5)
CM71L
9.5 (84)
9.6
13.8 (122)
14.0
39.0
9.1 (21.4)
11.1 (26.1)
CM90S
11.0 (97)
11.1
16.0 (141)
16.2
45.0
14.3 (33.6)
19.8 (46.5)
CM90M
14.5 (128)
14.7
21.0 (185)
21.5
59.0
18.6 (43.7)
24.1 (56.7)
CM90L
21.0 (185)
21.6
30.5 (270)
31.5
86.0
27.1 (63.7)
32.6 (76.7)
CM112S
23.5 (207)
22.5
34.0 (300)
32.5
90.0
67.4 (159)
87.5 (206)
CM112M
31.0 (274)
30.0
45.0 (397)
44.0
120
87.4 (206)
108 (254)
CM112L
45.0 (397)
46.0
65.0 (574)
67.0
184
128 (301)
148 (348)
CM motor selection
MOVIDRIVE compact MCS/MCH4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units) in SERVO operating modes (P700)
Motor
0015
0022
0030
CM71S
Mmax
[Nm]
13.0
([lb.in]) (115)
16.0
(141)
16.5
(145)
0040
0055
0075
0110
0150
0220
0300
CM71M
Mmax
[Nm]
13.0
([lb.in]) (115)
16.9
(149)
19.8
(175)
21.5
(190)
CM71L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
18.5
(163)
22.8
(201)
28.5
(252)
31.4
(278)
CM90S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
18.5
(163)
23.3
(206)
30.8
(272)
38.0
(336)
39.6
(350)
CM90M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
22.5
(199)
30.5
(269)
39.2
(346)
47.9
(423)
52.2
(461)
CM90L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
31.9
(282)
41.4
(366)
52.5
(464)
72.5
(640)
75.6
(668)
CM112S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
35.3
(312)
45.8
(405)
57.3
(506)
77.6
(686)
81.1
(717)
CM112M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
45.9
(405)
58.3
(515)
84.3 102.3 107.0

(745) (904) (945)
CM112L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
0370
0450
0550
0750
3 400/500 VAC
E
87.4
(772)
MCS/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: SERVO...
CM: nN = 2000 rpm
112.8 150.4 161.2

(997) (1329) (1425)
Motor
CM71S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
CM71M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
CM71L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
0015
0022
0030
0040
0055
9.0
(80)
11.9
(105)
14.3
(126)
16.5
(145)
16.5
(145)
0075
12.2
(107)
14.8
(130)
18.9
(167)
21.5
(190)
21.5
(190)
15.8
(140)
20.6
(182)
26.1
(230)
30.5
(270)
0110
0150
0220
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
CM90M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
CM90L
Mmax
CM112S
0450
0550
0750
MCS/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: SERVO...
27.0
(238)
33.6
(297)
39.6
(350)
27.4
(242)
34.4
(304)
48.1
(425)
52.2
(461)
[Nm]
([lb.in])
36.5
(322)
53.1
(469)
67.6
(597)
75.0
(663)
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
39.0
(344)
56.6
(500)
71.7
(633)
80.6
(712)
CM112M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
55.8
(493)
72.9
(644)
98.0 106.3
(866) (940)
CM112L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
21.2
(187)
0370
3 400/500 VAC
31.4
(278)
E
CM90S
0300
CM: nN = 3000 rpm
77.6 109.0 137.2 157.5 162.6

(686) (963) (1213) (1392) (1437)
187
Motor
0015
0022
0030
0040
0055
0075
8.0
(70)
10.0
(88)
13.0
(115)
15.7
(138)
16.5
(145)
9.9
(87)
13.3
(117)
16.7
(147)
19.8
(175)
21.5
(190)
[Nm]
([lb.in])
18.1
(160)
22.1
(195)
29.8
(263)
31.4
(277)
CM90S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
18.4
(162)
23.1
(204)
33.6
(297)
39.6
(350)
39.6
(350)
CM90M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
24.1
(213)
34.9
(308)
45.2
(400)
52.2
(461)
CM90L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
36.5
(322)
47.9
(423)
65.5
(580)
75.6
(668)
75.6
(668)
CM112S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
39.2
(346)
51.2
(452)
70.0
(618)
81.1
(716)
81.1
(716)
CM112M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
52.7
(465)
73.5
(650)
90.5 104.2 107.0

(800) (921) (945)
CM112L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
73.8
(652)
94.0
(830)
CM71S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
CM71M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
CM71L
Mmax
0110
0150
0220
0300
0450
0550
0750
3 400/500 VAC
E
188
0370
MCS/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: SERVO...
CM: nN = 4500 rpm
112.8 133.0 150.4 162.2

(997) (1175) (1330) (1434)
Motor table DFS/DFY

Additional project planning notes and information about the type DFS/DFY synchronous
servomotors can be found in the 'Geared Servo Motors' catalog. This document can be
ordered from SEW.
Characteristic values at Vmax = 400 VAC

Without forced cooling fan With forced cooling fan VY
nN
Motor
[rpm]
2000
3000
4500
M0
I0
M0_VY
[Nm (lb.in)]
[A]
[Nm (lb.in)]
DFY71S
2.5 (22)
1.25
DFY71M
3.7 (33)
1.8
DFY71ML
5.0 (44)
2.5
8.0 (71)
DFY71L
7.5 (66)
3.7
12 (106)
DFY90S
9.0 (80)
4.0
14.4 (127)
DFY90M
12 (106)
5.3
DFY90L
18 (159)
DFY112S
12 (106)
DFY112M
17.5 (155)
I0_VY

Imax
Without
brake
-4
With brake
2
[10 kgm (10-3 lb.ft2)]
[A]
[A]
4.0 (35)
2.0
3.75
3.42 (8.12)
5.46 (13.0)
5.9 (52)
2.9
5.4
4.85 (11.5)
6.89 (16.3)
4.0
7.5
6.27 (14.9)
8.31 (19.7)
5.9
11.1
9.1 (21.6)
11.1 (26.3)
6.4
12
14.3 (34.0)
19.8 (47.0)
19.2 (170)
8.5
15.9
18.6 (44.1)
24.1 (57.2)
8.0
28.9 (255)
12.9
24
27.1 (64.3)
32.6 (77.4)
5.5
19.2 (170)
8.8
16.5
47.2 (112)
67.4 (160)
8.0
28 (248)
12.8
24
67.4 (160)
87.5 (208)
DFY112ML
24 (212)
11
38.5 (340)
17.6
33
87.4 (207)
108 (256)
DFY112L
35 (309)
16
56 (495)
25.5
48
128 (304)
148 (351)
DFS56M
1.0 (8.8)
1.55
4.65
0.47 (1.12)
0.85 (2.02)
DFS56L
2.0 (18)
2.22
6.66
0.82 (1.95)
1.2 (2.85)
DFY71S
2.5 (22)
1.85
4.0 (35)
3.0
5.55
3.42 (8.12)
5.46 (13.0)
DFY71M
3.7 (33)
2.7
5.9 (52)
4.3
8.1
4.85 (11.5)
6.89 (16.3)
DFY71ML
5.0 (44)
3.8
8.0 (71)
6.1
11.4
6.27 (14.9)
8.31 (19.7)
DFY71L
7.5 (66)
5.5
12 (106)
8.8
16.5
9.1 (21.6)
11.1 (26.3)
DFY90S
9.0 (80)
5.9
14.4 (127)
9.4
17.7
14.3 (34.0)
19.8 (47.0)
DFY90M
12 (106)
7.9
19.2 (170)
12.6
23.7
18.6 (44.1)
24.1 (57.2)
DFY90L
18 (159)
12
29 (256)
19.7
36
27.1 (64.3)
32.6 (77.4)
DFY112S
12 (106)
8.0
19.2 (170)
12.8
24
47.2 (112)
67.4 (160)
DFY112M
17.5 (155)
12
28 (248)
19.2
36
67.4 (160)
87.5 (208)
DFY112ML
24 (212)
16.5
38.5 (340)
26.5
49.5
87.4 (207)
108 (256)
DFY112L
35 (309)
24
56 (495)
38
72
128 (304)
148 (351)
DFS56M
1.0 (8.8)
1.55
4.65
0.47 (1.12)
0.85 (2.02)
DFS56L
2.0 (18)
2.22
6.66
0.82 (1.95)
1.2 (2.85)
DFY71S
2.5 (22)
2.8
4.0 (35)
4.5
8.4
3.42 (8.12)
5.46 (13.0)
DFY71M
3.7 (33)
4.1
5.9 (52)
6.6
12.3
4.85 (11.5)
6.89 (16.3)
DFY71ML
5.0 (44)
5.8
8.0 (71)
9.3
17.4
6.27 (14.9)
8.31 (19.7)
DFY71L
7.5 (66)
8.2
12 (106)
13.1
24.6
9.1 (21.6)
11.1 (26.3)
DFY90S
9.0 (80)
9.0
14.4 (127)
14.4
27
14.3 (34.0)
19.8 (47.0)
DFY90M
12 (106)
11.6
19.2 (170)
18.6
34.8
18.6 (44.1)
24.1 (57.2)
DFY90L
18 (159)
18
29 (256)
29
54
27.1 (64.3)
32.6 (77.4)
DFY112S
12 (106)
11.7
19.2 (170)
18.7
35.1
47.2 (112)
67.4 (160)
DFY112M
17.5 (155)
18
28 (248)
28.8
54
67.4 (160)
87.5 (208)
DFY112ML
24 (212)
24.5
38.5 (340)
39.2
73.5
87.4 (207)
108 (256)
DFY112L
35 (309)
36.5
56 (495)
58.4
109
128 (304)
148 (351)
189
DFS/DFY motor selection

Motor
0015
0022
0030
0040
0055
0075
0110
DFY71S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
7.5
(66.3)
DFY71M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
11.1
(98.1)
DFY71ML
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
12.0
(106)
15.0
(133)
DFY71L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
12.2
(108)
16.7
(148)
21.3
(188)
22.5
(199)
DFY90S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
13.5
(119)
18.6
(164)
23.6
(209)
27.0
(238)
DFY90M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
18.7
(165)
23.7
(210)
32.2
(285)
36.0
(318)
DFY90L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
32.1
(284)
42.2
(373)
DFY112S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
31.1
(275)
36.0
(318)
DFY112M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
31.2
(276)
41.0
(362)
52.5
(464)
DFY112ML
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
40.9
(362)
52.3
(462)
72.0
(636)
DFY112L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
52.5
(464)
78.8
(697)
0150
0220
0300
0370
3 400/500 VAC
E
18.0
(159)
22.9
(202)
MCS/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: SERVO...
DFY: nN = 2000 rpm
54.0
(477)
105
(928)
Motor
0015
0022
0030
0040
0055
0075
0110
0220
DFS56M
[Nm]
([lb.in])
3.0
(26.5)
DFS56L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
5.0
(44.2)
DFY71S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
7.5
(66.4)
DFY71M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
8.2
(72.7)
11.1
(97.9)
DFY71ML
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
7.9
(69.8)
10.9
(96.0)
13.8
(122)
15.0
(133)
DFY71L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
11.2
(99.4)
14.3
(127)
19.4
(172)
22.5
(199)
DFY90S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
16.0
(142)
21.7
(192)
27.0
(238)
DFY90M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
21.6
(191)
28.5
(252)
36.0
(318)
DFY90L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
28.1
(249)
36.0
(318)
DFY112S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
28.1
(249)
36.0
(318)
DFY112M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
27.3
(242)
35.0
(309)
DFY112ML
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
52.4
(463)
69.8
(617)
72.3
(639)
DFY112L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
52.4
(463)
70.0
(619)
100
(890)
6.0
(53.2)
0300
0370
3 400/500 VAC
E
190
0150
Mmax
21.4
(189)
MCS/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: SERVO...
DFS/DFY: nN = 3000 rpm
54.0
(477)
52.5
(464)
105
(928)
Motor
0015
0022
DFS56M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
3.0
(26.5)
DFS56L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
5.0
(44.2)
6.0
(53.2)
DFY71S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
5.4
(47.4)
7.4
(65.1)
0030
0040
0055
0075
0110
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
DFY71ML
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
DFY71L
Mmax
DFY90S
7.4
(65.8)
9.5
(83.8)
11.1
(97.8)
9.1
(80.0)
12.3
(109)
15.0
(132)
[Nm]
([lb.in])
13.0
(115)
17.1
(152)
22.0
(194)
22.5
(199)
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
14.3
(126)
18.8
(166)
24.0
(212)
27.0
(238)
DFY90M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
19.4
(171)
24.8
(219)
36.0
(318)
DFY90L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
DFY112S
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
DFY112M
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
DFY112ML
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
DFY112L
Mmax
[Nm]
([lb.in])
0220
0300
0370
3 400/500 VAC
7.5
(66.3)
E
DFY71M
0150
DFS/DFY: nN = 4500 rpm
36.0
(318)
19.2
(170)
MCS/MCH4_A...-5_3
(400/500 V)
P700: SERVO...
24.6
(218)
5
48.0
(424)
53.8
(576)
46.7
(413)
52.3
(463)
47.0
(416)
67.6
(598)
71.7
(634)
66.2
(585)
86.3
(763)
36.0
(318)
35.0
(309)
105
(928)
191
Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies
5.7
Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies

The thermal model in MOVIDRIVE implements dynamic limiting of the maximum output current. Consequently, the thermal model only permits less than 100 % output current at output frequencies less than 2 Hz if the capacity utilization is high.
This can occur in the case of:
electrically stopping hoists,
torque control at low speeds or when stopped.
In the case of dynamic applications (CFC and SERVO operating modes) with a brief
overload duration (< 1 s), please refer to the information in Sec. 5.9 (page 204).
Guaranteed sustained output currents ID depending on the output frequency fA:
05568AXX
Figure 78: Sustained output currents ID

amb = Ambient temperature
192
ID
= Sustained inverter output current
V1
= Supply voltage
Iout 1 = Time-limited overload current of the inverter
fA
= Inverter output frequency
IN
= Rated inverter output current according to technical

data
Overload capacity of the inverter
5.8
Sustained output
current and heat
sink time constant
MOVIDRIVE drive inverters permanently calculate the load on the inverter output stage
(unit utilization). Consequently, they enable the maximum possible power to be output
in each operating status.
The sustained output current ID is the reference parameter for ascertaining the overload
capacity. The permitted continuous output current depends on the ambient temperature,
the supply voltage, the output frequency and the PWM frequency. The current Iout 1 during the overload phase and the current Iout 2 during the low-load phase are specified as
a function of the sustained output current ID. The time unit used for ascertaining the
overload capacity is the heat sink time constant T of the inverter. This time constant is
different for each size.
Heat sink time constant T for inverter size
1
T = 3.5 min = 210 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
T = 4 min = 240 s
T = 9 min = 540 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
Unit utilization
If 'P860/P861 PWM frequency 1/2' > 4 kHz is set in the VFC modes and 'P862/P863
PWM fix 1/2' is set to off, the inverter automatically reduces the PWM frequency in the
event of a unit overload. The PWM frequency stays at the same setting in CFC and
SERVO modes. The inverter does not reduce the PWM frequency in case of a unit overload. The inverter reacts to a higher than permitted load by outputting the 'F44 Unit utilization' fault message and an immediate switch-off.
Temperature-controlled fan
The fans of the power section heat sink are temperature-controlled. The fan is not
switched on until above a heat sink temperature of = 45 C.
Load cycle
The required load cycle is the basis for ascertaining the overload capacity of the inverter.
The following conditions must be met so that a load cycle can be repeated periodically:
The temperature must be just below the critical heat sink temperature at the end of
the overload time t1.
During the subsequent low-load time t2, the heat sink temperature must fall far
enough so that a renewed overload for duration t1 is possible.
Figure 79 shows an example of a load cycle of this type. The temperature profiles of the
heat sink for the overload time t1 and the low-load time t2 are shown under the load cycle. If you arrange the temperature profiles as shown in Figure 79, you can check whether the overload limit is being exceeded.
Sample load cycle:
Overload current Iout 1 = 120 % ID
Low-load current Iout 2 = 40 % ID
Overload time t1 = 0.75 T
Low-load time t2 = 1.5 T
193
05550AXX
Figure 79: Sample load cycle
Determining the
overload capacity
You can determine the overload capacity in two ways depending on the length of the
overload time t1:
1. Overload time t1 0.25 T: based on diagrams.
2. Overload times t1 < 0.25 T: using a formula.
1. Diagrams
Overload times t1 0.25 T:
05551AXX
Figure 80: Sample overload diagram
194
The time axis is separated. The left-hand area shows the overload time t1 and the righthand area shows the low-load time t2. The temperature profile of the maximum permitted overload current Iout 1 is shown above t1 for the corresponding peripheral conditions.
The temperature profiles of the various low-load currents Iout 2 are shown in a series of
curves above t2.
The overload capacity is ascertained as follows using the load cycle from Figure 79:
At overload time t1 = 0.75 T vertically upwards until the intersection with Iout 1.
Horizontally to the right until the intersection with Iout 2 = 0.4 ID.
Vertically downwards and read off the minimum low-load time t2 t2 = 1.25 T.
In the load cycle from Figure 79, t2 = 1.5 T, which means the overload capacity is given.
For overload times t1 < 0.25 T, the reading accuracy of the diagrams is inadequate.
Furthermore, the curves are almost linear in this area. This means you can use a linear
formula for overload times t1 < 0.25 T instead of the diagrams.
Formula
At overload times t1 < 0.25 T, it is possible to calculate the overload capacity using the
following formula:
t2 > k t 1
k = Overload factor
The values for overload factors k are given on page 196 to page 202 as a function of the
supply voltage V1, ambient temperature and cycle frequency fPWM.
Example for MOVIDRIVE compact MCF40A0055 (size 2):
Operation with supply voltage V1 = 3 400 VAC, ambient temperature = 40 C and

cycle frequency fPWM = 4 kHz.
Rated unit current IN = 12.5 AAC and sustained output current ID = 125 % IN = 15.6
AAC ( Figure 78)
Overload time t1 = 30 s = 0.1 T
Low-load current Iout 2 = 6 A = 0.4 ID k = 0.778

Cycle frequency
fPWM
4 kHz
Sustained output current ID

(fA > 2 Hz)
Overload current Iout 1
125 % IN
120 % ID
Overload factor k at low-load current Iout 2 =

0
0.2 ID
0.4 ID
0.6 ID
0.411
0.538
0.778
1.407
The low-load time must be t2 > k t1 > 0.778 30 s > 23.34 s.
195
Overload capacity at 400 V / 25 C
The overload capacity of the inverter is derived from the overload time t1 using a formula
or the diagrams. The time unit used to determine the overload capacity is the heat sink
time constant T of the inverter. This time constant is different for each size.
t1 < 0.25 T
T = 3.5 min = 210 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
T = 4 min = 240 s
T = 9 min = 540 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
For overload times t1 < 0.25 T, use the formula t2 > k t1 to determine the overload
capacity ( page 194). The following table shows the overload factor k for various lowload currents:
Cycle frequency
fPWM
t1 0.25 T

(fA > 2 Hz)

0
0.2 ID
0.4 ID
0.6 ID
0.8 ID
4 kHz
144 % IN
104 % ID
0.085
0.107
0.145
0.226
0.508
8 kHz
112 % IN
114 % ID
0.314
0.408
0.582
1.016
4.160
16 kHz
78 % IN
110 % ID
0.235
0.303
0.427
0.720
2.324
For overload times t1 0.25 T, use the following diagrams to determine the overload
capacity ( page 194).
Cycle frequency fPWM = 4 kHz:
05552AXX
Figure 81: Overload capacity at fPWM = 4 kHz (400 V / 25 C)
196
05553AXX
05554AXX
197
The overload capacity of the inverter is determined from the overload time t1 using a formula or the diagrams. The time unit used to determine the overload capacity is the heat
sink time constant T of the inverter. This time constant is different for each size.
t1 < 0.25 T
T = 3.5 min = 210 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
T = 4 min = 240 s
T = 9 min = 540 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
Cycle frequency
fPWM
t1 0.25 T

(fA > 2 Hz)

0
0.2 ID
0.4 ID
0.6 ID
4 kHz
125 % IN
120 % ID
0.411
0.538
0.778
1.407
8 kHz
100 % IN
125 % ID
0.678
0.928
1.473
3.639
16 kHz
68 % IN
126 % ID
0.676
0.922
1.448
3.438
05555AXX
198
05557AXX
05558AXX
199
t1 < 0.25 T
T = 3.5 min = 210 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
T = 4 min = 240 s
T = 9 min = 540 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
Cycle frequency
fPWM
t1 0.25 T

(fA > 2 Hz)

0
0.2 ID
0.4 ID
0.6 ID
0.8 ID
4 kHz
134 % IN
112 % ID
0.245
0.316
0.443
0.741
2.287
8 kHz
100 % IN
114 % ID
0.286
0.369
0.522
0.888
3.040
16 kHz
67 % IN
109 % ID
0.182
0.232
0.321
0.521
1.385
05561AXX
200
05562AXX
05563AXX
201
t1 < 0.25 T
T = 3.5 min = 210 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
T = 4 min = 240 s
T = 9 min = 540 s
T = 5 min = 300 s
Cycle frequency
fPWM
t1 0.25 T

(fA > 2 Hz)
4 kHz
144 % IN
8 kHz
112 % IN
16 kHz
78 % IN

0
0.2 ID
0.4 ID
0.6 ID
104 % ID
0.662
0.897
1.395
3.176
114 % ID
0.745
1.022
1.627
4.103
110 % ID
0.595
0.803
1.234
2.695
05564AXX
202
05565AXX
05566AXX
203
Overload capacity of the inverter for short overload duration
5.9
Overload duration t1 < 1 s
In dynamic applications (CFC and SERVO modes) with a short overload duration t1, the
inverter can output overload currents up to 150 % IN even at PWM frequencies of 8 kHz
and 16 kHz.
The overload time t1 must be less than 1 second in order for this high overload capacity
to be achieved.
Ascertaining the
overload capacity
The overload capacity for the short overload duration (t1 < 1 s) must be ascertained using appropriate diagrams. The mean inverter output current Iout RMS during the load cycle must not exceed a certain value.
05573AXX
Figure 93: Sample overload diagram for short overload duration
The time axis is separated. The left-hand area shows the overload time t1 and the righthand area shows the low-load time t2. The temperature profiles for various overload currents Iout 1 are shown in a series of curves above t1. The temperature profiles for various
low-load currents Iout 2 are shown in a series of curves above t2.
204
Example:
Following specifications:
Overload current Iout 1 = 140 % ID
Overload time t1 = 0.3 s
Low-load current Iout 2 = 40 % ID
Low-load time t2 = 1.0 s
At overload time t1 = 0.3 s vertically upwards until the intersection with Iout 1 = 140 %
ID.
Horizontally to the right until the intersection with Iout 2 = 0.4 ID.
Vertically downwards and read off the minimum low-load time t2 t2 = 0.13 s.
The overload capacity is given according to the diagram. In addition to the diagram, it is
now necessary to check that the permitted mean inverter output current Iout RMS is not
exceeded:
05574AXX
The permitted mean inverter output current is Iout RMS 65 % ID. In the specified load
cycle, Iout RMS = 63.08 % ID. This means the load cycle is just permitted.
205

The permitted mean inverter output current is Iout RMS 79 % ID.
05575AXX
Figure 94: Brief overload capacity at fPWM = 8 kHz (400 V / 25 C)

05576AXX
206

05577AXX

05578AXX
207

05579AXX

05580AXX
208

05581AXX

05582AXX
209
5.10
High voltage
The connection leads to the braking resistor carry a high DC voltage (approx. 900 V).
The braking resistor lines must be suitable for this high DC voltage.
Line length
The maximum permitted line length between MOVIDRIVE and the braking resistor
is 100 m (330 ft).
Parallel connection
Two braking resistors must be connected in parallel in the case of some inverter/
resistor combinations. In this case, the trip current must be set on the bimetallic relay
to twice the value of IF entered in the table.
Peak braking
power
The DC link voltage and the resistance value mean the peak braking power may be less
than the load capacity of the braking resistor. This peak braking power is calculated as
follows:
Pmax =
2
U DC
R
04994AXX
VDC is the switch-in threshold of the brake chopper. Its value is

VDC = 822 VDC in MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units) and
VDC = 480 VDC in MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-2_3 (230 V units).
The following table lists the peak braking power levels which are possible for the different resistance values.
Resistance value
100
MC_4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units)
MC_4_A...-2_3 (230 V units)
6.7 kW
68
10.0 kW
47
14.4 kW
39
17.3 kW
5.9 kW
27
8.5 kW
18
37.5 kW
15
45 kW
12
56 kW
19.2 kW
9 (2 BW018 parallel)
75 kW
25.6 kW
7.5 (2 BW915 parallel)

6
3 (2 BW106/206 parallel)
210
Peak braking power
30.7 kW
112 kW
38.4 kW
76.8 kW
In the case of braking operations within the cycle duration TD (standard: TD 120 s), the
cdf braking power can be used to ascertain the resulting continuous resistor dissipation
(100 % cdf power) with reference to the power diagrams. The right-hand y axis shows
the 100 % cdf power.
Power diagrams
8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
100
1
0.8
1
0.8
0.6
0.6
Continuous braking
power (100% cdf) [kW]
Short-term braking power [kW]
Power diagrams for MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units):
0.4
0.4
3
7 8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
Cyclic duration factor of the braking resistor cdf [%]
70 80
100
01043BEN
8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
40
Pmax @ 39
20
10
8
20
Pmax @ 47
Pmax @ 68
10
8
Pmax @ 100
100
40
1
0.8
1
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.4
6 7 8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
Continuous braking power (100% cdf) [kW]
Figure 102: Power diagram for flat-type braking resistor 400/500 V units (BW100-005)
0.4
100
01042BEN
Figure 103: Power diagram for wire resistors 400/500 V units
Example
When an intermittent braking power of 7 kW is needed with a cyclic duration factor of

30 %, it requires a braking resistor with a continuous power of 2 kW, e.g. BW247.

Load capacity
BW100-005 BW100-006
100 % cdf
Resistance value
RBW
Trip current of F16
IF
Enclosure
for MC_4_A...-5_3
0.45 kW
0.6 kW
100 10 %
0.8 ARMS
1.8 ARMS
BW168
BW268
BW147
BW247
BW347
0.8 kW
1.2 kW
1.2 kW
2.0 kW
4.0 kW
68 10 %
2.5 ARMS
IP54
0015/0022
3.4 ARMS
47 10 %
3.5 ARMS
4.9 ARMS
7.8 ARMS
IP20 (when mounted)

0015 ... 0040
0055/0075
211
8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
150
100
80
60
150
@6
100
80
@ 12
40
20
P
P
100
200
@ 15
60
40
@ 18
@ 39
20
10
8
10
8
3
200
1
3
7 8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
100
01516BEN
Figure 104: Power diagram for grid resistors 400/500 V units
Example
When an intermittent braking power of 3 kW is needed with a cyclic duration factor of

40 %, it requires a braking resistor with a continuous power of 1.5 kW, e.g. BW018-015.

Load capacity
100 % cdf
Resistance value
RBW
Trip current of F16
IF
BW039-012
BW039-026
BW039-050
BW018-015
BW018-035
BW018-075
1.2 kW
2.6 kW
5.0 kW
1.5 kW
3.5 kW
7.5 kW
39 10 %
4.2 ARMS
7.8 ARMS
Enclosure
100% cdf
8.1 ARMS
14 ARMS
Resistance value
RBW
Trip current of F16
IF
BW915
BW012-025
BW012-050
BW012-100
BW106
BW206
16 kW
2.5 kW
5.0 kW
10 kW
13 kW
18 kW
15 10 %
28 ARMS
Enclosure
212
4.0 ARMS
0150/0220 and 2 parallel with 0370/0450
0110
for MC_4_A...-5_3
11 ARMS
IP20 (when mounted)
for MC_4_A...-5_3
Load capacity
18 10 %
12 10 %
6.1 ARMS
12 ARMS
6 10 %
22 ARMS
38 ARMS
42 ARMS
IP20 (when mounted)

0110
0300
0370 ... 0750
Power diagrams for MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-2_3 (230 V units):
10
8
8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
100
Pmax @ 27
10
8
Pmax @ 39
1
0.8
1
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.2
3
7 8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
0.2
100
02773BEN
Figure 105: Power diagram for wire resistors 230 V units

Load capacity
100 % cdf
Resistance value
RBW
Trip current of F16
IF
BW039-003
BW039-006
BW039-012
BW039-026
BW027-006
BW027-012
0.3 kW
0.6 kW
1.2 kW
2.6 kW
0.6 kW
1.2 kW
39 10 %
2.0 ARMS
3.2 ARMS
4.2 ARMS
Enclosure
for MC_4_A...-2_3
27 10 %
7.8 ARMS
2.5 ARMS
4.4 ARMS
IP20 (when mounted)

0015/0022
0015 ... 0037
213
200
100
200
150
150
8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
Pmax @ 3 (26 )
100
80
60
100
80
60
Pmax @ 9 (218 )
Pmax @ 6
40
40
Pmax @ 7.5 (215 )

Pmax @ 12
20
20
10
8
10
8
1
3
7 8 9 10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
100
02774BEN
Figure 106: Power diagram for grid resistors 230 V units

Load capacity
100 % cdf
Resistance value
RBW
Trip current of F16
IF
BW018-015
BW018-035
BW018-075
1.5 kW
3.5 kW
7.5 kW
16 kW
18 10 %
15 10 %
14 ARMS
28 ARMS
18 10 %
4.0 ARMS
8.1 ARMS
Enclosure
IP20 (when mounted)
for MC_4_A...-2_3

Load capacity
100 % cdf
Resistance value
RBW
Trip current of F16
IF
BW012-025
BW012-050
BW012-100
BW106
2.5 kW
5.0 kW
10 kW
13 kW
12 10 %
10 ARMS
19 ARMS
Enclosure
for MC_4_A...-2_3
214
BW915
BW206
18 kW
6 10 %
27 ARMS
38 ARMS
42 ARMS
IP20 (when mounted)

0055/0075
0150 and 2 parallel with 0220/0300
Connecting AC brake motors
5.11
Connecting AC brake motors

Refer to the 'Geared Motors' catalog for detailed information about the SEW brake system. This document can be ordered from SEW.
SEW brake systems are DC operated disc brakes which are released electromagnetically and applied by spring force. A brake rectifier supplies the brake with DC voltage.
The brake rectifier must have its own supply system cable for inverter operation;
supply from the motor voltage is not permitted!
Switching off the

brake rectifier
The brake rectifier can be switched off thereby causing the brake to be applied in two
ways:
1. Cut-off in the AC circuit

2. Cut-off in the DC and AC circuit (faster cut-off)
Always switch off the brake on the DC and AC sides under the following conditions:
all hoist applications,
in CFC (MCV) and SERVO (MCS, MCH) operating modes.
Activating the
brake
Always operate the brake via DB, not via the PLC!
The binary output DB '/Brake' is configured as an output for operating a relay with a
control voltage of +24 V / max. 150 mA / 3.6 W. This means a power contactor can be
controlled directly with a 24 VDC coil voltage. The brake is switched using this power
contactor.
The startup function in the DBG11B keypad and in the MOVITOOLS software sets the
brake parameters for the 2 and 4-pole SEW motors. The brake parameters (P73_) must
be set manually in the case of SEW motors with a higher number of poles.
Brake parameters
The brake parameters are adapted to the brake activation arrangement shown in the
wiring diagram. Hoists may sag, for example, if the brake release and application time
is set too short, e.g. in the event of long response times in the brake control system.
215
Permitted voltage systems for MOVIDRIVE
5.12
Permitted voltage systems for MOVIDRIVE

MOVIDRIVE is intended to be operated on voltage supply systems with a directly
grounded star point (TN and TT power systems). Operation on voltage supply systems
with a non-grounded star point (for example IT power systems) is permitted. In such a
case, SEW recommends using earth-leakage monitors employing pulse-code measurement. This avoids mis-tripping of the earth-leakage monitor due to the earth capacitance
of the inverter.
5.13
Mains contactor and mains fuses
Mains contactor
Only use mains contactors in utilization category AC-3 (IEC 158-1).
Do not use the K11 mains contactor for setup mode, but only for switching the inverter on and off. Use the 'Enable/RAPID STOP', 'CW/STOP' or 'CCW/STOP' commands for jog mode.
Observe a minimum switch-off time of 10 s for the mains contactor K11.
Mains fuse types
Line protection types in utilization categories gL, gG:
Rated fuse voltage Power supply voltage
Rated fuse currents must be configured to 100 % or 125 % of the rated inverter currents depending on the inverter capacity utilization.
Circuit breakers with characteristics B, C:
216
Rated circuit breaker voltage Power supply voltage
Rated circuit breaker currents must be 10 % above the rated inverter current.
Power cables and motor cables
5.14
Special regulations
Comply with the regulations issued by specific countries and for specific machines
regarding fusing and the selection of line cross sections. Also comply with the instructions for UL-compliant installation if necessary.
Line cross sections and fusing
SEW proposes the following line cross sections and fusing, assuming the use of singlecore copper cables with PVC insulation laid in cable ducts, an ambient temperature of
25 C and rated system currents of 100 % of the rated inverter current:
400/500 V units metric, Vin = 3 400 VAC:

MC_4_A...-5A3
0015
0022
0030
Size
Fuses F11/F12/F13
0040
0055
0075
1
16 A
16 A
25 A
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
4 mm2
2 1.5 mm2
1 10 mm2
2 1.5 mm2
1 10 mm2
2 4 mm2
1 10 mm2
IN
Power cable L1/L2/L3

PE conductor
1.5 mm2
Motor cable U/V/W

Unit terminal cross section
of the power section
MC_4_A...-503
1.5 mm2
0150
0220
0300
2.5 mm2
0370
0450
4 mm2
0550
0750
5
35 A
50 A
63 A
80 A
100 A
125 A
6 mm2
10 mm2
16 mm2
25 mm2
35 mm2
50 mm2
2 6 mm2
1 10 mm2
1 10 mm2
1 16 mm2
Motor cable U/V/W
6 mm2
10 mm2
16 mm2 1)

Screw and washer assembly M6 with

washer max. 25 mm2
Crimp cable connector DIN 46234
Fuses F11/F12/F13
IN
Supply system lead L1/L2/L3

PE conductor
Screw and washer assembly M4 with terminal clip

4 mm2 conductor end sleeve DIN 46228
6 mm2 crimp cable connector DIN 46234
Disconnectable terminal strip

Size
0110
1 16 mm2
25 mm2 1)
35 mm2
50 mm2
Bolt M10 with nut

max. 70 mm2
1) Use a motor feeder with a 10 mm2 cross section with MCS and MCH (SERVO) due to the connector on the CM/DFY motor!
230 V units metric, Vin = 3 230 VAC:

MC_4_A...-2_3
0015
0022
Size
Fuses F11/F12/F13
0037
0055
0075
1
16 A
25 A
25 A
35 A
1.5 mm2
4 mm2
4 mm2
6 mm2
2 1.5 mm2
1 10 mm2
2 4 mm2
1 10 mm2
2 4 mm2
1 10 mm2
2 6 mm2
1 10 mm2
1.5 mm2
4 mm2
4 mm2
6 mm2
IN

PE conductor
Motor cable U/V/W



6 mm2 crimp cable connector DIN 46234
MC_4_A...-2_3
0110
0220
Size
Fuses F11/F12/F13
0150
3
IN

PE conductor
Motor cable U/V/W
0300
4
50 A
63 A
80 A
100 A
10 mm2
16 mm2
25 mm2
35 mm2
1 10 mm2
1 16 mm2
1 16 mm2
1 16 mm2
10 mm2
16 mm2
25 mm2
35 mm2
Screw and washer assembly M6 with washer

max. 25 mm2
Bolt M10 with nut

max. 70 mm2
217
400/500 V units to USA NEC, Vin = 3 460 VAC:

MC_4_A...-5A3
0015
0022
0030
Size
0040
0055
0075
1
20 A
30 A
AWG14
AWG12
AWG10
PE conductor
AWG14
AWG12
AWG10
Motor cable U/V/W
AWG14
AWG12
AWG10
Fuses F11/F12/F13
IN
6A
0110
10 A

MC_4_A...-503

AWG10 conductor end sleeve
AWG10 crimp cable connector

0150
0220
Size
Fuses F11/F12/F13
15 A
0300
0370
0450
3
IN
0550
0750
40 A
60 A
80 A
90 A
110 A
150 A
175 A
AWG8
AWG6
AWG4
AWG4
AWG3
AWG1
AWG2/0
AWG8
AWG8
AWG6
AWG61)
AWG41)
AWG41)
AWG3
PE conductor
AWG10
Motor cable U/V/W
AWG8

Screw and washer assembly M6 with

washer
max. AWG4 crimp cable connector
AWG6
AWG1
AWG2/0
Bolt M10 with nut

max. AWG2/0 crimp cable connector
1) Use a motor feeder with an AWG8 cross section with MCS and MCH (SERVO) due to the connector on the CM/DFY motor!
230 V units to USA NEC, Vin = 3 230 VAC:

MC_4_A...-2_3
0015
0022
Size
0037
0055
0075
16 A
25 A
AWG14
AWG12
AWG10
PE conductor
AWG14
AWG12
AWG10
Motor cable U/V/W
AWG14
AWG12
Fuses F11/F12/F13
IN

MC_4_A...-2_3

0110
Size
0150
25 A
35 A
AWG10
AWG10 crimp cable connector
0220
0300
4
50 A
60 A
80 A
90 A
AWG6
AWG4
AWG4
AWG3
PE conductor
AWG10
AWG8
AWG8
AWG6
Motor cable U/V/W
AWG6
AWG4
AWG4
AWG3
Fuses F11/F12/F13
IN

Screw and washer assembly M6 with washer

max. AWG4 crimp cable connector
Bolt M10 with nut

max. AWG2/0 crimp cable connector
AWG = American Wire Gauge
218
Permitted motor
cable lengths
The maximum motor cable length is dependent on:
cable type
voltage drop in the cable,
only in VFC operating mode: Set PWM frequency P860/P861.
only in VFC operating mode: Connecting an HF... output filter.
with an encoder connected: the maximum cable length for the encoder connection is
100 m (330 ft) with a capacitance per unit length of 120 nF/km (193 nF/mile).
The following information provides approximate values:

MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-5_3:
0015
MC_4_A...-5_3
at Vin = 3 400 VAC
0022
0030
0040
0055
0075 ... 0750
Recommended maximum motor cable length [m (ft)]

Shielded cable
VFC operating mode1) 4 kHz

PWM frequency 8 kHz
(P860/P861)
12 kHz
16 kHz
120 (396)
80 (264)
50 (165)
40 (132)
200 (660)
120 (396)
80 (264)
60 (198)
250 (825)
150 (495)
120 (396)
100 (330)
CFC and SERVO mode

PWM frequency fixed at 8 kHz
300 (990)
250 (825)
200 (660)
150 (495)
300 (990)
250 (825)
200 (660)
150 (495)
400 (1320)
300 (990)
250 (825)
200 (660)
900 (2970)
750 (2475)
600 (1980)
450 (1485)
1200 (3960)
900 (2970)
750 (2475)
600 (1980)
100 (330)
Unshielded cable
1)
VFC operating mode 4 kHz

PWM frequency 8 kHz
(P860/P861)
12 kHz
16 kHz
360 (1188)
240 (792)
150 (495)
120 (396)
600 (1980)
360 (1188)
240 (792)
180 (594)
750 (2475)
450 (1485)
360 (1188)
300 (990)
CFC and SERVO mode

900 (2970)
750 (2475)
600 (1980)
450 (1485)
100 (330)
1) An output filter is only permitted in VFC mode and with an unshielded motor feeder. If an HF... output filter is connected, the cable
length is not restricted by these limiting values, but exclusively by the voltage drop along the motor feeder.
MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-2_3:

0015
MC_4_A...-2_3
at Vin = 3 230 VAC
0022
0037
0055
0075
0110 ... 0300
Recommended maximum motor cable length [m (ft)]

Shielded cable
1)
VFC operating mode 4 kHz

PWM frequency 8 kHz
(P860/P861)
12 kHz
16 kHz
120 (396)
80 (264)
50 (165)
40 (132)
200 (660)
120 (396)
80 (264)
60 (198)
250 (825)
150 (495)
120 (396)
100 (330)
CFC operating mode

300 (990)
250 (825)
200 (660)
150 (495)
300 (990)
250 (825)
200 (660)
150 (495)
400 (1320)
300 (990)
250 (825)
200 (660)
900 (2970)
750 (2475)
600 (1980)
450 (1485)
1200 (3960)
900 (2970)
750 (2475)
600 (1980)
100 (330)
Unshielded cable
VFC operating mode1) 4 kHz

PWM frequency 8 kHz
(P860/P861)
12 kHz
16 kHz
360 (1188)
240 (792)
150 (495)
120 (396)
600 (1980)
360 (1188)
240 (792)
180 (594)
750 (2475)
450 (1485)
360 (1188)
300 (990)
CFC operating mode

900 (2970)
750 (2475)
600 (1980)
450 (1485)
100 (330)
1) No output filter is allowed to be connected to MOVIDRIVE MD_60A...-2_3!
219
Voltage drop
The line cross section of the motor cable should be selected so the voltage drop is as
small as possible. An excessively high voltage drop means that the full motor torque
is not achieved.
The expected voltage drop can be determined with reference to the following tables (the
voltage drop can be calculated in proportion to the length if the cables are shorter).
Line
cross section
Load with I [A] =

4
10
5.3
10.6
13.3
2.5
mm2
4 mm2
6 mm
17.3
20
25
21.3
30
40
50
63
80
100
125
150
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
10.2
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
3.2
4.8
6.4
8.1
10.4
12.8
16
1)
1.9
2.8
3.8
4.7
6.5
8.0
10
12.5
4.4
10 mm2
16
16
Voltage drop U [V] with length = 100 m (330 ft) and = 70 C
Copper
1.5 mm2
13
5.3
6.4
8.3
9.9
1)
3.2
4.0
5.0
6.0
8.2
mm2
3.3
25 mm2
3.9
5.2
6.5
7.9
10.0
1)
2.5
3.3
4.1
5.1
6.4
8.0
2.9
3.6
4.6
35 mm
50 mm2
5.7
7.2
8.6
4.0
5.0
6.0
100
125
150
1) Loading not permitted, in accordance with VDE 0100 part 430
Line
cross section
Load with I [A] =

4
10
7.0
10.5
1)
1)
16
30
40
50
63
80
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
12.9
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
AWG14
4.2
6.3
8.4
10.5
13.6
AWG12
2.6
3.9
5.2
6.4
8.4
10.3
AWG8
25
1)
1)
AWG10
20
Voltage drop U [V] with length = 100 m (330 ft) and = 70 C
Copper
AWG16
13
5.6
6.9
8.7
10.8
13.0
1)
4.5
5.6
7.0
8.4
11.2
5.1
6.9
8.6
10.8
13.7
1)
AWG4
3.2
4.3
5.4
6.8
8.7
10.8
13.5
AWG3
2.6
3.4
4.3
5.1
6.9
8.6
10.7
12.8
3.4
4.2
5.4
6.8
8.5
10.2
AWG1
3.4
4.3
5.4
6.8
8.1
AWG1/0
2.6
3.4
4.3
5.4
6.8
2.7
3.4
4.3
5.1
AWG6
AWG2
AWG2/0
4.3
1) More than 3 % voltage drop in relation to Vin = 460 VAC.
220
Group drive in VFC mode
5.15
Group drive in VFC mode

In VFC & GROUP operating mode, a group of asynchronous motors can be operated
on one inverter. In this operating mode, the inverter operates without slip compensation
and with a constant U/f ratio. The motors are operated without encoder feedback.
The parameter settings apply to all connected motors.
Motor currents
The total of the motor currents must not exceed the output rated current of the inverter.
Motor lead
The permitted length of all motor leads connected in parallel is determined as follows:
Iges
Imax
n
04999AXX
ltot= Total length of the motor leads connected in parallel

lmax= Recommended maximum motor lead length ( page 219)
n
= Number of motors connected in parallel
Only use unshielded motor leads.

Motor size
The motors in a group must not be more than three levels apart.
Output filter
Usually, there is no need for an output filter with small groups of 2 to 3 motors. An output
filter HF... is required if the maximum motor lead length (lmax) given in the table is not
adequate. This may be the case in large groups (n) or when there are long motor lead
lengths connected in parallel (ltot). The maximum motor lead length is then no longer restricted by the limit given in the table, but instead by the voltage drop on the motor lead.
The total value of the rated motor currents must not exceed the rated throughput current
of the output filter.
No flying restart circuit is possible with an output filter!
221
Connecting explosion-proof AC motors
5.16
Connecting explosion-proof AC motors

Comply with the following instructions when connecting explosion-proof AC motors to
MOVIDRIVE drive inverters:
222
The inverter must be installed outside the potentially explosive atmosphere.
Comply with regulations specific to the industry and country.
Comply with the regulations and instructions issued by the motor manufacturer with
regard to operation on a frequency inverter, e.g. requirement for a sine filter.
In future, all tools and fixtures in the potentially explosive atmosphere must comply
with directive 94/9/EC (ATEX 100a).
The TF/TH input on the MOVIDRIVE must not be used for thermal monitoring of the
motor. Use a TF/TH trip switch which is approved for use in potentially explosive atmospheres for thermal monitoring.
In the case of motors with speed feedback, the tachometer must also be approved
for use in potentially explosive atmospheres. The tachometer can be directly connected to MOVIDRIVE.
Components for EMC compliant installation
5.17

The designated use of MOVIDRIVE drive inverters and regenerative power supply
units is as components for installation in machinery and systems. They comply with the
EMC product standard EN 61800-3 'Variable-speed electrical drives'. Provided the information relating to EMC compliant installation is complied with, they satisfy the appropriate requirements for CE-marking of the entire machine/system in which they are fitted, on the basis of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A drive inverters of size 1 and 2 are fitted with an input
filter as standard. These units comply with limit value class A to EN 55011 and EN 55014
on the line side without further measures.
Interference
immunity
With regard to interference immunity, MOVIDRIVE meets all the requirements stipulated in EN 50082-2 and EN 61800-3.
Interference
emission
Higher levels of interference are permitted in industries. In such an environment, it may

be possible to dispense with the measures described below depending on the situation
of the supply system and the machine configuration.
Limit value class A
Two options are available for EMC compliant installation in accordance with EN 55011,
limit value class A, depending on the machine configuration:
Limit value class A
Class B limit
On the motor
On the power system
Sizes 1 to 5
Sizes 1 and 2
Sizes 3 to 5
1st option
HD... output choke
No action needed
NF...-... input filter
2nd option
Shielded motor feeder
No action needed
Two options are available for EMC compliant installation in accordance with EN 55011,
limit value class B, depending on the machine configuration:
Class B limit
On the motor
On the power system
Sizes 1 to 5
Sizes 1 to 5
1st option
HD... output choke
2nd option
IT systems
No EMC limits are specified for interference emission in voltage supply systems without
an earthed star point (IT systems). The effectiveness of input filters is severely limited.
223
Block diagram of
limit value class
B
L1
L2
L3
PE
F11 F12 F13
K11
L1
L2
L3
NF...-...
L1' L2' L3'
400 mm (15 in)
8 +R
MOVIDRIVE
9 -R
X10
(1)
(2)
HD...
n=5
V W
05000AXX
Figure 107: Installation with consideration for EMC, in accordance with limit value
class B
(1) = 1st possible solution with HD... output choke
(2) = 2nd possible solution with shielded motor lead
Refer to the publication entitled 'Drive Engineering - Practical Implementation, Electromagnetic Compatibility' for more information. This document can be ordered from SEW.
224
Connecting the optional power components
5.18
Series ND... line

choke
05001AXX
Figure 108: Connecting ND... line chokes
Series NF...-... line

filters
05002AXX
Figure 109: Connecting NF...-... line filters
Series HD... output chokes
MOVIDRIVE
n=5
HD...
PE U V W
(1)
05003AXX
Figure 110: Connecting HD... output chokes

(1) = Motor cable
Only route the 3 phases U, V and W through the output choke! Do not route the PE conductor through the output choke!
Output choke type

For cable cross sections
HD001
HD002
HD003
1.5...16 mm2 (AWG16...6)
1.5 mm2 ( AWG16)
16 mm2 ( AWG6)
225
Series HF... output filters
Output filters are allowed to be used in:

Operating mode
MOVIDRIVE compact
MCF
MCV
MCS
MCH
VFC
Yes
Yes
Yes
CFC
No
No
SERVO
No
No
Install output filters next to the corresponding inverter. Leave a ventilation space of
at least 100 mm (4 in) below and above the output filter. No clearance is required to
either side.
Restrict the length of the cable between the inverter and the output filter to the absolute minimum needed. Maximum 1 m (3.3 ft) with an unshielded cable and 10 m (33
ft) for a shielded cable.
An unshielded motor lead is sufficient when using an output filter. Note the following
instructions when you are using an output filter together with a shielded motor lead:
DC link required ( page 227)
Set P860/P861 PWM frequency 1/2 = 16 kHz
Set P862/P863 PWM fix 1/2 = ON
The DC link increases the inverter load.
Several motors can be connected jointly to one output filter when multiple motors are
operated on one inverter. The total value of the rated motor currents must not exceed
the rated throughput current of the output filter.
It is acceptable for two identical output filter to be connected in parallel to one inverter
output in order to double the rated throughput current. To do this, all connections with
the same name should be connected to the output filters in parallel.
Output filter connection V5 (with HF...-503) or 7 (with HF...-403) must not be connected (no DC link) when the inverter is operated with fPWM = 4 or 8 kHz.
MOVIDRIVE
HF...
7
2 3 PE 4
6 PE 8
5 6 PE U V W PE HF...-403
V5 U1 V1 W1 PE U2 V2 W2 PE HF...-503
M
U VW
PE
L1 L2 L3 PE
05004AXX
Figure 111: HF...-... output filter connection without DC link
226
DC link
Operation without DC link (standard):
Permitted for all PWM frequencies (4, 8, 16 kHz).
Operation with DC link

(Connection of inverter tl. 8 to HF...-503 tl. V5 or HF...-403 tl. 7):
Improved filter effect in the low-frequency range ( 150 kHz).
Only the PWM frequency 16 kHz is permitted. Note the power reduction of units as
a function of the PWM frequency!
Set P862/P863 'PWM fix' = ON!
With HF...-403: Only permitted with Vin 400 VAC.
The DC link connection increases the required inverter output current in relation to the
rated output current of the inverter in accordance with the following table.
fPWM
16 kHz
Vin = 3 400 VAC
Vin = 3 500 VAC
8%
12%
Failure to comply with this may result in the inverter shutting down due to an overload.
05504AXX
Figure 112: HF...-... output filter connection with DC link
227
Electronics cables and signal generation
5.19
Electronics cables and signal generation
The electronics terminals are suitable for the following cross sections:
MCF/MCV/MCS:
Single core 0.20...2.5 mm2 (AWG24...12)

Double core 0.20...1 mm2 (AWG24...17)
Only single core 0.20...1.5 mm2 (AWG24...16)
MCH:

Route electronics cables separately from power cables and contactor control cables
or braking resistor cables. If using shielded electronics cables, earth the shield at
both ends.
Use a setpoint potentiometer with R = 5 k.
If necessary, potentiometer setpoints are switched using the 10 V voltage rather than
via the wiper lead.
MCF/MCV/MCS
X10:
+10V
n1
+
-
-10V
REF1
AI11
REF2
AI12
SC11
AI21
SC12
AGND
MCH
X10:
R11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+10V
n1
+
-
-10V
REF1
AI11
AI12
AI21
AGND
REF2
R11
1
2
3
4
5
6
05304AXX
Figure 113: Switching the potentiometer setpoint
0 V cables (AGND, DGND, DCOM) are never connected for generating signals. The
0 V cables of several electrical units which are connected together should not be
looped from unit to unit, but rather wired up in a star configuration. This means:
Install the units in adjacent switch cabinet compartments rather than distributing
them widely.
Lay the 0 V cables with 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) cross section from a central point to each
individual unit by the shortest possible route.
If coupling relays are used, they should always be ones with encapsulated, dust-protected electronics contacts, which are suitable for switching small voltages and currents (5...20 V, 0.1...20 mA).
Binary inputs/outputs
The binary inputs are electrically isolated by optocouplers. Binary input commands
can also be issued directly as a 0/1 command from the PLC instead of using a coupling relay (signal level electronics data).
The binary outputs are short-circuit proof, although they are not interference-voltageproof. Applying an external voltage to the binary outputs may destroy them!
The inverter starts a self-test (approx. 3 s) when the power system or the 24 V supply
is switched on. All signal outputs have the level '0' throughout the self-test.
24 V power supply VI24:

To EN 61131-2, VN = +24 V -10 %/+20 %. A total AC voltage component with a peak
value of 5 % of the rated voltage (+24 V) is permitted in addition to the specified voltage tolerances.
228
External 24 VDC voltage supply
5.20
External 24 VDC voltage supply

MOVIDRIVE compact units have an internal 24 VDC supply with a maximum continuous power of 50 W. The units can be operated without an external 24 VDC voltage supply. An external 24 VDC power supply unit with minimum 50 W continuous output power
must be connected to VI24 if the control electronics of the inverter should remain operational even when the power system is switched off. The permitted peak output power
must be at least 100 W for 1 s. This power supply unit then takes over the complete 24
VDC power supply for MOVIDRIVE compact.
SEW recommends that units with a fieldbus (MC_41A and MCH42A) should always be
operated with an external 24 VDC voltage supply.
MCF/MCV/MCS
MCH
X10:
X12:
1
REF1
2
AI11
3
REF2
4
AI12
5
SC11
6
AI21
7
SC12
8
AGND
9
DI
DI1 10
DI2 11
DI3 12
DI4 13
DI5 14
DCOM 15
VO24 16
DGND 17
DO1-C 18
DO2 19
DO1-NO 20
DB 21
DO1-NC 22
DGND 23
24
VI24
DB
DO1-C
DO1-NO
DO1-NC
DO2
VI24
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
24 V
24 V
05305AXX
Figure 114: Connecting the external 24 VDC voltage supply
229
Parameter set switchover
5.21
Parameter set switchover

This function allows two motors to be operated with two different parameter sets on the
same inverter in the VFC modes without speed control ( P700).
The parameter set switchover occurs by means of a binary input. A binary input must be
programmed to the 'PARAM. SWITCHOVER' function ( P60_/P61_) for this purpose.
It is possible to switch between parameter set 1 and 2 in the BLOCKED inverter status.
Function
PARAM. SWITCHOVER
Effect of
'0' signal
'1' signal
A changeover contactor should be provided for each of the two motor leads when two
motors are operated alternately on the same inverter with the parameter set switchover
function in use ( P60_/P61_ PARAM. SWITCHOVER). Do not switch the switchover
contacts unless the unit is inhibited!
Only VFC operating modes without speed control are possible with parameter set 2.
Speed control or CFC and SERVO operating modes are not possible.
230
Priority of operating states and logic gating of control signals
5.22
Priority of operating states and logic gating of control signals
Priority of operating states

Priority
high
Controller inhibit
Rapid stop
Hold control
Stop
low
Enable
05306AEN
Figure 115: Priority of operating states
Logic gating of
control signals
The following table shows the logic gating of control signals. '/Controller inhibit' is programmed to binary input DI and cannot be changed. The other control signals are
only in effect if a binary input is programmed to this function ( parameter P60_).
Binary input is programmed to
/Controller
inhibit
(DI)
Enable/rapid
stop
/Hold control
CW/STOP
CCW/STOP
'0'
1)
1)
1)
1)
'1'
'0'
2)
2)
2)
'1'
'1'
'0'
3)
3)
'1'
'1'
'1'
'1'
'0'
CW running
enabled
'1'
'1'
'1'
'0'
'1'
CCW running
enabled
Inverter status
Inhibit
1) Not relevant if '/Controller inhibit (DI)' = '0'

2) Not relevant if 'Enable/Rapid stop' = '0'
3) Not relevant if '/Hold control' = '0'
CW*
=1
CCW*
&
&
&
DRIVE CONTROL
/HOLD CONTROL*
ENABLE*
/CONTROLLER INHIBIT
02210BEN
Figure 116: Logic gating of control signals

* If a binary input is programmed to this function.
231
Limit switches
5.23
Limit switches
Limit switch processing
Limit switch processing ensures that a drive does not move outside its travel range. To
do this, it is possible to program the binary inputs to the functions /LIM. SWITCH CW
and /LIM. SWITCH CCW. The limit switches are connected to these binary inputs. The
limit switches must be '0' active and continuously actuated in the limit switch area
(= movement up to limit switch).
'0' active means:
Limit switch not contacted (= not actuated) 24 V signal
Limit switch contacted (= actuated) 0 V signal
Limit switch contacted ('0' signal)
Moving the drive

clear
Behavior of the
drive when moving clear
The drive is stopped with the emergency ramp t14/t24.
The brake is then applied if the brake function is activated.
In IPOS operating modes, contacting a limit switch generates a fault message. A reset is then required in order to move clear ( IPOS manual).
The inverter must be enabled via the binary inputs.
Hold control must not be active.
The inverter receives a setpoint from the setpoint source leading in the direction for
moving clear.
If the setpoint stop function is activated: setpoint > start setpoint
When the brake function is activated, the brake is first released and then the drive is
moved clear ('0' '1' signal). The limit switches must supply a '1' signal continuously
in the travel range.
If movement clear of the limit switch area takes place without a move-clear phase, for
example by moving the drive manually, then it is possible to continue moving in normal
operating status.
Limit switch monitoring
232
The inverter monitors whether the limit switches are missing, if there is an open circuit or if the limit switches have been swapped over. If this is the case, the inverter
triggers an emergency stop and displays fault F27, 'Limit switches missing.'
6
6
Serial Communication
MOVILINK protocol
The MOVILINK profile enables the uniform transmission of user data between SEW inverters as well as via various communications interfaces to higher-level automation
equipment. Consequently, MOVILINK guarantees a control and parameter setting concept that can be used regardless of the fieldbus for all current bus systems, such as:
PROFIBUS-DP
INTERBUS with fiber optic cable
CAN
RS-232
RS-485
The MOVILINK protocol for serial interfaces in the new SEW range of inverters, MOVIDRIVE and MOVIMOT, enables you to set up a serial bus connection between a
higher-level master and several SEW inverters. For example, masters may take the
form of programmable logic controllers, PCs or even SEW inverters with PLC functions
(IPOSplus). Generally speaking, the SEW inverters function as slaves in the bus system.
The MOVILINK protocol allows both of the following applications to be implemented:

automation tasks such as control and parameter setting of the drives by means of cyclical data exchange, startup and visualization tasks.
Features
The principal features of the MOVILINK protocol are:
Support for the master/slave structure via RS-485 with one master (single master)
and at most 31 slave stations (SEW inverters).
Support for point-to-point connection via RS-232.
User-friendly implementation of the protocol in a straightforward and reliable message structure with fixed message lengths and a unique start identifier.
Data interface to the basic unit in accordance with the MOVILINK profile. This
means the user data sent to the drive are transmitted to the inverter in the same way
as via the other communications interfaces (PROFIBUS, INTERBUS, CAN etc.).
Access to all drive parameters and functions, so they can be used for startup, service, diagnostics, visualization and automation tasks.
Startup and diagnostic tools on the basis of MOVILINK for PC (e.g. MOVITOOLS/
SHELL and MOVITOOLS/SCOPE).
Please refer to the 'Serial Communication and System Bus (SBus)' manual for a detailed
description of the MOVILINK protocol. This manual is available from SEW-EURODRIVE.
233
7
7
Safety Notes
Installation and
startup
Never install damaged products or take them into operation. Please submit a
complaint to the shipping company immediately in the event of damage.
Installation, startup and service work may only be performed by trained personnel observing applicable accident prevention regulations and operating instructions!
The regulations in force (e.g. EN 60204, VBG 4, DIN-VDE 0100/0113/0160) must
also be complied with.
Follow the specific instructions during installation and startup of the motor and
the brake!
Make sure that preventive measures and protection devices correspond to the
applicable regulations (e.g. EN 60204 or EN 50178).
Necessary protection measures:
Grounding the unit
Necessary protection device:
Overcurrent protection devices
The unit meets all requirements for reliable isolation of power and electronics
connections in accordance with EN 50178. All connected circuits must also satisfy
the requirements for reliable isolation so as to guarantee reliable isolation.
Take suitable measures to ensure that the connected motor does not start up automatically when the inverter is switched on.
Suitable measures are:
With MCF/MCV/MCS4_A: Connect terminal X10:9 '/CONTROL. INHIBIT' to DGND.
With MCH4_A: Disconnect the electronics terminal block X11.
Operation and
service
234
Disconnect the unit from the power supply system prior to removing the protective cover. Dangerous voltages may still be present for up to 10 minutes after
mains disconnection.
The unit has IP 00 enclosure with the protective cover removed. Dangerous voltages are present at all subassemblies except for the control electronics. The unit
must be closed during operation.
Dangerous voltages are present at the output terminals and the cables and motor terminals connected to them when the unit is switched on. This also applies
even when the unit is inhibited and the motor at a standstill.
Just because the operation LED and other display elements have gone out does
not mean that the unit has been disconnected from the supply system and is de-energized.
Safety functions inside the unit or a mechanical blockage may cause the motor
to stop. The removal of the source of the malfunction or a reset can result in an
automatic restart of the drive. If, for safety reasons, this is not permitted for the
driven machine, the unit must be disconnected from the supply system before
correcting the fault. In such cases, it is also forbidden for the 'Auto reset' function
(P841) to be activated.
Switch the inverter output only when the output stage is inhibited.
Unit designation, nameplates and scope of delivery
Unit Design
8.1
Unit designation, nameplates and scope of delivery
Sample unit designation
05292AEN
Sample nameplate
The overall nameplate is attached to the side of the unit.
C 4
8267480
01318AXX
Figure 117: Overall nameplate
Furthermore, a type label is attached to the front of the control unit (above the TERMINAL option slot).
C4
8267480
01322AXX
Figure 118: Type label
Scope of delivery
MCH: Connector housing for signal terminals (X10...X12), connected.
In addition, with size 1: Plug housing for the power terminals (X1...X4), connected.
In addition, with sizes 1 and 2: Power shield clamp.
In addition, with sizes 4 and 5: Touch guard for the power terminals.
235
Unit design MCF/MCV/MCS4_A
8.2
Size 1

MCF/MCV/MCS4_A...-5A3 (400/500 V units): 0015...0040
MCF/MCV/MCS4_A...-2A3 (230 V units): 0015...0037
Figure 119: Unit design, MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCS4_A, size 1
05417AXX
1. X1: Mains connection L1 (1) / L2 (2) / L3 (3), separable

2. X4: DC link connection -UZ / +UZ and PE connection, separable
3. X2: Motor connection U (4) / V (5) / W (6), separable
4. Connection for power shield clamp (not visible)
5. X3: Braking resistor connection R+ (8) / R- (9) and PE connection, separable
6. TERMINAL: Option slot for DBG11B keypad or USS21A serial interface
7. V1: Operating LED and PROFIBUS-DP diagnostic LEDs (only with MCF/MCV/MCS41A)
8. Retaining screw A for terminal unit
9. Flap on terminal unit with labeling tile
10. X10: Electronics terminal strip
11. Retaining screw B for terminal unit
12. Screw for electronics shield clamp
13. Terminal unit, removable
14. Only with MCV/MCS4_A X15: Motor encoder input (9-pin sub D socket)
15. Only with MCV/MCS4_A X14: Incremental encoder simulation output or external encoder
input (9-pin sub D plug)
16. Only in MCF/MCV/MCS41A X30: PROFIBUS-DP connection (9-pin sub D socket)
236
Size 2
MCF/MCV/MCS4_A...-5A3 (400/500 V units): 0055...0110

MCF/MCV/MCS4_A...-2A3 (230 V units): 0055 / 0075
05418AXX
1. X1: Mains connection L1 (1) / L2 (2) / L3 (3)

2. X4: DC link connection -UZ / +UZ and PE connection
3. X2: Motor connection U (4) / V (5) / W (6)
4. X6: Connection for power shield clamp (not visible)
5. X3: Braking resistor connection R+ (8) / R- (9) and PE connection
237
Size 3
MCF/MCV/MCS4_A...-503 (400/500 V units): 0150...0300

MCF/MCV/MCS4_A...-203 (230 V units): 0110 / 0150
05419AXX
1. PE connections
3. X4: DC link connection -UZ / +UZ
4. PE connections
6. X3: Braking resistor connection R+ (8) / R- (9)
238
Size 4
MCF/MCV/MCS4_A...-503 (400/500 V units): 0370 / 0450

MCF/MCV/MCS4_A...-203 (230 V units): 0220 / 0300
05420AXX
1. PE connections
4. PE connections
239
Size 5
MCF/MCV/MCS4_A...-503 (400/500 V units): 0550 / 0750
05421AXX
1. PE connections
4. PE connections
240
Unit design MCH4_A
8.3
Size 1
Unit design MCH4_A

MCH4_A...-5A3 (400/500 V units): 0015...0040
MCH4_A...-2A3 (230 V units): 0015...0037
Figure 124: Unit design, MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A, size 1
05193AXX

2. X4: DC link connection -UZ / +UZ and PE connection, separable
3. X2: Motor connection U (4) / V (5) / W (6), separable
4. Connection for power shield clamp (not visible)
5. X3: Braking resistor connection R+ (8) / R- (9) and PE connection, separable
7. V1: Operation LED
10. X10: Electronics terminal strip, separable
16. Diagnostic LEDs INTERBUS-FO
17. Only with MCH42A X30...X33: INTERBUS-FO connections
18. X14: Incremental encoder simulation output or external encoder input (15-pin sub D plug)
19. X15: Motor encoder input (15-pin sub D socket)
20. Only with MCH41A X30: PROFIBUS-DP connection (9-pin sub D socket)
241
Unit design MCH4_A
Size 2
MCH4_A...-5A3 (400/500 V units): 0055...0110

MCH4_A...-2A3 (230 V units): 0055 / 0075
05194AXX

2. X4: DC link connection -UZ / +UZ and PE connection
4. X6: Connection for power shield clamp (not visible)
5. X3: Braking resistor connection R+ (8) / R- (9) and PE connection
242
Unit design MCH4_A
Size 3
MCH4_A...-503 (400/500 V units): 0150...0300

MCH4_A...-203 (230 V units): 0110 / 0150
05195AXX
1. PE connections
4. PE connections
243
Unit design MCH4_A
Size 4
MCH4_A...-503 (400/500 V units): 0370 / 0450

MCH4_A...-203 (230 V units): 0220 / 0300
05196AXX
1. PE connections
4. PE connections
244
Unit design MCH4_A
Size 5
MCH4_A...-503 (400/500 V units): 0550 / 0750
05322AXX
1. PE connections
4. PE connections
245
Installation instructions for basic unit
Installation
9.1

It is essential to comply with the safety notes during installation!
Tightening
torques
Only use genuine connection elements. Note the permitted tightening torques
of MOVIDRIVE power terminals.
Size 1
0.6 Nm (5.3 lb.in)
Size 2
1.5 Nm (13.3 lb.in)
Size 3
3.5 Nm (31 lb.in)
Sizes 4 and 514 Nm (124 lb.in)
Nm (lb.in)!
02475AXX
Figure 129: Note the tightening torques
Minimum clearance and mounting position
Leave 100 mm (4 in) clearance at the top and bottom for optimum cooling. No lateral clearance required; the units can be lined up side-by-side. With sizes 4 and 5,
do not install any components which are sensitive to high temperatures within 300
mm (11.81 in) of the top of the unit. Only install the units vertically. Do not install the
units horizontally, tilted or upside down.
100 mm
(4 in)
100 mm
(4 in)
02474AXX
Figure 130: Minimum clearance and installation position of the units
246
Separate cable
ducts
Route power cables and electronics cables in separate cable ducts.
Input fuses and

earth-leakage circuit breakers
Install the input fuses at the beginning of the supply system lead after the supply
bus junction ( Wiring diagram for basic unit, power section and brake).
Using an earth-leakage circuit breaker as the sole protection device is not permitted. Earth-leakage currents > 3.5 mA can arise during normal operation of the
inverter. Use universal current-sensitive earth-leakage circuit breakers only.
Supply system
and brake contactors
Use only contactors in utilization category AC-3 (IEC 158-1) as supply system
and brake contactors.
More than four

units
With more than four units on a supply system contactor designed to cope with
the total current: Insert a 3-phase line choke in the circuit to limit the inrush current.
PE mains connection ( EN
50178)
With a supply system lead < 10 mm2 (AWG 8): Lay a second PE conductor with
the cross section of the supply system lead in parallel to the protective earth via
separate terminals or use a copper protective earth with a cross section of 10
mm2 (AWG 8).
With a supply system lead 10 mm2 (AWG 8): Lay a copper protective earth
with the cross section of the supply system lead.
SEW recommends using earth-leakage monitors with a pulse code measuring

process in voltage supply systems with a non-earthed star point (IT systems). This
avoids mis-tripping of the earth-leakage monitor due to the earth capacitance of the
inverter.
IT systems
9
Cross sections
Supply system lead: Cross section according to rated input current Imains at rated
load.
Motor lead: Cross section according to rated output current IN.
Electronics cables:
MCF/MCV/MCS:
Single core 0.20...2.5 mm2 (AWG24...12)

Double core 0.20...1 mm2 (AWG24...17)
MCH:
Only single core 0.20...1.5 mm2 (AWG24...16)

Unit output
Connect ohmic/inductive loads (motors) only. Never connect capacitive loads!
02476AXX
Figure 131: Connect ohmic/inductive loads only; do not connect capacitive loads
247
Connecting braking resistors
Operating braking resistors
Binary inputs /
binary outputs
Shielding and
earthing
Use two closely twisted cables or a 2-core shielded power cable. Cross section
according to the rated output current of the inverter.
Protect the braking resistor with a bimetallic relay / thermal overload relay ( Wiring diagram for basic unit, power section and brake). Set the trip current according
to the technical data of the braking resistor.
The connection leads to the braking resistors carry a high DC voltage (approx. 900
V) during rated operation.
The surfaces of the braking resistors get very hot when the braking resistors are
loaded with PN. Select a suitable installation position. As a rule, braking resistors
are mounted on the switch cabinet roof.
Install the flat-type braking resistors together with the appropriate touch guard.
The binary inputs are electrically isolated by optocouplers.
The binary outputs are short-circuit proof, although they are not interferencevoltage-proof (exception: relay output DO1). External voltage can cause irreparable damage to the binary outputs.
Use shielded control cables only.
Connect the shield by the shortest possible route and make sure it is earthed
over a wide area at both ends. You can ground one end of the shield via a suppression capacitor (220 nF / 50 V) to avoid ground loops. If using double-shielded cables,
ground the outer shield on the inverter end and the inner shield on the other end.
00755BXX
Figure 132: Example of correct shield connection with metal clamp (shield clamp) or metal
cable gland
248
Shielding can also be achieved by laying the cables in grounded sheet metal
ducts or metal pipes. In this case, the power cables and control cables should
be laid separately.
Provide high frequency compatible grounding for the inverter and all additional
units (wide area metal-on-metal contact between the unit housing and ground, e.g.
unpainted switch cabinet mounting panel).
Line filter
Interference
emission
HD... output choke
Sizes 1 and 2 are fitted with an line filter as standard. This line filter ensures that
limit value class A is maintained on the supply side. Use an NF...-... line filter as
an option to maintain the class B limit.
The NF...-... line filter option is required for sizes 3 to 5 to maintain class A and B
limits.
Install the line filter close to the inverter, but outside the minimum clearance required for cooling.
Restrict the cable between the line filter and the inverter to the absolute minimum length required, and never more than 400 mm (15.8 in). Unshielded, twisted
cables are sufficient. Also use unshielded cables as the supply system lead.
This line filter must be installed either directly at the entry point into the switch
cabinet or in the immediate vicinity of the inverter if several inverters are connected to the same line filter. The line filter must be chosen on the basis of the total
current of the connected inverters.
No EMC limits are specified for interference emission in voltage supply systems without an earthed star point (IT systems). The effectiveness of line filters
in IT systems is severely limited.
SEW recommends the following EMC measures on the output side to maintain the
class A and B limits:
HD... output choke option
Install the output choke close to the inverter, but outside the minimum clearance
required for cooling.
Route all three phases together through the output choke. Do not route the PE
conductor through the output choke!
MOVIDRIVE
HD... output choke

n=5
PE U V W
motor cable
to the motor
03973AEN
Figure 133: Connecting HD... output chokes
249
Installation instructions for PROFIBUS-DP interface (MC_41A)
9.2
Pin assignment
Connection to the PROFIBUS network using a 9-pin sub D plug according to IEC 61158.
The T-bus connection must be made using a plug with the corresponding configuration.
02893AEN
Figure 134: Assignment of 9-pin sub D plug to IEC 61158
As a rule, the MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverter is connected to the PROFIBUS system using a shielded twisted-pair cable. Note the maximum supported transmission rate
when you are selecting the bus connector.
The two-core cable is connected to the PROFIBUS connector using pin 3 (RxD/TxD-P)
and pin 8 (RxD/TxD-N). Communication takes place via these two contacts. The RS-485
signals RxD/TxD-P and RxD/TxD-N must be connected to the same contacts in all
PROFIBUS stations. Otherwise, communication via the bus will not function.
The PROFIBUS interface sends a TTL control signal via pin 4 (CNTR-P) for a repeater
or FO adapter (reference = pin 9).
Shielding and
routing bus
cables
The PROFIBUS interface supports RS-485 transmission technology and requires the
cable type A to IEC 61158 specified as the physical medium for PROFIBUS. This cable
must be a shielded, twisted-pair two-core cable.
Having the bus cable correctly shielded cuts out parasitic interference which can occur
in an industrial environment. The following measures enable the best possible shielding
to be achieved:
Tighten the retaining screws of plugs, modules and equipotential bonding conductors
until finger-tight.
Only use connectors with a metal housing or a metallized housing.
Connect the shield in the connector over a large surface area.
Apply the bus cable shielding on both ends.
Do not route the signal and bus cables in parallel to the power cables (motor feeders); use separate cable ducts if at all possible.
Only use metal, grounded cable racks in industrial environments.
Join the signal cables and the associated equipotential bonding together at closely
spaced intervals by the shortest route.
Avoid using plug connections to extend bus cables.
Route the bus cables closely adjacent to available grounding surfaces.
In the event of fluctuations in the ground potential, a compensating current may flow
along the shield which is connected at both ends and to the ground potential (PE). In this
case, make adequate provision for equipotential bonding in accordance with the relevant VDE regulations.
250
Bus termination
with MCF/MCV/
MCS41A
If the MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverter is located at the start of or the end of a
PROFIBUS segment, then the connection to the PROFIBUS network is not generally
made using a T-bus connection with an incoming and outgoing PROFIBUS cable. Instead, the connection is a direct one with only one PROFIBUS cable. In order to prevent
malfunctions in the bus system due to reflections, etc., the PROFIBUS segment must
be terminated using bus terminating resistors at the first and last physical stations.
It is not necessary to use a sub D plug with integrated terminating resistors because the
bus terminating resistors on the inverter can be switched on (DIP switches below the
connection unit Sec. 'Removing the connection unit' on page 269).
10
9
21
22
23
24
25
ON
20
26
ON
mA
OFF
PROFIBUS-DP
Bus termination
= OFF
TERMINATION
2
1
ON
nc
TERMINATION
ON
OFF
PROFIBUS-DP
Bus termination
= ON
S12
V
S11
02894AEN
Figure 135: Activating the bus termination using DIP switches with MCF/MCV/MCS41A
Both DIP switches (TERMINATION 1 and 2) must always be switched!
Bus termination is implemented for cable type A to IEC 61158.

Do not switch on the terminating resistors on the inverter if you are using sub D plugs
with integrated bus terminating resistors!
Bus termination
with MCH41A
MCH41A is not provided with bus terminating resistors so that the bus system can be
taken into operation more easily and in order to reduce the number of error sources.
Use a plug with an integrated bus terminating resistor if the inverter is at the start or finish
of a PROFIBUS segment and only one PROFIBUS cable is leading to the inverter.
Switch on the bus terminating resistors on this PROFIBUS plug.
251
Setting the station address with

MCF/MCV/
MCS41A
The PROFIBUS station address is set using DIP switches 4...10 (valency 26...20) below
the connection unit ( Sec. 'Removing the connection unit' on page 269). MOVIDRIVE
compact supports the address range 0...125.
Significance ON
10
9
8
22
Significance: 4 x 1 = 4
23
24
25
26
nc
Not connected, position OFF
TERMINATION
ON
ON
21
ON
20
mA
Factory setting:
Address = 4
PROFIBUS-DP Bus termination
OFF
S12
V
S11
02895AEN
Figure 136: Setting the PROFIBUS station address with MCF/MCV/MCS41A
The PROFIBUS station address can only be set using the DIP switches when the connection unit has been removed. This means the address cannot be altered during ongoing operation. The change comes into effect when the drive inverter is switched back on
(power system + 24 V OFF/ON). The drive inverter displays the current station address
in fieldbus monitor parameter P092 'Fieldbus address' (display with DBG11B or MOVITOOLS/SHELL).
For example: Setting station address 17
Significance ON
10
Significance:
1x1 = 1
21
Significance:
2x0 = 0
Significance:
4x0 = 0
Significance:
8x0 = 0
24
25
ON
20
26
nc
Not connected, position OFF
2
1
ON
ON
TERMINATION
mA
For example:
Set address = 17
PROFIBUS-DP Bus termination
OFF
S12
V
S11
03003AEN
Figure 137: Setting station address 17
252
Setting the station address with

MCH41A
The PROFIBUS station address is set using DIP switches 1...8 (valency 20...26) below
the connection unit ( Sec. 'Removing the connection unit' on page 269). MOVIDRIVE
compact supports the address range 0...125.
05527AEN
Figure 138: Setting the PROFIBUS station address with MCH41A
The PROFIBUS station address can only be set using the DIP switches when the connection unit has been removed. This means the address cannot be altered during ongoing operation. The change comes into effect when the drive inverter is switched back on
(power system + 24 V OFF/ON). The drive inverter displays the current station address
in fieldbus monitor parameter P092 'Fieldbus address' (display with DBG11B or MOVITOOLS/SHELL).
For example: Setting station address 17
05528AEN
Figure 139: Setting station address 17
253
Installation instructions for INTERBUS FO interface (MCH42A)
9.3
Bus connection
via fiber optic
cable (FO)
The bus connection uses fiber optic cables. You can use either polymer fiber cables or
HCS cables.
Polymer fiber
cables
This type of cable is used for distances of up to 70 meters between two INTERBUS stations. Various types are available depending on the application. This cable type offers
straightforward and inexpensive installation.
HCS cables
This type of cable can be used over distances of up to 500 m, since it has much lower
light attenuation values than polymer fiber cable.
The bus cable must be at least 1 meter long. Cable bridges from Phoenix Contact must
be used for shorter distances.
Please refer to Phoenix Contacts fiber optic cable installation guidelines (art. name IBS
SYS FOC ASSEMBLY) for further information about the correct routing of fiber optic cables.
Checklist for installing FO cables

Routing FO cables
Do not exceed the maximum cable length
Note the permitted bending radii
Do not crush or kink FO cables
Do not exceed the strain limit when routing
When unreeling FO cables for installation, always use an unreeling fixture
Protect them from strain and impermissibly small bending radii
Route them without loops
Protect them against sharp edges
Use a special cable type when routing in special areas (e.g. laying underground or
in proximity to welding robots)
Strip the insulation off the outer sheath and the individual cores without damaging
them
Fix the individual core in the plug (strain relief)
Polish and install the end of the plug in accordance with the guidelines
Calibrating FO
cables
Check the light intensity complies with the limit values (optical diagnosis with CMD
tool or FO measuring instrument)
Connecting FO
plugs
The fiber optic cable is connected to MOVIDRIVE compact MCH42A using plugs called
F-SMA plugs. You need a pair of plugs for the incoming and outgoing remote bus (transmitter and receiver). SEW recommends using F-SMA plugs with an anti-kinking sleeve
to ensure that the optimum bending radius is maintained.
Order data
for F-SMA plugs (e.g. Phoenix Contact)
Protective measures for FO

cables
Pre-fabricating FO
cables
254
Article name
Name
F-SMA plug set for polymer fiber cables (4 pieces) with anti-kinking sleeve
PSM-SET-FSMA/4-KT
for INTERBUS remote bus with FO
X31
X32
Direction
FO core color
FO remote IN
(incoming remote bus)
Receive data
Orange (OG)
Send data
Black (BK)
FO remote OUT
(continuing remote bus)
Receive data
Black (BK)
Send data
Orange (OG)
X10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UL
CC
BA
RD
TR
FO1
FO2
X33
Signal
X14
X30
OG
X31
BK
X32
BK
X15
X12
X33
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
UL
CC
BA
RD
TR
FO1
FO2
X30
X30
OG
X14
Connection
X31
BK
X32
X15
Pin assignment
X33
OG
05208AXX
Figure 140: FO connection assignment
Length of the fiber

optic cable
Use fiber optic cables with different lengths so as to avoid impermissible bending radii
in the fiber optic cables. Refer to the length data in the figure below in this regard.
50589AXX
Figure 141: Different lengths of fiber optic cables
255
Setting the DIP

switches
The six DIP switches S1 to S6 on the underside of the connection unit are used for setting the process data length, the PCP length and for selecting the baud rate.
The DIP switches can only be accessed when the connection unit has been removed
( Sec. 'Removing the connection unit' on page 269). Switch off the supply system and
the 24 VDC backup voltage before you remove the connection unit. This means the settings of the DIP switches cannot be changed during ongoing operation.
ON
ON
1
X1
05216AXX
Figure 142: DIP switches S1...S6 on the underside of the connection unit
ON
1
20 21 22
[1]
0.5 MBaud
2 MBaud
2
[2]
[3]
05215AXX
Figure 143: Assignment of DIP switches S1...S6

[1] Number of process data items (1...6 PD), for example 2 PD
[2] Number of PCP words (1, 2 or 4), for example 2 PCP words
[3] Baud rate (ON = 0.5 Mbaud, OFF = 2 Mbaud), for example 2 Mbaud
The drive inverter signals the 'Microprocessor not ready' ID code (38 hex) if the DIP
switch settings are not correct.
256
Setting the process

data and PCP
lengths
Up to six INTERBUS data words can be exchanged between the INTERBUS interface
and the inverter. These data words can be split between the process data channel and
the PCP channel using DIP switches S1 to S5. Because of the restriction to six data
words, there are some settings which cannot be reproduced on the INTERBUS.
The inverter signals the 'Microprocessor not ready' IC code (38hex) if the setting is incorrect. Its red TR LED indicates that the setting is incorrect. The following figure shows
the peripheral conditions for setting the process data and PCP lengths. The following
limits apply in principle:
1
ON
1
20 21 22
6 PD
[1]
ID: 03hex (3dez)

05217AXX
Figure 144: Settings for operating the inverter with 6 process data items
[1] The PCP settings with S4 and S5 are ineffective.
Process data length in words
PCP length
ID code
PCP setting ineffective;

no PCP channel can be used
03hex (3dec)
Examples:
1
ON
ON
20 21 22
5 PD
2
1 PCP
ID: E3hex (227dez)
ON
2
20 21 22
4 PD
20 21 22
2
2 PCP
2 PD
ID: E0hex (224dez)
2
4 PCP
ID: E1hex (225dez)

05218AXX
Figure 145: Examples for setting the PCP length and the maximum process data length
PCP length
Maximum process data length
ID code
1 word
5 words
E3 hex (227dec)
2 words
4 words
E0 hex (224dec)
4 words
2 words
E1 hex (225dec)
If the max. length is exceeded or the setting 38 hex (56dec) = 'Microprocessor not ready'
is 0 or 7 PD
All settings which have not been named result in the 'Microprocessor not ready' ID code.
The inverter then signals 0PD in parameter P090 'PD configuration' and indicates that
the setting is incorrect by means of the red TR LED.
257
UL compliant installation
9.4
UL compliant installation
Please note the following points for UL compliant installation:
Only use copper cables with the following temperature ranges as connection
leads:
For MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A0015...0300 temperature range 60/75 C
For MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A0370...0750 temperature range 75/90 C
The permitted tightening torques for MOVIDRIVE compact power terminals are:
Size 1
0.6 Nm (5.3 lb.in)
Size 2
1.5 Nm (13.3 lb.in)
Size 3
3.5 Nm (31 lb.in)
Sizes 4 and 514 Nm (124 lb.in)
MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters are suitable for operation in voltage power
systems with an earthed star point (TN and TT systems) which can supply a max.
current in accordance with the following tables and which have a max. voltage of 240
VAC for MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...2_3 (230 V units) and 500 VAC for MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-5_3 (400/500 V units). The performance data of the
fuses must not exceed the values in the tables.
400/500 V units
MOVIDRIVE compact
MC_4_A...5_3
Max. supply current
Max. supply voltage
Fuses
0015/0022/0030/0040
10000 AAC
500 VAC
30 A / 600 V
0055/0075/0110
10000 AAC
500 VAC
30 A / 600 V
0150/0220
5000 AAC
500 VAC
175 A / 600 V
0300
5000 AAC
500 VAC
225 A / 600 V
0370/0450
10000 AAC
500 VAC
350 A / 600 V
0550/0750
10000 AAC
500 VAC
500 A / 600 V
MOVIDRIVE compact
MC_4_A...2_3
Max. supply current
Max. supply voltage
Fuses
0015/0022/0037
5000 AAC
240 VAC
30 A / 250 V
0055/0075
5000 AAC
240 VAC
30 A / 250 V
0110
5000 AAC
240 VAC
175 A / 250 V
0150
5000 AAC
240 VAC
225 A / 250 V
0220/0300
10000 AAC
240 VAC
350 A / 250 V
230 V units
Only use tested units with a limited output voltage (Vmax = 30 VDC) and limited output current (I 8 A) as an external 24 VDC voltage source.
UL certification does not apply to operation in voltage supply systems with a nonearthed star point (IT systems).
258
Power shield clamp
9.5
Power shield clamp
For size 1
A power shield clamp is supplied as standard with MOVIDRIVE compact size 1. Install
this power shield clamp together with the retaining screws of the unit.
1
2
Figure 146: Power shield clamp for MOVIDRIVE compact size 1
02012BXX
1. Shield clamp
2. PE connection ()
For size 2
A power shield clamp with 2 retaining screws is supplied as standard with MOVIDRIVE
compact size 2. Install this power shield clamp together with the two retaining screws on
X6.
Figure 147: Power shield clamp for MOVIDRIVE compact size 2
01469BXX
1. Shield clamp
2. PE connection ()
Power shield clamps provide you with a very convenient way of installing the shield for
the motor and brake leads. Fit the shield and PE conductor as shown in the figures.
259
Touch guard
9.6
Touch guard
Two touch guards with eight retaining screws are supplied as standard with MOVIDRIVE compact sizes 4 and 5. Install the touch guard on the two hood covers for the
power section terminals.
Figure 148: Touch guard for MOVIDRIVE compact sizes 4 and 5
01470BXX
With installed touch guard, MOVIDRIVE compact size 4 and 5 units achieve IP10 enclosure, IP00 without touch guard.
260
Wiring diagram, basic unit
9.7
Connection of the power section and brake

L1
L2
L3
PE
F11/F12/F13
K11
(AC-3)
Protective earth conductor (shield)

L1 L2
VAC
VAC
F14/F15
F14/F15
L3
Option NF... line filter
VAC
DC-link
connection *
7 8
L1' L2' L3'
F14/F15
L1 L2 L3
X1:
K11
(AC-3)
K11
(AC-3)
K11
(AC-3)
DB
DGND
K12
(AC-3)
X4:
Power section
U
DB
-VDC link PE
+VDC link
DB
X2:
V W
5
X3:
+R -R PE
K12
(AC-3)
DGND
DGND
F16
1
BMK 2
3
4
13
14
15
white
1
BG 2
red
Brake connector** BGE 3
4
blue
CM (DY)
5
3 (3)
4 (2)
CT/CV/DT/DV/D:
5 (1)
simultaneous switch-off
PE
in the AC and DC circuits
1
BG 2
3
BGE 4
5
white
red
blue
CT/CV/DT/DV/D:
switch-off in the AC circuit
CM71...112: simultaneous switch-off in the AC and DC circuits
M
3- phase
BW...
affects
K11
K11 must be opened in case F16 triggers

and DI "/Controller Inhibit" must
receive a 0signal.Do not separate
the resistor circuit!
05149AEN
Figure 149: Wiring diagram, power section and brake

*
With sizes 1 and 2, there is no PE connection next to the mains connection terminals. In this case, use the PE
terminal next to the DC link connection.
**
Important:It is essential to adhere to the sequence of connections. Incorrect connection will lead to irreparable
damage to the brake.
A separate supply system lead is required for connecting the brake rectifier. Powering it from the motor voltage is not permitted!
drives which require a rapid brake reaction time and
in CFC and SERVO operating modes.
Brake rectifier in
switch cabinet
Route the connection cables between the brake rectifier and the brake separately from
other power cables when installing the brake rectifier in the switch cabinet. Joint routing
is only permitted if the power cables are shielded.
261
MCF/MCV/MCS4_A: Control unit connection
03828AEN
Figure 150: Wiring diagram for MCF/MCV/MCS4_A control unit
262
MCF/MCV/MCS41A (with PROFIBUS-DP): SEW recommends always supplying

these units with 24 VDC at terminal X10:24 (VI24). This external 24 VDC power supply
must be capable of supplying a continuous power of 50 W and a peak power (1 s) of
100 W.
Analog input AI21 (X10:6) can be used either as a 10 V voltage input or as a TF/TH
input. It is changed over using parameter P120.
DIP switches S11, S12 and 1...10 can only be accessed when the connection unit
has been removed ( Sec. 'Removing the connection unit' on page 269).
The function of DIP switches 1...10 is explained in Secs. 'Bus termination' and 'Setting the station address' on page 251 and page 252.
The TF/TH line must either be shielded or laid at a distance of at least 0.2 m (8 in)
from power cables (e.g. motor or brake cables). The TF/TH line must be separately
shielded if hybrid cables are used for the motor and TF/TH connection.
MCF/MCV/MCS4_A: Description of terminal functions on the basic unit

Terminal
Function
X1:1/2/3
X2:4/5/6
X3:8/9
X4:
L1/L2/L3
U/V/W
+R/-R
+UZ/-UZ
Mains connection
Motor connection
Braking resistor connection
DC link connection
X10:1
X10:2/4
X10:3
X10:5/7
X10:6
X10:8
REF1
AI11/12
REF2
SC11/SC12
AI21
AGND
+10 V (max. 3 mA) for setpoint potentiometer

Setpoint input n1 (differential input or input with AGND reference potential), signal form P11_ / S11
-10 V (max. 3 mA) for setpoint potentiometer
System bus (SBus) high/low
Either setpoint input n2 (0...10 V) or TF/TH input, setting P120
Reference potential for analog signals (REF1, REF2, AI..)
X10:9
X10:10
X10:11
X10:12
X10:13
X10:14
DI
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
Binary input 1, with fixed assignment '/Controller inhibit'

Binary input 2, factory setting 'CW/stop'
Binary input 3, factory setting 'CCW/stop'

Binary input 4, factory setting 'Enable/rapid stop'
Binary input 5, factory setting 'n11/n12'
X10:15
DCOM
Reference for binary inputs DI to DI5 (X10:9 to X10:14)

Switching of binary inputs with +24 V external voltage: DCOM (X10:15) must be connected to the reference potential of the external voltage.
Without jumper DCOM-DGND (X10:15-X10:17) Isolated binary inputs
With jumper DCOM-DGND (X10:15-X10:17) Non-isolated binary inputs
X10:18
X10:19
Shared contact binary output 1, factory setting: 'Ready'

DO1-C
DO2/AO1 Binary output 2, factory setting: 'No function', load capacity max. 50 mA (short-circuit proof)
can also be used as analog output AO1 (not with MCF41A), switchover with P621 and P642
DO1-NO Normally open contact binary output 1, load capacity of the relay contacts max. 30 VDC and 0.8 A
DB
Binary output 0, with fixed assignment '/Brake', load capacity max. 150 mA (short-circuit proof)
DO1-NC NC contact binary output 1
Selection options for binary outputs 1 and 2 (DO1 and DO2) Parameter menu P62_
Do not apply an external voltage to binary outputs DB (X10:21) and DO2/AO1 (X10:19)!
DGND
Reference potential for binary signals
VI24
Input +24 V voltage supply (backup voltage, unit diagnosis when supply system off)
X10:20
X10:21
X10:22
X10:23
X10:24
X14:1
X14:2
X14:3
X14:4
X14:5
X14:6
X14:7
X14:8
X14:9
X15:1
X15:2
X15:3
X15:4
X15:5
X15:6
X15:7
X15:8
X15:9

Selection options for binary inputs 2 to 6
(DI1...DI5) Parameter menu P60_
Switching of binary inputs with +24 V from VO24 (X10:16) DCOM-DGND jumper required.
Input of
external
encoder or
output of
incremental encoder
simulation
Signal track A (K1)

Signal track B (K2)
Signal track C (K0)
Switchover
Ref. potential DGND
Signal track A (K1)
Signal track B (K2)
Signal track C (K0)
+24 V (max. 180 mA)
The following encoders are allowed to be connected as external encoders:

5 V TTL sensor with 24 VDC voltage supply type ES1R, ES2R or EV1R
5 V TTL sensor with 5 VDC voltage supply type ES1T, ES2T or EV1T via
DWI11A option
Motor
encoder
input
MCV4_A:
Signal track A (K1)
Signal track B (K2)
Signal track C (K0)
N.C.
Ref. potential DGND
Signal track A (K1)
Signal track B (K2)
Signal track C (K0)
+24 V (max. 180 mA)
MCS4_A:
sin+ (S2)
cos+ (S1)
Ref.+ (R1)
N.C.
REF1 (+10 V for TF/TH)
sin- (S4)
cos- (S3)
Ref.- (R2)
AI21 (TF/TH connection)
If X14: is used as an incremental encoder simulation output, the switchover (X14:4)

must be jumpered with DGND (X14:5).
The following encoders are allowed to be connected:

With MCV4_A:
sin/cos encoder type ES1S, ES2S or EV1S
5 V TTL sensor with 24 VDC voltage supply type
ES1R, ES2R or EV1R
5 V TTL sensor with 5 VDC voltage supply type
ES1T, ES2T or EV1T via DWI11A option
5 V HTL sensor with 24 VDC voltage supply type
ES1C, ES2C or EV1C
With MCS4_A:
2-pole resolver, 7 VAC_r.m.s. / 7 kHz
X30:
MCF/MCV/MCS41A: PROFIBUS-DP connection, 9-pin sub D socket, pin assignment page 250
1...10
DIP switches for PROFIBUS settings page 251
S11:
S12:
Switch mode I signal (0(4)...20 mA) V signal (-10 V...0...10 V, 0...10 V), factory setting: V signal
Switch system bus terminating resistor on or off, factory setting: switched off
TERMINAL
Option slot for DBG11B keypad or serial port USS21A (RS-232 and RS-485)
Important with MCS4_A: If a TF/TH is connected to X15:5 and X15:9 then no TF/TH
connection is permitted on X10:1 and X10:6! Terminal X10:6 is not allowed to be used
in this case, not even as a 10 V voltage input.
263
Analog output
AO1
With MCF40A and MCV/MCS40/41A, binary output DO2 (X10:19) can also be used
as a 0(4)...20 mA analog output AO1. It is changed over using parameters P621 'Binary
output DO2' and P642 'Operating mode AO1'.
Function of X10:19
P621 'Binary output DO02'
P642 'Operating mode AO1'
Binary output DO2
Set to NO FUNCTION
Set to OFF
Analog output AO1

NO FUNCTION
Set to NO FUNCTION
Set to OFF
Set to NO FUNCTION
Set to OFF
Set to NO FUNCTION
Set to OFF
MCV41A: Assignment of electronics terminals and labeling tile
03044AXX
Figure 151: Electronics terminals and labeling tile, example of MCV41A
264
MCH4_A: Control unit connection
05209AEN
Figure 152: Wiring diagram, MCH4_A control unit
265
MCH41A (with PROFIBUS-DP) / MCH42A (with INTERBUS FO): SEW recommends always supplying these units with 24 VDC at terminal X10:24 (VI24). This external 24 VDC power supply must be capable of supplying a continuous power of 50
W and a peak power (1 s) of 100 W.
input. It is changed over using parameter P120.
DIP switches S11, S12, 1...8 and S1...S6 can only be accessed when the connection
unit has been removed ( Sec. 'Removing the connection unit' on page 269).
The function of DIP switches 1...8 is explained in Secs. 'Bus termination with
MCH41A' and 'Setting the station address with MCH41A' on page 251 and page 252.
The function of DIP switches S1...S6 is explained in Sec. 'DIP switch settings' on
page 256.
The TF/TH line must either be shielded or laid at a distance of at least 0.2 m (8 in)
from power cables (e.g. motor or brake cables). The TF/TH line must be separately
shielded if hybrid cables are used for the motor and TF/TH connection.
If a TF/TH is connected to X15:6 and X15:14 then no TF/TH connection is permitted on

X10:1 and X10:4! However, terminal X10:4 can be used as a 10 V voltage input.
Analog output
AO1
With MCH4_A, binary output DO2 (X12:5) can also be used as a 0(4)...20 mA analog
output AO1. It is changed over using parameters P621 'Binary output DO2' and P642
'Operating mode AO1'.
Function of X12:5
Binary output DO2
Analog output AO1
NO FUNCTION
266
P621 'Binary output DO02'
P642 'Operating mode AO1'
Set to NO FUNCTION
Set to OFF
Set to NO FUNCTION
Set to OFF
Set to NO FUNCTION
Set to OFF
Set to NO FUNCTION
Set to OFF
MCH4_A: Description of terminal functions on the basic unit

Terminal
Function
X1:1/2/3
X2:4/5/6
X3:8/9
X4:
L1/L2/L3
U/V/W
+R/-R
+UZ/-UZ
Mains connection
Motor connection
Braking resistor connection
DC link connection
X10:1
X10:2/3
X10:4
X10:5
X10:6
REF1
AI11/12
AI21
AGND
REF2
+10 V (max. 3 mA) for setpoint potentiometer

Setpoint input n1 (differential input or input with AGND reference potential), signal form P11_ / S11
Either setpoint input n2 (0...10 V) or TF/TH input, setting P120
Reference potential for analog signals (REF1, REF2, AI..)
-10 V (max. 3 mA) for setpoint potentiometer
X10:7/8
SC11/SC12 System bus high/low, direct electrical connection to SC21/SC22 (X10:10/X10:11)
X10:9
DGND
Reference potential system bus
X10:10/11 SC21/SC22 System bus high/low, direct electrical connection to SC11/SC12 (X10:7/X10:8)
X11:1
X11:2
X11:3
X11:4
X11:5
X11:6
DI
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
Binary input 1, with fixed assignment '/Controller inhibit'

Binary input 2, factory setting 'CW/stop'
Binary input 3, factory setting 'CCW/stop'

Binary input 4, factory setting 'Enable/rapid stop'
X11:7
DCOM
Reference for binary inputs DI to DI5 (X11:1 to X11:6)

Switching of binary inputs with +24 V external voltage: DCOM (X11:7) must be connected to the reference
potential of the external voltage.
Without jumper DCOM-DGND (X11:7-X11:9) Isolated binary inputs
With jumper DCOM-DGND (X11:7-X11:9) Non-isolated binary inputs
X11:8
X11:9
VO24
DGND
Auxiliary supply output +24 V (max. 200 mA) for external command switches
X12:1
X12:2
X12:3
X12:4
X12:5
DB
DO1-C
DO1-NO
DO1-NC
DO2/AO1
X12:6
X12:7
VI24
DGND
Binary output 0, with fixed assignment '/Brake', load capacity max. 150 mA (short-circuit proof)
Shared contact binary output 1, factory setting: 'Ready'
Normally open contact binary output 1, load capacity of the relay contacts max. 30 VDC and 0.8 A
NC contact binary output 1
Binary output 2, factory setting: 'No function', load capacity max. 50 mA (short-circuit proof)
can also be used as analog output AO1, switchover with P621 and P642
Selection options for binary outputs 1 and 2 (DO1 and DO2) Parameter menu P62_
Do not apply an external voltage to binary outputs DB (X12:1) and DO2/AO1 (X12:5)!
Input +24 V voltage supply (backup voltage, unit diagnosis when supply system off)
X14:1
X14:2
X14:3
X14:4
X14:5/6
X14:7
X14:8
X14:9
X14:10
X14:11
X14:12
X14:13/14
X14:15
Input of
external
encoder or
output of
incremental encoder
simulation
Signal track A (K1)

Signal track B (K2)
Signal track C (K0)
DATA+
Reserved
Switchover
Ref. potential DGND
Signal track A (K1)
Signal track B (K2)
Signal track C (K0)
DATAReserved
+12 V (max. 180 mA)
The following encoders are allowed to be connected as external encoders:

Hiperface encoder type AS1H, ES1H or AV1H
DWI11A option
X15:1
X15:2
X15:3
X15:4
X15:5
X15:6
X15:7
X15:8
X15:9
X15:10
X15:11
X15:12
X15:13
X15:14
X15:15
Motor
encoder
input
Signal track A (K1)

Signal track B (K2)
Signal track C (K0)
DATA+
Reserved
TF2
Reserved
Ref. potential DGND
Signal track A (K1)
Signal track B (K2)
Signal track C (K0)
DATAReserved
TF2
+12 V (max. 180 mA)
The following encoders are allowed to be connected:

Hiperface encoder type AS1H or ES1H
DWI11A option

Selection options for binary inputs 2 to 6
(DI1...DI5) Parameter menu P60_
Switching of binary inputs with +24 V from VO24 (X11:8) DCOM-DGND jumper required.
If X14: is used as an incremental encoder simulation output, the switchover (X14:7)

must be jumpered with DGND (X14:8).
The 12 VDC supply from X14 and X15 is sufficient to operate SEW encoders with a
24 VDC supply.
The 12 VDC supply from X14 and X15 is sufficient to operate SEW encoders with a
24 VDC supply.
S1...S6
DIP switches for INTERBUS settings Sec. 'Setting the DIP switches' (page 256)
S11:
S12:
Switch mode I signal (0(4)...20 mA) V signal (-10 V...0...10 V, 0...10 V), factory setting: V signal
Switch system bus terminating resistor on or off, factory setting: switched off
TERMINAL
Option slot for DBG11B keypad or serial port USS21A (RS-232 and RS-485)
267
MCH42A: Assignment of electronics terminals and labeling tile
05183AXX
Figure 153: Electronics terminals and labeling tile, example of MCH42A
268
Removing the terminal unit
9.8
Removing the terminal unit

First switch off the supply system and the 24 VDC backup voltage, then remove the terminal unit.
You can remove the entire terminal unit completely from the control unit in order to facilitate installation of the control cables. You have to remove the terminal unit in order to
set the DIP switches for PROFIBUS (1...10), INTERBUS (S1...S6), signal switchover n1
(S11) and SBus terminating resistor (S12). Proceed as follows to do this:
1. Open the flap on the terminal unit.
2. Unscrew retaining screws A and B; they are captive screws and cannot fall out.
3. Remove the terminal unit from the control unit.
ON
F
OF
2
S11
S1
S
BULT
U
FA
N
RU
3.
2.
A
1.
2.
B
03045AXX
Figure 154: Removing the terminal unit, for example with MCV41A
Follow the instructions in reverse order when installing the terminal unit.
269
Assignment of braking resistors, chokes and filters
9.9
400/500 V units, sizes 1 and 2

MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-5A3
0015
0022
Size
Braking resistors
Trip current
Part number
IF = 0.8 ARMS
826 269 1
BW100-006
IF = 1.8 ARMS
821 701 7
BW168
IF = 2.5 ARMS
820 604 X
BW268
IF = 3.4 ARMS
820 715 1
BW147
IF = 3.5 ARMS
820 713 5
BW247
IF = 4.9 ARMS
820 714 3
BW347
IF = 7.8 ARMS
820 798 4
BW039-012
IF = 4.2 ARMS
821 689 4
BW039-026
IF = 7.8 ARMS
821 690 8
BW039-050
IF = 11 ARMS
BW100-005
Line chokes
Imains = 20 AAC
826 012 5
Imains = 45 AAC
826 013 3
Line filters
Vmax = 550 VAC
NF035-503
0110
827 412 6
827 116 X
827 413 4
827 128 3
Inside diameter
Part number
HD001
d = 50 mm (1.97 in)
813 325 5
For cable cross sections 1.5...16 mm2 (AWG 16...6)
HD002
d = 23 mm (0.91 in)
813 557 6
For cable cross sections 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
HD003
d = 88 mm (4.46 in)
813 558 4
For cable cross sections > 16 mm2 (AWG 6)
Output filters (in VFC mode only)
270
0075
Part number
NF009-503
Output chokes
0055
821 691 6
ND045-013
NF014-503
0040
Part numbers
ND020-013
NF018-503
0030
1
Part number
HF015-503
826 030 3
HF022-503
826 031 1
HF030-503
826 032 X
HF040-503
826 311 6
HF055-503
826 312 4
HF075-503
826 313 2
HF023-403
825 784 1
HF033-403
825 785 X
With variable torque load in VFC mode (125 %)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
400/500 V units, sizes 3 to 5

MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-503
0150
Size
Braking resistors
0300
0370
0450
Trip current
Part number
821 684 3
BW018-035
IF = 8.1 ARMS
821 685 1
BW018-075
IF = 14 ARMS
821 686 X
BW915
IF = 28 ARMS
821 260 0
BW012-025
IF = 6.1 ARMS
821 680 0
BW012-050
IF = 12 ARMS
821 681 9
BW012-100
IF = 22 ARMS
821 682 7
BW106
IF = 38 ARMS
821 050 0
BW206
IF = 42 ARMS
821 051 9
Part numbers
ND045-013
Imains = 45 AAC
826 013 3
ND085-013
Imains = 85 AAC
826 014 1
ND1503
Imains = 150 AAC
825 548 2
Line filters
A
B
Part number
NF035-503
827 128 3
NF048-503
827 117 8
NF063-503
827 414 2
Vmax = 550 VAC
NF115-503
A
B
827 415 0
A
B
827 416 9
NF150-503
Output chokes
0750
5
IF = 4.0 ARMS
NF085-503
0550
BW018-015
Line chokes
A
B
A
B
827 417 7
Inside diameter
Part number
HD001
d = 50 mm (1.97 in)
813 325 5
For cable cross sections 1.5...16 mm2 (AWG 16...6)
HD003
d = 88 mm (4.46 in)
813 558 4
For cable cross sections > 16 mm2 (AWG 6)
Output filters (only in VFC mode)

HF033-403
0220
Part number
825 785 X
B/D
HF047-403
825 786 8
HF450-503
826 948 3
A/D
Connect two braking resistors in parallel and set twice the trip current on F16 (2 IF)
Connect two output filters in parallel
In rated operation (100 %): One output filter

With variable torque load (125 %): Connect two output filters in parallel
271
230 V units, sizes 1 to 4

MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-2_3
0015
Size
Braking resistors
0055
0075
0110
0150
0220
0300
4
Trip current
Part number
BW039-003
IF = 2.0 ARMS
821 687 8
BW039-006
IF = 3.2 ARMS
821 688 6
BW039-012
IF = 4.2 ARMS
821 689 4
BW039-026
IF = 7.8 ARMS
821 690 8
BW027-006
IF = 2.5 ARMS
822 422 6
BW027-012
IF = 4.4 ARMS
822 423 4
BW018-015
IF = 4.0 ARMS
821 684 3
BW018-035
IF = 8.1 ARMS
821 685 1
BW018-075
IF = 14 ARMS
821 686 X
BW915
IF = 28 ARMS
821 260 0
BW012-025
IF = 10 ARMS
821 680 0
BW012-050
IF = 19 ARMS
821 681 9
BW012-100
IF = 27 ARMS
821 682 7
BW106
IF = 38 ARMS
821 050 0
BW206
IF = 42 ARMS
821 051 9
ND020-013
Imains = 20 AAC
826 012 5
ND045-013
Imains = 45 AAC
826 013 3
ND085-013
Imains = 85 AAC
826 014 1
ND1503
Imains = 150 AAC
Part numbers
Line filters
A
B
825 548 2
A
B
Part number
NF009-503
827 412 6
NF014-503
827 116 X
NF018-503
827 413 4
NF035-503
827 128 3
NF048-503
Vmax = 550 VAC
NF063-503
A
B
827 117 8
827 414 2
NF085-503
827 415 0
NF115-503
827 416 9
Output chokes
272
0037
Line chokes
0022
Inside diameter
Part number
HD001
d = 50 mm
(1.97 in)
813 325 5
For cable cross sections 1.5...16 mm2

(AWG 16...6)
HD002
d = 23 mm
(0.91 in)
813 557 6
For cable cross sections 1.5 mm2

(AWG 16)
HD003
d = 88 mm
(4.46 in)
813 558 4
For cable cross sections > 16 mm2

(AWG 6)
Connect two braking resistors in parallel and set twice the trip current on F16 (2 IF)
System bus (SBus) installation
9.10

Only when P816 'SBus baud rate' = 1000 kbaud:
MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A units are not to be combined with other MOVIDRIVE
units in the same system bus combination.
The units can be combined at baud rates 1000 kbaud.
MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCS4_A

Control unit
Control unit
X10:
System bus high
SC11
System bus low
SC12
Control unit
X10:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System bus high
SC11
System bus low
SC12
Reference
DGND 17
potential
System bus ON OFF
Terminating resistor
S 12
S 11
X10:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System bus high
SC11
System bus low
SC12
Reference
DGND 17
potential
System bus ON OFF
S 12
S 11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reference
DGND 17
potential
System bus ON OFF
S 12
S 11
Figure 155: System bus connection MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCS4_A
02411AEN
Figure 156: System bus connection MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A
05210AEN
SBus MCH4_A: Connect the terminating equipment to SC11/SC12. SC21/SC22 are only active when S12 = OFF.
273
Cable specification
Use a 2-core twisted and shielded copper cable (data transmission cable with shield
comprising copper braiding). The cable must meet the following specifications:
Conductor cross section 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18)
Cable resistance 120 at 1 MHz
Capacitance per unit length 40 pF/m (12 pF/ft) at 1 kHz
Suitable cables are CAN bus or DeviceNet cables, for example.
Shield contact
Connect the shield at either end to the electronics shield clamp of the inverter or the
master control and ensure the shield is connected over a large area. Also connect
the ends of the shield to DGND.
Line length
The permitted total cable length depends on the baud rate setting of the SBus
(P816):
125 kbaud320 m (1056 ft)
250 kbaud160 m (528 ft)
500 kbaud80 m (264 ft)
1000 kbaud40 m (132 ft)
Terminating
resistor
274
Switch on the system bus terminating resistor (S12 = ON) at the start and finish of
the system bus connection. Switch off the terminating resistor on the other units (S12
= OFF).
There must not be any potential displacement between the units connected using the
SBus. Take suitable measures to avoid a potential displacement, e.g. by connecting
the unit ground connectors using a separate lead. Do not use the shield of the SBus
cable for equipotential bonding!
Connection of option USS21A (RS-232 and RS-485)
9.11
Connection of option USS21A (RS-232 and RS-485)

Part number USS21A: 822 914 7
RS-232 connection
Use a shielded standard interface cable with 1:1 connection assignment for connecting to the RS-232 interface.
PC COM 1-4
USS21A
GND (ground)
3
2
TxD
3
2
RxD
max. 5 m (16.5 ft)

9-pin sub D connector (male)
9-pin sub D connector (female)

02399AEN
Figure 157: USS21A-PC connection cable (1:1 connection assignment)
RS-485 connection
Please observe the following connection instructions:
Use a 2-core twisted and shielded copper cable (data transmission cable with shield
comprising copper braiding). The cable must meet the following specifications:
Conductor cross section 0.5...0.75 mm2 (AWG 20...18)
Cable resistance 100...150 at 1 MHz
Capacitance per unit length 40 pF/m (12 pF/ft) at 1 kHz
The following cable is suitable, for example:
BELDEN (www.belden.com), data cable type 3105A
Connect the shield at either end to the electronics shield clamp of the inverter and
ensure the shield is connected over a large area. Also connect the ends of the shield
to DGND.
USS21A
0V5 -
USS21A
0V5 -
00997CXX
Figure 158: RS-485 interface of the USS21A
EIA standard
The RS-485 interface of the USS21A corresponds to the EIA standard:
Max. transmission rate 9600 baud
Max. 32 stations (each unit with USS21A counts as 2 stations)
Max. cable length 200 m (660 ft) in total
Dynamic terminating resistor with fixed installation
275
Connection of motor encoder and external encoder
9.12

The 'SEW Encoder Systems' manual contains detailed information. This manual can be
obtained from SEW.
General installation notes
Max. line length (inverter-encoder): 100 m (330 ft) with a capacitance per unit length
120 nF/km (193 nF/mile).
MCV/MCS4_A: Conductor cross section 0.20...0.5 mm2 (AWG 24...20)
MCH4_A: Core cross section

Hiperface encoder, sin/cos encoder and TTL sensor with 5 VDC supply (via
DWI11A): 0.25...0.5 mm2 (AWG 23...20)
TTL sensor with 12...24 VDC supply: 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20)
If you cut off a core of the encoder cable: Isolate the cut-off end of the core.
Use shielded cables with twisted pairs of insulated conductors and connect the shield
at both ends:
to the encoder in the cable screw fitting or in the encoder plug
to the inverter in the housing of the sub D plug and to the electronics shield clamp
of the inverter
Use encoder plugs and sub D plugs with a metal housing.
Route the encoder cable separately from the power cables.
Encoder with cable gland: Please note permitted diameter of the encoder cable for
correct function of cable gland.
Shield contact
Connect the shield of the encoder cable over a large area.
On the inverter
Connect the shield on the inverter end in the housing of the sub D plug.
01939BXX
Figure 159: Connect the shield in the sub D connector
On the encoder
Connect the shield on the encoder end in the cable screw fitting or in the encoder plug.
01948AXX
Figure 160: Connect the shield in the cable screw fitting of the encoder
276
Pre-fabricated
cables
Motor encoder
SEW offers pre-fabricated cables for connecting encoders. We recommend using

these pre-fabricated cables.
The conductor colors specified in the connection figures are in accordance with IEC
757 and correspond to the conductor colors used in the pre-fabricated cables from
SEW.
The following motor encoders have been approved for connection to X15: of MOVIDRIVE compact units:
MCV4_A
High-resolution sin/cos encoders with signal voltage 1 VSS
TTL sensors with signal level to RS-422
HTL sensors
MCS4_A
2-pole resolvers, 7 VAC_r.m.s. / 7 kHz
MCH4_A
Hiperface encoders
TTL sensors with signal level to RS-422
05232AXX
Figure 161: SEW encoders with plug connection or connection terminals
Voltage supply
Encoders with 12...24 VDC voltage supply (max. 180 mA) are connected directly to X15:.
These encoders are then powered by the inverter.
Encoders with a 5 VDC voltage supply must be connected via the '5 V encoder power
supply type DWI11A' option (part number 822 759 4).
277
sin/cos encoders
High-resolution sin/cos encoders ES1S, ES2S or EV1S are recommended for operation
with MOVIDRIVE compact MCV4_A. Sin/cos encoders have also been approved for
connection to MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A. Connect the sin/cos encoder as follows:
Connection to
MCV4_A
max. 100 m (330 ft)
ES1S / ES2S / EV1S

ES1R / ES2R / EV1R A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB K1 K2 K0 K1 K2 K0
UB A B C A B C
UB
X15:
YE
GN
RD
BU
PK
GY
WH
BN
VT
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4
03021AXX
Figure 162: Connecting sin/cos encoders to MCV4_A as a motor encoder
Cut off the violet conductor (VT) of the cable at the encoder end.
Part numbers of the pre-fabricated cables:
For fixed routing:
198 829 8
For cat track routing:
198 828 X
Connection to
MCH4_A
max. 100 m (330 ft)
ES1S / ES2S / EV1S

A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB A B C A B C
UB
X15:
1
9
2
10
3
11
15
8
15
05212AXX
Figure 163: Connecting sin/cos encoders to MCH4_A as a motor encoder
278
TTL sensors
TTL sensors from SEW are available with a 12...24 VDC voltage supply and a 5 VDC voltage supply.
12...24 VDC voltage supply
Connect TTL sensors with 12...24 VDC voltage supply ES1R, ES2R or EV1S in the same
way as the high-resolution sin/cos encoders.
5 VDC voltage supply
TTL sensors with a 5 VDC voltage supply ES1T, ES2T or EV1T must be connected via
the '5 V encoder power supply type DWI11A' option (part number 822 759 4). The sensor cable must be connected as well in order to correct the supply voltage of the encoder. Connect these encoders as follows:
Connection to
MCV4_A
max. 5 m (16.5 ft)
DWI11A
YE
GN
RD
BU
PK
GY
WH
BN
VT
N.C.
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
ES1T / ES2T / EV1T
UB A B C A B C
max. 100 m (330 ft)
YE
GN
RD
BU
PK
GY
WH
BN
VT*
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4*
X1: MOVIDRIVE
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4
X2: Encoder
X15:
03023AXX
Figure 164: Connecting TTL sensors via DWI11A to MCV4_A as a motor encoder
* Connect the sensor line (VT) on the encoder to UB, do not jumper on the DWI11A!
MOVIDRIVE compact MCV4_A, X15: DWI11A X1:MOVIDRIVE

Fixed routing only:814 344 7
Encoder ES1T / ES2T / EV1T DWI11A X2:Encoder

For fixed routing:198 829 8
For cat track routing:198 828 X
279
Connection to
MCH4_A
X15:
max. 5 m (16.5 ft)
15
ES1T / ES2T / EV1T
UB A B C A B C
max. 100 m (330 ft)

YE
GN
RD
BU
PK
GY
WH
BN
VT*
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4*
X2: Encoder
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
X1: MOVIDRIVE
DWI11A
1
9
2
10
3
11
15
8
05214AXX
Figure 165: Connecting TTL sensors via DWI11A to MCH4_A as a motor encoder

HTL sensors (on

MCV4_A only)
If you are using an HTL sensor ES1C, ES2C or EV1C, do not connect the negated
channels A (K1), B (K2) and C (K0).
max. 100 m (330 ft)
ES1C / ES2C / EV1C
UB A B C A B C
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
X15:
YE
GN
GY
WH
BN
1
N.C. 6
2
N.C. 7
3
N.C. 8
9
5
N.C. 4
03022AXX
Figure 166: Connecting HTL sensors to MCV4_A as a motor encoder
280
For fixed routing:
198 932 4
198 931 6
Hiperface encoders (on MCH4_A

only)
Hiperface encoders AS1H, ES1H and AV1H are recommended for operation with MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A. Depending on the motor type and motor configuration, the
encoder connection takes the form of a plug connection or terminal box.
CM71...112 with
plug connection
Connect the Hiperface encoder as follows:
05211AXX
Figure 167: Connecting Hiperface encoders to MCH4_A as a motor encoder
For fixed routing:
199 488 3
199 320 8
Part numbers of the pre-fabricated extension cables:
For fixed routing:
199 539 1
199 540 5
281
CM71...112 with
terminal box
Connect the Hiperface encoder as follows:
05556AXX
Figure 168: Connecting Hiperface encoders to MCH4_A as a motor encoder
282
For fixed routing:
199 591 X
199 592 8
Resolvers (only
on MCS4_A)
Depending on the motor type and motor configuration, the resolver connection takes the
form of a plug connection or terminal box.
DS56, CM71...112
with plug connection
The resolver connections are housed in a plug connection.

Plug connection DS56, CM:
Intercontec, type ASTA021NN00 10 000 5 000
05524AXX
Figure 169: Resolver connection DS56 and CM motors with plug connection
For fixed routing:
199 487 5
199 319 4
Part numbers of the pre-fabricated extension cables:
DS56, DY71...112
with terminal box
For fixed routing:
199 542 1
199 541 3
The resolver connections are accommodated in the terminal box on the 10-pin Phoenix
terminal strip.
05525AXX
Figure 170: Resolver connection DS and DY motors with terminal box
For fixed routing:
199 589 8
199 590 1
283
DY71...112 with
plug connection
The resolver connections are housed in a plug connection.

Plug connection DY71...112:
Framatome Souriou, type GN-DMS2-12S
05526AXX
Figure 171: Resolver connection DY motors with plug connection
284
For fixed routing:
198 827 1
198 812 3
External encoders
The following motor encoders are allowed to be connected to X14: of MOVIDRIVE

compact units:
MCV/MCS4_A
5 V TTL sensors with signal level to RS-422
MCH4_A
Hiperface encoders
5 V TTL sensors with signal level to RS-422
Voltage supply
Encoders with 12/24 VDC voltage supply (max. 180 mA) are connected directly to X14:.
These encoders are then powered by the inverter.
Encoders with a 5 VDC voltage supply must be connected via the '5 V encoder power
supply type DWI11A' option (part number 822 759 4).
5 V TTL sensors
5 V TTL sensors from SEW are available with a 24 VDC voltage supply and a 5 VDC voltage supply.
24 VDC voltage
supply
Connection to MCV/MCS4_A:
max. 100 m (330 ft)
ES1R / ES2R / EV1R
UB A B C A B C
MOVIDRIVE
X14:
1
6
2
1
7 6
3
8 9
5
9
5
4
YE
GN
RD
BU
PK
GY
WH
BN
VT
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
03776AXX
Figure 172: Connecting TTL sensors to MCV/MCS4_A as an external encoder
Fixed routing only:
815 354 X
285
Connection to MCH4_A:
max. 100 m (330 ft)
ES1S / ES2S / EV1S

A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB A B C A B C
UB
X14:
1
9
2
10
3
11
15
8
15
05220AXX
Figure 173: Connecting TTL sensors to MCH4_A as an external encoder
5 VDC voltage supply
5 V TTL sensors with a 5 VDC voltage supply ES1T, ES2T or EV1T must be connected
via the '5 V encoder power supply type DWI11A' option (part number 822 759 4). The
sensor cable must be connected as well in order to correct the supply voltage of the encoder.
Connection to MCV/MCS4_A:
max. 5 m (16.5 ft)
N.C.
ES1T / ES2T / EV1T
UB A B C A B C
max. 100 m (330 ft)
YE
GN
RD
BU
PK
GY
WH
BN
VT*
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4*
X1: MOVIDRIVE
DWI11A
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
X2: Encoder
MOVIDRIVE
X14:
1
6
2
7
1
6
3
8
9
5
9
5
4
03777AXX
Figure 174: Connecting TTL sensors via DWI11A to MCV/MCS4_A as an external encoder

286
Connection to MCH4_A:
X14:
max. 5 m (16.5 ft)

DWI11A
max. 100 m (330 ft)
ES1T / ES2T / EV1T
UB A B C A B C
X1: MOVIDRIVE
15
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
YE
GN
RD
BU
PK
GY
WH
BN
VT*
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4*
X2: Encoder
1
9
2
10
3
11
15
8
05221AXX
Figure 175: Connecting TTL sensors via DWI11A to MCH4_A as an external encoder

Hiperface encoders (on MCH4_A

only)
Hiperface encoders AS1H are recommended for operation with MOVIDRIVE compact
MCH4_A. Connect the Hiperface encoder as follows:
max. 100 m (330 ft)
AS1H
1
2
8
12 7
10
11
3
4
6
5
COS
REFCOS
SIN
REFSIN
DATA+
DATAUS
X14:
3
4
5
6
8
7
12
11
1
9
2
10
4
12
15
8
15
05219AXX
Figure 176: Connecting SEW Hiperface encoders to MCH4_A as an external encoder
287
sin/cos encoders
(on MCH4_A
only)
Connect the sin/cos encoder as follows:

max. 100 m (330 ft)
ES1S / ES2S / EV1S

A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB A B C A B C
UB
X14:
1
9
2
10
3
11
15
8
15
05220AXX
Figure 177: Connecting sin/cos encoders to MCH4_A as an external encoder
288
Incremental
encoder simulation
You can also use X14: as an incremental encoder simulation output. To do this, you
must jumper 'switchover' (X14:4 on MCV/MCS4_A, X14:7 on MCH4_A) with DGND
(X14:5 on MCV/MCS4_A, X14:8 on MCH4_A). X14: then supplies incremental encoder
signals with a signal level according to RS-422 (5 V TTL). The number of pulses is as
follows:
With MCV4_A as on X15: Input motor encoder
With MCS4_A 1024 pulses/revolution
With MCH4_A with Hiperface encoder 1024 pulses/revolution
With MCH4_A with sin/cos encoder or TTL sensor as on X15: Input motor encoder
Connection to
MCV/MCS4_A
MOVIDRIVE
X14:
max. 100 m (330 ft)

YE
GN
RD
BU
PK
GY
WH
BN
Umschaltung VT
A (K1)
A (K1)
B (K2)
B (K2)
C (K0)
C (K0)
UB
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4
03818AXX
Figure 178: Incremental encoder simulation connection to MCV/MCS4_A
Fixed routing only:
815 354 X
Connection to
MCH4_A
05223AXX
Figure 179: Incremental encoder simulation connection to MCH4_A
289
Master/slave connection
X14-X14 connection (= master/slave connection) of two MOVIDRIVE compact units.
MCV/MCS4_A
Master
Slave
MOVIDRIVE
X14:
MOVIDRIVE
X14:
max. 100 m (330 ft)
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4
1
6
2
7
3
8
9
5
4
05036AXX
Figure 180: X14-X14 connection MCV/MCS4_A
Fixed routing only:
815 355 8
The sub D sockets on the ends of the cable are marked with 'MASTER' and 'SLAVE'.
Make sure that you connect the socket marked 'MASTER' to X14: of the master unit and
the socket marked 'SLAVE' to X14: of the slave unit.
MCH4_A
Master
Slave
MOVIDRIVE compact
MCH42A
X14:
15
max. 100 m (330 ft)
MOVIDRIVE compact
MCH42A
X14:
1
9
2
10
3
11
15
8
7
1
9
2
10
3
11
15
8
7
15
05222AXX
Figure 181: X14-X14 connection MCH4_A
290
General startup instructions
10
10
Startup
10.1

It is essential to comply with the safety notes during startup!
Prerequisite
Correct project planning of the drive is the prerequisite for successful startup. Refer to
the MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual for detailed project planning instructions and
an explanation of the parameters (chapters 4 and 5).
VFC operating
modes without
speed control
MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters are factory set to be taken into operation with the
SEW motor (MC_4_A...-5_3: 4-pole and rated voltage 3 400 VAC / 50 Hz or
MC_4_A...-2_3: 4-pole and rated voltage 3 230 VAC / 60 Hz) which is adapted to the
correct power level. The motor can be connected and the drive started immediately in
accordance with Sec. 'Starting the motor' ( page 302).
Inverter/motor
combinations
The following tables indicate the applicable inverter/motor combinations.
400/500 V units
MOVIDRIVE compact MCF4_A
or MCV/MCH4_A in VFC mode
SEW motor
0015-5A3-4
DT90L4
0022-5A3-4
DV100M4
0030-5A3-4
DV100L4
0040-5A3-4
DV112M4
0055-5A3-4
DV132S4
0075-5A3-4
DV132M4
0110-5A3-4
DV160M4
0150-503-4
DV160L4
0220-503-4
DV180L4
0300-503-4
DV200L4
0370-503-4
DV225S4
0450-503-4
DV225M4
0550-503-4
D250M4
0750-503-4
D280S4
10
291
10
0
230 V units
MOVIDRIVE compact MCF4_A
or MCV/MCH4_A in VFC mode
SEW motor
0015-2A3-4
DT90L4
0022-2A3-4
DV100M4
0037-2A3-4
DV100L4
0055-2A3-4
DV132S4
0075-2A3-4
DV132M4
0110-203-4
DV160M4
0150-203-4
DV180M4
0220-203-4
DV180L4
0300-203-4
DV225S4
The startup functions described in this section are used for setting the inverter so it is
optimally adapted to the motor which is actually connected and to the given operating
conditions. It is essential to perform a startup as described in this section for the VFC
operating modes with speed control, all CFC operating modes and SERVO operating
modes.
Hoist applications
Do not use MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters for any safety functions in connection
with hoist applications.
Use monitoring systems or mechanical protection devices as safety features in order to
avoid possible damage to property or injury to people.
292
Preliminary work and resources
10
10.2
Preliminary work and resources
Check the installation.
Take suitable measures to prevent the motor starting up inadvertently. Furthermore, additional safety precautions must be taken depending on the application in
order to avoid endangering people and machinery.
Suitable measures are:
With MCF/MCV/MCS4_A: Connect terminal X10:9 '/CONTROL. INHIBIT' to DGND.
With MCH4_A: Disconnect the electronics terminal block X11.
For startup with the DBG11B keypad:

Connect the DBG11B keypad to the TERMINAL option slot.
For startup with a PC and MOVITOOLS:

Connect the USS21A option to the TERMINAL option slot and use an interface cable
(RS-232) to connect it to the PC. MOVIDRIVE and the PC must be de-energized
when you do this, otherwise undefined states may be adopted. Then switch on both
units. Install MOVITOOLS on the PC if you have not already done so. Start the program.
Switch on the power supply and the 24 V supply, if necessary.

If you are using the DBG11B keypad, the following message appears for about 13 s:
SELFTEST
MOVIDRIVE
Undertake the correct preliminary parameter setting (e.g. factory setting).
Check the set terminal assignment ( P60_).
Startup automatically changes a group of parameter values. The parameter description P700 'Operating modes' explains which parameters are affected by this step. Refer
to the MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual, Sec. 4 'Parameters', for a parameter description.
10
293
10
Startup with the DBG11B keypad
10.3
General information
Startup with the DBG11B keypad is possible with MCF and MCV/MCH in VFC operating modes only. Startup in CFC and SERVO operating modes is possible using the
MOVITOOLS software only.
Data required
The following data are required for successful startup:
Motor type (SEW motor or non-SEW motor)
Motor data
Rated voltage and rated frequency.
In addition, with a non-SEW motor: Rated current, rated power, power factor cos
and rated speed.
Power supply voltage
The following information is also required for startup of the speed controller:
Incremental encoder type
Encoder type and resolution of the incremental encoder:

SEW encoder type
AS1H, ES1H, AV1H
Startup parameters
Encoder type
Encoder resolution
HIPERFACE
1024
SINE ENCODER
1024
ES1R, ES2R, EV1R

ES1T1), ES2T1), EV1T1)
INCREM. TTL SENSOR
1024
ES1C, ES2C, EV1C
INCREM. HTL SENSOR
1024
ES1S, ES2S, EV1
1) 5 V TTL sensors ES1T, ES2T and EV1T must be connected via the DWI11A option ( Sec. Installation).
Motor data
SEW motor: Brake yes or no and flywheel fan (Z fan) yes or no
Non-SEW motor: Mass moment of inertia [10-4kgm2] of the motor, brake and fan
Stiffness of the closed-loop control system (factory setting = 1; can be used as an

initial value in most applications)
If the drive tends to vibrate setting < 1
If the transient recovery time is too long setting > 1
Setting range for most applications: 0.70...1...1.40
Mass moment of inertia [10-4kgm2] of the load (gear unit + driven machine) extrapolated for the motor shaft. If the mass moment of inertia of the load cannot be determined use 1 to 20 times the value of the mass moment of inertia of the motor.
Time for the shortest ramp required.
If you are using a TTL sensor (encoder type INCREM. TTL SENSOR), a sin/cos encoder
(encoder type SINE ENCODER) or a Hiperface encoder (encoder type HIPERFACE):
Activate encoder monitoring (P504 = 'ON') after completing the startup. The function
and voltage supply of the encoder are then monitored.
Important: Encoder monitoring is not a safety function!
294
10
Startup functions
of the DBG11B
Detailed description of the keypad Sec. 'Operating displays':

and at
the same
time
Language selection on DBG11B

keypad
Commence startup.
key
Next menu command or increase value in edit mode.
key
Previous menu command or decrease value in edit

mode.
key
One menu level down or activate edit mode for the

menu command.
key
One menu level up or deactivate edit mode for the

menu command.
01406AXX Q
key
Cancel startup and return to main display.
key
Cancel startup and return to main display.
The main display of the keypad is in German.
REGLERSPERRE
STROM:
Press the key twice to display parameter group 8...
8..
GERAETEFUNKTIONEN
Press the key twice and the key once to display parameter 801 'Language'. Press the key to activate edit mode.
Press the or key to select the language you want and then
press the key to exit edit mode.
801
GERMAN
LANGUAGE
Press the Q key to return to the main display.
10
295
10
Structure of the
startup menu
CONTR. INHIBIT
CURR.:
0
[] and []
simultaneously
STARTUP ->
IPOS_VARIABLES <-
[]
PREPARE FOR
STARTUP
ca. 3 s
C00* PARAM. SET 1
STARTUP
[]
C01*
OPER. MODE 1
VFC1
[]
[]
C01*
_
OPER. MODE 1
VFC1
[] []
[]
C02*
DV112M4
MOTOR TYPE 1
[]
C03*
400 V
MOT. RATED VOLT. 1
[]
C04*
50 HZ
MOT. RATED FREQ. 1
[]
C05*
400 V
MAINS RAT. VOLT. 1
[]
835*
NO RESPONSE
RESP. TF-SIGNAL
[]
C06*
CALCULATION
NO
[]
C06*
CALCULATION
NO
[] []
C06*
_
CALCULATION
C08*
SAVE
YES
NO
[] []
C08*
SAVE
YES
COPYING
DATA ...
CONTR. INHIBIT
CURR.:
0
[Q]
A
[E]
C08*
SAVE
NO
02400AEN
Figure 182: Structure of the startup menu
296
10
Startup procedure
1. '0' signal at terminal DI '/CONTROLLER INHIBIT'.

2. Activate the startup menu by pressing the and keys on
the DBG11B at the same time.
3. Press the key to commence the startup. The first window of
the startup menu appears. The menu commands are identified
by an * in the 4th position. Menu commands which only appear
in the startup menu start with 'C', the other menu commands
have the number in the parameter list (page 306). Press the
key to jump to the next menu command when you have worked
through a menu command.
CONTROL.INHIBIT
CURRENT:
0 A
STARTUP
IPOS_VARIABLES
STARTUP IS
BEING PREPARED
4. Select a parameter set, e.g. parameter set 1.
C00* PARAM. SET 1

STARTUP
5. Set the operating mode, e.g. VFC1.
C01*
OPER. MODE 1
6. Select the connected motor. If a 2 or 4-pole SEW motor is connected, select the correct motor from the list. In the case of a
non-SEW motor or an SEW motor with more than four poles,
choose 'NON-SEW MOTOR' in the selection list.
C02*
DV112M4
MOT. TYPE 1
7. Refer to the nameplate of the motor and enter the rated motor
voltage for the selected connection type.
C03*
400
V
RATED MOT. VOLT. 1
VFC1
C02*
NON-SEW
MOT.
MOT. TYPE 1
Example: Nameplate 230/400 50 Hz
connection Enter 400 V.
connection, transition point at 50 Hz Enter 230 V.

connection, transition point at 87 Hz Also enter 230 V,
however after startup first set parameter P302 'MAXIMUM
SPEED 1' to the value for 87 Hz and then start the drive.
10
Example: Nameplate 400/690 50 Hz

Only connection possible Enter 400 V.
connection is not possible.
8. Enter the rated frequency specified on the motor nameplate.
Example: 230/400 50 Hz
Enter 50 Hz in a and connection.
C04*
50
Hz
RATED MOT. FREQ. 1
WITH SEW MOTORS

9. The motor values are stored for SEW 2 and 4-pole motors and
do not have to be entered.
WITH NON-SEW MOTORS
9. Enter the following data from the motor nameplate:
Rated motor current, note the connection type ( or ).
Rated power of the motor
Power factor cos
Rated speed of the motor
10. Enter the rated voltage of the supply system
C05*
400
V
RATED SYS. VOLT. 1
297
10
11. If no TF/TH is connected Set 'NO RESP.'. Set the required

fault response if a TF/TH is connected.
835* NO RESP.
RESP. TF sensor SIGNAL
12. Commence the startup calculation by selecting 'YES'.
C06*
NO
CALCULATION
WITH SEW MOTORS

13. The calculation is performed.
WITH NON-SEW MOTORS
13. The calculation for non-SEW motors requires a calibration procedure:
When prompted, give a '1' signal on terminal DI '/CONTROL.INHIBIT'.
Give a '0' signal on terminal DI '/CONTROL.INHIBIT'
again after the calibration is complete.
The motor parameters are estimated if it is not possible to
calibrate (energize) the motor.
14. The 'SAVE' menu command appears automatically. The keypad is already in edit mode.
15. Set 'SAVE' to 'YES'. The data (motor parameters) are copied
into the non-volatile memory of MOVIDRIVE.
16. This completes the startup. Press the E or Q key to exit the
startup menu. The main display then appears.
298
C08*
SAVE
_NO
DATA ARE BEING

COPIED...
CONTROL.INHIBIT
CURRENT:
0 A
Copy the parameter set from MOVIDRIVE into the DBG11B keypad after completing the startup (P807 'MDX DBG'). In this way, it is possible to use the DBG11B
to transfer the parameter set to other MOVIDRIVE units (P 806 'DBG MDX').
Enter any parameter settings which differ from the factory settings in the parameter
list ( page 306).
In the case of non-SEW motors, set the correct brake reaction time (P732 / P735).
Refer to the information in Sec. 'Starting the motor' ( page 302) for starting the motor.
With connection and transition point at 87 Hz Set parameter P302/312 'Maximum speed 1/2' to the value for 87 Hz.
10
Startup of speed
controller
Startup is performed without the speed controller first.

Important: Set VFC-n-CONTROL operating mode.
Structure
C01* VFC-n-CTRL.
OPER. MODE 1
Structure of the startup menu for the speed controller:
10
03025AEN
Figure 183: Structure of startup with the speed controller
299
10
Startup procedure
1. Press 'YES' to commence the speed controller startup. All mass moments of inertia must be
entered in the unit [10-4 kgm2].
2. Press the key to move on to the next menu item each time.
3. Enter the correct encoder type.
4. Enter the correct encoder resolution.
WITH SEW MOTORS
5. Enter whether the motor has a brake.
6. Set the stiffness of the closed-loop control system.
7. Enter whether the motor has a flywheel fan (Z fan).
WITH NON-SEW MOTORS
5. Enter the moment of inertia of the motor.
6. Set the stiffness of the closed-loop control system.
7. Set the moment of inertia of the brake and the fan.
8. Enter the mass moment of inertia of the load (gear unit + driven machine) extrapolated for
the motor shaft.
9. Enter the time for the shortest ramp you want.
10. Commence the speed controller startup calculation by selecting 'YES'.
11. The 'SAVE' menu command appears automatically. Set 'SAVE' to 'YES'. The data are copied into the non-volatile memory of MOVIDRIVE.
12. The 'SAVE' menu command appears again. Press the E or Q key to exit the startup menu.
The main display then appears.
300
Copy the parameter set from MOVIDRIVE into the DBG11B keypad after completing the startup (P807 'MDX DBG'). In this way, it is possible to use the DBG11B
to transfer the parameter set to other MOVIDRIVE units (P 806 'DBG MDX').
Enter any parameter settings which differ from the factory settings in the parameter
list ( page 306).
In the case of non-SEW motors, set the correct brake reaction time (P732 / P735).
With connection and transition point at 87 Hz Set parameter P302/312 'Maximum speed 1/2' to the value for 87 Hz.
Activate encoder monitoring for TTL sensors, sin/cos and Hiperface encoders
(P504='ON'). Encoder monitoring is not a safety function.
Startup with a PC and MOVITOOLS
10
10.4
Startup with a PC and MOVITOOLS
General information
Terminal DI '/CONTROL.INHIBIT' must get a '0' signal!
Start the MOVITOOLS program.
Set the language.
Select the PC port (PC COM) to which the inverter is connected.
Select <Update> to display the connected inverter.
05407AEN
Figure 184: MOVITOOLS startup window
Commencing
startup
Click on <Shell> in 'Execute Program'. The Shell program is started.
Select the [Startup] / [Startup...] menu command. MOVITOOLS opens the startup
menu.
Select asynchronous or synchronous as the motor type.
Select the parameter set. With speed-controlled drives, the speed controller can be
selected separately when startup is repeated (only possible with parameter set 1).
Set the operating mode.
Select SEW motor or non-SEW motor. 2 and 4-pole SEW motors can be selected in
VFC operating modes. Only 4-pole SEW motors can be selected in CFC and SERVO
operating modes. SEW motors with different numbers of poles must be set as nonSEW motors.
Enter the motor type data and, if speed control is being used, the speed controller
data as well.
Press <Finish> to complete the startup.
Make any necessary parameter settings using the main menu or the user menu.
Save the parameter set. The parameter set can be transferred to other MOVIDRIVE
units.
Print out the set parameters using [File] / [Print Data].
10
301
10
Starting the motor
10.5
Starting the motor
Analog setpoint
specification
The following table shows which signals must be present on terminals AI1 and
DI...DI3 when the 'UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT' setpoint is selected (P100), in order to operate the drive with an analog setpoint entry.
AI11
Analog input n1
DI
/Controller inhibit
DI1
CW/STOP
DI2
CCW/STOP
Controller inhibit
'0'
Rapid stop
'1'
'0'
'1'
Function
Enable and stop
DI3
Enable/rapid stop
'1'
'0'
'0'
Clockwise at 50 % nmax
5V
'1'
'1'
'0'
'1'
Clockwise at nmax
10 V
'1'
'1'
'0'
'1'
Counterclockwise at
50 % nmax
5V
'1'
'0'
'1'
'1'
Counterclockwise at
nmax
10 V
'1'
'0'
'1'
'1'
The following travel cycle shows by way of example how the motor is started with the wiring of terminals
DI...DI3 and analog setpoints. Binary output DB '/Brake' is used for switching brake contactor K12.
"1"
Input DI
/Controller inhibit
"0"
"1"
Input DI1
CW/stop
"0"
"1"
Input DI2
CCW/stop
"0"
"1"
Input DI3
Enable/
Rapid stop
"0"
Output DB
/Brake
"1"
"0"
10V
Analog
input n1 (AI11) 5V
0V
Speed
n [rpm]
nmax
50% nmax
nmin
nstart-stop
0
t11 CW up
t11 CW down
t11 CW up
t11 CW up
t11 CW down
t13 stop ramp
t11 CCW up
-50% nmax
-nmax
05033AEN
Figure 185: Travel cycle with analog setpoints
The motor is not energized in the event of controller inhibit (DI = '0'). A motor without
a brake then coasts to a halt.
302
Starting the motor
10
Fixed setpoints
The following table shows which signals must be present on terminals DI...DI5
when the 'UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT' setpoint is selected (P100) to operate the drive with the
fixed setpoints.
DI
/Controller inhibit
Function
DI1
CW/STOP
DI2
CCW/STOP
DI3
Enable/rapid stop
DI4
n11/n21
DI5
n12/n22
Controller inhibit
'0'
Rapid stop
'1'
'0'
Enable and stop
'1'
'0'
'0'
'1'
Clockwise at n11
'1'
'1'
'0'
'1'
'1'
'0'
Clockwise at n12
'1'
'1'
'0'
'1'
'0'
'1'
Clockwise at n13
'1'
'1'
'0'
'1'
'1'
'1'
Counterclockwise at n11
'1'
'0'
'1'
'1'
'1'
'0'
The following travel cycle shows by way of example how the drive is started with the wiring of terminals
DI...DI5 and the internal fixed setpoints. Binary output X10:3 (DB '/Brake') is used for switching brake
contactor K12.
"1"
Input DI
/Controller inhibit
"0"
"1"
Input DI1
CW/stop
"0"
"1"
Input DI2
CCW/stop
"0"
"1"
Input DI3
Enable/
Rapid stop
"0"
"1"
Input DI4
n11/n21
10
"0"
"1"
Input DI5
n12/n22
"0"
Output DB
/Brake
"1"
"0"
Speed
n [rpm]
n13
t11 CW up
t11 CW up
n12
n11
0
-n11
t11 CW down
t11 CW up
-n12
t11 CCW up
t13 stop ramp
-n13
05034AEN
Figure 186: Travel cycle with internal fixed setpoints
The motor is not energized in the event of controller inhibit (DI = '0'). A motor without
a brake then coasts to a halt.
303
10
Starting the motor
Manual operation
The inverter can be controlled using the DBG11B keypad with the manual operation
function. The inverter must be in 'No enable' status to start manual operation. 'No enable' status means DI /Controller inhibit = '1' and binary inputs DI1 CW/STOP,
DI2 CCW/STOP and DI3 Enable/Rapid stop = '0' which are programmed in the factory settings.
Binary input DI /Controller inhibit is also effective in manual operation. The other binary inputs are ineffective during manual operation. Binary input DI '/Controller inhibit' must get a '1' signal to start the drive in manual operation. The drive can also be
stopped in manual operation by DI = '0'. The direction of rotation is not determined
by the 'CW/stop' or 'CCW/stop' binary inputs. Instead, you select the direction of rotation
using the keypad ( Figure 187).
Manual operation remains active even after the supply system power has been switched
off/on. The inverter is then inhibited, however. A change of direction command using the
or key produces an enable and a start in the selected sense of rotation at nmin. The
speed is increased and decreased using the and keys. The modification speed is
150 rpm per second.
880
MANUAL
OFF
OPERATION
-key
-key
880
MANUAL
_OFF
OPERATION
- or -key
E-key
_ DIR. OF ROTATION
L
<E>=EXIT
R
Q-key
-key
_ 0%In
<Q>=STOP
0 rpm
R
Q-key
-key
-key
-key
_ 0%In
L
0 rpm
<Q>=STOP
-key: increase speed

-key: decrease speed
02406AEN
Figure 187: Manual mode with DBG11B
The signals at the binary inputs take effect as soon as manual operation is finished. Binary input DI '/Controller inhibit' does not have to be switched from '1' to '0' and back
to '1'. The drive can start according to the signals at the binary inputs and the setpoint
sources.
Note that the binary inputs DI1 CW/STOP, DI2 CCW/STOP and DI3 Enable/Rapid
stop which are programmed in the factory settings receive a '0' signal when you end
manual operation.
304
Startup for positioning tasks (MCH4_A)
10
10.6
Startup for positioning tasks (MCH4_A)

A Hiperface encoder connected to the MOVIDRIVE compact MCH4_A provides absolute position values and is a suitable device for positioning tasks. This statement holds
true for connection as motor encoder to X15 and as external encoder to X14.
A single reference travel is required to set up the absolute position.
Positioning with
the Hiperface
encoder as motor
encoder
The motor encoder can be used for positioning tasks for slip-free applications, i.e. a positive connection between drive and driven machine. Proceed as follows:
Set parameter P941 "Source Actual Position = Motor Encoder (X15)."
Set parameter P900 "Reference Offset." The following formula applies: machine zero
= reference point + reference offset.
Set the reference travel parameters P901, P902, P903 and P904 according to your
application.
Execute a reference travel. The reference travel can take place in two ways:
Go to the manual operation menu in the MOVITOOLS operating software and start
the function "Reference travel."
Writ an IPOS program for the reference travel and start this program.
Positioning with
the Hiperface
encocer as external encoder
Use an external encoder for positioning in case of slip-prone applications, i.e. non-positive connection between drive and driven machine. Proceed as follows:
Connect the Hiperface encoder to X14.
Set the parameter P900 "Reference offset." The following formula applies: machine
zero = reference point + reference offset.
Set the parameter P941 "Source Actual Position = Ext. Encoder (X14)."
Set the reference travel parameters P901, P902, P903 and P904 according to your
application.
Set parameter P945 "Synchronous encoder type (X14) = Hiperface."
Execute a reference travel.
10
305
10
Complete parameter list
10.7
The parameters of the short menu are identified by a '/' (= displayed on the DBG11B keypad).
Par.
Name
Value range
DISPLAY VALUES
306
Par.
Name
07_
Unit data
Value range
00_
Process values
070
Unit type
000
Speed
-5000...0...5000 rpm
071
Rated output current
001/
User display
[Text]
076
Firmware basic unit
002
Frequency
0...400 Hz
077
Technology function
003
Actual position
0...231-1 inc
08_
Fault memory
004
Output current
0...200 % IN
080/
Fault t-0
005
Active current
-200...0...200 % IN
081
Fault t-1
006/
Motor utilization 1
0...200 %
082
Fault t-2
007
Motor utilization 2
0...200 %
083
Fault t-3
008
DC link voltage
0...1000 V
09_
Bus diagnostics
009
Output current
090
PD configuration
01_
Status displays
091
Fieldbus type
010
Inverter status
092
Fieldbus baud rate
011
Operational status
093
Fieldbus address
012
Fault status
094
PO1 setpoint
013
1/2
095
PO2 setpoint
014
Heat sink temperature
-20...0...100 C
096
PO3 setpoint
015
Mains ON operation time
0...25000 h
097
PI1 actual value
016
Operating time (enabled)
0...25000 h
098
PI2 actual value
017
Electrical energy
kWh
099
PI3 actual value
02_
Analog setpoints
020
Analog input AI1
021
Analog input AI2
-10...0...10 V
022
External current limit
0...100 %
03_
030
Binary input DI
031
Binary input DI1
032
Binary input DI2
033
Binary input DI3
034
Binary input DI4
035
Binary input DI5
036/
Status binary inputs basic unit
-10...0...10 V
/CONTROL.INHIBIT
05_
050
Binary output DB
051
Binary output DO1
052
Binary output DO2
053/
Status binary outputs basic unit
/BRAKE
10
Par. Name
Setting range
Factory setting
After
startup
Variable par.
Parameter set 1
SETPOINTS / RAMP GENERATORS
10_
Setpoint selection
100/ Setpoint source
UNIPOL/FIX.SETPT
101
TERMINALS
11_
Analog input AI1
110
AI1 scaling
111
AI1 offset
-500...0...500 mV
112
AI1 operation mode
Ref. N-MAX
113
AI1 voltage offset
-10...0...10 V
114
AI1 speed offset
-5000...0...5000 rpm
Filter setpoint
0...5...100 ms 0 = Filter
off
12_
Analog input AI2
120
AI2 operation mode
13_
Speed ramps 1
130/ Ramp t11 UP CW
Setting range
Factory setting
-10...-0.1 / 0.1...1...10
NO FUNCTION
14_ Speed ramps 2
0...2...2000 s
140 Ramp t21 UP CW
0...2...2000 s
131/ Ramp t11 DOWN CW 0...2...2000 s
141 Ramp t21 DOWN CW 0...2...2000 s
132/ Ramp t11 UP CCW
0...2...2000 s
142 Ramp t21 UP CCW
0...2...2000 s
0...2...2000 s
Ramp t21 DOWN

143
CCW
0...2...2000 s
Ramp t11 DOWN

133/
CCW
134/ Ramp t12 UP=DOWN 0...2...2000 s
144 Ramp t22 UP=DOWN 0...2...2000 s
135
0...3
145 S pattern t22
136/ Stop ramp t13
0...2...20 s
146 Stop ramp t23
0...2...20 s
137/ Emergency ramp t14
0...2...20 s
147 Emergency ramp t24
0...2...20 s
S pattern t12
After
startup
Parameter set 2
1__
115
Par
Name
.
15_
Motorized potentiometer (parameter set 1 and 2)
150
Ramp t3 UP
0.2...20...50 s
151
Ramp t3 DOWN
0.2...20...50 s
152
Save last setpoint
ON / OFF
16_
Fixed setpoints 1
0...3
17_ Fixed setpoints 2
160/ Internal setpoint n11
-5000...0...150...5000
rpm
170 Internal setpoint n21
-5000...0...150...5000
rpm
-5000...0...750...5000
rpm
-5000...0...750...5000
rpm
-5000...0...1500...5000
rpm
-5000...0...1500...5000
rpm
2__
CONTROLLER PARAMETERS
20_
Speed control (parameter set 1 only)
200
P-gain
speed controller
0.1...2...32
201
0...10...300 ms
202
Gain
accel. feedforward
0...32
203
0...100 ms
204
Filter speed actual

value
0...32 ms
0...150 %
205
Load feedforward
206
Sample time n-control. 1 ms = 0 / 0.5 ms = 1
207
Load feedforward VFC 0...150 %
21_
Hold controller
210
P gain hold controller
22_
Synchr. oper. control (only parameter set 1)
228
Feedforward filter
(DRS)
10
0.1...2...32
0...100 ms
Only with MOVITOOLS. Not visible on the DBG11B keypad.
307
10
Par. Name
Setting range
Factory setting
After
startup
Par
Name
.
Variable par.
Parameter set 1
After
startup
Parameter set 2
3__
MOTOR PARAMETERS
30_
Limits 1
31_ Limits 2
300/ Start/stop speed 1
0...60...150 rpm
310 Start/stop speed 2
0...60...150 rpm
301/ Minimum speed 1
0...60...5500 rpm
311 Minimum speed 2
0...60...5500 rpm
302/ Maximum speed 1
0...1500...5500 rpm
312 Maximum speed 2
0...1500...5500 rpm
303/ Current limit 1
0...150 %IN
313 Current limit 2
0...150 %IN
304
Torque limit
0...150 %
32_
Motor compensat. 1 (asynchr.)
33_ Motor compensat. 2 (asynchr.)
320/
ON / OFF
1
330
321
Boost 1
0...100 %
331 Boost 2
0...100 %
322
IxR compensation 1
0...100 %
332 IxR compensation 2
0...100 %
323
Premagnetizing time 1 0...0.1...2 s
333 Premagnetizing time 2 0...0.1...2 s
324
Slip compensation 1
0...500 rpm
334 Slip compensation 2
34_
Motor protection
340
Motor protection 1
ON / OFF
342 Motor protection 2
ON / OFF
Cooling type 1
FAN COOLED /
FORCED COOLING
343 Cooling type 2
FAN COOLED /
FORCED COOLING
341
308
Setting range
Factory setting
ON / OFF
2
0...500 rpm
35_
350
Change direction
of rotation 1
ON / OFF
351
360
Startup
YES / NO
Only available in DBG11B, not in MOVITOOLS/SHELL!
4__
REFERENCE SIGNALS
40_
400
Speed reference value 0...1500...5000 rpm
401
Hysteresis
0...100...500 rpm
402
Delay time
0...1...9 s
403
Signal = '1' if:
n < nref / n > nref
41_
Speed window signal
410
Window center
0...1500...5000 rpm
411
Range width
0...5000 rpm
412
Delay time
0...1...9 s
413
Signal = '1' if:
INSIDE / OUTSIDE
42_
420
Hysteresis
1...100...300 rpm
421
Delay time
0...1...9 s
n <> nsetpt / n = nsetpt
422
Signal = '1' if:
43_
430
Current reference
value
Change direction
of rotation 2
ON / OFF
0...100...150 % IN
431
Hysteresis
0...5...30 % IN
432
Delay time
0...1...9 s
433
Signal = '1' if:
I < Iref / I > Iref
44_
Imax signal
440
Hysteresis
0...5...50 % IN
441
Delay time
0...1...9 s
442
Signal = '1' if:
I = Imax / I < Imax
10
Par. Name
Setting range
Factory setting
After
startup
Variable par.
Parameter set 1
Par
Name
.
Setting range
Factory setting
Parameter set 2
5__
MONITORING FUNCTIONS
50_
Speed monitoring
500
Speed monitoring 1
OFF / MOTOR MODE /

REGENERAT. MODE /
MOT.& REGEN.MODE
502 Speed monitoring 2
OFF / MOTOR MODE /

REGENERAT. MODE /
MOT.& REGEN.MODE
501
Delay time 1
0...1...10 s
503 Delay time 2
0...1...10 s
504
Encoder monitoring
ON / OFF
52_
520
Mains OFF response

time
0...5 s
521
Mains OFF response
CONTROL.INHIBIT
EMERGENCY STOP
6__
TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT
60_
Binary input DI
With fixed assignment: /CONTROL.INHIBIT
600
Binary input DI1
CW/STOP
601
Binary input DI2
CCW/STOP
602
Binary input DI3
ENABLE/RAP.STOP
603
Binary input DI4
n11/n21
604
Binary input DI5
n12/n22
62_
Binary output DB
With fixed assignment: /BRAKE
620
Binary output DO1
READY
621
Binary output DO2
NO FUNCTION
64_
Analog output
640
Analog output AO1
ACTUAL SPEED
641
Scaling AO1
-10...0...1...10
642
Operating mode AO1
OFF / -10...+10V /
0...20mA / 4...20mA
7__
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
70_
Operating modes
700
Operating mode 1
71_
710
Standstill current 1
After
startup
The following functions can be programmed: NO FUNCTION

ENABLE/RAP.STOP CW/STOP CCW/STOP n11(n13)
n21(n23) n12(n13) n22(n23) FIX SETPT SW.OV. PAR.
SWITCHOVER RAMP SWITCHOVER MOTOR POT UP
MOTOR POT DOWN /EXT. FAULT FAULT RESET /HOLD
CONTROL LIM. SWITCH CW /LIM. SWITCH CCW IPOS
INPUT REFERENCE CAM REF.TRAVEL START SLAVE
FREE RUNN. SETPOINT HOLD MAINS ON DRS SET ZERO
PT. DRS SLAVE START DRS TEACH IN DRS
MAST.STOPPED
The following signals can be programmed: NO FUNCTION /
FAULT READY OUTP. STAGE ON ROT. FIELD ON BRAKE
RELEASED BRAKE APPLIED MOTOR STANDSTILL
PARAMETER SET SPEED REFERENCE SPEED WINDOW
SP/ACT.VAL.COMP. CURR. REFERENCE Imax-SIGNAL /
MOTOR UTILIZ.1 /MOTOR UTILIZ.2 DRS PREWARN. /DRS
LAG ERROR DRS SLAVE IN POS IPOS IN POSITION IPOS
REFERENCE IPOS OUTPUT /IPOS FAULT
The following functions can be programmed: NO FUNCTION
RAMP INPUT SPEED SETPOINT ACTUAL SPEED ACTUAL
FREQUENCY OUTPUT CURRENT ACTIVE CURRENT
UNIT UTILIZATION IPOS OUTPUT RELATED TORQUE
VFC 1
VFC 1 & GROUP
VFC 1 & HOIST
VFC 1 & DC BRAK.
VFC 1 &FLY.START
VFC-n-CONTROL
VFC-n-CTRL&GROUP
VFC-n-CTRL.&HOIST
VFC-n-CTRL& IPOS
CFC
CFC & M-CONTROL
CFC & IPOS
SERVO
SERVO & M-CTRL.
SERVO&IPOS
701 Operating mode 2
VFC 2
VFC 2 & GROUP
VFC 2 & HOIST
VFC 2 & DC BRAK.
VFC 2 &FLY.START
0...50 % Imot
711 Standstill current 2
0...50 % Imot
10
309
10
Par. Name
Setting range
Factory setting
After
startup
Par
Name
.
Variable par.
Parameter set 1
720

ON / OFF
1
723
721
Stop setpoint 1
0...30...500 rpm
724 Stop setpoint 2
0...30...500 rpm
722
Start offset 1
0...30...500 rpm
725 Start offset 2
0...30...500 rpm

ON / OFF
2
73_
Brake function
730
Brake function 1
ON / OFF
733 Brake function 2
ON / OFF
731
Brake release time 1
0...2 s
734 Brake release time 2
0...2 s
732

0...0.2...2 s
1
74_
Speed skip

735
0...0.2...2 s
2
740
Skip window center 1
0...1500...5000 rpm
742 Skip window center 2
0...1500...5000 rpm
741
Skip width 1
0...300 rpm
743 Skip width 2
0...300 rpm
75_
MASTER-SLAVE OFF
SPEED (RS-485)
SPEED (SBus) SPEED
485+SBus) TORQUE
(RS-485) TORQUE
(SBus)
TORQUE(485+SBus)
LOAD SHAR (RS-485) /
LOAD SHARE (SBus)
LOAD S(485+SBus)
750
Slave setpoint
751
Scaling slave setpoint -10...0...1...10
8__
UNIT FUNCTIONS
80_
Setup
802/ Factory setting
YES / NO
803/ Parameter lock
ON / OFF
804
NO
FAULT MEMORY
KWH METER
OPERATING HOURS
Reset statistic data
After
startup
Parameter set 2
72_
800/ Quick menu
ON / OFF
801/ Language
DE / EN / FR
806
Copy DBGMDX
YES / NO
807
Copy MDXDBG
YES / NO
81_
810
RS485 address
811
RS-485 group address 100...199
812
RS485 timeout delay
0...650 s
813
SBus address
0...63
814
SBus group address
0...63
815
SBus timeout delay
0...0.1...650 s
816
SBus baud rate
125/250/500 / 1000
kbaud
817
SBus synchronization
0...1023
ID
818
CAN synchronization
ID
819
Fieldbus timeout delay 0...0.5...650 s
82_
Brake operation
4-quadrant
820/
operation 1
310
Setting range
Factory setting
These parameters are only available in the DBG11B keypad, not in

MOVITOOLS!
0...99
0...1...2047
ON / OFF
821
4-quadrant
operation 2
ON / OFF
10
Par. Name
Setting range
Factory setting
Variable par.
Parameter set 1
After
startup
Par
Name
.
Setting range
Factory setting
Parameter set 2
83_
Fault response
830
Response
EXT. FAULT
831
Response
RAPID STOP/WARNG
FIELDBUS TIMEOUT
832
Response
MOTOR OVERLOAD
EMERG.STOP/FAULT
833
Response
RS485 TIMEOUT
RAPID STOP/WARNG
834
Response
DRS LAG ERROR
EMERG.STOP/FAULT
835/
Response
TF sensor SIGNAL
NO RESPONSE
836
Response
SBus TIMEOUT
EMERG.STOP/FAULT
84_
Reset response
EMERG.STOP/FAULT
840/ Manual reset
YES / NO
841
Auto reset
ON / OFF
1...3...30 s
842
Restart time
85_
Scaling speed actual value
850
Scaling factor numera1...65535

tor
851
Scaling factor denomi1...65535

nator
852
User dimension
86_
Modulation
The following fault responses can be programmed: NO

RESPONSE DISPLAY FAULT IMM. STOP/FAULT EMERG.STOP/
FAULT RAPID STOP/FAULT IMM.STOP/WARNG EMERG.STOP/
WARNG RAPID STOP/WARNG
1 rpm
Can only be set using MOVITOOLS
860
PWM frequency 1
4/8/16 kHz
861 PWM frequency 2
4/8/16 kHz
862
PWM fix 1
ON / OFF
863 PWM fix 2
ON / OFF
864
PWM frequency CFC
4/8/16 kHz
87_
870
Setpoint description
PO1
CTRL. WORD 1
871
PO2
SPEED
872
PO3
NO FUNCTION
873
Actual value description PI1
STATUS WORD1
874
SPEED
875
OUTPUT CURRENT
876
PO data enable
ON / OFF
877
DeviceNet PD configu0...3...5
ration
88_
Manual operation
880
Manual operation
After
startup
10
ON / OFF
311
10
Par. Name
Setting range
Factory setting
Variable par.
Parameter set 1
312
After
startup
Par
Name
.
Setting range
Factory setting
After
startup
Parameter set 2
9__
IPOS PARAMETERS
90_
900
Reference offset
-231...0...231-1 inc
901
Reference speed 1
0...200...5000 rpm
902
Reference speed 2
0...50...5000 rpm
903
Reference travel type
0...7
904
Reference travel to
zero pulse
Yes / No
91_
910
Gain X controller
911
Positioning ramp 1
0.1...0.5...32
0...1...20 s
912
Positioning ramp 2
0...1...20 s
913
Travel speed CW
0...1500...5000 rpm
914
Travel speed CCW
0...1500...5000 rpm
915
Speed feedforward
199.99...0...100...199.9
9%
916
Ramp type
LINEAR / SINE /
SQUARED / BUSRAMP
92_
IPOS Monitoring
920
SW limit switch CW
-231...0...231-1 inc
921
SW limit switch CCW
-231...0...231-1 inc
922
Position window
0...50...32767 inc
923
Lag error window
0...231-1 inc
93_
930
Override
ON / OFF
931
CTRL word Task 1
START / STOP
932
CTRL word Task 2
START / STOP

Display parameter, cannot be edited using DBG11B.
94_
IPOS Variables/Encoder
940
IPOS variables edit
941
MOTOR ENC. (X15)

Source actual position EXTERN.ENC (X14)
ABSOL.ENC. (DIP)
ON / OFF
942
Enc. factor numerator 1...32767
943
Encoder factor denom1...32767

inator
944
Encoder scaling ext.

encoder
x1/x2/x4/x8/x16/x32/x64
945
Encoder type (X14)
TTL / SIN/COS / HIPERFACE

NORMAL/INVERTIERT
946
Zhlrichtung X14
95_
DIP
950
Encoder type
951
Counting direction
NORMAL/INVERTED
952
Cycle frequency
1...200 %
953
Position offset
-(231-1)...0...231-1
954
Zero offset
-(231-1)...0...231-1
x1/x2/x4/x8/x16/x32/x64
This parameter is only available in the DBG11B keypad, not in

MOVITOOLS!
Only with MOVITOOLS. Not visible on the DBG11B keypad.
NO ENCODER
955
Encoder scaling
96_
IPOS Modulo Function
960
Modulo function
OFF/SHORT/CW/CCW
961
Modulo numerator
0...231
962
Modulo denominator
0...231
963
Modulo encoder reso0...4096...20000

lution
Starting up the inverter with PROFIBUS-DP (MC_41A)
10
10.8
Configuring the
PROFIBUS-DP
interface
It is necessary for the DP master to send a certain DP configuration to the drive inverter
to define the type and number of input and output data used for transfer. In doing this,
you have the opportunity to
control the drive using process data
read and write all drive parameters using the parameter channel.
The following figure shows a schematic of the data exchange between the programmable controller (DP master) and the MOVIDRIVE drive inverter (DP slave) with the process data and parameter channel.
Parameter channel
Process data channel
Parameter channel
01065BEN
Figure 188: Communication via PROFIBUS-DP
Process data configuration
MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters make it possible to have different DP configurations for exchanging data between the DP master and the inverter. The following table
provides additional information about all possible DP configurations for the MOVIDRIVE compact range. The 'Process data configuration' column lists the names of the
configurations. These texts also appear as a selection list in your project planning software for the DP master. The DP configurations column shows which configuration data
are sent to the inverter when the PROFIBUS-DP connection is established.
Process data
configuration
Meaning / information
DP configurations
0
1 PD
Control by 1 process data word
240dec
2 PD
Control by 2 process data words
241dec
3 PD
242dec
6 PD
0dec
245dec
10 PD
0dec
249dec
Param + 1 PD
Control by 1 process data word

Parameter setting using 8-byte parameter channel
243dec
240dec
Param + 2 PD

243dec
241dec
Param + 3 PD

243dec
242dec
Param + 6 PD

243dec
245dec
Param + 10 PD

243dec
249dec
10
313
10
'Universal configuration' DP configuration
Selecting the 'Universal configuration' DP configuration gives you two DP identifiers defined as 'blank spaces' (often referred to as DP modules) with the entry 0dec. You can
now configure these two identifiers individually, although you must comply to the following operating conditions:
Module 0 (DP identifier 0) defines the parameter channel of the inverter:
Length
Function
Parameter channel switched off
8 bytes or 4 words
Parameter channel is being used
Module 1 (DP identifier 1) defines the process data channel of the inverter:
Length
Function
2 bytes or 1 word
1 process data word
4 bytes or 2 words
2 process data words
6 bytes or 3 words
12 bytes or 6 words
20 bytes or 10 words
The following figure shows the structure of the configuration data defined in EN 50170
(V2). These configuration data are transferred to the inverter when the DP master is
starting up.
MSB
LSB
0
Data length
0000 = 1 byte/word
1111 = 16 byte/word
Input/output
00 = special identifier formats
01 = input
10 = output
11 = input/output
Format
0 = byte structure
1 = word structure
Consistency over
0 byte or word
1 complete length
00087BEN
Figure 189: Format of the Cfg_Data identifier byte according to EN 50170 (V2)
Please note for MCF/MCV/MCS41A (does not apply to MCH41A):

'Special identifier formats' coding is not supported! Only use the 'Consistency throughout entire length' setting for data transmission!
Data consistency
Consistent data are data that have to be transmitted between the programmable controller and the drive inverter as one block at all times and are not to be transmitted separately from one another.
Data consistency is very important for transmitted position values or complete positioning tasks. The reason being that data not transmitted consistently could be from different
program cycles of the programmable controller, which would lead to undefined values
being transmitted to the drive inverter.
In the case of PROFIBUS-DP, data communication always takes place between the programmable controller and the inverter using the 'Data consistency throughout entire
length' setting.
314
10
External diagnostics
For MOVIDRIVE compact, it is possible to activate automatic generation of external diagnostic alarms via PROFIBUS-DP during the project planning in the DP master. If this
function has been activated, MOVIDRIVE compact sends an external diagnostic signal
to the DP master every time a malfunction occurs. It is then necessary to program corresponding algorithms in the program of the DP master system to evaluate the diagnostic information. These algorithms can sometimes be quite complex.
Recommendation
It is basically not necessary to activate the external diagnostic function because MOVIDRIVE compact transmits the current drive status in status word 1 during every
PROFIBUS-DP cycle.
Note regarding
Simatic S7 master
systems
Diagnostic alarms may be triggered by the PROFIBUS-DP system in the DP master at

any time even when external diagnostic signal generation is inactive. This means the
corresponding operation blocks (e.g. OB84 for S7-400 or OB82 for S7-300) should always be created in the controller.
For more information, please refer to the Readme file included with the GSD file.
Identity number
Each DP master and DP slave must have its individual identity number which is assigned by the PROFIBUS user organization. This number uniquely identifies the connected unit. When the PROFIBUS-DP master starts up, it compares the identity numbers of the connected DP slaves with the identity numbers the user has entered in the
project planning. User data transfer is not activated until the DP master has made sure
that the connected station addresses and unit types (identity numbers) correspond to
the project planning data. As a result, this process provides a high degree of protection
against project planning mistakes.
The identity number is defined as an unsigned 16-bit number. The PROFIBUS user organization has defined the following identity numbers for the MOVIDRIVE compact
drive inverter unit series.
MOVIDRIVE compact MCF/MCV/MCS41A
6002hex (24578dec)
MOVIDRIVE
6003hex (24579dec)
compact MCH41A
10
315
10
The drive inverter is controlled via the process data channel which is one, two or three
I/O words in length. These process data words are reproduced in the I/O or peripheral
area of the controller, for example when a programmable logic controller is used as the
DP master. As a result, they can be addressed in the usual manner (see the following
figure).
Output data
Control via
PROFIBUS-DP
PW160
PW158
PW156
PW154
PW152
PW150
PW148
Input data
PLC
address area
Parameter channel
PO1
PO2
PO3
Parameter channel
PI1
PI2
PI3
PW160
PW158
PW156
PW154
PW152
PW150
PW148
02906AEN
Figure 190: Assignment of the I/O area of the PLC
Control example
for Simatic S5
While the process input data (actual values) are being read in, e.g. using load commands with the Simatic S5, it is possible to send the process output data (setpoints) using the transfer commands. Starting from Figure 190, the example shows the syntax for
processing the process input data and process output data of the MOVIDRIVE drive
inverter. The factory setting for the process data channel is specified in the remark.
Sample STEP5
program
In this example, the project planning for MOVIDRIVE has the process data configuration '3 PD' on input addresses PW156...161 and output addresses PW156...161. In this
case, consistent access takes place in the 'last byte first' sequence.
In the Simatic S5, data consistency is principally determined by the CPU type. Please
refer to the manuals for the CPU or the DP master module of the Simatic S5 for information about correct programming with data consistency.
//Read in actual values consistently
L...PW 160
//Load PI3 (no function)
L...PW 158
//Load PI2 (speed actual value)
L...PW 156
//Load PI1 (status word 1)
//Output setpoints consistently
L...KH 0
T PW 160
//Write 0hex to PO3 (no function)
316
L KF +1500
T...PW 158
//Write 1500dec to PO2 (speed setpoint = 300 rpm)
L KH 0006
T...PW 156
//Write 6hex to PO1 (control word = enable)
10
0
Control example
for Simatic S7
The drive inverter is controlled using Simatic S7 in accordance with the selected process
data configuration either directly using load and transfer commands or by means of special system functions, SFC 14 DPRD_DAT and SFC15 DPWR_DAT.
In principle with S7, data lengths of 3 bytes or more have to be transferred as 4 bytes
using the SFC14 and SFC15 system functions. The following table applies:
Process data configuration
1 PD
Sample STEP7
program
Program access
Load/transfer commands
2 PD
Load/transfer commands
3 PD
System functions SFC14/15 (length 6 bytes)
6 PD
10 PD
Param + 1 PD
Parameter channel: System functions SFC14/15 (length 8 bytes)

Process data: Load/transfer commands
Param + 2 PD

Process data: Load/transfer commands
Param + 3 PD

Process data: System functions SFC14/15 (length 6 bytes)
Param + 6 PD

Param + 10 PD

In this example, the project planning for MOVIDRIVE compact has the process data
configuration '3 PD' on input addresses PIW576...and output addresses POW576 . A
data block DB3 is created with about 50 data words.
When SFC14 is called up, the process input data are copied into data block DB3, data
words 0, 2 and 4. When SFC15 is called up after the control program has been processed, the process output data are copied from data words 20, 22 and 24 into output
address POW 576 .
Note the length information in bytes in case of the RECORD parameter. This value must
correspond to the configured length.
10
Please refer to the online help for STEP7 for further information about the system functions.
317
10
//Start of cyclical program processing in OB1

BEGIN
NETWORK
TITLE = Copy PI data from inverter to DB3, word 0/2/4
CALL SFC...14 (DPRD_DAT)
//Read DP slave record
LADDR...:= W#16#240
//Input address 576
RET_VAL:= MW 30
//Result in flag word 30
RECORD := P#DB3.DBX 0.0 BYTE 6
//Pointer
NETWORK
TITLE = PLC program with drive application
// PLC program uses the process data in DB3 for
// controlling the drive
L DB3.DBW 0
//Load PI1 (status word 1)
L...DB3.DBW 2
//Load PI2 (speed actual value)
L...DB3.DBW 4
//Load PI3 (no function)
L W#16#0006
T...DB3.DBW 20
L...1500
T DB3.DBW 22
L W#16#0000
T...DB3.DBW 24
//Write 6hex to PO1 (control word = enable)

//Write 1500dec to PO2 (speed setpoint = 300 rpm)
//Write 0hex to PO3 (no function)
//End of cyclical program processing in OB1

NETWORK
TITLE = Copy PO data from DB3, word 20/22/24 to inverter
CALL SFC...15 (DPWR_DAT)
//Write DP slave record
LADDR...:= W#16#240
//Output address 576 = 240hex
RECORD := P#DB3.DBX 20.0 BYTE 6
//Pointer to DB/DW
RET_VAL:= MW 32
//Result in flag word 32
Please refer to the Fieldbus Unit Profile manual (available from SEW) for more detailed
information and sample applications for control via the process data channel, in particular concerning the coding of the control and status word.
318
10
0
Parameter setting via PROFIBUS-DP
With PROFIBUS-DP, the drive parameters are accessed via the MOVILINK parameter
channel. This offers extra parameter services in addition to the conventional READ and
WRITE services.
Structure of the
parameter channel
In order to set the parameters of peripheral units via fieldbus systems which do not provide an application layer, it is necessary to recreate the most important functions and
services such as READ and WRITE for reading and writing parameters. To do this with
PROFIBUS-DP, define a parameter process data object (PPO). This PPO is transmitted
cyclically. In addition to the process data channel, it contains a parameter channel for
the exchange of acyclical parameter values ( Figure 191).
Parameter channel
Parameter channel
01065BEN
Figure 191: Parameter process data object for PROFIBUS-DP
The structure of the parameter channel is shown below. In principle, it is made up of a

management byte, an index word, a reserved byte and four data bytes.
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Management
Reserved
Index high
Index low
Data MSB
Data
Data
Data LSB
Parameter index
4 byte data
10
319
10
Administration of
the parameter
channel
The entire parameter setting sequence is coordinated with 'Byte 0: Management'. This
byte is used for providing important service parameters such as service identifier, data
length, version and status of the service performed. Bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 contain the service
identifier. These bits define which service is performed. Bit 4 and bit 5 specify the data
length in bytes for the write service. This should be set to 4 bytes for all SEW drive inverters.
Byte 0: Management
MSB
Bit:
LSB
6
0
Service identifier:
0000 = No service
0001 = Read parameter
0010 = Write parameter
0011 = Write parameter volatile
0100 = Read minimum
0101 = Read maximum
0110 = Read default
0111 = Read scale
1000 = Read attribute
1001 = Read EEPROM
Data length:
00 = 1 byte
01 = 2 bytes
10 = 3 bytes
11 = 4 byte (must be set!)
Handshake bit:
Must be changed on every new job in cyclical transmission.
Status bit:
0 = No error during execution of service
1 = Error during execution of service
Bit 6 is used as an acknowledgment between the controller and the drive inverter. It triggers the implementation of the transferred service in the drive inverter. In particular with
PROFIBUS-DP, the parameter channel is transmitted cyclically with the process data.
For this reason, the implementation of the service in the drive inverter must be triggered
by edge control using handshake bit 6. To permit this, the value of this bit is altered for
each new service to be performed (toggle). The drive inverter uses the handshake bit to
signal whether the service was performed or not. The service has been performed as
soon as the handshake bit received in the control corresponds to the one which was
sent. Status bit 7 indicates whether it was possible to carry out the service properly or if
there were errors.
Index addressing
320
'Byte 2: Index high' and 'Byte 3: Index low' determine the parameter which is to be read
or written via the fieldbus system. The parameters of a drive inverter are addressed with
a uniform index regardless of the connected fieldbus system. Byte 1 should be viewed
as reserved and must always be set to 0x00.
10
Data range
The data are located in byte 4 to byte 7 of the parameter channel. This means up to 4
bytes of data can be transmitted per service. The data are always entered with right-justification, i.e. byte 7 contains the least significant data byte (data-LSB) whereas byte 4
is the most significant data byte (data-MSB).
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Management
Reserved
Index high
Index low
Data MSB
Data
Data
Data LSB
High byte 1
Low byte 1
High byte 2
Low byte 2
High word
Low word
Double word
Incorrect performance of service
The status bit in the management byte is set to signal that a service has been performed
incorrectly. The service was performed by the drive inverter if the received handshake
bit is the same as the sent handshake bit. If the status bit now signals an error, the error
code is entered in the data range of the parameter message. Bytes 4...7 send back the
return code in a structured format ( Sec. 'Return codes for parameter setting' on page
322).
Byte 0
Management
Byte 1
Reserved
Byte 2
Index high
Byte 3
Index low
Byte 4
Byte 5
Error class Error code
Byte 6
Byte 7
Add. code
high
Add. code
low
Status bit = 1: Incorrect performance of service
10
321
10
Return codes for

parameter setting
In the event of an incorrect parameter setting, the drive inverter sends back various return codes to the master which set the parameters. These codes provide detailed information about the cause of the error. All of these return codes are structured in accordance with EN 50170. The system distinguishes between the following elements:
Error class
Error code
Additional code
These return codes apply to all communications interfaces of MOVIDRIVE.

Error class
The error class element classifies the type of error more precisely. MOVIDRIVE compact supports the following error classes as defined in EN 50170 (V2):
Class (hex)
Name
Meaning
vfd-state
Status error of the virtual field unit
application-reference
Error in application program
definition
Definition error
resource
Resource error
service
Error when performing service
access
Access error
ov
Error in object list
other
Other error (see additional code)
The error class is generated by the communications software of the fieldbus interface if
there is an error in communication. This statement does not apply to error class 8, 'Other
error.' Return codes sent from the drive inverter system are all in error class 8, 'Other
error.' The error can be more precisely identified using the additional code element.
Error code
322
The error code element provides a means for more precisely identifying the cause of the
error within the error class. It is generated by the communications software of the fieldbus interface in the event of an error in communication....Only error code 0 (Other error
code) is defined for error class 8, 'Other error.' In this case, detailed identification is
made using the additional code.
10
Additional code
The additional code contains the return codes specific to SEW dealing with incorrect parameter settings of the drive inverter. They are sent back to the master in error class 8,
'Other error.' The following table shows all possible codings for the additional code.
Error class: 8 = 'Other error'
Special return
codes (special
cases)
Incorrect service
coding in the
parameter channel
Add. code
high (hex)
Add. code low

(hex)
Meaning
00
00
No fault
00
10
Invalid parameter index
00
11
Function/parameter not implemented
00
12
Read access only
00
13
Parameter lock is active
00
14
Factory setting is active
00
15
Value for parameter too large
00
16
Value for parameter too small
00
17
Option card required for this function/parameter is missing
00
18
Error in system software
00
19
Parameter access via RS-485 process interface on X13 only
00
1A
Parameter access via RS-485 diagnostic interface only
00
1B
Parameter has access protection
00
1C
Controller inhibit required
00
1D
Impermissible value for parameter
00
1E
Factory setting was activated
00
1F
Parameter was not saved in EEPROM
00
20
Parameter cannot be changed with output stage enabled
Faults in parameter settings which cannot be identified either automatically by the application layer of the fieldbus system or by the system software of the drive inverter are
treated as special cases. This refers to the following possible faults:
Incorrect coding of a service via parameter channel
Incorrect length specification of a service via parameter channel
Internal communications error
10
A non-defined coding was specified in the management or reserved byte during parameter setting via the parameter channel. The following table shows the return code for this
special case.
Code (dec)
Meaning
Error class:
Service
Error code:
Illegal parameter
Add. code high:
Add. code low:
Correcting the fault:

Check bytes 0 and 1 in the parameter channel.
323
10
Incorrect length
specification in
parameter channel
A data length other than 4 data bytes was specified in a write service during parameter
setting via the parameter channel. The following table displays the return code.
Error class:
Code (dec)
Meaning
Access
Error code:
Type conflict
Add. code high:
Add. code low:

Check bit 4 and bit 5 for the data length in the management byte of the parameter channel.
Internal communications error
The return code listed in the following table is sent back if a communications error has
occurred within the system. The requested parameter service may not have been performed and should be repeated. If this error reoccurs, it is necessary to switch off the
drive inverter completely and then back on again so it is re-initialized.
Error class:
Code (dec)
Meaning
Access
Error code:
Hardware fault
Add. code high:
Add. code low:

Repeat the parameter service. De-energize the drive inverter if the error reoccurs (supply voltage + ext. 24 VDC) and then switch it back on. Contact SEW Service for advice
if this error occurs continuously.
324
10
Reading a parameter with PROFIBUS-DP (Read)
In order to perform a READ service using the parameter channel, the handshake bit
must not be changed until the entire parameter channel has been prepared in accordance with the service. This is because cyclical transfer takes place on the parameter
channel. As a result, adhere to the following sequence in order to read a parameter:
1. Enter the index of the parameter to be read in byte 2 (Index high) and byte 3 (Index
low).
2. Enter the service identifier for the read service in the management byte (byte 0).
3. Transfer the read service to the inverter by changing the handshake bit.
Since this is a read service, the sent data bytes (bytes 4...7) and the data length (in the
administration byte) are ignored and consequently do not need to be set.
The inverter now processes the read service and sends the service confirmation back
by changing the handshake bit.
Byte 0: Management
7
0/1
1
Service identifier:
0001 = Read
Data length:
Not relevant for READ service
Handshake bit:
Must be changed with every new job.
Status bit:
X = Not relevant
0/1 = Bit value is changed
The data length is not relevant; only the service identifier for the READ service should
be entered. This service is now activated in the drive inverter when the handshake bit
changes. For example, it would be possible to activate the read service with the management byte coding 01hex or 41hex.
10
325
10
Writing a parameter with PROFIBUS-DP (Write)
In order to perform a WRITE service using the parameter channel, the handshake bit
must not be changed until the entire parameter channel has been prepared in accordance with the service. This is because cyclical transfer takes place on the parameter
channel. As a result, adhere to the following sequence in order to write a parameter:
1. Enter the index of the parameter to be written in byte 2 (Index high) and byte 3 (Index
low).
2. Enter the data to be written in bytes 4...7.
3. Enter the service identifier and the data length for the write service in the administration byte (byte 0).
4. Transfer the write service to the inverter by changing the handshake bit.
The inverter now processes the write service and sends the service confirmation back
by changing the handshake bit.
Byte 0: Management
7
0/1
0
Service identifier:
010 = Write
Reserved
Data length:
11 = 4 bytes
Handshake bit:
Must be changed with every new job.
Status bit:
0/1 = Bit value is changed
The data length is 4 bytes for all parameters in SEW drive inverters. This service is now
transferred to the drive inverter when the handshake bit changes. As a result, a write
service on SEW drive inverters always has the management byte coding 32hex or 72hex.
326
10
Procedure for
programming
with PROFIBUSDP
Taking the example of the WRITE service, is intended to represent a process of setting
parameters between the control and the drive inverter via PROFIBUS-DP ( Figure
192). To simplify the sequence, Figure 192 only shows the management byte of the parameter channel.
The parameter channel is only received and returned by the drive inverter while the controller is preparing the parameter channel for the write service. The service is not activated until the handshake bit is changed (in this example, when it changes from 0 to 1).
The drive inverter now interprets the parameter channel and processes the write service; however, it continues to respond to all messages with handshake bit = 0. Confirmation that the service has been performed occurs when the handshake bit in the response telegram of the drive inverter is changed. The controller now detects that the received handshake bit is once again the same as the one which was sent. It can now prepare another parameter setting procedure.
Higher level automatic system
RS-485
Drive Inverter
(Slave)
00110010
Parameter setting
channel is prepared
for WRITE service.
00110010
00110010
00110010
Handshake bit is
toggled and service
transferred to
drive inverter.
Parameter setting
channel is received
but not evaluated.
01110010
00110010
01110010
Write service
is processed.
00110010
Write service is executed,
handshake bit is toggled.
Service acknowledge
received, as send and
receive handshake
bits the same again.
01110010
01110010
01110010
10
Parameter setting
channel is received
but not evaluated.
00152BEN
Figure 192: Parameter setting procedure
Parameter data
format
When parameters are set via the fieldbus interface, the same parameter coding is used
as with the serial RS-485 interfaces or the system bus.
The data formats and ranges of values for the individual parameters can be found in the
'MOVIDRIVE Serial Communication' manual which can be ordered from SEW.
327
10
Starting up the inverter with INTERBUS (MCH42A)
10.9

The parameters of the MOVIDRIVE compact MCH42A inverter can be set straight
away via INTERBUS without any further settings once the INTERBUS interface has
been installed. As a result, all parameters can be set by the master automation system
after switch-on.
To do this, the "Control signal source" must be set to FIELDBUS in the inverter (P100 =
FIELDBUS and P101 = FIELDBUS). The FIELDBUS setting means the inverter parameters are set for control and setpoint entry via INTERBUS. The inverter then responds
to the process output data transmitted from the programmable master controller.
Activation of the control signal source/setpoint source FIELDBUS is signaled to the machine control using the 'Fieldbus mode active' bit in the status word. For safety reasons,
the inverter must also be enabled on the terminal side for control via the fieldbus system.
Accordingly, the terminals must be wired up or programmed in such a way that the inverter is enabled via the input terminals.
The simplest way of enabling the inverter on the terminal side is to connect the DI (/
CONTROLLER INHIBIT) input terminal to a '1' signal and to program input terminals
DI1...DI3 to 'NO FUNCTION'.
Preliminary work
for startup
1. Enable the inverter on the terminal side. To do this, apply a '1' signal to X11:1 (DI
'/CONTROLLER INHIBIT'), for example using a jumper to X11:8 (VO24).
2. Only switch on the 24 VDC voltage supply; do not switch on the supply voltage yet.
You can now set the parameters of the inverter without the connected motor starting
up inadvertently.
3. Set the setpoint source and control signal source to FIELDBUS (P100 = FIELDBUS
and P101 = FIELDBUS).
4. Set binary inputs DI1...DI3 to 'NO FUNCTION' (P600...P602 = 'NO FUNCTION').
328
10
Configuring the
INTERBUS system
There are two configuration steps for the inverter in the INTERBUS interface module using the 'CMD Tool' project planning software (CMD = Configuration Monitoring Diagnostics).
1. Create the bus structure
2. Station description and address setting for process data
PLC
...
T PAW 144
T PAW 146
T PAW 148
...
ON
1
20 21 22
3 PD
PAW 148
PA3
PAW 146
PA2
PAW 144
PA1
INTERBUS
PA1
PA2
PA3
PE1
PE2
PE3
2
2 PCP
...
L PEW 144
L PEW 146
L PEW 148
...
PEW 148
PE3
PEW 146
PE2
PEW 144
PE1
03713AXX
Figure 193: Project planning example for 3PD + 2PCP
The figures below show the settings in the CMD Tool for an inverter configured with 3PD
+ 2PCP as shown in Figure 193, with input/output addresses 144...149 in the control.
Configuring the
bus structure
The bus structure can be configured online or offline using the CMD Tool.
Offline configuration: Insert with ID

code
In offline status, the inverter is configured in the CMD Tool using the 'Edit / Insert with
ID code' menu command. When doing this, you must enter the values for the ID code,
process data channel and station type as shown in Figure 194.
10
03714AXX
Figure 194: Offline configuration with CMD Tool
329
10
Note!
Not all combinations are possible, because the inverter can occupy up to six words in
the INTERBUS!
The following table shows the possible settings. The ID code setting must match the DIP
switches S4 and S5. The process data channel setting must match the DIP switches S1
to S3. Otherwise, INTERBUS operation is not possible.
Information for
offline configuration in CMD Tool
Online configuration: Configuration

frame / Read in
330
Program setting
Function (MOVIDRIVE display)
ID code
227 dec (E3 hex)
Parameter channel: 1 word
Process data channel:
16 bits
1 process data word (Param+1PD)
32 bits
2 process data words (Param + 2 PD)
48 bits
3 process data words (Param +3 PD)
64 bits
80 bits
ID code
224 dec (E0 hex)
Parameter channel: 2 words
16 bits
1 process data word (Param + 1PD)
32 bits
48 bits
64 bits
ID code
225 dec (E1 hex)
Parameter channel: 4 words
16 bits
1 process data word (Param + 1 PD)
32 bits
ID code
3 dec (03 hex)
Parameter channel: -
96 bits
6 process data words (6PD)
The INTERBUS system can also be fully installed first and then DIP switches S1 to S6
set. Following this, the entire bus structure can be read in with the CMD Tool (configuration frame). All stations are automatically detected with their data width settings.
10
Creating a station
description
The INTERBUS stations can be identified and described uniquely using an individual
station description created for the inverter in the INTERBUS system.
The following entries are significant:
Station description
The 'Manufacturer Name' and 'Device Type' must have the following entries:
Manufacturer name:SEW-EURODRIVE
Device type:MOVIDRIVE
Once these entries have been made, the drive parameters can be set using a management PC from the management level via the INTERBUS interface module (Figure 195).
10
Figure 195: Station description for MOVIDRIVE compact MCH42A
Interface type
03715AXX
Select 'Fiber optic remote bus' as the interface type.
331
10
Representation
You can copy your own ICO files into the '.\IBSCMD\PICT32\' directory as of CMD Tool
4.50 for easy identification of the inverter (Figure 196). The INTERBUS description files
for the CMD Tool are available on the SEW website at http://www.SEW-EURODRIVE.com in the 'Software' section.
03716AXX
Figure 196: Linking the station description with the ICO file
332
10
Parameter channel
You must make the following settings for the parameter channel if you want to use the
PCP channel for setting the inverter parameters in your application.
Telegram lengths / Transmit / Receive:

243 bytes each
Supported parameter channel services (standard): Read / Write
03717AXX
Figure 197: Setting the parameter channel (PCP)
Assigning process
data
INTERBUS process data of the inverter are assigned to the program addresses of the
control system using the 'Process Data' shortcut menu.
10
03718AXX
Figure 198: Assigning INTERBUS process data and PLC program addresses
Refer to the chapter for a sample program (STEP7) for controlling the inverter using the
INTERBUS process data.
333
10
0
Testing the PCP
connection
You can use the MONITOR mode of the CMD Tool for testing the PCP connection to
the inverter. The following figures illustrate the PCP test procedure. Basically, this method involves establishing a PCP connection to the unit and reading the parameter list (object list) stored in the unit.
Set the CMD Tool to 'Monitoring' status.
03719AXX
Figure 199: Setting CMD Tool to 'MONITORING' status
Click the inverter to which you want to establish a PCP connection. Press the right
mouse button to open the shortcut menu and select the 'Device Parameterization' menu
command.
03721AXX
Figure 200: Testing the PCP device parameterization
334
10
In the 'Device Parameterization' window, select the 'Device / Read Parameter List' menu
command.
03722AXX
Figure 201: Window for device parameterization using the CMD Tool
The configuration of the PCP channel has been performed correctly once the device parameters have been imported. You can break off the read-in procedure.
Check the PCP configuration and the assignment of CRs if you get an error message
instead of the progress bar. If necessary, reformat the parameterization memory of the
interface module and then write the current project into the parameterization memory
again. Now run the parameterization procedure for the interface module again and repeat this test sequence to check the PCP connection.
10
03723AXX
Figure 202: CMD Tool is reading in device parameters, i.e. PCP communication is OK
335
10
0
Overview of basic
structure
The MOVIDRIVE compact MCH42A inverter offers a standardized interface for parameterization using the 'Peripherals Communication Protocol' (PCP). This INTERBUS
communications channel gives you complete access to all MOVIDRIVE drive parameters.
The PCP channel must be configured with the corresponding ID code so you can access
parameter values in the inverter. There are one, two or four words available in the INTERBUS protocol for the PCP channel. Changing the number of PCP words varies the
access speed to parameter values via the PCP channel.
Additional PCP
channel for startup
and diagnostics
The PCP interface is implemented using PCP version 3. In addition to the familiar PCP
channel between the control system (PLC) and the inverter, it is now possible to establish an additional (logical) PCP channel between the interface module and the inverter.
This additional PCP channel can be used by a supervisory computer to access the inverter parameter values via the Ethernet / INTERBUS communications pathway.
-CMD Tool
-@X
-MOVITOOLS
Ethernet TCP/IP
PLC
MOVIDRIVE
PD
PLC + MOVIDRIVE
INTERBUS LWL 2MBd

PCP
PLC
03725AXX
Figure 203: Communications channels with PCP version 3
Figure 203 shows a sample system topology with an Ethernet TCP/IP layer and an INTERBUS layer. In this case, an INTERBUS interface module is used with an Ethernet
TCP/IP interface. This module functions as the gateway between the two communications layers.
In addition to the 'CMD Tool,' the supervisory computer also runs INTERBUS '@utomationXplorer' and 'MOVITOOLS' for programming and setting the parameters of the SEW
inverter on the INTERBUS. This arrangement means existing bus infrastructures can be
used for startup and maintenance. This setup facilitates startup and diagnostics of the
entire automation system because the INTERBUS cable is now not only used for controlling but for startup and diagnostics of all components used on the fieldbus.
336
10
0
PCP services
The MOVIDRIVE compact MCH42A inverter supports the PCP services shown in Figure 204. However, only the following services are of significance for setting the inverter
parameters:
Initiate
Read
Write
Abort
Refer to the PCP communication user manual for your INTERBUS interface module for
a detailed description of the PCP services.
INTERBUS Slave
INTERBUS Master
Initiate
Abort
Abort/Reject
Identify
Get-OV
Status
Read
Write
INTERBUS
Figure 204: PCP services supported by MOVIDRIVE
03727AXX
10
337
10
Establishing the
communications
link with 'Initiate'
The 'Initiate' PCP service establishes a communications link for exchanging parameters
between an INTERBUS interface module and the MOVIDRIVE inverter. Communication is always established from the INTERBUS interface module. Various arrangements
relating to the communications link are checked during establishment of the connection,
such as supported PCP services, user data length, etc. The inverter responds with a
positive initiate response if the connection is established successfully. If the connection
could not be established, then the arrangements for the communications link on the INTERBUS interface module do not match those on the MOVIDRIVE inverter. The inverter responds with an initiate error response. In this case, compare the configured communications relationship list in the INTERBUS interface module with that in the inverter.
As a rule, an attempt to re-establish an existing communications link leads to an abort.
The communications link is then dropped, which means the 'Initiate' PCP service has to
be run for a third time in order to re-establish the communications connection.
338
Breaking off the

communications
link with 'Abort'
The 'Abort' PCP service breaks off an existing communications link between the INTERBUS interface module and the MOVIDRIVE inverter. Abort is an unconfirmed PCP service and can be triggered either from the INTERBUS interface module or from MOVIDRIVE.
Reading parameter values with

'Read'
The 'Read' PCP service gives the INTERBUS interface module read access to all communications objects (drive parameters) of the MOVIDRIVE inverter. All drive parameters and their coding are presented in detail in the Fieldbus Unit Profile documentation
and the list of MOVIDRIVE parameters.
Writing parameter
values with 'Write'
The 'Write' PCP service gives the INTERBUS interface module write access to all MOVIDRIVE drive parameters. The inverter generates a write error response if incorrect access is made to a drive parameter (e.g. the written value is too great). Precise information is given relating to the cause of the error.
10
0
Parameters in the
object list
The 'Read' and 'Write' PCP services give the INTERBUS interface module access to all
parameters defined in the object list. All drive parameters which can be accessed via the
bus system are described as communications objects in the static object list. All objects
in the static object list are addressed using indices. The following table shows the structure of the object list for the MOVIDRIVE compact MCH42A inverter.
The index range is subdivided into three logical areas. The drive parameters are addressed using indices 8300...8800dec. Refer to the MOVIDRIVE parameter list in the
SEW documentation for information about the parameter index. Indices below 8300dec
are handled directly on the INTERBUS interface and are not to be viewed as drive parameters.
Object description
of the drive parameters
Parameter index (decimal)
Name of the communications object
8296
Download parameter block
8297
Last PCP index
8298
MOVILINK parameter channel cyclical
8299
MOVILINK parameter channel acyclical
8300...8800
Drive parameter for MOVIDRIVE (can be accessed directly with the

'Read' and 'Write' PCP services, see the MOVIDRIVE parameter list in the
SEW documentation for information about the parameter index)
8801...9999
Drive parameters for MOVIDRIVE (these parameters can only be

accessed via the MOVILINK parameter channel)
>10000
Table, program and variable memory (these parameters can only be

accessed via the MOVILINK parameter channel)
The drive parameters of the MOVIDRIVE inverter are described in detail in the MOVIDRIVE parameter list in the SEW documentation. In addition to the parameter index,
you will receive additional information about coding, the range of values and the meaning of the parameter data.
The object description in the object list is identical for all drive parameters. Even those
parameters which can only be read are given the Read all/Write all attribute in the object
list, because the inverter undertakes the corresponding check itself and sends back a
return code if necessary. The following table shows the object description of all drive parameters.
Index:
10
8300...8800
Object code:
7 (simple variable)
Data type index:
10 (octet string)
Length:
Local address:
Password:
Access groups:
Access rights:
Read all/Write all
Name[16]:
Extension length:
339
10
'Download parameter block' object
The 'download parameter block' object lets you write up to 38 MOVIDRIVE drive parameters at the same time with only one write service. As a result, this object gives you
the opportunity to set the parameters of the inverter in the startup phase, e.g. by calling
up the write service only once. As a rule, it is only necessary to change a few parameters. As a result, this parameter block with its max. 38 parameters is sufficient for almost
all applications. The user data area is defined as 38 x 6 + 2 bytes = 230 bytes (octet
string type). The following table shows the structure of the 'download parameter block'
object.
Octet
Meaning
reserved (0)
Number of parameters
1...38 parameters
Index high
1. Parameters
Index low
Data MSB
Data
Data
Data LSB
Index high
...
...
223
Data LSB
224
Index high
225
Index low
226
Data MSB
227
Data
228
Data
229
Data LSB
Note
38. Parameters
The 'download parameter block' object is only handled locally on the INTERBUS interface and is defined as in the following table.
Index:
8296
Object code:
7 (simple variable)
Data type index:
10 (octet string)
Length:
230
Local address:
Password:
Access groups:
340
Access rights:
Write all
Name[16]:
Extension length:
10
The WRITE service on the 'download parameter block' object starts a parameter setting
mechanism on the INTERBUS interface. This step puts all parameters specified in the
user data area of the object into the DPRAM and therefore sets the parameters of the
inverter. The write service is terminated with a positive write response once the download parameter block has been processed successfully, i.e. all parameters transmitted
by the INTERBUS interface module have been written. A negative write response is returned in case of an error. The return code contains more detailed information about the
type of error as well as the number of the parameter (no. 1...38) where the error occurred
(see example).
Example: Write error response for an error when writing the 11th parameter:
Error class: 8 Other
Error code: 0 Other
Additional code high: 11dec Error when writing parameter 11
Additional code low: 15hex Value too large
Note the following points when using the download parameter block:
'Last PCP index'

object
Do not perform a factory setting within the download parameter block!
All parameters written after the parameter lock has been activated will be rejected.
This object is 4 bytes long and, when read access is made, returns the numerical value
of the last index which can be addressed directly using the PCP services. PCP accesses
to indices greater than this numerical value must be made using the 'MOVILINK parameter channel acyclical' object.
Index:
8297
Object code:
7 (simple variable)
Data type index:
10 (octet string)
Length:
Local address:
10
Password:
Access groups:
Access rights:
Read all
Name[16]:
Extension length:
341
10
0
'MOVILINK
parameter channel cyclical'
This object is 8 bytes in length and contains the cyclical MOVILINK parameter channel.
All MOVILINK communications services can be performed by cyclically alternating
reading and writing of this object. The communications service is not performed until the
handshake bit in the management byte has changed. The MOVILINK parameter channel grants access to all indices and therefore also to the IPOS variable and program
memory.
The following table shows the structure of this communications object. Refer to the
'MOVIDRIVE Fieldbus Unit Profile and Parameter List' document for information about
the structure of the parameter channel.
Octet
Meaning
Management
Reserve
d
Index
high
Index
low
Data
MSB
Data
Data
Data
LSB
Note
Management
Reserve
d
Parameter index
4 bytes data
The 'MOVILINK parameter channel cyclical' object is only handled locally on the INTERBUS interface.
Index:
8298
Object code:
7 (simple variable)
Data type index:
10 (octet string)
Length:
Local address:
Password:
Access groups:
Access rights:
Read all/Write all
Name[16]:
Extension length:
The following table shows the procedure involved in a parameter access via the cyclical
MOVILINK parameter channel. The performance of the service is not started in the inverter until the control has changed the handshake bit in the parameter channel. To do
this, the control program must read the parameter channel at the start of the parameter
setting process to obtain the current status of the handshake bit in the inverter. Now, the
master can initiate evaluation of the parameter channel in the inverter when the handshake bit changes.
342
10
The inverter now performs the service coded in the parameter channel and enters the
service confirmation back in the parameter channel. The control program receives the
service confirmation the next time it makes read access to the 'MOVILINK parameter
channel cyclical'. The following tables displays the procedure of the cyclically called
read/write services for the 'MOVILINK parameter channel cyclical'.
MOVIDRIVE (slave)
Control (master)
1. 'READ MOVILINK parameter channel cyclical', to evaluate the status of the handshake bit.
READ 8298 (parameter channel)
Data = Parameter channel
2. Initiate the service coded in the parameter channel by means of a WRITE to the 'MOVILINK parameter
channel cyclical' object and toggling the handshake bit.
WRITE 8298 (parameter channel)
OK
3. READ 'MOVILINK parameter channel cyclical' and evaluation of the service confirmation in the parameter channel.
Data = Parameter channel with result
10
343
10
'MOVILINK parameter channel acyclical' object
The 'MOVILINK parameter channel acyclical' object is 8 bytes long and contains the
MOVILINK parameter channel. This object can be used for acyclical parameter access,
i.e. the inverter processes the service coded in the parameter channel every time a
WRITE service is received on this object. The handshake bit is not evaluated! The following table shows the structure of the 'MOVILINK parameter channel acyclical'. Refer
to the 'MOVIDRIVE Fieldbus Unit Profile and Parameter List' document for information
about the structure of the parameter channel.
Octet
Meaning
Management
Reserve
d
Index
high
Index
low
Data
MSB
Data
Data
Data
LSB
Note
Management
Reserve
d
Parameter index
4 bytes data
There are two different procedures involved in setting the inverter parameters via the
acyclical MOVILINK parameter channel:
Parameter channel performs a

write type service
Parameter channel performs a write type service
Parameter channel performs a read type service
If a write type service is performed via the acyclical parameter channel (e.g. write parameter or write parameter volatile), the inverter responds with the current service confirmation when the service has been performed. The corresponding error code is returned if the write access is not correct.
This variant offers the advantage that the write services are processed by simply sending a WRITE 'MOVILINK parameter channel' once and the service confirmation can take
place by evaluating the 'write confirmation.' The following table shows how write services are performed via the acyclical MOVILINK parameter channel.
MOVIDRIVE (slave)
Control (master)
channel cyclical' object.
Service confirmation (OK/error code)
The WRITE service coded in the parameter channel is performed and the service confirmation is returned directly as the response.
344
10
Parameter channel performs a

read type service
A PCP WRITE service has to be performed before a parameter can be read via the parameter channel. The PCP WRITE service defines where the inverter data should be
available. A read service must take place on the acyclical parameter channel in order
for these data to get to the master. As a result, a PCP WRITE and a PCP READ are
always required for performing read services via the parameter channel. The following
table shows how read services are performed via the acyclical MOVILINK parameter
channel.
MOVIDRIVE (slave)
Control (master)
channel cyclical' object.
OK
2. READ 'MOVILINK parameter channel cyclical' and evaluation of the service confirmation in the parameter channel.
Data = Parameter channel with result
1. Reception is confirmed immediately, the parameter channel is evaluated and the requested service performed.
2. Service confirmation is entered in the parameter channel and can be evaluated by
READ access in the master.
The acyclical MOVILINK parameter channel is only handled locally on the INTERBUS
interface and is defined as in the following table.
Index:
8299
Object code:
7 (simple variable)
Data type index:
10 (octet string)
Length:
10
Local address:
Password:
Access groups:
Access rights:
Read all/Write all
Name[16]:
Extension length:
345
10
Return codes for

parameterization
In the event of an incorrect parameter setting, the inverter sends back various return
codes to the master which set the parameters. These codes provide detailed information
about the cause of the error. All of these return codes are structured in accordance with
EN 50170. The system distinguishes between the following elements:
Error class
Error code
Additional code
These return codes apply to all MOVIDRIVE communications interfaces.
Error class
The error class element classifies the type of error more precisely. In accordance with
EN 50170, the system differentiates between the error classes listed in table 1.
Class (hex)
Name
Meaning
vfd-state
Status error of the virtual field unit
application-reference
Error in application program
definition
Definition error
resource
Resource error
service
Error when performing service
access
Access error
ov
Error in object list
other
Other error (see additional code)
The error class is generated by the communications software of the fieldbus interface if
there is an error in communication. This does not apply to error class 8, Other error. Return codes sent from the inverter system are all in error class 8, Other error. The error
can be more precisely identified using the additional code element.
Error code
346
The error code element provides a means for more precisely identifying the cause of the
error within the error class. It is generated by the communications software of the fieldbus card in the event of an error in communication. Only error code 0 (Other error code)
is defined for error class 8, Other error. In this case, detailed identification is made using
the additional code.
10
Additional code
'Internal communications error' special case
Correcting the fault
The additional code contains the return codes specific to SEW dealing with incorrect parameter settings of the inverter. They are sent back to the master in error class 8, Other
error. Table 2 shows all possible codings for the additional code.
Add. code
high (hex)
Add. code low

(hex)
Meaning
00
00
No fault
00
10
Invalid parameter index
00
11
Function/parameter not implemented
00
12
Read access only
00
13
Parameter lock is active
00
14
Factory setting is active
00
15
Value for parameter too large
00
16
Value for parameter too small
00
17
Option card required for this function/parameter is missing
00
18
Error in system software
00
19
Parameter access only via RS-485 process interface on X13
00
1A
Parameter access only via RS-485 diagnostic interface
00
1B
Parameter has access protection
00
1C
Controller inhibit required
00
1D
Impermissible value for parameter
00
1E
Factory setting was activated
00
1F
Parameter was not saved in EEPROM
00
20
Parameter cannot be changed with output stage enabled
The return code listed in the following table is sent back if a communications error has
occurred between the INTERBUS interface and the inverter system. The PCP service
transferred via the fieldbus may not have been performed and should be repeated. If this
error reoccurs, it is necessary to switch off the inverter completely and then back on
again so it is re-initialized.
Code (dec)
Meaning
Error class:
Access
Error code:
Hardware fault
Add. code high:
Add. code low:
10
Repeat the read or write service. If this error occurs again, switch the inverter off completely and back on again. Contact the SEW Electronics Service for advice if this error
occurs continuously.
347
10
Control via process data
The inverter is controlled using the process data simply by reading/writing the program
addresses where the INTERBUS process data of the inverter are replicated. The following is an example for a simple STEP7 program for the Simatic S7:
L...W#16#0006
T...PAW...144... //Write 6hex on PO1 (control word = enable)
L...1500
T...PAW...146... //Write 1500dec on PO2 (speed setpoint = 300 rpm)
L...W#16#0000
T...PAW...148...//Write 0hex on PA3 (no function after factory setting)
Please refer to the Fieldbus Unit Profile manual for more information about controlling
the inverter via the process data channel, in particular regarding the coding of the control
and status word.
Setting parameters via the PCP

interface
This chapter describes how parameters and IPOS variables can be read and written using the standardized INTERBUS PCP Read' and 'Write' services. The example applies
to all 4th generation (G4) INTERBUS interface modules and is explained using PHOENIX terminology.
The coding examples shown in the following chapters are shown in the same way as in
the 'Peripherals Communication Protocol (PCP)' INTERBUS user manual produced by
Phoenix Contact.
Prerequisite
348
You should have the following user manuals:
'Peripherals Communication Protocol (PCP)' INTERBUS user manual, PHOENIX

CONTACT, IBS SYS PCP G4 UM
MOVIDRIVE Fieldbus Unit Profile manual
10
Presentation of
coding examples
The coding examples shown in the following chapters are shown in the same way as in
the 'Peripherals Communication Protocol (PCP)' INTERBUS user manual produced by
Phoenix Contact.
All information in a PCP service is presented word-by-word in column format. As a result, you can think of a word as a PLC word (e.g. Simatic data word). There is a coding
example for the MOVIDRIVE inverter on the right-hand side in each case.
The communication reference (CR) is used for selecting the inverter for which the parameters should be set. In the examples below, CR = 02 hex was assigned to the inverter in the CMD Tool. The index defines the drive parameter which should be accessed.
Station description
of the inverter in
the CMD Tool
Before you can use the PCP channel of the inverter, you have to configure the station
description in the CMD Tool for the inverter.
Process of a
parameterization
sequence
The peripherals communication protocol (PCP) of the INTERBUS standardizes access

to the parameter data of INTERBUS stations and prescribes the following procedure:
Initialization of the PCP connection with the 'Initiate' service
Reading or writing with the 'Read' and 'Write' services.
The communications link can be broken off with the 'Abort' service if it is no longer
required (this is not explained here because there is often no need for it, see the PCP
manual).
Initialization of the PCP connection with the 'Initiate' service
The drive parameters of the inverter are not accessed until the PCP connection has
been established with 'Initate_Request, e.g. once during the system startup.
Word
Meaning
Coding (hex)
Command_Code = Initiate_Request
00 8B
Parameter_Count
00 02
Comm._Reference
00 02
Password
Access_Groups
00 00
Bits
15...8
7...0
10
You should receive the positive 'Initiate_Confirmation' message after the service has
been sent (see the PCP manual in case of a negative message).
349
10
Reading a drive
parameter
The 'Read' service is used for reading a drive parameter (with index 8800). All the drive
parameters are 4 bytes long (1 double word).
Example
Reading from P130 Ramp t11 UP CW (index 8470dec = 2116hex)

Word
Meaning
Command_Code = Read_Request
00 81
Parameter_Count
00 03
Invoke_ID
Coding (hex)
Comm._Reference
00 02
Index
21 16
Subindex
Bits
15...8
7...0
00 00
You should receive the positive 'Read_Confirmation' message after this service has
been sent.
Word
Meaning
Coding (hex)
Message_Code = Read_Confirmation (+)
80 81
2
3
Parameter_Count
Invoke_ID
00 05
Comm._Reference
00 02
Result (+)
00 00
Length
00 04
Data [1]
Data [2]
00 00
Data [3]
Data [4]
07 D0
Bits
15...8
7...0
The parameter data are represented as follows in Motorola format (Simatic format):
Data [1] = High byte
Data [2] = Low byte
Data [4] = Low byte
00 hex
00 hex
07 hex
D0 hex
00 00 07 D0 hex = 2000 dec (= 2000 ms ramp)

Refer to the appendix of the 'Fieldbus Unit Profile' manual for more information about
coding the drive parameters.
Word
Meaning
Coding (hex)
Message_Code = Read_Confirmation
80 81
Parameter_Count
00 03
Invoke_ID
Comm._Reference
00 02
Error_Class
Error_Code
08 00
5
Bits
Additional_Code
15...8
00 10
7...0
The table shows the 'Value for parameter too great' return code, by way of example.
350
10
Writing a drive
parameter
The 'Write' service is used for writing a drive parameter (with index 8800). All drive parameters are 4 bytes long (1 double word).
Example
Writing the ramp time 1.65 s to P130 'Ramp t11 UP CW'

Index: 8470 dec = 2116 hex
Value: 1.65 s = 1650 ms = 1650 dec = 0000 0672 hex
The parameter data are represented as follows in Motorola format (Simatic format):
Data [2] = Low byte
Data [4] = Low byte
00 hex
00 hex
06 hex
72 hex
Refer to the appendix of the 'Fieldbus Unit Profile' manual for more information about
coding the drive parameters.
Word
Meaning
Command_Code = Write_Request
00 82
Parameter_Count
00 05
Invoke_ID
Coding (hex)
Comm._Reference
Index
00 02
21 16
Subindex
Length
00 04
Data [1]
Data [2]
00 00
Data [3]
Data [4]
06 72
Bits
15...8
7...0
Word
Meaning
Coding (hex)
Message_Code = Write_Confirmation (+)
80 82
2
3
Parameter_Count
Invoke_ID
4
Bits
00 02
Comm._Reference
Result (+)
00 02
00 00
15...8
10
7...0
You should receive the positive 'Write_Confirmation' message after this service has
been sent.
Word
Meaning
Coding (hex)
Message_Code = Write_Confirmation (-)
80 82
Parameter_Count
Invoke_ID
Error_Class
5
Bits
00 03
Comm._Reference
00 02
Error_Code
08 00
Additional_Code
15...8
00 15
7...0
The table shows the 'Value for parameter too great' return code, by way of example
351
10
Writing IPOS variables / parameters via MOVILINK
The inverters offer special parameter access via the MOVILINK parameter channel for
universal write access to all inverter data (parameters, IPOS variables, IPOS program
code, etc.). The following section illustrates the mechanism by which IPOS variables
can be changed via the parameter channel.
The acyclical parameter channel can be used above 8299 dec (206B hex).
Example
Writing the value 74565 of the IPOS variable H0 = Index 11000 dec (2AF8 hex)
Value to be written = 74565 dec (0001 2345 hex)
Word
Meaning
00 82
Parameter_Count
00 07
3
4
Invoke_ID
Coding (hex)
Comm._Reference
Index = MOVILINK parameter channel
00 02
20 6B
Subindex
Length
00 08
Data [1] = Management byte
Data [2] = Reserved
32 00
Data [3/4] = Index (e.g. IPOS variable)
2A F8
Data [5]
Data [6]
00 01
Data [7]
Data [8]
23 45
Bits
15...8
7...0
You receive the 'Write_Confirmation' after this service is sent. Once again, you can use
the return codes for evaluating a negative message.
352
10
Reading IPOS
variables / parameters via MOVILINK
The inverters offer special parameter access via the MOVILINK parameter channel for
universal read access to all inverter data (parameters, IPOS variables, IPOS program
code, etc.). The following section illustrates the mechanism by which IPOS variables
can be read via the parameter channel. A two-stage procedure is required:
Writing the MOVILINK parameter channel with the 'Read IPOS variable H0' job
Reading the MOVILINK parameter channel
The MOVILINK parameter channel (acyclical) can be used above 8299 dec (206B hex).
Example
Reading the IPOS variable H0 = Index 11000 dec (2AF8 hex)

Refer to the 'Fieldbus Unit Profile' manual for a detailed description of the MOVILINK
parameter channel.
Word
Meaning
00 82
Parameter_Count
00 07
3
4
Invoke_ID
Coding (hex)
Comm._Reference
00 02
20 6B
Subindex
Length
00 08
Data [2] = Reserved
31 00
2A F8
Data [5]
Data [6]
00 00
Data [7]
Data [8]
00 00
Bits
15...8
7...0
Once the positive 'Write_Confirmation (+)' has been received, read access takes place
on the MOVILINK parameter channel; this involves reading the data into the interface
module which were read during the previous read job defined by 'Write_Request'.
Word
Meaning
Coding (hex)
Command_Code = Read_Request
00 81
2
3
4
Parameter_Count
Invoke_ID
00 03
Comm._Reference
Subindex
Bits
15...8
7...0
10
00 02
20 6B
00 00
353
10
You should receive the positive 'Read_Confirmation' message after this service has
been sent.
Word
Meaning
Coding (hex)
Message_Code = Read_Confirmation (+)
80 81
2
3
Parameter_Count
Invoke_ID
00 07
Comm._Reference
Result (+)
00 00
Length
Data [2] = Reserved
00 02
00 08
31 00
2A F8
Data [5]
Data [6]
00 01
Data [7]
Data [8]
23 45
Bits
15...8
7...0
Word
Meaning
Coding (hex)
Message_Code = Read_Confirmation
80 81
Parameter_Count
00 03
Invoke_ID
Comm._Reference
00 02
Error_Class
Error_Code
08 00
5
Bits
Additional_Code
15...8
00 10
7...0
You can use the return codes for evaluating a negative message.
354
10
Writing IPOS variables / parameters using the

download parameter block
MOVIDRIVE inverters let you download the parameter block to write several IPOS variables and parameters at the same time using one PCP service.
Example
Three values of the inverter are to be written with one 'Write_Request':
The download parameter block is always 230 bytes long. It is possible to write up to 42
drive parameters and IPOS variables in one block.
Parameter/variable name
Index
Value to be written
IPOS variable H0
11000 dec (2AF8 hex)
1 dec (1 hex)
IPOS variable H1
11001 dec (2AF9 hex)
-40000 dec (FFFF63C0 hex)
P130 Ramp t11 UP CW
8470 dec (2116 hex)
1500 dec (05DC hex)
the return codes for evaluating a negative message. The individual parameters of the
download parameter block in the inverter are written one after the other. This means if
there is a negative 'Write_Confirmation' in the high part of the additional code, the parameter number at which the error occurred is entered.
Word
Meaning
Coding (hex)
00 82
Parameter_Count = 118 words (= 76 hex)
00 76
3
4
Invoke_ID
Comm._Reference
Index = Download parameter block
00 02
20 68
Subindex
Length = 230 bytes (= E6 hex)
00 E6
Data [1] = Reserved
Data [2] = Number of parameters
00 03
7
8
9
10
Data [3/4] = Index of the 1st parameter (e.g. IPOS variable H0)
Data [5]
Data [6]
Data [7]
Data [8]
Data [9/10] = Index of the 1st parameter (e.g. IPOS variable H1)
2A F8
00 00
00 01
2A F9
11
Data [11]
Data [12]
FF FF
12
Data [13]
Data [14]
63 C0
13
Data [15/16] = Index of the 1st parameter (P130 Ramp t11)
10
21 16
14
Data [17]
Data [18]
00 00
15
Data [19]
Data [20]
05 DC
...
...
...
...
Bits
15...8
7...0
the return codes for evaluating a negative message. The individual parameters of the
download parameter block in the inverter are written one after the other. This means if
there is a negative 'Write_Confirmation' in the high part of the additional code, the parameter number at which the error occurred is entered.
355
11
MC_40A operating displays (without fieldbus)
11
Operation and Service
11.1
MC_40A operating displays (without fieldbus)

The operational status of MOVIDRIVE compact MC_40A is displayed on LED V1.
1
Figure 205: MOVIDRIVE compact MC_40A operating display
05428AXX
1. Operation LED V1 (three colors: green/red/yellow)
Operation LED V1
The operational states of MOVIDRIVE compact MC_40A are displayed using the
three-color LED V1 (green/red/yellow).
Color
Description
No voltage
No supply voltage and no 24 VDC backup

voltage.
Controller inhibit or
no enable
Unit ready but controller inhibit active

(DI = '0') or no enable.
OFF
Yellow
Steady light
Green
Steady light
Enable
Motor is energized.
Red
Steady light
System error leading to

interlock
Error leads to unit being switched off.
Yellow
Flashing
Unit not ready
Factory setting in progress or 24 VDC

backup mode without supply voltage.
Green
Flashing
Flying start in progress
Operating mode VFC & FLYING START is

set and inverter connected to a rotating
motor.
Green/red
Flashing
0.5 s green / 0.5 s red
Limit switch reached
Limit switch reached in enable operating

status.
Yellow/
red
Flashing
0.5 s yellow / 0.5 s
red
Limit switch reached in 'controller inhibit'

operating status.

display or wait status
Fault in 'enable' operating status which is

only displayed and does not lead to a
switch-off.

Fault in 'controller inhibit' operating status

which is only displayed and does not lead
to a switch-off.
Timeout active
Enable ineffective, inverter is waiting for a

valid message.
Flashing
Green/red Green - green - red red
Yellow/
red
Flashing
Yellow - yellow - red red
Green/yel- 0.75 s green /

low
0.75 s yellow
356
Operational status
MC_41A (PROFIBUS-DP) operating displays
11.2
11
MC_41A (PROFIBUS-DP) operating displays

The following LEDs are on the MOVIDRIVE compact MC_41A to display its operating
status.
BUS
FAULT
RUN
Figure 206: MOVIDRIVE compact MC_41A operating displays
02902AXX

2. PROFIBUS-DP LED 'RUN' (green)
3. PROFIBUS-DP LED 'BUS-FAULT' (red)
Operation LED V1
The operational states of MOVIDRIVE compact MC_41A are displayed using the
Color
PROFIBUS-DP
LEDs
Operational status
Description
No voltage

voltage.
no enable
Unit ready but controller inhibit active (DI

= '0') or no enable.
OFF
Yellow
Steady light
Green
Steady light
Enable
Motor is energized.
Red
Steady light

interlock
Yellow
Flashing
Unit not ready
Factory setting in progress or 24 VDC backup

mode without supply voltage.
Green
Flashing
Operating mode VFC & FLYING START is set

and inverter connected to a rotating motor.
Green/
red
Flashing
0.5 s green / 0.5 s red

status.
Yellow/
red
Flashing 0.5 s yellow

/ 0.5 s red

operating status.
Green/
red
Flashing Green green - red - red
System error leading to Fault in 'enable' operating status which is only

displayed and does not lead to a switch-off.
Yellow/
red
Flashing Yellow - yellow - red - red

which is only displayed and does not lead to a
switch-off.
Green/
yellow
0.75 s green /
0.75 s yellow
Timeout active
11

valid message.
The 'RUN' LED (green) indicates that the bus electronics are operating correctly. The
'BUS FAULT' LED (red) indicates a PROFIBUS-DP fault.
RUN
BUS FAULT
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
FLASHING
OFF
FLASHING
Meaning
Connection to the DP master has failed, check the bus connection.
Unit does not detect a baud rate, check the setting in the DP master.
Bus interruption or DP master not functioning.
Unit is currently exchanging data with the DP master (data exchange).
Unit has detected the baud rate, however it is not being addressed by the DP master. Make sure the address set on the unit (P092) matches the address set in the
project planning software of the DP master.
Unit was not configured in DP master or configured incorrectly. Check the configuration, use the SEW_6002.GSD GSD file.
Hardware defect in the bus electronics. Switch the unit off and on again. Contact
SEW Service for advice if this reoccurs.
PROFIBUS address is set higher than 125. Set address 125.
357
11
MCH42A operating displays (INTERBUS FO)
11.3

The following LEDs are on the MOVIDRIVE compact MCH42A to display its operating
status.
2.
X10
Remote IN
X30 IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X10
V1
UL
CC
BA
RD
TR
FO1
FO2
1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
REF1
AI11
AI12
AI21
AGND
REF2
SC11
SC12
DGND
Figure 207: MOVIDRIVE compact MCH42A operating displays
05225AXX

2. INTERBUS FO LEDs
Operation LED V1
The operational states of MOVIDRIVE compact MCH42A are displayed using the
Color
358
Operational status
Description
No voltage

voltage.
OFF
Yellow
Steady light
no enable
Unit ready but controller inhibit active

(DI = '0') or no enable.
Green
Steady light
Enable
Motor is energized.
Red
Steady light

interlock
Yellow
Flashing
Unit not ready
Factory setting in progress or 24 VDC

backup mode without supply voltage.
Green
Flashing
Operating mode VFC & FLYING START

is set and inverter connected to a rotating
motor.
Green/
red
Flashing
0.5 s green / 0.5 s
red

status.
Yellow/
red
Flashing
0.5 s yellow / 0.5 s
red

operating status.
Green/
red
Flashing
Green - green - red red

Fault in 'enable' operating status which is

only displayed and does not lead to a
switch-off.
Yellow/
red
Flashing
Yellow - yellow - red
- red


which is only displayed and does not lead
to a switch-off.
Green/
yellow
0.75 s green /
0.75 s yellow
Timeout active

valid message.
11
INTERBUS FO
LEDs
The INTERBUS FO LEDs display the current status of the fieldbus interface and the INTERBUS system:
UL
CC
BA
RD
TR
FO1
FO2
Logic Voltage (green = OK)

Cable Check (green = OK)
Bus Active (green = OK)
Remote Bus Disabled (red = OFF)
Transmit (green = PCP active)
Fiber Optic 1 (yellow = not OK)
Fiber Optic 2 (yellow = not OK)
The following figure shows frequently occurring INTERBUS FO LED patterns. The
meanings are described in detail in the tables below.
05226AEN
Figure 208: Frequently occurring LED patterns

[A] Inverter power-on (INTERBUS not yet active)
[B] Incorrect DIP switch setting (INTERBUS not yet active)
[C] Initialization phase of the INTERBUS system
[D] Correct INTERBUS operation
[E] Incorrectly set baud rate
LED UL 'U Logic'

(green)
LED CC 'Cable
Check' (green)
LED BA 'Bus
Active' (green)
Status
Meaning
Fault rectification
On
Supply voltage applied to bus

ECU
Off
No supply voltage for bus ECU Check that the terminal unit is correctly seated and the
24 VDC voltage supply for the inverter is present.
Status
Meaning
Fault rectification
On
Incoming remote bus connection OK
Off
Incoming remote bus connection not OK
Check the incoming remote bus fiber optic cable and LED
FO1.
Fault rectification
Status
Meaning
On
Data transfer active on INTER- BUS
Off
No data transfer; INTERBUS

stopped
11
Check the incoming remote bus cable. Use the diagnostic

display of the INTERBUS interface module (master) for further fault localization.
359
11
LED RD 'Remote
Bus Disable' (yellow)
LED FO1 'Fiber

Optic 1' (yellow)
LED FO2 'Fiber

Optic 2' (yellow)
LED TR 'Transmit'
(green)
Status
Meaning
On
Outgoing remote bus switched off
Fault rectification
-
Off
Outgoing remote bus not switched off
Status
Meaning
Fault rectification
On
Monitoring of the incoming fiber optic cable

section. If the previous station
has an optical section diagnostic function,
then the power is below the system reserve
level for optical transmission
does not have an optical section diagnostic
function, then the optical transmission
power cannot be controlled
Check the incoming FO cable for cable quality,

correct plug mounting, bending radii, etc. Use
the optical diagnostic function of CMD Tool or
an FO measuring instrument to localize the
fault further.
Off
Incoming fiber optic section OK
Status
Meaning
Fault rectification
On
Monitoring of the outgoing fiber optic cable section. If the next station
has an optical section diagnostic function,
then the power is below the system reserve
level for optical transmission
does not have an optical section diagnostic
function, then the optical transmission
power cannot be controlled
Check the outgoing FO cable for cable quality,

correct plug mounting, bending radii, etc. Use
the optical diagnostic function of CMD Tool or
an FO measuring instrument to localize the
fault further.
Off
Outgoing fiber optic section OK
Status
Meaning
Fault rectification
The color of the LED TR corresponds to the INTERBUS standard.
LED TR 'Transmit'
(yellow or red)
Off
No PCP communication
Green
PCP communication active or INTERBUS startup (parameter access via INTERBUS PCP channel)
Status
Meaning
Fault rectification
When the LED TR is yellow or red, this indicates states within the system which do not occur as a rule during
INTERBUS operation.
360
Off or green Normal mode (see table for TR = green)
Yellow
Flashing
Inverter in initialization phase
Red
Steady
Incorrect DIP switch configuration selected, no Check the settings of DIP switch S1. Correct
INTERBUS operation possible.
the DIP switch settings if necessary and switch
the unit on again.
Red flashing
Incorrect DIP switch configuration or INTER- Check the setting of DIP switches S1 to S6.
BUS interface defective, no INTERBUS opera- Contact SEW Electronics Service if the setting
tion possible.
is correct.
DBG11B keypad
11.4
11
DBG11B keypad
Basic displays
Copy function of
the DBG11B
CONTROL.INHIBIT
CURRENT:
0
Display when X11:1 (DI '/CONTROL.INHIBIT') = '0'.
NO ENABLE
CURRENT:
Display when X11:1 (DI '/CONTROL.INHIBIT') = '1' and

inverter is not enabled ('ENABLE/RAPID STOP' = '0').
SPEED 942 rpm

CURRENT:
2.51 A
Display when inverter enabled.
NOTE XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Information message
FAULT XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Fault indication
The DBG11B keypad can be used for copying parameter sets from one MOVIDRIVE
unit to other MOVIDRIVE units. To do this, copy the parameter set onto the keypad using P807 (MD_ DBG). Connect the keypad to another MOVIDRIVE unit and copy
the parameter set onto the MOVIDRIVE using P806 (DBG MD_). The keypad can
be disconnected and plugged in during operation.
Not all parameters are copied with the DBG11A keypad. Use the new DBG11B keypad
to ensure that all parameters are copied.
No connection
between inverter
and DBG11B
One of the following error messages may appear if no communication can be established with the inverter after the supply system or the 24 VDC power supply is switched
on and the keypad is connected.
COMMUNIC. ERROR
NO SERIAL LINK
Maybe error in MOVIDRIVE unit
11
ERROR WHILE COPY

FLASH ERR. XX
Error in DBG11B keypad

FATAL ERROR!
CODE CRC WRONG
Try to establish the connection by disconnecting the keypad and reconnecting it. Return
the unit to SEW for repair or replacement if you cannot establish the connection.
361
11
DBG11B keypad
Selected via menu

1st Menu level
Main menu
2nd Menu level

Submenu
3rd Menu level

Parameters
Editing mode
[] []
CONTR. INHIBIT
CURR.:
0 A
0.. DISPLAY
VALUES
1.. SETPOINTS/
RAMP GENERATORS []
3.. MOTOR
PARAMETERS
[]
[] []
10. SETPOINT
SELECTION
4.. REFERENCE
SIGNALS
11. ANALOG INP. 1

[]
(+/- 10 V)
5.. MONITORING
FUNCTIONS
12. ANALOG
INPUT AI2
6.. TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
[]
13. SPEED
RAMPS 1
7.. CONTROL
FUNCTIONS
14. SPEED
RAMPS 2
8.. UNIT
FUNCTIONS
15. MOTOR. POT.
9.. IPOS
PARAMETERS
16. FIXED
SETPOINTS 1
17. FIXED
SETPOINTS 2
[] []
110
A11
1
SCALING
0 mV [] 111
OFFSET [] A11
111
A11
112
A11
REF. NMAX
OPERAT. MODE
113
A11
0 V
V-OFFSET
114
A11
0 /M
n-OFFSET
0 mV
OFFSET
115
1.89 ms
ETPOINT FILTER
02407AEN
Figure 209: Menu structure
01406AXX
362
or
key
Change menu level, in 3rd menu level (parameter) entry to () or exit from () edit
mode. The parameter can only be changed in edit mode. Startup is commenced if
the and keys are pressed at the same time ( Sec. 'Startup').
or
key
Select menu command, increase or decrease value in edit mode. The new value
comes into effect in edit mode when the or key is released.
Q key
Back to main display; in startup mode, cancel startup.
E key
Startup:
Cancel startup
Normal operation:
Signature display; the signature can only be entered or edited

with MOVITOOLS/SHELL and is used for identifying the
parameter set or the unit.
Manual mode:
Exit manual mode
Malfunction:
Call up reset parameter P840
11
DBG11B keypad
Quick menu of
the DBG11B
The DBG11B keypad has a detailed parameter menu and a clearly structured quick
menu with the most frequently used parameters. It is possible to switch between both
menus using P800 ('Quick menu'). This can be done in any operating status. The default
setting is for the quick menu to be active. The quick menu is shown on the display by a
'/' after the parameter number. The parameters in the quick menu are identified by a '/'
in the parameter list.
[] []
BASIC DISPLAY
DISPLAY VALUES
SPEED:
CURR.:
001/
USER
006/
MOTOR
[] []
942 rpm
2.51 A
0
[rpm ]
0
UTIL.
150 rpm
SP N11
161/
INTERNAL
750 rpm
SP N12
162/
INTERNAL
1500 rpm
SP N13
300/
ST/STOP
0
rpm
SPEED 1
048/
00000000
INPUT DI1:01234567
301/
MINIMUM
0
rpm
SPEED 1
053/
001
OUT. TERM.DO: 012
302/
MAXIMUM
1500 rpm
SPEED 1
068/
00000000
OUTP. D1: 01234567
303/
150
CURRENT LIMIT
080/
FAULT
NO FAULT
320/
ON
AUTOMAT. ADJUST. 1
036/
INPUT DIO:
SETPOINTS /
RAMP GENERATORS
%
1
160/
INTERNAL
000000
012345
t-
100/
UNIPOL./FIX
SETPOINTS SOURCE
2
CW
MOTOR PARAMETERS
800/
SHORT MENU
801/
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
UP
131/
T11
2
s
DOWN CW
132/
T11
UP
133/
T11
2
s
DOWN CCW
820/
4-QUADR-OPER.
134/
T12
10
UP=DOWN
835/
RESP.
136/
2
s
RAP. STP. RAMP T13
137/
EMERG.
2
RAMP
802/
FACTORY
SETTING
803/
PARAMETER
840/
MANUAL
ON
130/
T11
2
CCW
UNIT FUNCTIONS
LOCK
NO
OFF
ON
NO RESPONSE
TF-SIGNAL
RESET
NO
s
T14
11
[] []
[] []
02408AEN
Figure 210: DBG11B quick menu
IPOSplus
MOVITOOLS is required for programming IPOSplus. The DBG11B keypad only makes
it possible to edit and modify IPOSplus parameters (P9__).
The IPOSplus program is also stored in the DBG11B keypad when it is saved. It is
transferred as well when the parameter set is copied to another MOVIDRIVE unit.
Parameter P931 can be used for starting and stopping the IPOSplus program from the
DBG11B keypad.
363
11
DBG11B keypad
Information messages
Information messages on the DBG11B (approx. 2 s in duration) or in MOVITOOLS/

SHELL (message which can be acknowledged):
No.
Text DBG11B/SHELL
Description
ILLEGAL INDEX
Index addressed via interface is not available.
NOT IMPLEMENTED
READ ONLY VALUE
Attempt to edit a read only value.
PARAM. LOCKED
Parameter lock P803 = 'ON'. Parameter cannot be altered.
SETUP ACTIVE
Attempt to alter parameters during active factory setting.
VALUE TOO LARGE
Attempt to enter a value which is too large.
VALUE TOO SMALL
Attempt to enter a value which is too small.
REQ. PCB MISSING
The option card required for the selected function is missing.
11
TERMINAL ONLY
Manual mode must be completed using TERMINAL (DBG11B or

USS21A).
12
NO ACCESS
Access to selected parameter refused.
13
NO CTRLER. INHIBIT
Set terminal DI '/Controller inhibit' = '0' for the selected function.
14
INVALID VALUE
Attempt to enter an invalid value.
PARAM. NOT SAVED
EEPROM buffer overrun, e.g. due to cyclical write accesses. Parameter is

saved in EEPROM and is not protected against loss following POWER
OFF.
Attempt to execute a non-implemented function.

An incorrect communication service has been selected.
Manual mode selected via impermissible interface (e.g. fieldbus).
---
-16
364
Fault information
11.5
11
Fault information
Fault memory
The fault memory (P080) stores the last five fault messages (faults t-0 t-4). The fault
message of longest standing is deleted whenever more than five fault messages have
occurred. The following information is stored when a malfunction takes place: Fault
which occurred Status of the binary inputs/outputs Operational status of the inverter
Inverter status Heat sink temperature Speed Output current Active current Unit
utilization DC link circuit voltage ON hours Enable hours Parameter set Motor
utilization.
Switch-off
responses
There are three switch-off responses depending on the fault; the inverter is inhibited
when in fault status:
Immediate switchoff
The unit can no longer brake the drive; the output stage goes to high resistance in the
event of a fault and the brake is applied immediately (DB '/Brake' = '0').
Rapid stop
The drive is braked with the stop ramp t13/t23. Once the stop speed is reached (
P300/P310), the brake is applied (DB '/Brake' = '0'). The output stage goes to highresistance after the brake reaction time has elapsed (P732 / P735).
Emergency stop
The drive is braked with the emergency ramp t14/t24. Once the stop speed is reached
( P300/P310), the brake is applied (DB '/Brake' = '0'). The output stage goes to
high-resistance after the brake reaction time has elapsed (P732 / P735).
Reset
A fault message can be acknowledged by:
Switching the supply system off and on again.

Recommendation: Observe a minimum switch-off time of 10 s for the supply system
contactor K11.
Timeout active
Reset via input terminals, i.e. via an appropriately assigned binary input.
Manual reset in SHELL (P840 = 'YES' or [Parameter] / [Manual reset]).
Manual reset using the DBG11B (pressing the <E> key in the event of a fault gives
direct access to parameter P840).
Auto reset performs up to five unit resets with an adjustable restart time. Not to be
used with drives where an automatic restart represents a risk of injury to people or
damage to equipment.
11
If the inverter is controlled via a communications interface (fieldbus, RS-485 or SBus)

and the power was switched off and back on again or a fault reset was performed, then
the enable remains ineffective until the inverter once again receives valid data via the
interface which is monitored with a timeout.
365
11
List of faults
11.6
List of faults
A dot in the 'P' column means that the response is programmable (P83_ Fault response). The factory set fault response is listed in the 'Response' column.
Fault
code
Name
Response
00
No fault
01
Over-current
Immediate
switch-off
Ground fault
03
04
07
08
Brake chopper
DC link overvoltage
n-monitoring
P Possible cause
Short circuit on output

Motor too large
Defective output stage
Rectify the short circuit

Connect a smaller motor
Contact SEW Service for advice if the output stage is defective
Immediate
switch-off
Ground fault
in the connecting harness
in the inverter
in the motor
Eliminate ground fault

Contact SEW Service for advice
Immediate
switch-off
Extend deceleration ramps

Check feeder to braking resistor
Check technical data of braking resistor
Fit a new MOVIDRIVE if the brake chopper is defective
Check for ground fault
Immediate
switch-off
DC link voltage too high

Possibly also ground fault
Speed controller or current controller (in

VFC operating mode without encoder)
operating at setting limit due to mechanical overload or phase fault in the power
system or motor.
Encoder not connected correctly or incorrect direction of rotation.
nmax is exceeded during torque control.
Immediate
switch-off
Startup
Immediate
switch-off
IPOS-ILLOP
Emergency
stop
Extend deceleration ramps

Check connecting harness for braking
resistor
Check technical data of braking resistor
Check for ground fault
Reduce load
Increase deceleration time setting (P501
or P503).
Check encoder connection, possibly swap
over A/A and B/B in pairs
Check encoder voltage supply
Check current limitation
Extend ramps if appropriate
Check motor feeder and motor
Check supply system phases
Incorrect command detected during run

ning of IPOS program.
Incorrect conditions during command exe
cution.
Function not in inverter.
Check program memory content and correct if necessary.

Load correct program into program memory.
Check program sequence ( IPOS manual)
Use another function.
11
Overtempera- Emergency
ture
stop
Thermal overload of inverter.
Reduce load and/or ensure adequate cooling.
13
Control signal Immediate

source
switch-off
Control signal source not defined or defined

incorrectly.
Set correct control signal source (P101).
14
Encoder
Immediate
switch-off
15
24 V internal
Immediate
switch-off
No internal 24 V supply voltage.
17-24
System fault
Immediate
switch-off
Check ground connections and shields;

Inverter electronics disrupted. Possibly due to
improve them if necessary. Contact SEW Sereffect of EMC.
vice for advice if this reoccurs.
25
EEPROM
Rapid stop
Fault when accessing EEPROM
26
External termi- Emergency

nal
stop
366
Inverter startup not yet performed for selected Perform startup for appropriate operating
operating mode.
mode.
10
Regenerative power excessive

Braking resistor circuit interrupted
Short circuit in braking resistor circuit
Excessively high braking resistance
Brake chopper defective
Possibly also ground fault
09
Action
Encoder cable or shield not connected

correctly
Check encoder cable and shield for correct
Short circuit/open circuit in encoder cable connection, short circuit and open circuit.
Encoder defective
Check the mains connection. Contact SEW
Service for advice if this reoccurs.
Call up default setting, perform reset and set

parameters again. Contact SEW Service for
advice if this reoccurs.
Read in external fault signal via programmable Eliminate specific cause of fault; reprogram
input.
terminal if appropriate.
List of faults
Fault
code
Name
27
Limit switches Emergency

missing
stop
28
Fieldbus
timeout
Rapid stop
29
Limit switch
reached
30
Emergency
stop
timeout
31
TF sensor
Response
P Possible cause
Check wiring of limit switches.

Swap over limit switch connections.
Reprogram terminals
No master-slave communication took place

within the configured response monitoring
period.
Check master communication routine

Extend fieldbus timeout time (P819) or
switch off monitoring
Emergency
stop
Limit switch was reached in IPOS operating

mode.
Check travel range.

Correct user program.
Immediate
switch-off
Drive overloaded
Emergency stop ramp too short.
Check project planning

Extend emergency stop ramp
Motor too hot, TF sensor has tripped
TF sensor of motor not connected or not
connected properly
MOVIDRIVE connection and TF connec
tion on motor interrupted
Open circuit/both limit switches missing

Limit switches are swapped over in relation to direction of rotation of motor
Action
No
response
Let motor cool down and reset fault

Check connections/link between MOVIDRIVE and TF.
Set P835 to 'NO RESPONSE'.
32
IPOS index
overrun
Emergency
stop
Basic programming rules violated causing

stack overflow in system.
Check IPOS user program and correct if necessary ( IPOS manual).
33
Setpoint
source
Immediate
switch-off
Setpoint source not defined or defined incorrectly
Set correct setpoint source (P100).
35
Operating
mode
Immediate
switch-off
Operating mode not defined or defined incorrectly
Use P700 or P701 to set correct operating

mode
37
System watch- Immediate

dog
switch-off
Fault in system software procedure
Contact SEW Service for advice.
38
System software
Immediate
switch-off
System fault
Contact SEW Service for advice.
39
Reference
travel
Immediate
switch-off
42
Lag error
Immediate
switch-off
Reference cam missing or does not switch
Limit switches not connected correctly

Reference travel type changed during ref-
erence travel
Incremental encoder connected incorrectly

Accelerating ramps too short
P-component of positioning controller too
small
Speed controller parameters set incorrectly
Value of lag error tolerance too small
43
RS-485
timeout
Rapid stop
44
Unit utilization
Immediate
switch-off
45
Initialization
Immediate
switch-off
47
System bus
timeout
Rapid stop
77
IPOS control
word
No
response
78
IPOS SW limit No
switches
response
Communication between inverter and PC

interrupted
Unit utilization (IxT value) exceeds 125 %
81
Start condition
Immediate
switch-off
Only in IPOS operating mode:

Attempt was made to set an invalid automatic mode (via external control).
P916 = BUSRAMP set.
Programmed target position is outside travel
range delimited by software limit switches.
Check rotary encoder connection

Extend ramps
Set P-component to higher value
Set speed controller parameters again
Increase lag error tolerance
Check encoder, motor and mains phase
wiring
Check mechanical components can move
freely, possibly blocked up
Reduce power output

Extend ramps
Use a larger inverter if the specified points
are not possible.
11
Restore factory settings. Call SEW Service for advice if the fault still cannot be
reset.
Insert the option pcb correctly.
Check system bus connection.
Check serial connection to external control.

Check write values of external control.
Set P916 correctly.
Check user program

Check position of software limit switches
Only in 'VFC hoist' operating mode:
Current during premagnetization phase could

not be injected into motor at a high enough
level:
Motor rated power too small in relation to
inverter rated power.

Motor cable cross section too small.
Check reference cam

Check connection of limit switches
Check reference travel type setting and
the parameters required for it
Check connection between inverter and PC.

Contact SEW Service for advice if necessary.
No parameters set for EEPROM in power

section or parameters set incorrectly.
Option pcb not in contact with backplane
bus.
Fault during communication via system bus.
11
Check startup data and repeat startup procedure if necessary.

Check connection between inverter and
motor.
Check cross section of motor cable and
increase if necessary.
367
11
368
List of faults
Fault
code
Name
Response
82
Output open
Immediate
switch-off
84
Motor protection
Emergency
stop
85
Copy
Immediate
switch-off
Fault when copying parameters.
87
Technology
function
Immediate
switch-off
Attempt made to load the parameter set for a

Activate the factory settings (P802 = YES) and
technology version unit with the technology
perform a reset.
function activated into a standard version unit.
88
Flying start
Immediate
switch-off
Only in 'VFC n-CTRL' operating mode:

Actual speed > 5000 rpm when inverter
enabled.
94
EEPROM
checksum
Immediate
switch-off
Inverter electronics disrupted, possibly due to

Send the unit in for repair.
effect of EMC or a defect.
99
IPOS ramp
calculation
fault
Immediate
switch-off

Attempt made to alter ramp times and traveling velocities when the inverter is enabled,
with a sine or squared positioning ramp.
P Possible cause
Only in 'VFC hoist' operating mode:
Two or all output phases interrupted.
Motor rated power too small in relation to
inverter rated power.
Motor utilization too high.
Action
Check connection between inverter and

motor.
Check startup data and repeat startup procedure if necessary.
Reduce load.
Extend ramps.
Observe longer pause times.
Check connection between inverter and PC.
Enable only at actual speed

5000 rpm.
Rewrite the IPOS program so that ramp times

and traveling velocities can only be altered
when the inverter is inhibited.
11
SEW electronics service
11.7
SEW electronics service
Send in for repair
Please contact the SEW electronics service if a fault cannot be rectified ( 'Customer and spare parts service').
When contacting the SEW electronics service, please always quote the digits of your
service code to enable our service personnel to assist you more effectively.
Please provide the following information if you are sending the unit in for repair:
Service label
Serial number ( nameplate)
Unit designation
Standard type or technology type
Digits of the service code
Brief description of the application (application, control via terminals or serial)
Connected motor (motor type, motor voltage, or circuit)
Nature of the fault
Peripheral circumstances
Your own presumption of what has happened
Any unusual events, etc. preceding the fault
MOVIDRIVE units have service labels attached to them; one for the power section and
another for the control unit. These are located on the side next to the nameplate.
Control unit
MCH42A-00
Power section
Service code data
Type identification
Sub-assemblies / Components
Figure 211: Service label
05227AEN
369
12
12
Index of Changes
This edition of the MOVIDRIVE compact includes the following amendments and changes compared to the preceding edition 10/2000:
The functionality of the MOVIDRIVE drive inverter is represented in form of a block

diagram in the seciton "System Description."
We distinguish tow versions of the MOVIDRIVE compact drive inverters. These are:
standard version, corresponds to the units sold so far.
application version, includes technology functions and application modules.
Technology functions "Electronic Cam" and "Internal Synchronous Operation" are

available with units in application version.
Application modules for the applications "Positioning", "Winding" and "Controlling"

are available with units in application version.
The 230 V units (MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A...-2_3) are now available with
power ratings up to 30 kW (40 HP).
New type series, i.e. MOVIDRIVE compact MCH with HIPERFACE interface. You
can connect asynchronous motors and synchronous motors to these MCH units in
connection with HIPERFACE encoders.
New pre-fabricated cables, e.g. for connection of CM motors and MOVIDRIVE

master-slave connection.
New parameters:
370
P138 "Ramp limit"

P205 "Load precontrol"
P206 "Scanning time n-controller"
P207 "Load precontrol VFC"
P304 "Torque limit"
P96_ "IPOS Modulo function"
The DT/DV motors from SEW are also available in JEC design. The section "Project
Planning" includes a JEC motor table and motor selection tables.
The new synchronous SEW servomotors of the CM Series can be connected to

MOVIDRIVE compact units. The section "Project Planning" includes a CM motor
table and motor selection tables.
The sections "Overload capacity of inverters" and "Load capacity of the units at small
output frequencies" have been completely revised.
Abbreviation key
13
13
Abbreviation Key and Index
13.1 Abbreviation key

cos
Power factor of motor
FA
Axial force acting on the output shaft
[N]
fin
Supply frequency
[Hz]
Installation altitude
[m . NN]
Efficiency
Id
Magnetizing current
[A]
Iin
Input current
[A]
IF
Trip current
[A]
IN = In
Rated current
[A]
Iq
Torque-forming current
[A]
Iges
Current in total
[A]
IP..
Enclosure
itot
Gear ratios in total
Umg
Ambient temperature
[C]
JLast
Mass moment of inertia to be driven
[10-4 kgm2]
JMot
Mass moment of inertia of motor
[10-4 kgm2]
JX
Mass moment of inertia reduced to motor shaft
[10-4 kgm2]
JZ
Mass moment of inertia of heavy fan
[10-4 kgm2]
kT
Torque constant
[Nm/A]
Ma
Output torque
[Nm]
MB
Braking torque
[Nm]
MH/MN
Ratio acceleration torque / rated torque motor
MS
Starting torque
[Nm]
nA
Output speed
[1/min]
nEck
Base speed
[1/min]
nE
Input speed
[1/min]
nM
Motor speed
[1/min]
nN
Rated speed
[1/min]
Pa
Output power
[kW]
Pe
Mathematical input power of gear unit
[kW]
PN
Rated power
[kW]
Preduziert
Power reduced in relation to rated power
[kW]
Pv = Ploss
Power loss
[kW]
RBWmin
Minimum braking resistance value for 4Q operation
[]
S.., %ED
Duty type and relative cyclic duration factor cdf
Cycle duration
[min]
t1
Response time of motor brake
[10-3 s]
t2
Reaction time of motor brake
[10-3 s]
Uin
Supply voltage
[V]
UN
Rated voltage
[V]
Uout
Output voltage
[V]
Starting frequency
[1/h], [c/h]
Z0
No-load starting frequency
[1/h], [c/h]
13
371
13
Index
13.2 Index
Configuring the bus structure
5 V encoder power supply DWI11A

Technical Data 57
A
Abort 337, 338
Additional code 347
Analog input AI1 96
Analog outputs 120
Application modules
Technical Data 59
Application version
Additional functions 16
Application modules 18
Assigning process data 333
Assignment braking resistors, chokes and filters
230 V units 272
400/500 V units 270
B
BA 359
Basic displays of DBG11B keypad 361
Baud rate 256
Binary inputs 118
Binary outputs 119
Block wiring diagram MOVIDRIVE 13
Brake function 133
Brake operation 142
Braking resistor BW
Assignment 270
Technical Data 63
Braking resistor, connection 248
Braking resistor, selection
General notes 210
Peak braking power 210
Power diagrams 211
Breaking off the communications link 337,
Bus Active 359
Bus connection via fiber optic cable 254
Bus diagnostics 93
C
Cable Check 359
Cable types 254
CC 359
CE marking 20
CMD Tool 329
Coding examples 349
Communications error 347
Configuration Monitoring Diagnostics
Configuration of bus structure 329
Configuration offline 329
Configuration online 330
372
329
329
Connecting AC brake motors 215
Connecting explosion-proof AC motors 222
Connection
External encoder 285
HTL encoder 280
Incremental encoder simulation 289
Master/slave connection 290
Resolver 283
Connection basic unit
Control unit MCF/MCV/MCS4_A 262
Control unit MCH4_A 265
Power section and brake 261
Characteristic parameters 153
Control response 153
Control functions 122
Control mode, General description 11
Control signals, Logic gating 231
Controller parameters 107
Copy function of the DBG11B keypad
Cross sections 247
C-Tick approval 20
361
338
DBG11A keypad
Technical Data 55
DBG11B
Language selection 295
Startup functions 295
Startup of speed controller 299
Startup procedure 297
Structure of the startup menu 296
DBG11B keypad, basic displays 361
DBG11B keypad, Copy function 361
DBG11B keypad, Menu 362
DBG11B keypad, Quick menu 363
Project planning for hoists 155
Project planning for pumps and fans 155
Project planning for trolleys 154
Description, General 10
Descripton of applications
Inverter selection 154
Device Parameterization 334, 335
Device type 331
Dimension drawings
5 V encoder power supply DWI11A 57
Basic unit size 1 49
Braking resistors BW.. 68
DBG11B keypad 55
Index
Heat sink DKB11A for braking resistors in flat-pack

design 67
Line choke ND.. 69
Line filter NF.. 71
Output choke HD.. 72
Output filter HF.. 74
Serial interface USS21A 56
Touch guard for braking resistors in flat-pack design
66
DIP switches 256
Display values 91
Download parameter block 340, 355
Drive parameters 339
E
Earth leakage circuit breaker 247
Earthing 248
Earth-leakage current 247
Electronic Cam
Description 16
Electronic cam
Description 40
Electronics cables 228
EMC compliant installation
Components 223
EMV compliant installation
Block diagram of limit value class B 224
Error class 346
Error code 346
Establishing the communications link 337, 338
Expert characteristics 100
External 24 VDC voltage supply 229
External encoder
Connection 285
General installation notes 276
F
Fault memory 93, 365
Fault response 142
Features of the units 14
Fiber Optic 1 360
Fiber Optic 2 360
Fiber optic plugs 254
Fixed setpoints 106
FO1 360
FO2 360
Functions of the units 14
Fuses 247
G
Group drive (VFC)
221
I
ID code 330
Ident code 329
Incremental encoder simulation
Connection 289
Information messages 364
Initiate 337, 338
Installation instructions 246
Installation of fiber optic cables 254
Installing fiber optic cables 254
INTERBUS FO LEDs 359
Interface type 331
Internal communications error 347
Description 17, 41
IPOS Encoder 150
IPOS Modulo function 151
IPOS Monitoring 149
IPOS parameters 148
IPOSplus
General description
Technical Data 54
148
150
148
11
L
Labeling tile MCH42A
Labeling tile MCV41A
Last PCP index
268
264
341
LED BA 359
LED CC 359
LED FO1 360
LED FO2 360
LED RD 360
LED TR 360
LED UL 359
Limit switches 232
Limits motor parameters 110
Line choke ND
Connection 225
Technical Data 69
Line filter 249
Line filter NF
Connection 225
Technical Data 70
List of faults 366
Load capacity at low output frequencies
Sustained output current 192
HCS cables 254

Hold controller 108
Mains contactor, Notes 216

Mains fuse types, Notes 216
13
13
373
13
Index
Mains OFF monitoring 117

Manual mode 146
Manufacturer name 331
Master/slave connection 290
Master-Slave function 135
MCH42A operating displays 358
Menu of the DBG11B keypad 362
Menu structure of parameters 86
Minimum clearance 246
Modulation 145
Monitoring 334
Monitoring functions 117
Motor compensation 111
Motor encoder
Connection 277
General installation notes 276
Motor parameters 110
Motor potentiometer 105
Motor protection 112
Motor selection asynchronous AC motors (VFC)
Basic recommendations 156
dynamic applications 157
Examples for delta/star topology 230/400 V / 50 Hz
159
Motor selection delta topology 230 V / 50 Hz 161
Motor selection delta/star topology 230/400 V / 50 Hz
158
Motor selection double star/star topology 230/460 V /
60 Hz 160
Motor selection double-star topology 230 V / 60 Hz
162
Speed/torque characteristics 157
Voltage/frequency characteristics 156
Motor selection asynchronous servomotors (CFC)
CT/CV motor selection delta/star topology 167/290 V /
50 Hz 168
DT/DV motor selection delta 230 V / 50 Hz 181
DT/DV motor selection double-star or double-delta
topology 200 V / 50 Hz 183
DT/DV motor selection double-star topology 230 V / 60
Hz 182
DT/DV/D motor selection delta/star topology 230/400 V
/ 50 Hz 175
DT/DV/D motor selection double-star/star or doubledelta/delta topology 200/400 V / 50 Hz 179
DT/DV/D motor selection double-star/star topology
230/460 V / 60 Hz 177
Magnetization current 164
Motor characteristics 163
Motor tabeles DT/DV/D 172
Motor table CT/CV 167
Notes CT/CV motors 166
Torque control 165
Motor selection synchronous servomotors (SERVO)
CM motor selection 187
DFS/DFY motor selection 190
374
Motor characteristics 184

Motor table CM 186
Motor table DFS/DFY 189
Torque control 185
Mounting position 246
MOVILINK parameter channel 352
MOVILINK parameter channel 353
MOVILINK parameter channel acyclical 344
MOVILINK parameter channel cyclical 342
MOVILINK, General description 11
MOVITOOLS
Technical Data 58
N
Nameplate 235
Number of PCP words 256
Number of process data 256
O
Object description 339
Object list 339
Offline configuration 329
Online configuration 330
Operating displays MC_40A 356
Operating displays MC_41A 357
Operating modes 122
Operating states, Priority 231
Operation LED V1 356, 357, 358
Output choke 249
Output choke HD
Connection 225
Technical Data 72
Output filter HF
Connection 226
Technical Data 73
Overload capacity
at 400 V and 25C 196
at 400 V and 40C 198
at 500 V and 25C 200
at 500 V and 40C 202
Determining the overload capacity 194
for dynamic applications 204
Load cycle 193
Sustained output current 193
Temperature-controlled fan 193
Unit utilization 193
Overview MOVIDRIVE units 12
Communications and application components
Power components 8
P
Parameter channel 333
Parameter description
Introduction 86
Menu structure of parameters
86
Index
Overview in table form 87

P0__, Display values 91
P1__, Setpoints/Ramp Generators 94
P2__, Controller parameters 107
P3__, Motor parameters 110
P4__, Reference signals 114
P5__, Monitoring functions 117
P6__, Terminal assignment 118
P7__, Control functions 122
P8__, Unit functions 139
P9__, IPOS parameters 148
Parameter list 306
Parameter set switchover 230
Parameterization sequence 349
Parameterization, Return codes 346
Parameters in object list 339
Parameterwerte schreiben 338
PCP connection 334
PCP length 256, 257
PCP services 337
PE mains connection 247
Pin assignment 255
Plugs for fiber optic cable connection 254
Polymer fiber cables 254
Positioning tasks, Startup 305
Line cross sections and fusing 217
Permitted motor cable length 219
Special regulations 217
Voltage drop 220
Power shield clamp 259
Technical Data 76
Process data channel 329, 330
Process data description 145
Process data length 256, 257
Process data manager 333
Process values 91
PROFIBUS-DP LEDs 357
Program setting 330
Project Planning 329
Hoists 155
Inverter selection 154
Pumps and fans 155
Schematic procedure 152
Trolleys 154
Q
Quick menu of the DBG11B keypad
363
R
Ramp generators 94
RD 360
Read 337, 338, 345,
Read in bus structure 330
350,
353
13
Read in configuration frame 330

Read parameter list 335
Read parameter values 337, 338
Reading a drive parameter 350
Reading IPOS variables 353
Reading parameters 353
Reference signals 114
Remote Bus Disable 360
Removing the terminal unit 269
Reset 365
Reset response 143
Resolver
Connection 283
Return codes 346
S
Safety instructions 6
Safety Notes 234
Scaling actual speed value
144
Schreiben 338
Scope of delivery 235
Serial Communication 233
Serial communication 140
Serial interface USS21A, Technical Data 56
Serial interface, Connection 275
Service label 369
Service, Repair 369
Setpoint selection 94
Setpoint stop function 132
Setpoints 94
Setup 139
SEW Icons 332
Shielding 248
Speed control 107
Speed monitoring 117
Speed ramps 103
Speed skip 134
Standstill current 131
Starting the motor
Analog setpoint specification 302
Fixed setpoints 303
Manual operation 304
Startup
General startup instructions 291
Preliminary work and resources 293
With DBG11B keypad 294
with PC and MOVITOOLS 301
Startup for positioning tasks 305
Startup with INTERBUS 328
Startup with INTERBUS, Preliminary work 328
Startup with PROFIBUS-DP 313
Station description 331
Station type 329
13
375
13
Index
Status displays 92
Supporte parameter channel services
Switch-off responses 365
System bus (SBus)
General description 11
Technical Data 47
Technical data 43
System bus installation 273
Unit design MCH42A, Size 1

333
T
Technical Data
230 V units
Size 1 32
Size 2 34
Size 3 36
Size 4 38
400/500 V units
Size 1 22
Size 2 24
Size 3 26
Size 4 28
Size 5 30
5 V encoder power supply DWI11A 57
Application modules 59
Braking resistor BW 63
DBG11B keypad 55
Electronics data basic units 42, 46
General technical data 21
IPOSplus 54
Line choke ND 69
Line filter NF 70
MOVITOOLS operating software 58
Output choke HD 72
Output filter HF 73
Pre-fabricated cables 76
Serial interface USS21A 56
System bus (SBus) 43, 47
Telegram length 333
Terminal assignment 118
Terminals, Description of functions MCH4_A 267
Terminals, Description of terminal functions MCF/MCV/
MCS4_A 263
Tightening torques 246
Timeout 365
Touch guard 260
TR 360
Transmit 360

Unit designation 20, 235
Unit functions 139
Unit properties 14
Unit versions
General description 10
241
242
243
244
245
V
Voltage systems, permitted
216
W
Warning instructions 6
Write 337, 338, 344, 351,
Write parameter values 337
Write parameters 352
352,
355
Writing a drive parameter 351

Writing IPOS variables 352, 355
Writing parameters 355
U
U Logic 359
UL 359
UL approval 20
Unit design MCF/MCV/MCS4_A, Size 1
376
236
237
238
239
240
14 Address List
14
Address List
Germany
Headquarters
Production
Sales
Service
Bruchsal
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co

Ernst-Blickle-Strae 42
D-76646 Bruchsal
P.O. Box
Postfach 3023 D-76642 Bruchsal
Tel. +49 (0) 72 51 / 75-0

Fax +49 (0) 72 51 / 75-19 70
http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Service Electronics:
Tel. +49 (0) 1 71 / 7 21 07 91
Service Gear Units and Motors:
Tel. +49 (0) 1 72 / 7 60 13 77
Production
Graben

Ernst-Blickle-Strae 1
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf
P.O. Box
Postfach 1220 D-76671 Graben-Neudorf
Tel. +49 (0) 72 51 / 75-0

Fax +49 (0) 72 51 / 75-29 70
Telex 7 822 276
Assembly
Service
Garbsen
(near Hannover)

Alte Ricklinger Strae 40-42
D-30823 Garbsen
P.O. Box
Postfach 110453 D-30804 Garbsen
Tel. +49 (0) 51 37 / 87 98-30

Fax +49 (0) 51 37 / 87 98-55
scm-garbsen@sew-eurodrive.de
Kirchheim
(near Mnchen)

Domagkstrae 5
D-85551 Kirchheim
Tel. +49 (0) 89 / 90 95 52-10

Fax +49 (0) 89 / 90 95 52-50
scm-kirchheim@sew-eurodrive.de
Langenfeld
(near Dsseldorf)

Siemensstrae 1
D-40764 Langenfeld
Tel. +49 (0) 21 73 / 85 07-30

Fax +49 (0) 21 73 / 85 07-55
scm-langenfeld@sew-eurodrive.de
Meerane
(near Zwickau)

Dnkritzer Weg 1
D-08393 Meerane
Tel. +49 (0) 37 64 / 76 06-0

Fax +49 (0) 37 64 / 76 06-30
scm-meerane@sew-eurodrive.de
Augsburg

Max-von-Laue-Str. 9
D-86156 Augsburg
Tel. +49 (0) 8 21 / 2 27 79-10

Fax +49 (0) 8 21 / 2 27 79-50
tb-augsburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Berlin

Lilienthalstrae 3a
D-15732 Waltersdorf
Tel. +49 (0) 3 37 62 / 22 66 30

Fax +49 (0) 3 37 62 / 22 66 36
tb-berlin@sew-eurodrive.de
Bodensee

Burgbergring 91
D-88662 berlingen
Tel. +49 (0) 75 51 / 92 26-30

Fax +49 (0) 75 51 / 92 26-56
tb-bodensee@sew-eurodrive.de
Bremen

Kohlhkerstr.48
D-28203 Bremen
Tel. +49 (0) 4 21 / 3 39 18-0

Fax +49 (0) 4 21 / 3 39 18-22
tb-bremen@sew-eurodrive.de
Dortmund

Chemnitzer Strae 130
D-44139 Dortmund
Tel. +49 (0) 2 31 / 91 20 50-10

Fax +49 (0) 2 31 / 91 20 50-20
tb-dortmund@sew-eurodrive.de
Dresden

Hauptstrae 32
D-01445 Radebeul
Tel. +49 (0) 3 51 / 2 63 38-0

Fax +49 (0) 3 51 / 2 63 38-38
tb-dresden@sew-eurodrive.de
Erfurt

Blumenstrae 70
D-99092 Erfurt
Tel. +49 (0) 3 61 / 2 17 09-70

Fax +49 (0) 3 61 / 2 17 09-79
tb-erfurt@sew-eurodrive.de
Gstrow

Thnenweg 19
D-18273 Gstrow
P.O. Box
Postfach 1216 D-18262 Gstrow
Tel. +49 (0) 38 43 / 85 57 80

Fax +49 (0) 38 43 / 85 57 88
tb-guestrow@sew-eurodrive.de
Hamburg

Wohldorfer Strae 5
D-22081 Hamburg
P.O. Box
Postfach 7610 07 D-22060 Hamburg
Tel. +49 (0) 40 / 29 81 09-60

Fax +49 (0) 40 / 29 81 09-70
tb-hamburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Hannover/Garbsen

Alte Ricklinger Str.40-42
D-30823 Garbsen
P.O. Box
Postfach 1104 53 D-30804 Garbsen
Tel. +49 (0) 51 37 / 87 98-10

Fax +49 (0) 51 37 / 87 98-50
tb-hannover@sew-eurodrive.de
Technical Offices
08/2002
377
14 Address List
Germany
378
Heilbronn

Zeppelinstrae 7
D-74357 Bnnigheim
P.O. Box
Postfach 68 D-74355 Bnnigheim
Tel. +49 (0) 71 43 / 87 38-0

Fax +49 (0) 71 43 / 87 38-25
tb-heilbronn@sew-eurodrive.de
Herford

Radewiger Strae 21
D-32052 Herford
P.O. Box
Postfach 4108 D-32025 Herford
Tel. +49 (0) 52 21 / 91 41-0

Fax +49 (0) 52 21 / 91 41-20
tb-herford@sew-eurodrive.de
Karlsruhe

Ettlinger Weg 2
D-76467 Bietigheim
P.O. Box
Postfach 43 D-76463 Bietigheim
Tel. +49 (0) 72 45 / 91 90-10

Fax +49 (0) 72 45 / 91 90-20
tb-karlsruhe@sew-eurodrive.de
Kassel

Waldauer Weg 80
D-34253 Lohfelden
Tel. +49 (0) 5 61 / 9 51 44-80

Fax +49 (0) 5 61 / 9 51 44-90
tb-kassel@sew-eurodrive.de
Koblenz

Bahnstrae 17a
D-56743 Mendig
Tel. +49 (0) 26 52 / 97 13-30

Fax +49 (0) 26 52 / 97 13-40
tb-koblenz@sew-eurodrive.de
Lahr

Europastrae 3
D-77933 Lahr / Schwarzwald
Tel. +49 (0) 78 21 / 9 09 99-60

Fax +49 (0) 78 21 / 9 09 99-79
tb-lahr@sew-eurodrive.de
Langenfeld

Siemensstrae 1
D-40764 Langenfeld
Tel. +49 (0) 21 73 / 85 07-10

Fax +49 (0) 21 73 / 85 07-50
tb-langenfeld@sew-eurodrive.de
Magdeburg

Burgstrae 7
D-39326 Wolmirstedt
Tel. +49 (0) 3 92 01 / 70 04-1

Fax +49 (0) 3 92 01 / 70 04-9
tb-magdeburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Mannheim

Radeberger Strae 2
D-68309 Mannheim
Tel. +49 (0) 6 21 / 7 16 83-10

Fax +49 (0) 6 21 / 7 16 83-22
tb-mannheim@sew-eurodrive.de
Mnchen
SEW-EURODRlVE GmbH & Co

Domagkstrae 5
D-85551 Kirchheim
Tel. +49 (0) 89 / 90 95 51-10

Fax +49 (0) 89 / 90 95 51-50
tb-muenchen@sew-eurodrive.de
Mnster

Von-Vincke-Strae 14
D-48143 Mnster
Tel. +49 (0) 2 51 / 4 14 75-11

Fax +49 (0) 2 51 / 4 14 75-50
tb-muenster@sew-eurodrive.de
Nrnberg

An der Radrunde 168
D-90455 Nrnberg
Tel. +49 (0) 9 11 / 98 88 45-0

Fax +49 (0) 9 11 / 98 88 46-0
tb-nuernberg@sew-eurodrive.de
Regensburg

Im Gewerbepark A15
D-93059 Regensburg
Tel. +49 (0) 9 41 / 4 66 68 68

Fax +49 (0) 9 41 / 4 66 68 66
tb-regensburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Rhein-Main

Niederstedter Weg 5
D-61348 Bad Homburg
Tel. +49 (0) 61 72 / 96 17-0

Fax +49 (0) 61 72 / 96 17-50
tb-rheinmain@sew-eurodrive.de
Stuttgart

Friedrich-List-Strae 46
D-70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen
Tel. +49 (0) 7 11 / 1 60 72-0

Fax +49 (0) 7 11 / 1 60 72 72
tb-stuttgart@sew-eurodrive.de
Ulm

Hauffstrae 21
D-89160 Dornstadt
Tel. +49 (0) 73 48 / 98 85-0

Fax +49 (0) 73 48 / 98 85-90
tb-ulm@sew-eurodrive.de
Wrzburg

Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 55a
D-97076 Wrzburg-Lengfeld
Tel. +49 (0) 9 31 / 2 78 86-60

Fax +49 (0) 9 31 / 2 78 86-66
tb-wuerzburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Zwickau /
Meerane

Dnkritzer Weg1
D-08393 Meerane
Tel. +49 (0) 37 64 / 76 06-0

Fax +49 (0) 37 64 / 76 06-20
tb-zwickau@sew-eurodrive.de
08/2002
14 Address List
France
Production
Sales
Service
Haguenau
SEW-USOCOME
48-54, route de Soufflenheim
B. P. 185
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex
Tel. +33 (0) 3 88 73 67 00

Fax +33 (0) 3 88 73 66 00
http://www.usocome.com
sew@usocome.com
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bordeaux
SEW-USOCOME
Parc dactivits de Magellan
62, avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Tel. +33 (0) 5 57 26 39 00

Fax +33 (0) 5 57 26 39 09
Lyon
SEW-USOCOME
Parc dAffaires Roosevelt
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
Tel. +33 (0) 4 72 15 37 00

Fax + 33 (0) 4 72 15 37 15
Paris
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
2, rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil IEtang
Tel. +33 (0) 1 64 42 40 80

Fax +33 (0) 1 64 42 40 88
Alsace FrancheComt
SEW-USOCOME
51, rue de Mulhouse
F-68210 Balschwiller
Tel. +33 (0) 3 89 25 91 01

Fax +33 (0) 3 89 25 91 21
Alsace Nord
SEW-USOCOME
32, rue Jeanne dArc
F-67250 Surbourg
Tel. +33 (0) 3 88 54 74 44

Fax +33 (0) 3 88 80 47 62
Aquitaine
SEW-USOCOME
Parc dactivits de Magellan
62, avenue de Magellan
B.P.182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Tel. +33 (0) 5 57 26 39 00

Fax +33 (0) 5 57 26 39 09
Ardennes
Lorraine
SEW-USOCOME
7, rue de Prny
F-54000 Nancy
Tel. +33 (0) 3 83 96 28 04

Fax +33 (0) 3 83 96 28 07
Bourgogne
SEW-USOCOME
10, rue de la Poste
F-71350 St. Loup de la Salle
Tel. +33 (0) 3 85 49 92 18

Fax +33 (0) 3 85 49 92 19
Bretagne Ouest
SEW-USOCOME
4, rue des Chtaigniers
F-44830 Brains
Tel. +33 (0) 2 51 70 54 04

Fax +33 (0) 2 51 70 54 05
Centre Pays de
Loire
SEW-USOCOME
9, rue des Erables
F-37540 Saint Cyr sur Loire
Tel. +33 (0) 2 47 41 33 23

Fax +33 (0) 2 47 41 34 03
Centre
Auvergne
SEW-USOCOME
17, boulevard de la libert
F-63200 Riom
Tel. +33 (0) 4 73 64 85 60

Fax +33 (0) 4 73 64 85 61
Champagne
SEW-USOCOME
139, rue Thiers
F-10120 Saint Andr les Vergers
Tel. +33 (0) 3 25 79 63 24

Fax +33 (0) 3 25 79 63 25
Lyon Nord-Est
SEW-USOCOME
Rue Jacques Tati
Tel. +33 (0) 4 72 15 37 03

Fax +33 (0) 4 72 15 37 15
Lyon Ouest
SEW-USOCOME
Rue Jacques Tati
Tel. +33 (0) 4 72 15 37 04

Fax +33 (0) 4 72 15 37 15
Lyon Sud-Est
SEW-USOCOME
4, Monte du Pav
F-26750 Gnissieux
Tel. +33 (0) 4 75 05 65 95

Fax +33 (0) 4 75 05 65 96
Nord
SEW-USOCOME
348, rue du Calvaire
F-59213 Bermerain Cidex 102
Tel. +33 (0) 3 27 27 07 88

Fax +33 (0) 3 27 27 24 41
Normandie
SEW-USOCOME
Les Courtillages Hameau de Coupigny
F-14370 Airan
Tel. +33 (0) 2 31 78 99 70

Fax +33 (0) 2 31 78 99 72
Technical Offices
08/2002
379
14 Address List
France
Paris Est
SEW-USOCOME
Rsidence Le Bois de Grce
2, alle des Souches Vertes
F-77420 Champs sur Marne
Tel. +33 (0) 1 64 68 40 50

Fax +33 (0)1 64 68 45 00
Paris Ouest
SEW-USOCOME
1, rue Matisse
F-78960 Voisins le Bretonneux
Tel. +33 (0) 1 30 64 46 33

Fax +33 (0) 1 30 57 54 86
Paris Picardie
SEW-USOCOME
25 bis, rue Klber
F-92300 Levallois Perret
Tel. +33 (0) 1 41 05 92 74

Fax +33 (0) 1 41 05 92 75
Paris Sud
SEW-USOCOME
6. chemin des Bergers
Lieu-dit Marchais
F-91410 Roinville sous Dourdan
Tel. +33 (0) 1 60 81 10 56

Fax +33 (0) 1 60 81 10 57
Provence
SEW-USOCOME
Chemin Les Grands Vallons
F-13100 St Marc Jaumegarde
Tel. +33 (0) 4 42 24 90 05

Fax +33 (0) 4 42 24 90 13
Pyrnes
SEW-USOCOME
271, Lieu-dit Ninaut
F-31190 Caujac
Tel. +33 (0) 5 61 08 15 85

Fax +33 (0) 5 61 08 16 44
Sud-Atlantique
SEW-USOCOME
12, rue des Pinsons
F-44120 Vertou
Tel. +33 (0) 2 40 80 32 23

Fax +33 (0) 2 40 80 32 13
Alger
Rducom
16, rue des Frres Zaghnoun
Bellevue El-Harrach
16200 Alger
Tel. +213 (0) 2 82 22 84

Fax +213 (0) 2 82 22 84
Buenos Aires
SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A.

Centro Industrial Garin, Lote 35
Ruta Panamericana Km 37,5
1619 Garin
Tel. +54 (0) 33 27 45 72 84

Fax +54 (0) 33 27 45 72 21
sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Melbourne
SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD.

27 Beverage Drive
Tullamarine, Victoria 3043
Tel. +61 (0) 3 99 33 10 00

Fax +61 (0) 3 99 33 10 03
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney

9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park
New South Wales, 2164
Tel. +61 (0) 2 97 25 99 00

Fax +61 (0) 2 97 25 99 05
enquires@sew-eurodirve.com.au
Adelaide

Unit 1/601 Anzac Highway
Glenelg, S.A. 5045
Tel. +61 (0) 8 82 94 82 77

Fax +61 (0) 8 82 94 28 93
Perth

105 Robinson Avenue
Belmont, W.A. 6104
Tel. +61 (0) 8 94 78 26 88

Fax +61 (0) 8 92 77 75 72
Brisbane
SEW-EURODRIVE PTY.LTD.
1 /34 Collinsvale St
Rocklea, Queensland, 4106
Tel. +61 (0) 7 32 72 79 00

Fax +61 (0) 7 32 72 79 01
Wien
SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H.
Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24
A-1230 Wien
Tel. +43 (0) 16 17 55 00-0

Fax +43 (0) 16 17 55 00-30
http://sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Algeria
Technical Office
Argentina
Assembly
Sales
Service
Australia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Technical Offices
Austria
Assembly
Sales
Service
380
08/2002
14 Address List
Austria
Technical Offices
Linz
Reuchlinstr. 6/3
A-4020 Linz
Tel. +43 (0) 7 32 65 51 09-0

Fax +43 (0) 7 32 65 51 09-20
sew@linz.sew-eurodrive.at
Graz
Grabenstrae 231
A-8045 Graz
Tel. +43 (0) 316 68 57 56-0

Fax +43 (0) 316 68 57 55
sew@graz.sew-eurodrive.at
Dhaka
Triangle Trade International

Bldg-5, Road-2, Sec-3,
Uttara Model Town
Dhaka-1230 Bangladesh
Tel. +880 (0) 28 91 22 46

Fax +880 (0) 28 91 33 44
Assembly
Sales
Service
Brssel
CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre
Tel. +32 (0) 10 23 13 11

Fax +32 (0) 10 2313 36
http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Technical Office
Vlaanderen
CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Industrieweg 112-114
B-9032 Gent (Wondelgem)
Tel. +32 (0) 92 27 34 52

Fax +32 (0) 92 27 41 55
La Paz
GRUPO LARCOS LTDA.

Av. Jose Carrasco Not. 1398
Entre Hugo Estrada Y Av. Busch
La Paz
Tel. +591 (0) 2 34 06 14

Fax +591 (0) 2 35 79 17
Sao Paulo
SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda.

Avenida Amncio Gaiolli, 50
Caixa Postal: 201-07111-970
Guarulhos - Cep.: 07251-250
Tel. +55 (0) 11 64 89 90 00

Fax +55 (0) 11 64 89 90 09
http://www.sew.com.br
filial.sp@sew.com.br
Bangladesh
Belgium
Bolivia
Brazil
Production
Sales
Service
Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request!

Bulgaria
Sales
Sofia
BEVER-DRIVE GMBH
Bogdanovetz Str.1
BG-1606 Sofia
Tel. +359 (0) 9 29 53 25 65

Fax +359 (0) 9 29 54 93 45
bever@mbox.infotel.bg
Douala
Electro-Services
Rue Drouot Akwa
B.P. 2024
Douala
Tel. +237 (0) 43 22 99

Fax +237 (0) 42 77 03
Toronto
SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.

210 Walker Drive
Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1
Tel. +1 (0) 905 7 91-15 53

Fax +1 (0) 905 7 91-29 99
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.reynolds@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver

7188 Honeyman Street
Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2
Tel. +1 (0) 604 9 46-55 35

Fax +1 (0) 604 946-2513
b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Montreal

2555 Rue Leger Street
LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9
Tel. +1 (0) 514 3 67-11 24

Fax +1 (0) 514 3 67-36 77
a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Cameroon
Technical Office
Canada
Assembly
Sales
Service
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!
08/2002
381
14 Address List
Chile
Assembly
Sales
Service
Santiago de
Chile
SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE
Motores-Reductores LTDA.
Panamericana Norte No 9261
Casilla 23 - Correo Quilicura
RCH-Santiago de Chile
Tel. +56 (0) 26 23 82 03 + 6 23 81 63

Fax +56 (0) 26 23 81 79
sewsales@entelchile.net
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Tianjin
SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.

No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA
Tianjin 300457
Tel. +86 (0) 22 25 32 26 12

Fax +86 (0) 22 25 32 26 11
http://www.sew.com.cn
Technical Offices
Beijing
SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., LTD

Room 1205/1206,
Golden Corner Building, No. 129
Xuanwumen
Xidajie, Xicheng District
Beijing 100031
Tel. +86 (0) 10 66 41 20 26

Fax +86 (0) 10 66 41 10 17
beijing@sew.com.cn
Chengdu
SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjin) Co. Ltd.

Room 715, Sichuan International Building
No. 206, Shun Cheng Avenue
Chengdu 610015
Tel. +86 (0) 2 86 52 15 60

Fax +86 (0) 2 85 52 15 63
chengdu@sew.com.cn
Fuzhou
SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjin) Co. Ltd.

Unit D, 15/F, Oriental Hotel Fujian
Fuzhou 350001
Tel. +86 (0) 59 17 50 75 96

Fax +86 (0) 59 17 50 72 85
fuzhou@sew.com.cn
Guangzhou
SEW-EURODRIVE Pte.Ltd.
Rm 1702, No. 138, Tiyudong Road
Guangzhou, Guangdong, 510620
Tel. +86 (0) 20 38 78 00 12

Fax +86 (0) 20 38 78 00 13
guangzhou@sew.com.cn
Jinan
SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjin) Co.Ltd.

Room 2008-2009, Liang You Fu Lin Hotel
No. 5, Luo Yuan Avenue
Jinan 250063
Tel. +86 (0) 53 16 41 26 22

Fax +86 (0) 53 16 41 24 30
jinan@sew.com.cn
Kunming
SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd

Room 1401 Dong Yuan Business Building No.
464
Tuodong Road, Kunming
Yunnan Province 650011
Tel. +86 (0) 87 13 11 36 77

Fax +86 (0) 87 13 15 44 54
kunming@sew.com.cn
Nanjing
SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjing) Co.Ltd.

Room 710, Jianda Plaza
No. 223, North Zhongshan Road
Nanjing 210009
Tel. +86 (0) 2 53 34 67 68

Fax +86 (0) 2 53 34 68 71
nanjing@sew.com.cn
Shanghai
SEW-EURODRIVE (TIANJIN) CO., Ltd

16/F, E Block, Jinxuan Building
No. 238 South Dandong Road
Xuhui District
Shanghai 200030
Tel. +86 (0) 21 64 69 35 34

Fax +86 (0) 21 64 69 55 32
shanghai@sew.com.cn
Shenyang
SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd

Shenyang OfficeRoom 0605 Koh Brother Building
No. 21 Beijing Street
Shenhe District Shenyang City, 110013
Tel. +86 (0) 24 22 52 15 96

Fax +86 (0) 24 22 52 15 79
shenyang@sew.com.cn
Wuhan
SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjin) Co.Ltd.

Room 911, Tai He Plaza
Wusheng Road
Wuhan 430033
Tel. +86 (0) 27 85 71 22 93

Fax +86 (0) 27 85 71 22 82
wuhan@sew.com.cn
Xian
SEW-EURODRIVE (TIANJIN) CO., Ltd

Rm 611, Fan Mei Building
No. 1 Nan Guan Main Street
Xian 710068, Shanxi Province
Tel. +86 (0) 2 97 81 13 27

Fax +86 (0) 2 97 81 13 27
xian@sew.com.cn
Bogot
SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA.

Calle 22 No. 132-60
Bodega 6, Manzana B
Santaf de Bogot
Tel. +57 (0) 5715 47 50 50

Fax +57 (0) 5715 47 50 44
sewcol@andinet.com
China
Colombia
Assembly
Sales
Service
382
08/2002
14 Address List
Croatia
Sales
Service
Zagreb
KOMPEKS d. o. o.
PIT Erddy 4 II
HR 10 000 Zagreb
Tel. +385 (0) 14 61 31 58

Fax +385 (0) 14 61 31 58
kompeks@net.hr
Sales
Praha
SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O.
Business Centrum Praha
Lun 591
CZ-16000 Praha 6 - Vokovice
Tel. +420 (0) 2 20 12 12 34 +

2 20 12 12 36
Fax +420 (0) 2 20 12 12 37
http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Technical Offices
Brno
Zvonarka 16
CZ-61700 Brno
Tel. +420 (0) 5 43 25 61 51 + 5

43 25 61 63
Fax +420 (0) 5 43 25 68 45
Hradec Kralove
Technicka Kancelar - vychodni Cechy
Smermova
CZ-53374 Horni Jeleni
Tel. +420 (0) 6 02 41 03 88

Fax +420 (0) 4 56 89 36 34
Assembly
Sales
Service
Kopenhagen
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Geminivej 28-30, P.O. Box 100
DK-2670 Greve
Tel. +45 (0) 43 95 8500

Fax +45 (0) 43 95 8509
http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Technical Offices
Aarhus
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Birkenhaven 45
DK-8520 Lystrup
Tel. +45 (0) 86 22 8344

Fax +45 (0) 86 22 8490
Helsingr
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Rmvej 2
DK-3140 lsgrde
Tel. +45 (0) 49 75 5700

Fax +45 (0) 49 75 5800
Odense
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Lindelyvei 29, Nr. Sby
DK-5792 Arslev
Tel. +45 (0) 65 90 2070

Fax +45 (0) 65 90 2309
Cairo
Copam Egypt
for Engineering & Agencies
33 EI Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo
Tel. +20 (0) 22 56 62 99 + 22 41 06 39

Fax +20 (0) 22 59 47 57 + 22 40 47 87
copam@datum.com.eg
Tallin
ALAS-KUUL AS
Paldiski mnt.125
EE 0006 Tallin
Tel. +372 (0) 6 59 32 30

Fax +372 (0) 6 59 32 31
Assembly
Sales
Service
Lahti
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Vesimentie 4
FIN-15860 Hollola 2
Tel. +358 (0) 3 589 300

Fax +358 (0) 3 780 6211
http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew-eurodrive.fi
Technical Offices
Helsinki
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Luutnantinaukio 5C LT2
FIN-00410 Helsinki
Tel. +358 (0) 3 589 300

Fax + 358 (0) 9 566 6311
Vaasa
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Kauppapuistikko 15 A
FIN-65100 Vaasa
Tel. +358 (0) 3 589 300

Fax +358 (0) 6 312 7470
Libreville
Electro-Services
B.P. 1889
Libreville
Tel. +241 (0) 73 40 11

Fax +241 (0) 73 40 12
Czech Republic
Denmark
Egypt
Estonia
Sales
Finland
Gabon
Technical Office
08/2002
383
14 Address List
Great Britain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Normanton
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
Beckbridge Industrial Estate
P.O. Box No.1
GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR
Tel. +44 (0) 19 24 89 38 55

Fax +44 (0) 19 24 89 37 02
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Technical Offices
London
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
764 Finchely Road, Temple Fortune
GB-London N.W.11 7TH
Tel. +44 (0) 20 84 58 89 49

Fax +44 (0) 20 84 58 74 17
Midlands
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
5 Sugar Brook court,
Aston Road,
Bromsgrove, Worcs
B60 3EX
Tel. +44 (0) 15 27 87 73 19

Fax +44 (0) 15 27 57 52 45
Scotland
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
Scottish Office
No 37 Enterprise House
Springkerse Business Park
GB-Stirling FK7 7UF Scotland
Tel. +44 (0) 17 86 47 87 30

Fax +44 (0) 17 86 45 02 23
Sales
Service
Athen
Christ. Boznos & Son S.A.

12, Mavromichali Street
P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus
Tel. +30 (0) 1 04 22 51 34

Fax +30 (0) 1 04 22 51 59
http://www.boznos.gr
Boznos@otenet.gr
Technical Office
Thessaloniki
Christ. Boznos & Son S.A.

Maiandrou 15
562 24 Evosmos, Thessaloniki
Tel. +30 (0) 3 10 70 54 00

Fax +30 (0) 3 10 70 55 15
Hong Kong
SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.
Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor
Hong Leong Industrial Complex
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel. +852 (0) 2-7 96 04 77 + 79 60 46 54

Fax +852 (0) 2-7 95-91 29
sew@sewhk.com
Budapest
SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.
H-1037 Budapest
Kunigunda u. 18
Tel. +36 (0) 1 437 06 58

Fax +36 (0) 1 437 06 50
sew-eurodrive.voros@matarnet.hu
Hafnarfirdi
VARMAVERK ehf
Dalshrauni 5
IS - 220 Hafnarfirdi
Tel. +354 (0) 5 65 17 50

Fax +354 (0) 5 65 19 51
varmaverk@varmaverk.is
Assembly
Sales
Service
Baroda
SEW-EURODRIVE India Pvt. Ltd.

Plot No. 4, Gidc
Por Ramangamdi Baroda - 391 243
Gujarat
Tel. +91 (0) 265-83 10 86

Fax +91 (0) 265-83 10 87
sew.baroda@gecsl.com
Technical Offices
Calcutta
SEW EURODRIVE INDIA PVT. LTD.

Juthika Apartment, Flat No. B1
11/1, Sunny Park
Calcutta - 700 019
Tel. +91 (0) 33-4 85 39 18

Fax +91 (0) 33-4 85 38 26
sewcal@cal.vsnl.net.in
Chennai
SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited

2nd Floor, Hariram Building
Chennai - 600 006, Tamil Nadu
Tel. +91 (0) 44-8 21 44 71

Fax +91 (0) 44-8 21 44 73
New Delhi

303 Kirti Deep,
2-Nangal Raya Business Centre
New Delhi 110 046
Tel. +91 (0) 11-5 61 15 66

Fax +91 (0) 11-5 51 34 94
Pune

206, Metro House 7
Mangaldas Road
Pune 411001, Maharashtra
Tel. +91 (0) 20 60 10 54

Fax +91 (0) 20 63 13 65
sewpun@pn2.vsnl.net.in
Greece
Hong Kong
Assembly
Sales
Service
Hungary
Sales
Service
Iceland
India
384
08/2002
14 Address List
Indonesia
Technical Office
Jakarta
SEW-EURODRIVE Pte Ltd.

Jakarta Liaison Office,
Menara Graha Kencana
Jl. Perjuangan No. 88, LT 3 B, Kebun Jeruk,
Jakarta 11530
Tel. +62 (0) 21 535-90 66/7

Fax +62 (0) 21 536-36 86
Dublin
Alperton Engineering Ltd.

48 Moyle Road
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11
Tel. +353 (0) 18 30 62 77

Fax +353 (0) 18 30 64 58
Tel-Aviv
Liraz Handasa Ltd.

Ahofer Str 34B / 228
58858 Holon
Tel. +972 (0) 3-5 59 95 11

Fax +972 (0) 3-5 59 95 12
lirazhandasa@barak-online.net
Assembly
Sales
Service
Milano
SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s.

Via Bernini,14
I-20020 Solaro (Milano)
Tel. +39 (0) 2 96 98 01

Fax +39 (0) 2 96 79 97 81
sewit@sew-eurodrive.it
Technical Offices
Bologna

Via Emilia,172
I-40064 Ozzano dellEmilia (Bo)
Tel. +39 (0) 51 79 66 60

Fax +39 (0) 51 79 65 95
Caserta

Viale Carlo III-Parco Matilde A
I-81020 S. Nicola la Strada (Caserta)
Tel. +39 (0) 8 23 45 06 11

Fax +39 (0) 8 23 42 14 14
Firenze
RIMA
Via Einstein, 14
I-50013 Campi Bisenzio (Firenze)
Tel. +39 (0) 5 58 98 58 21 /-22

Fax +39 (0) 5 58 98 58 30
Roma
Elettromec
Via Castel Rosso, 10
I-00144 Roma
Tel. +39 (0) 65 92 45 30

Fax +39 (0) 65 92 45 30
Torino

Corso G. Ferraris,146
I-10129 Torino
Tel. +39 (0) 1 13 18 66 06

Fax +39 (0) 1 13 19 0115
Verona

Via P. Sgulmero, 27/A
I-37132 Verona
Tel. +39 (0) 45 97 77 22

Fax +39 (0) 45 97 60 79
Abidjan
SICA
Ste industrielle et commerciale pour lAfrique
165, Bld de Marseille
B.P. 2323, Abidjan 08
Tel. +225 (0) 25 79 44

Fax +225 (0) 25 84 36
Assembly
Sales
Service
Toyoda-cho
SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD

250-1, Shimoman-no,
Toyoda-cho, Iwata gun
Shizuoka prefecture, 438-0818
Tel. +81 (0) 53 83 7 3811-13

Fax +81 (0) 53 83 7 3814
sewjapan@lilac.ocn.ne.jp
Technical Offices
Fukuoka
SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD.

C-go, 5th-floor, Yakuin-Hiruzu-Bldg.
1-5-11, Yakuin, Chuo-ku
Fukuoka, 810-0022
Tel. +81 (0) 92 713 69 55

Fax +81 (0) 92 713 68 60
sewkyushu@jasmine.ocn.ne.jp
Osaka

B-Space EIRAI Bldg., 3rd Floor
1-6-9 Kyoumachibori,
Nishi-ku, Osaka, 550-0003
Tel. +81 (0) 6 64 44-83 30

Fax +81 (0) 6 64 44-83 38
sewosaka@crocus.ocn.ne.jp
Tokyo

Izumi-Bldg. 5 F
3-2-15 Misaki-cho Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo
101-0061
Tel. +81 (0) 3 32 39-04 69

Fax +81 (0) 3 32 39-09 43
sewtokyo@basil.ocn.ne.jp
Ireland
Sales
Service
Israel
Italy
Ivory Coast
Technical Office
Japan
08/2002
385
14 Address List
Korea
Assembly
Sales
Service
Ansan-City
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.

B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate
Unit 1048-4, Shingil-Dong
Ansan 425-120
Tel. +82 (0) 3 14 92-80 51

Fax +82 (0) 3 14 92-80 56
master@sew-korea.co.kr
Technical Offices
Busan
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd.

No. 407, Samjoo officetel.
116-7, Kamjun-2-dong, Sasang-ku
Busan 617-724
Tel. +82 (0) 5 13 13 48 04

Fax +82 (0) 5 13 13 48 05
sewpu2@channeli.net
Daegu

No.1108 Sungan officete
l 87-36, Duryu 2-dong, Dalseo-ku
Daegu 704-712
Tel. +82 (0) 5 36 50-7111

Fax +82 (0) 5 36 50-7112
sewdaegu@netsgo.com
DaeJeon
SEW-Eurodrive KOREA Co., Ltd.

No. 2017, Hongin offictel
536-9, Bongmyung-dong, Yusung-ku
Daejeon 305-710
Tel. +82 (0) 4 28 28-64 61

Fax +82 (0) 4 28 28-64 63
sewdaejeon@netsgo.com
Kwangju

4fl., Shinhyun B/D
96-16 Unam-dong, Buk-ku
Kwangju 500-170
Tel. +82 (0) 62 511-9172

Fax +82 (0) 62 511-9174
sewkwangju@netsgo.com
Seoul

No.1104 Sunkyung officetel
106-4 Kuro 6-dong, Kuro-ku
Seoul 152-056
Tel. +82 (0) 28 62-80 51

Fax +82 (0) 28 62-81 99
sewseoul@netsgo.com
Beirut
Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl

B. P. 80484
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut
Tel. +961 (0) 1 49 47 86

+961 (0) 1 49 82 72
+961 (0) 3 27 45 39
Fax +961 (0) 1 49 49 71
gacar@beirut.com
Brssel
CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre
Tel. +352 (0) 10 23 13 11

Fax +352 (0) 10 2313 36
http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Skopje
SGS-Skopje / Macedonia
"Teodosij Sinactaski 66
91000 Skopje / Macedonia
Tel. +389 (0) 9 91 38 43 90

Fax +389 (0) 9 91 38 43 90
sgs@mol.com.mk
Assembly
Sales
Service
Johore
SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD

No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya
81000 Johor Bahru, Johor
West Malaysia
Tel. +60 (0) 73 54 57 07 + 73 54 94 09

Fax +60 (0) 73 5414 04
kchtan@pd.jaring.my
Technical Offices
Kota Kinabalu
SEW-EURODRIVE Sdn Bhd

(Kota Kinabalu Branch)
Lot No. 2,1st Floor, Inanam Baru
Phase III, Miles 5.1 /2, Jalan Tuaran, Inanam
89350 Kota Kinabalu
Sabah, Malaysia
Tel. +60 (0) 88-42 47 92

Fax +60 (0) 88-42 48 07
Kuala Lumpur
SEW-EURODRIVE Sdn. Bhd.

No. 2, Jalan Anggerik Mokara 31/46
Kota Kemuning Seksyen 31
40460 Shah Alam
Selangor Darul Ehsan
Tel. +60 (0) 35 22 96 33

Fax +60 (0) 35 22 96 22
sewpjy@po.jaring.my
Penang
SEW-EURODRIVE Sdn. Bhd.

No. 38, Jalan Bawal
Kimsar Garden
13700 Prai, Penang
Tel. +60 (0) 43 99 93 49 + 43 99 98 35

Fax +60 (0) 43 99 93 48
seweurodrive@po.jaring.my
Lebanon
Technical Office
Luxembourg
Assembly
Sales
Service
Macedonia
Sales
Malaysia
386
08/2002
14 Address List
Mexico
Tultitlan
SEW-EURODRIVE, Sales and Distribution,

S.A.de C.V.
Boulevard Tultitlan Oriente #2 "G"
Colonia Ex-Rancho de Santiaguito
Tultitlan, Estado de Mexico, Mexico 54900
Tel. +52 (0) 55 58 88 29 76

Fax +52 (0) 55 58 88 29 77
scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
Casablanca
S. R. M.
Socit de Ralisations Mcaniques
5, rue Emir Abdelkader
05 Casablanca
Tel. +212 (0) 2 61 86 69 + 61 86 70 +

61 86 71
Fax +212 (0) 2 62 15 88
srm@marocnet.net.ma
Rotterdam
VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V.

Industrieweg 175
NL-3044 AS Rotterdam
Postbus 10085
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam
Tel. +31 (0) 10 44 63 700

Fax +31 (0) 10 41 55 552
http://www.vector-aandrijftechniek.nl
info@vector.nu
Auckland
SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.

P.O. Box 58-428
82 Greenmount drive
East Tamaki Auckland
Tel. +64 (0) 9-2 74 56 27

Fax +64 (0) 9-2 74 01 65
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Christchurch

10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead
Christchurch
Tel. +64 (0) 3-3 84 62 51

Fax +64 (0) 3-3 85 64 55
Palmerston
North

C/-Grant Shearman, RD 5, Aronui Road
Palmerston North
Tel. +64 (0) 6-3 55 21 65

Fax +64 (0) 6-3 55 23 16
Moss
SEW-EURODRIVE A/S
Solgaard skog 71
N-1599 Moss
Tel. +47 (0) 69 2410 20

Fax +47 (0) 69 2410 40
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Karachi
SEW-EURODRIVE Pte. Ltd.

Karachi Liaison Office A/3,1 st Floor,
Central Commercial Area
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road
Block7/8, K.C.H.S. Union Ltd., Karachi
Tel. +92 (0) 92-21-43 93 69

Fax +92 (0) 92-21-43 73 65
Asuncin
EQUIS S. R. L.
Avda. Madame Lynchy y Sucre
Asuncin
Tel. +595 (0) 21 67 21 48

Fax +595 (0) 21 67 21 50
Lima
SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES

S.A.C.
Los Calderos # 120-124
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima
Tel. +51 (0) 511 349-52 80

Fax +51 (0) 511 349-30 02
sewperu@terra.com.pe
Manila
SEW-EURODRIVE Pte Ltd

Manila Liaison Office
Suite 110, Ground Floor
Comfoods Building
Senator Gil Puyat Avenue
1200 Makati City
Tel. +63 (0) 2-8 94 27 52 54

Fax +63 (0) 2-8 94 27 44
sewmla@i-next.net
Morocco
Technical Office
Netherlands
Assembly
Sales
Service
New Zealand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Technical Office
Norway
Assembly
Sales
Service
Pakistan
Technical Office
Paraguay
Peru
Assembly
Sales
Service
Philippines
Technical Office
08/2002
387
14 Address List
Poland
Sales
Lodz
SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o.

ul. Techniczna 3/5
PL-92-519 Lodz
Tel. +48 (0) 4 26 77 10 90

Fax +48 (0) 4 26 77 10 99
http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Technical Office
Katowice

ul. Nad Jeziorem 87
PL-43-100 Tychy
Tel. +48 (0) 3 22 17 50 26 +

3 22 17 50 27
Fax +48 (0) 3 22 27 79 10 + 3 22 17 74
68 + 3 22 17 50 26 + 3 22 17 50 27
Bydgoszcz

ul. Fordonska 246
PL-85-959 Bydgoszcz
Tel. +48 (0) 5 23 60 65 90

Fax +48 (0) 5 23 60 65 91
Szczecinek

ul. Mickiewicza 2 pok. 36
PL-78-400 Szczecinek
Tel. +48 (0) 9 43 72 88 20

Fax +48 (0) 5 23 72 88 21
Assembly
Sales
Service
Coimbra
SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.
Apartado 15
P-3050-901 Mealhada
Tel. +351 (0) 2 31 20 96 70

Fax +351 (0) 2 31 20 36 85
http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Technical Offices
Lisboa
Tertir
Edificio Lisboa
Gabinete 119
P-2615 Alverca do Ribatejo
Tel. +351 (0) 2 19 58 01 98

Fax +351 (0) 2 19 58 02 45
esc.lisboa@sew-eurodrive.pt
Porto
AV. D. AFONSO HENRIQUES, 1196-9

Sala 909 - Edificio Acia
P- 4450 Matosinhos
Tel. +351 (0) 2 29 35 03 83

Fax +351 (0) 2 29 35 03 84
MobilTel. +351 (0) 9 33 2 55 91 10
esc.porto@sew-eurodrive.pt
Bucuresti
Sialco Trading SRL

str. Madrid nr.4
71222 Bucuresti
Tel. +40 (0) 2 12 30 13 28

Fax +40 (0) 2 12 30 71 70
sialco@sialco.ro
Sales
St. Petersburg
ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE
P.O. Box 263
RUS-195220 St. Petersburg
Tel. +7 (0) 812 5 35 71 42 +

812 5 35 04 30
Fax +7 (0) 812 5 35 22 87
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Technical Office
Moskau
ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE
RUS-113813 Moskau
Tel. +7 (0) 9 52 38 76 11
Fax +7 (0) 9 52 38 04 22
Dakar
SENEMECA
Mcanique Gnrale
Km 8, Route de Rufisque
B.P. 3251, Dakar
Tel. +221 (0) 849 47 70

Fax +221 (0) 849 47 71
senemeca@sentoo.sn
SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD.

No 9, Tuas Drive 2
Jurong Industrial Estate
Singapore 638644
Tel. +65 (0) 68 62 17 01 ... 17 05

Fax +65 (0) 68 61 28 27
Telex 38 659
sales@sew-eurodrive.com.sg
Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o.

UI. XIV. divizije 14
SLO 3000 Celje
Tel. +386 (0) 3 490 83 20

Fax +386 (0) 3 490 83 21
pakman@siol.net
Portugal
Romania
Sales
Service
Russia
Senegal
Technical Office
Singapore
Assembly
Sales
Service
Slovenia
Sales
Service
388
Celje
08/2002
14 Address List
South Africa
Johannesburg
SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

Eurodrive House
Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads
Aeroton Ext. 2
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Tel. + 27 (0) 11 248 70 00

Fax +27 (0) 11 494 23 11
ljansen@sew.co.za
Capetown

Rainbow Park
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road
Montague Gardens
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town
Tel. +27 (0) 21 552 98 20

Fax +27 (0) 21 552 98 30
Telex 576 062
dswanepoel@sew.co.za
Durban

2 Monaceo Place
Pinetown
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Tel. +27 (0) 31 700 34 51

Fax +27 (0) 31 700 38 47
dtait@sew.co.za
Nelspruit
SEW-EURODRIVE (PTY) LTD.

7 Christie Crescent
Vintonia
P.O.Box 1942
Nelspruit 1200
Tel. +27 (0) 13 752 80 07

Fax +27 (0) 13 752 80 08
robermeyer@sew.co.za
Port Elizabeth
SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LTD.

5 b Linsay Road
Neave Township
6000 Port Elizabeth
Tel. +27 (0) 41 453 03 03

Fax +27 (0) 41 453 03 05
dswanepoel@sew.co.za
Richards Bay
SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LTD.

25 Eagle Industrial Park Alton
Richards Bay
P.O. Box 458
Richards Bay 3900
Tel. +27 (0) 35 797 38 05

Fax +27 (0) 35 797 38 19
dtait@sew.co.za
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bilbao
SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAA, S.L.

Parque Tecnolgico, Edificio, 302
E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya)
Tel. +34 (0) 9 44 31 84 70

Fax +34 (0) 9 44 31 84 71
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Technical Offices
Barcelona
Delegacin Barcelona
Avenida Francesc Maci 40-44 Oficina 3.1
E-08206 Sabadell (Barcelona)
Tel. +34 (0) 9 37 16 22 00

Fax +34 (0) 9 37 23 30 07
Lugo
Delegacin Noroeste
Apartado, 1003
E-27080 Lugo
Tel. +34 (0) 6 39 40 33 48

Fax +34 (0) 9 82 20 29 34
Madrid
Delegacin Madrid
Gran Via. 48-2 A-D
E-28220 Majadahonda (Madrid)
Tel. +34 (0) 9 16 34 22 50

Fax +34 (0) 9 16 34 08 99
Colombo 4
SM International (Pte) Ltd

254, Galle Raod
Colombo 4, Sri Lanka
Tel. +94 (0) 941-59 79 49

Fax +94 (0) 941-58 29 81
Jnkping
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gnejsvgen 6-8
S-55303 Jnkping
Box 3100 S-55003 Jnkping
Tel. +46 (0) 36 34 42 00

Fax +46 (0) 36 34 42 80
http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
info@sew-eurodrive.se
Assembly
Sales
Service
Technical Offices
Spain
Sri Lanka
Sweden
Assembly
Sales
Service
08/2002
389
14 Address List
Sweden
Technical Offices
Gteborg
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gustaf Werners gata 8
S-42131 Vstra Frlunda
Tel. +46 (0) 3 17 09 68 80

Fax +46 (0) 3 17 09 68 93
Malm
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Borrgatan 5
S-21124 Malm
Tel. +46 (0) 4 06 80 64 80

Fax +46 (0) 4 06 80 64 93
Stockholm
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Bjrkholmsvgen 10
S-14125 Huddinge
Tel. +46 (0) 84 49 86 80

Fax +46 (0) 84 49 86 93
Skellefte
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Trdgrdsgatan 8
S-93131 Skellefte
Tel. +46 (0) 9 10 71 53 80

Fax +46 (0) 9 10 71 53 93
Assembly
Sales
Service
Basel
Alfred lmhof A.G.

Jurastrasse 10
CH-4142 Mnchenstein bei Basel
Tel. +41 (0) 6 14 17 17 17

Fax +41 (0) 6 14 17 17 00
http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Technical Offices
Suisse romande
Andr Gerber
Es Perreyres
1436 Chamblon
Tel. +41 (0) 2 44 45 38 50

Fax +41 (0) 2 44 45 48 87
Bern
Rudolf Bhler
Allerheiligenstrae 97d
2540 Grenchen
Tel. +41 (0) 3 26 52 23 39

Fax +41 (0) 3 26 52 23 31
Luzern
Beat Ltolf
Baumacher 11
6244 Nebikon
Tel. +41 (0) 6 27 56 47 80

Fax +41 (0) 6 27 56 47 86
Zrich
Ren Rothenbhler
Nrgelbach 7
8493 Saland
Tel. +41 (0) 5 23 86 31 50

Fax +41 (0) 5 23 86 3213
Nan Tou
Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd.

No. 55 Kung Yeh N. Road
Industrial District
Nan Tou 540
Tel. +886 (0) 49-255-353

Fax +886 (0) 49-257-878
Taipei
Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd.

6F-3, No. 267, Sec. 2
Tung Hwa South Road, Taipei
Tel. +886 (0) 27 38 35 35

Fax +886 (0) 27 36 82 68
Telex 27 245
nestnet@ms6.hinet.net
Assembly
Sales
Service
Chon Buri
SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd.

Bangpakong Industrial Park 2
700/456, Moo.7, Tambol Donhuaroh
Muang District
Chon Buri 20000
Tel. +66 (0) 38 21 40 22

Fax +66 (0) 38 21 45 31
sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.co.th
Technical Offices
Bangkok
SEW-EURODRIVE PTE LTD

Bangkok Liaison Office
TPS Building, Room No. 5/4
1023, Phattanakarn Road
Klongtan, Phrakanong, Bangkok,10110
Tel. +66 (0) 2717 81 51

Fax +66 (0) 2717 81 52
Hadyai

Hadyai Country Home Condominium
59/101 Soi.17/1
Rachas-Utid Road.
Hadyai, Songkhla 90110
Tel. +66 (0) 74-35 94 41

Fax +66 (0) 74-35 94 42
sewhdy@ksc.th.com
Khonkaen

4th Floor, Kaow-U-HA MOTOR Bldg,
359/2, Mitraphab Road.
Muang District
Khonkaen 40000
Tel. +66 (0) 43-22 57 45

Fax +66 (0) 43-32 48 71
sewkk@cscoms.com
Lampang

264 Chatchai Road, sub-tuy,
Muang, Lampang 52100
Tel. +66 (0) 54-31 02 41

Fax +66 (0) 54-31 02 42
Switzerland
Taiwan (R.O.C.)
Thailand
390
08/2002
14 Address List
Tunisia
Tunis
T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service

7, rue Ibn EI Heithem
Z.I. SMMT
2014 Mgrine Erriadh
Tel. +216 (0) 1 43 40 64 + 1 43 20 29

Fax +216 (0) 1 43 29 76
Assembly
Sales
Service
Istanbul
SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri Sirketi
Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3
TR-81540 Maltepe ISTANBUL
Tel. +90 (0) 216 4 41 91 63 + 216 4 41

91 64 + 216 3 83 80 14
Fax +90 (0) 216 3 05 58 67
seweurodrive@superonline.com.tr
Technical Offices
Ankara
SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri Sirketi
Ehlibeyt Mah. Ceyhun Atif Kansu Cad. 12. Sok.
Tepe Apt. No. 7/12
TR-06520 Balgat-Ankara
Tel. +90 (0) 312 286 80 14

Fax +90 (0) 312 286 80 15
Izmir
SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri Ticaret Ltd. Sirketi
1203/11 Sok. No. 4/613
Hasan Atli Is Merkezi
TR-35110 Yenisehir-Izmir
Tel. +90 (0) 232 4 69 62 64

Fax +90 (0) 232 4 33 61 05
Montevideo
SEW-EURODRIVE S. A. Sucursal Uruguay

German Barbato 1526
CP 11200 Montevideo
Tel. +598 (0) 2 9018 189

Fax +598 (0) 2 9018 188
sewuy@sew-eurodrive.com.uy
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Greenville
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
1295 Old Spartanburg Highway
P.O. Box 518
Lyman, S.C. 29365
Tel. +1 (0) 864 4 39 75 37

Fax Sales +1 (0) 864 439-78 30
Fax Manuf. +1 (0) 864 4 39-99 48
Fax Ass. +1 (0) 864 4 39-05 66
Telex 805 550
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly
Sales
Service
San Francisco
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
30599 San Antonio St.
Hayward, California 94544-7101
Tel. +1 (0) 510 4 87-35 60

Fax +1 (0) 510 4 87-63 81
cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Philadelphia/PA
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
Pureland Ind. Complex
200 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Tel. +1 (0) 856 4 67-22 77

Fax +1 (0) 856 8 45-31 79
csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Dayton
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
2001 West Main Street
Troy, Ohio 45373
Tel. +1 (0) 9 37 3 35-00 36

Fax +1 (0) 9 37 4 40-37 99
cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Dallas
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
3950 Platinum Way
Dallas, Texas 75237
Tel. +1 (0) 214 3 30-48 24

Fax +1 (0) 214 3 30-47 24
csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Technical Office
Turkey
Uruguay
USA
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!

Venezuela
Assembly
Sales
Service
08/2002
Valencia
SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A.

Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319
Zona Industrial Municipal Norte
Valencia, Estado Carabobo
Tel. +58 (0) 241 8 32 98 04

Fax +58 (0) 241 8 38 62 75
sewventas@cantv.net
sewfinanzas@cantv.net
391
MCF/MCV/MCS4_A: Control unit connection
03828AEN
Figure 212: Wiring diagram for MCF/MCV/MCS4_A control unit
MCF/MCV/MCS41A (with PROFIBUS-DP): SEW recommends always supplying

these units with 24 VDC at terminal X10:24 (VI24). This external 24 VDC power supply
must be capable of supplying a continuous power of 50 W and a peak power (1 s) of
100 W.
input. You can change the setting by using parameter P120.
DIP switches S11, S12 and 1...10 can only be accessed once the connection unit has
been removed.
The TF/TH line must either be shielded or routed at a distance of at least 0.2 m (8 in)
from power cables (e.g. motor or brake cables). The TF/TH line must be shielded
separately if hybrid cables are used for the motor and TF/TH connection.
MCH4_A: Control unit connection
05209AEN
Figure 213: Wiring diagram, MCH4_A control unit
MCH41A (with PROFIBUS-DP) / MCH42A (with INTERBUS FO): SEW recommends always supplying these units with 24 VDC at terminal X10:24 (VI24). This external 24 VDC power supply must be capable of supplying a continuous power of 50
W and a peak power (1 s) of 100 W.
input. You can change the setting by using parameter P120.
DIP switches S11, S12, 1...8 and S1...S6 can only be accessed once the connection
unit has been removed.
The TF/TH line must either be shielded or routed at a distance of at least 0.2 m (8 in)
from power cables (e.g. motor or brake cables). The TF/TH line must be shielded
separately if hybrid cables are used for the motor and TF/TH connection.
Connection of the power section and brake

L1
L2
L3
PE
F11/F12/F13
K11
(AC-3)
Protective earth conductor (shield)

L1 L2
VAC
VAC
VAC
F14/F15
F14/F15
L3
Option NF... line filter
DC-link
connection *
7 8
L1' L2' L3'
F14/F15
L1 L2 L3
X1:
K11
(AC-3)
K11
(AC-3)
K11
(AC-3)
DB
DGND
K12
(AC-3)
X4:
Power section
U
DB
-VDC link PE
+VDC link
DB
X2:
V W
5
X3:
+R -R PE
K12
(AC-3)
DGND
DGND
F16
1
BMK 2
3
4
13
14
15
white
1
BG 2
red
Brake connector** BGE 3
4
blue
CM (DY)
5
3 (3)
4 (2)
CT/CV/DT/DV/D:
5 (1)
simultaneous switch-off
PE
in the AC and DC circuits
1
BG 2
3
BGE 4
5
white
red
blue
CT/CV/DT/DV/D:
switch-off in the AC circuit
CM71...112: simultaneous switch-off in the AC and DC circuits
M
3- phase
BW...
affects
K11
K11 must be opened in case F16 triggers

and DI "/Controller Inhibit" must
receive a 0signal.Do not separate
the resistor circuit!
05149AEN
Wiring diagram, power section and brake

*
With sizes 1 and 2, there is no PE connection next to the mains connection terminals. In this case, use the PE
terminal next to the DC link connection.
**
Important:It is essential to adhere to the sequence of connections. Incorrect connection will lead to irreparable
damage to the brake.
A separate supply system lead is required for connecting the brake rectifier. Powering it from the motor voltage is not permitted!
drives which require a rapid brake reaction time and
in CFC and SERVO operating modes.
Brake rectifier in
switch cabinet
Route the connection cables between the brake rectifier and the brake separately from
other power cables when installing the brake rectifier in the switch cabinet. Joint routing
is only permitted if the power cables are shielded.
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co P.O. Box 3023 D-76642 Bruchsal/Germany Phone +49-7251-75-0
Fax +49-7251-75-1970 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com sew@sew-eurodrive.com

Sew Servo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sew Servo

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sew Servo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Edition

3 Technical Data and Dimensions ......................................................................... 20

5 Project Planning ................................................................................................. 152

6 Serial Communication ....................................................................................... 233

7 Safety Notes ....................................................................................................... 234

8 Unit Design ......................................................................................................... 235

9 Installation .......................................................................................................... 246

11 Operation and Service ....................................................................................... 356

12 Index of Changes ............................................................................................... 370

13 Abbreviation Key and Index .............................................................................. 371

14 Adress List.......................................................................................................... 377

MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual

Overview of the system................................................................................................ 8

3 Technical Data and Dimensions ......................................................................... 20

CE-marking, UL approval and unit designation.......................................................... 20

Menu structure ........................................................................................................... 86

5 Project Planning ................................................................................................. 152

Schematic procedure ............................................................................................... 152

MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual

6 Serial Communication ....................................................................................... 233

7 Safety Notes ....................................................................................................... 234

Unit designation, nameplates and scope of delivery................................................ 235

9 Installation .......................................................................................................... 246

Installation instructions for basic unit ....................................................................... 246

General startup instructions ..................................................................................... 291

11 Operation and Service ....................................................................................... 356

MC_40A operating displays (without fieldbus) ......................................................... 356

12 Index of Changes ............................................................................................... 370

13 Abbreviation Key and Index .............................................................................. 371

Abbreviation key ...................................................................................................... 371

14 Address List ....................................................................................................... 377

MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual

Safety and warning instructions

Tips and useful information.

MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual

Use in explosion-proof areas

Use in non-stationary applications which are subject to mechanical vibration and

Electronics scrap (printed-circuit boards)

MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual

Overview of the system

Overview of the system

Figure 1: Overview of the system, MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A power components

MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual

Overview of the system

Figure 2: Overview of the system, MOVIDRIVE compact MC_4_A communications components

MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual

Overview of the system

The MOVIDRIVE compact range of units includes four series:

MOVIDRIVE compact MCF:

Drive inverter for asynchronous AC motors without

MOVIDRIVE compact MCV:

Drive inverter for asynchronous AC motors with encoder

MOVIDRIVE compact MCS:

Drive inverter for synchronous servo motors with resolver,

MOVIDRIVE compact MCH:

Drive inverter for asynchronous AC motors, asynchronous

The MCH series is available in three variants:

MOVIDRIVE compact System Manual

Overview of the system

The following table presents an overview of the series and versions: